Withal We Tea; ell 
Wl!©^Sfe©iiid:Enroll 
And Kiaspras Wii^' 



inlernafioBsl 
CorrespondesGe Sctiools 

SCRAHTOW PA 




Book SS8 __ 
Copi^htN" 



COPKRICHT DEPOSrr. 



WHAT WE TEACH 
WHO SHOULD ENROLL 
AND REASONS WHY 



THIRD EDITION 



INTERNATIONAL 

CORRESPONDENCE SCHOOLS 

SCRANTON. PA. 






UBRARY of CONGRESS 

Tvi{o Codes Received 

APh 23 \907 

^^pyriffht Entn/ 
ci^ss <^ XXc, No. 

COPY g. 



Copyright, 1907, by 

International Textbook Company 

All rights reserved 



444W— 23098-2 15-07-2m 



Our Work 

Our work is to gather technical knowl- 
edge from all quarters, arrange it into 
Courses, and impart it. 

To gather this knowledge and classify 
it, we maintain our Faculty and on 
occasion employ the foremen, superin- 
tendents, managers, and engineering 
experts of the leading industrial estab- 
lishments. To dispense it, we have 
our Representatives for explaining the 
peculiar advantages of. our different 
Courses, and our Corps of Instructors 
for guiding the student after he enrolls. 
There are three phases of our work: 

1. We teach unemployed people the 
theory of the work in which they want 
to engage. Results : positions easily se- 
cured; days of drudgery shortened, and 
sometimes avoided altogether; quick 
promotion, 

2. We teach employed people to do 
their work better. Results : more respon- 
sible positions; better pay. 

3. We teach dissatisfied people how 
to do what is congenial. Results : prepa- 
ration for new work before leaving the 
old; rapid progress in the new field. 



Our Plan 

It was in October, 1891, that Presi- 
dent Thomas J. Foster invented and 
first put into practice our arrangement 
of textbooks and system of instruction. 
The thoroughness and extreme prac- 
ticabiHty of his plan are the foundation 
of our success. This plan embodies the 
following distinctive features: 

1 . We furnish all necessary prepara- 
tory instruction. 

2. We provide drawing instruments 
and experimental apparatus with each 
Course requiring them. 

3. We explain facts, principles, and 
processes so clearly that the student 
quickly comprehends and easily remem- 
bers them. 

4. We illustrate our instruction with 
all views, plans, sections, and elevations 
that will contribute to its clearness. 

5. We give concise rules, and practi- 
cal examples showing their application. 

6. We grade our instruction so that 
at no stage of his progress is the stu- 
dent confronted with insurmountable 
difficulties. 

7. We criticize and correct our stu- 
dent's written recitations, and send 
him special advice regarding his Course 
whenever necessary. 



Little Items 

We occupy in Scranton three of our 
o^vn buildings having a total floor space 
of about 7 acres. 

We employ 2,700 people. 

We spend $250,000 a year in improv- 
ing and revising our Instruction Papers. 

We use nearly $400 worth of postage 
stamps every day. 

Our Mailing Department handles 
about 15,000 pieces of mail daily. 

We issued about 63 million pages of 
instruction last year. 

In 1906 we received and corrected 
809,858 recitations from our students. 

While there were tens of thousands 
of similar cases of which we are without 
specific knowledge, we know positively 
that 3,320 of our students last year had 
their wages substantially increased as a 
direct result of studying our Courses 



How to Secure Employment 

If a student has had experience 
in the work he desires to follow, he 
may file his application with the Stu- 
dents' Aid Department after he has 
completed one full subject of his Course. 

If a student has had no experience, 
he must finish enough of his Course to 
justify the Students' Aid Department 
in recommending him for a position. 

When these conditions have been 
complied with, we send to the student 
an Application Blank to be filled out 
for our files, and then advise him of all 
positions we are requested to fill and 
for which he is qualified. 

The Student of After finishing the 

AdvertisinP- ^'^^^ ^ P^^^^ °^ ^^^ 

AQvemsmg complete A d v e r - 

TisiNG Course, a student is prepared to 
take up ad writing for retail stores. He 
should interview all the merchants in 
his vicinity — taking printed samples of 
his work to show what he can do, or 
revisions of their ads showing how he 
can improve them — and endeavor to 
secure a permanent salaried position. 
If this is not possible, he may make 
arrangements w^ith several merchants 
to write their advertisements at so much 
an ad or at so much a month. In addi- 
tion to this, he can work up a mail- 
order business by writing ads for retail 
merchants all over the country. An 
excellent plan for an inexperienced 
person to get a start in advertising is to 
secure employment as advertising- 
solicitor with a local paper, then make 
a canvass of all merchants and offer to 



prepare ads for them if they will give 
him the business for the paper he 
represents. In this way a man may 
establish a reputation for good work 
and soon get into a profitable business 
for himself. 

The Student of A student of the 
Architecture Complete A r c h i - 

TECTURAL CoURSE Or 

the Architectural Drawing and De- 
signing Course, without practical 
experience in the building trades, should 
be able — after finishing the Drawing 
Plates of his Course — to make tracings, 
letter drawings, and be otherwise useful 
in an architect's office. To begin with 
he may get about $30 a month. The 
student paying close attention to his 
work will soon discover his weak points, 
and by remedying them will increase 
his efficiency and be justified in asking 
for more pay. A skilled m.echanic 
supplementing his practical knowledge 
of building construction with our 
Course should, after finishing the draw- 
ing instruction, start in at about $20 a 
week. A student finishing the Com- 
plete Architectural Course or the 
Architectural Drawing and Design- 
ing Course should get at least $40 a 
month to begin with, and by conscien- 
tious work and further study be able to 
so increase his earning power as to 
merit $40 a week. 



The Student of When the student 
BuildinS' enrolls for the Build- 

^ , °. iNG Contractors' 

Contracting Course, and has had 

no experience in a department of the 
building trades and has no opportunity 
to learn a trade while studying his 
Course, he should finish the entire 
Course before seeking a position as a 
timekeeper on buildings, as a building 
clerk, as a draftsman, or as an estimator. 
He can fill any of these positions with- 
out serving time as a craftsman. A 
practical tradesman, after finishing the 
Course, may seek a position as a build- 
ing superintendent or a foreman, or he 
can set up in business as a contractor. 

The Student of After finishing any 
Chemistry %{ ^^}\ Courses in 

-^ Chemistry, if he has 

performed the analyses as required, a stu- 
dent is. qualified to do analytic work in 
a laboratory. The student desiring to 
begin with a fair salary should therefore 
finish his entire Course before applying 
for a position. But if he is satisfied to 
begin "at the bottom" in a laboratory, 
he may apply for employment as a 
laboratory helper or "porter" as soon 
as he has finished the Instruction Paper 
entitled Qualitative Analysis. Chem- 
ists are employed in the manufacture of 
sulphuric acid, alkalies, hydrochloric 
acid, cement, cottonseed oil, leather, 
soap, sugar, petroleum, gas, and in 
packing-house industries, as well as in 
many other pursuits. Salaries range 
from $40 to $60 a month for beginners. 



The Student of The student of any 

Civil Engineer- °^ ^^f l^.^^^'i'"^-^^ 
"DM A should finish the m- 
I'lgj _-^3-"^0^^ struction in mathe- 
Engineering, matics and survey- 
Municipal ing before seeking a 
Eno'ineering' position as a rodman 
-TT 'j r or a chainman in a 
nyaramiC surveying corps. 
Engineering, or The best time to 
Surveying and secure employment 
MapDing" °^ ^^-^^^ kind is in the 
^^ ° early spring, for engi- 
neers as a rule make up their corps at 
that season. 

A student of the Bridge Engineer- 
ing Course can get a start in the draft- 
ing department of a bridge works in 
the same way as a student of the 
Courses in Mechanical Drawing. (See 
Mechanical Drawing.) 

The Student of A young man or 
Commerce ^^^^ woman pre- 

parmg at a resident 
school for a business position usually 
graduates before seeking employment. 
Our student of commerce should like- 
wise endeavor to finish his Course. But 
a student of the Complete Commercial 
Course can seek a position as stenog- 
rapher as soon as he has finished all 
the subjects embraced in his steno- 
graphic section, or as a bookkeeper as 
soon as he has finished his bookkeeping 
and business forms section. The daily 
papers of all large towns and cities con- 
tain advertisements for stenographers 
and bookkeepers, and a student of the 
Complete Stenographic Course or of 
the Bookkeeping and Business Forms 



Course should have little difficulty in 
securing a position if he answers these 
advertisements or makes personal appli- 
cation. 

The Student of A student of the 
Electricity Complete Electri- 

^ CAL Engineering 

Course, even without practical experi- 
ence, has open to him several M^ays for 
entering his chosen profession. If he 
wishes to become a designer of electric 
machinery, he should enter a works 
where electric apparatus is made and 
work for a year or more in the shop — 
paying close attention to the methods 
of making the various parts of a machine , 
to their assembling into the completed 
device, and to the customary shop 
tests. After this shop experience, he 
can enter the drafting room, progress 
in the usual way, and eventually be- 
come a designer. To get the best 
results from this plan, the student 
should finish the instruction in mathe- 
matics and in the theory of electricity 
and magnetism before going into a shop ; 
he should likewise finish the drawing 
section of his Course before entering a 
drafting room. He will find the infor- 
mation obtained from the study of his 
Course of the greatest advantage to him 
in understanding thoroughly the opera- 
tion of electric apparatus and the 
designing problems he may meet with 
in his daily work. As one can start in 
at better pay in a drafting room, the 
student finding it necessary to begin at 
higher wages than is paid in the shop 
may, after finishing the mathematics 
and drawing of his Course, apply for a 

10 



position as junior draftsman. The 
preliminary shop experience, however, 
is invaluable to the student wanting to 
become competent as a designer. Of 
course, after securing employment in 
either the shop or the drafting room, 
the student should supplement his 
practical experience with a further 
study of his Course, applying the 
principles to whatever problems may 
arise. 

If a student of either the Complete 
Electrical Engineering Course or 
the Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course desires to enter the broad fields 
of electric lighting or electric railways, 
he may apply for a position as helper 
in an electric power station or on out- 
side construction work or inaintenance. 
It is best for a student of the Electric 
Lighting and Railways Course to 
finish his studies up to and including 
the Instruction Paper entitled Opera- 
tion of Dynamos and Motors before 
seeking employment. The usual line 
of advancement is through the posi- 
tions of dynamo tender, assistant engi- 
neer, engineer, superintendent, and 
manager for inside work, and foreman 
and superintendent of lines for outside 
work. 

The Student of A student of the 
Illustration ^ourses in Illustra- 

J —^ . tion or m Design 

and Design j^ust have had some 

practical experience before he can 
assume the responsibilities of a salaried 
position. This experience can be 
obtained by entering a photoengraving, 
photolithograph, or other designing 



establishment and doing — for the sake 
of experience and without expecting 
pay — whatever is required there in the 
way of simple drawing. A less direct 
method of getting experience is by 
making designs for selected subjects 
and sending the designs to the Director 
of the Department of Arts and Crafts 
at the I. C. S., for his correction and 
criticism. The student will, as soon 
as he shows enough ability to make 
salable designs, be put in touch with 
prospective buyers and told how to 
submit his work to them. 

The student far enough advanced in 
his Course is invited to enter competi- 
tions for bookcovers, chapter headings, 
and architectural and other designs 
for which cash prizes are awarded by 
various magazines and publications. 
Before entering these competitions or 
submiitting original work for criticism, 
the student must finish that part of his 
Course dealing with the branch he 
desires to take up. It is absolutely 
useless for a novice to submit designs 
for bookcovers, carpets, wallpapers, etc. 
until he has received thorough instruc- 
tion in these subjects and criticism 
of his work. 

The pay received by a beginner for 
work in illustration or design varies 
according to his inventive faculty, 
originality, and experience. The clever 
student — after devoting a reasonable 
length of time to practical work, either 
as outlined or in some practical design 
establishment — should earn from $50 
to $75 a month. 



12 



The Student of If a student is will- 
Mechanical i^§ to begin work in 
TV . a drafting room as a 
Drawing "blueprinter" at 
small wages, he may apply for a position 
at any time ; but if he desires to start as 
a tracer or as a junior draftsman, he 
should finish his instruction in geomet- 
rical drawing and mechanical drawing 
before applying for a position. After 
the student has finished the drawing 
section of his Course, he should take 
with him some of his best drawings 
and tracings to show as samples of his 
work, and then apply for a position as 
junior draftsman at machine shops, 
engine works, boiler works, steel works, 
locomotive works, and electrical man- 
ufacturing plants. The salary the 
applicant may command depends 
entirely on his own personal qualifica- 
tions as well as on the locality and the 
character of the firm. Many of our 
graduates that have had no experience 
■in drawing begin at from $40 to $50 a 
month, while experienced draftsmen 
earn anywhere from $75 to $150 a 
month. 

The Student of A student of the 
Mechanical Mechanical 

T^ . . Engineering 

Engineering course or the Me- 

chanical Course, without experience 
and desiring to become a machine 
designer, should finish the mechanical 
drawing section of his Course and then 
seek employment as suggested for stu- 
dents of Mechanical Drawing. If a 
student of the Mechanical Engineer- 
ing Course desires to make himself 

13 



proficient in shop work, he should first 
study the shop practice divisions of his 
Course and apply for employment as 
an apprentice in shop work. 

The Student of A student of the 

Mining ^ ^ ^ L M,J N I.N ^ 

° Course, the Com- 

plete Coal Mining Course, or the 
Metal Mining Course, without practi- 
cal experience in mining, should finish 
the Instruction Paper entitled Mine 
Surveying and Mapping before seeking 
a position on a mine surveying corps. 
Once on a corps, he will rapidly obtain 
the experience that in connection with 
his studies will qualify him for the 
higher positions. 

The Student of The student finishing 

Navigation ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^i!'''f; 

° TioN Course should 

be qualified to pass the examination for 
any grade of license for ocean-going 
steamers — provided of course that he 
has served the required time at sea. If 
the student is in the naval service and 
is qualified to apply for promotion to 
the grade of commissioned officer, his 
knowledge of navigation should enable 
him to pass the examination in that 
subject successfully. Before an appli- 
cant for license goes up for examination, 
his eyes must be tested for color blind- 
ness. The Inspectors issue a blank 
form for this eye test to all applicants 
for an officer's license. If no defect of 
vision is found, the applicant fills out 
his application blank, giving his sea 
experience together with certified copies 
of indorsements fronl masters, owners, 



or agents in whose service he has been; 
he also furnishes letters of recommenda- 
tion from captains or vessel owners by 
whom he has been employed. After 
these documents have been presented 
at the office of the local Inspector, the 
applicant's examination in navigation, 
seamanship, rules of the road, and 
stowage of cargo takes place. The 
different questions usually asked at 
these examinations will be found in the 
last Instruction Paper of the Ocean 
Navigation Course. As we require 
our student to write his answers to 
examination questions, and as the 
questions asked in license examinations 
have to be answered in writing, the 
training we give him is a decided ad- 
vantage. Ability to express oneself 
clearly in writing counts for much with 
the Inspectors. If successful in passing 
the examination, and if his testimonials 
are satisfactory to the Inspector, the 
applicant is granted a license. Accord- 
ing to present regulations, this license 
is good for 1 year and must be renewed 
for each succeeding year, though no 
examination is required at such re- 
newal. Of course, all applicants for 
any grade of license must be citizens, 
either native or naturalized, of the 
United States, 

Having finished the Coastwise Navi- 
gation Course, the student, if a first- 
class seaman, should have no difficulty 
in passing the license examination for 
third mate, second mate, or even chief 
mate, provided he passes the color test 
and has had the required sea experience. 
For particulars in regard to regulations 

15 



governing the issuing of licenses, fhe 
student should consult our Navigation 
Circular, where are reprinted the rules 
and regulations prescribed by the 
Board of Supervising Inspectors of 
Steamboats; or he may apply to the 
nearest office of United States Local 
Inspectors located in the principal ports 
(usually in the Post-Office building or 
the Custom-House building) ; or he 
may communicate direct with the office 
of the Supervising Inspector-General, 
Steamboat-Inspection Service, Wash- 
ington, D. C. 

After finishing the Lake Navigation 
Course, the student should be able to 
pass the license examination for pilot 
for any grade of license in any district 
of the Great Lakes or other waterways 
not included in deep-sea navigation, 
provided he has had the necessary prac- 
tical experience and is thoroughly 
familiar with the waters and the aids 
to navigation located in the district for 
which he applies for a license. A test 
for color blindness must be made 
before the applicant goes up for his 
examination. As the Lake Naviga- 
tion Course does not contain instruc- 
tion in the subject of finding latitude 
and longitude by astronomical observa- 
tions, the student of this Course should 
not attempt to go up for examinations 
in districts along the seaboard where a 
knowledge of that subject is required. 



16 



The Student of After a student (of 
Plumbing, ^^he Complete 

TT ^- ^ Plumbing AND 

Heating, or Heating Course) 

Steam Fitting that has had practi- 
cal experience fin- 
ishes the prehminary Instruction Papers 
entitled i\rithnietic, Mensuration and 
Use of Letters in Formulas, Principles 
of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneu- 
matics, and Strength of Materials, and 
also finishes the Instruction Papers 
entitled Elementary Chemistry, Gas 
Making, Gas Supply and Distribution, 
and Domestic Uses of Gas, he is quali- 
fied to apph^ for a position as a gas- 
fitter, foreman, or superintendent of 
a gas-manufacturing plant. After he 
has studied the preliminary Instruc- 
tion Papers as well as the Instruction 
Papers on practical plumbing subjects, 
he should be competent to fill a posi- 
tion as foreman plumber or leading 
journeyman on a large job, and should 
command a higher salary than the regu- 
lar journeymen working on the same 
job. And after he has finished the 
Instruction Papers relating to the theory 
of plumbing, the student should be 
fitted to apply for a position as sanitary 
engineer, plumbing inspector, super- 
intendent of plumbing construction, 
assistant to architect, etc., or he may 
become a plumbing contractor. If, on 
the other hand, he finishes the Instruc- 
tion Papers pertaining to the theory 
and practice of heating and ventilation 
in addition to the Instruction Papers 
relating to plumbing and gas-fitting 
previously mentioned, he should be in 

17 



a position to fill any of the foregoing 
offices, or he may open a shop in any 
town in the United States or Canada as 
a plumbing and heating contractor and 
make a success of it. A plumbing shop 
alone in a small town does not pay so 
well as a combination plumbing and 
heating shop. 

Any plumber studying even the 
practical Instruction Papers of this 
Course and not taking up the theoretical 
Instruction Papers nor the drawing 
instruction, is in a position to command 
first-class wages as a high-grade plumber 
and fitter. The man able to do both 
plumbing and fitting is in demand and 
usually has steady employment at good 
wages. Any student finishing the en- 
tire Course can easily apply for a posi- 
tion as an architect's assistant, his 
duties being to draw plans and get out 
specifications for the plumbing and 
heating equipment of large buildings. 

A practical student finishing this 
Course should be able to fill any position 
in plumbing and heating engineering 
or in plumbing and heating contracting ; 
for the whole subject is taught in this 
Course very fully and clearly, and he 
should command a salary of $2,000 or 
more a year. 

After an apprentice has studied the 
preliminary Instruction Papers (of the 
Complete Plumbing Course) entitled 
Arithmetic, Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas, Principles of 
Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumat- 
ics, and Strength of Materials, and also 
the Instruction Papers entitled Gas 
Making, Gas Supply and Distribution, 

18 



and Domestic Uses of Gas, he is quali- 
fied to apply for a position as a gas- 
fitter. After he has passed his exami- 
nations on the Instruction Papers 
entitled Plumbing Materials and Tools; 
Soldering and Wiping; Lead Work; 
Pipework ; Washing and Drinking Fix- 
tures ; Baths and Urinals ; Water Closets ; 
House Drains; Soil, Waste, and Vent 
Stacks ; Traps and Vents ; Drainage and 
Sewerage ; Sewage Disposal ; Sources of 
Water Supply; Water Filtration; Cold- 
Water Supply ; Hot-Water Supply ; and 
Reading Architect's Drawings; he is 
qualified to apply for a position as 
foreman in any first-class plumbing 
and gas-fitting establishment. When, 
in addition to the foregoing Instruction 
Papers, he has studied the Papers 
entitled Plumbing Inspection, Plumbing 
Plans and Specifications, Contracts, Geo- 
metrical Drawing, Principles of Mechan- 
ical Drawing, and Plumbing and Heating 
Drawing, it is safe for him to apply for 
a position as general superintendent of 
a large plumbing and gas-fitting estab- 
lishment, commanding a salary of 
$2,000 or more a year; or he is in a posi- 
tion to start a plumbing business of his 
own; or he may interest capital and 
organize a company of which he will 
become the manager. A thorough 
knowledge of this Course should qualify 
a practical plumber of average intelli- 
gence to become a first-class sanitary 
engineer. 

In the Plumbing Inspectors' Course 
the Instruction Papers entitled Arith- 
metic, Mensuration, Principles of Me- 
chanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, 

19 



and Strength of Materials are optional, 
but they should be studied by every 
student if possible. Any plumber 
reasonably good at practical work and 
having an average amount of intelli- 
gence can — after finishing our Course — 
safely apply for the position of plumbing 
inspector or sanitary inspector in any 
city in the United States or Canada; 
for the knowledge he will obtain by a 
study of this Course should qualify 
him to fill such a position satisfactorily. 
His salary should be at least $1,500 
a year. 

In the Short Plumbing Course the 
Instruction Papers pertaining to the 
subjects Arithmetic, Mensuration, Prin- 
ciples of Mechanics, Hydromechanics, 
Pneumatics, and Strength of Materials, 
though optional, should be studied by 
the student. When a student has fin- 
ished these Instruction Papers and 
passed our examinations in the remain- 
ing Instruction Papers, which consti- 
stute thorough instruction in the prac- 
tice of plumbing, he may apply for a 
position as foreman plumber on any 
kind of work — provided he has had prac- 
tical experience in plumbing. 

After the student (of the Complete 
Heating Course) has studied the pre- 
liminary Instruction Papers pertaining 
to Arithmetic, Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas, Principles of 
Mechanics, Hydromechanics, Pneumat- 
ics, and Strength of Materials, has 
passed his examinations in the subjects 
pertaining to the practical part of steam 
fitting, and has had a reasonable 
amount of practical experience, he is 

20 



qualified to apply for a position as 
leading journeyman, or as a journey- 
man in charge of a job, or as a shop fore- 
man, and should receive salary usually 
paid to men in those positions. After 
finishing the subjects pertaining to the 
theory of heating and ventilation and 
completing the Drawing Plates and the 
Instruction Papers on Heating Plans 
and Specifications, he should be fully 
equipped to apply for a position as 
superintendent, estimator, draftsman, 
or expert for a boiler or radiator manu- 
facturing concern, or he may open an 
office of his own as a consulting engi- 
neer, or he may — if he has sufficient 
capital back of him — open an estab- 
lishment as a heating contractor. 
There is a great ' demand today from 
heating engineers and contractors for 
first-class foremen, superintendents, esti- 
mators, and draftsmen, and the salaries 
range from $5 to $10 or more a day. 

In the Plumbing and Steam Fitters' 
Course the instruction in Arithmetic, 
Mensuration and Use of Letters in 
Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, 
Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, and 
Strength of Materials are optional, but 
should be studied by every student if 
possible, because a thorough knowledge 
of these subjects forms an excellent 
foundation for the student to compre- 
hend properly all the instruction given 
in the succeeding Instruction Papers. 
The Instruction Papers relating to 
I practical plumbing should qualify an 
i apprentice to become a first-class 
[journeyman plumber, and the Instruc- 
[ tion Papers relating to heating should 

21 



qualify him to become a first-class 
practical fitter. The Instruction Paper 
entitled. Reading Architects' Drawings 
teaches the student how to read work- 
ing drawings and general drawings from 
architects, engineers, etc. A student 
finishing this Course should make a 
first-class foreman for a large plumbing 
and heating shop, where he should be 
able to command at least $5 a day. 

In the Steam Fitters' Course the 
Instruction Papers entitled Arithmetic, 
Mensuration and Use of Letters in 
Formulas, Principles of Mechanics, 
Hydromechanics, Pneumatics, and 
Strength of Materials are optional in 
this Course; but the student should 
study them if possible, because a knowl- 
edge of these subjects is important. 
Any practical fitter that studies these 
Instruction Papers should, after he has 
finished the succeeding Papers on 
practical heating, be qualified to take 
a position as foreman on a heating job ; 
for he is in a position to erect a heating 
system quickly and in a scientific 
manner. 

The Student of The graduate of the 
Sheet-Metal Sheet-Metal Pat- 

p ,, T^ERN Drafting 

Jrattern Course is qualified 

Drafting to enter the draft- 

ing room of a boiler 
works or a tinware manufacturing 
establishment, or in fact any place 
where sheet-metal work is done. Or, 
if he is a sheet-metal worker by trade, 
he will be qualified to take a position 
as foreman or superintendent of a 
sheet-metal works. The demand for 



first-class sheet-metal workers is greater 
than the supply, and the daily papers 
of large cities publish a good number of 
"want ads" for trained men in this line. 

The Student of Before attempting to 
Show-Card ^^^^^® employment 

_„ . . as an expert show- 

Writing card writer, an inex- 

perienced student should finish the 
entire Advanced Show-Card Writing 
Course. He is then qualified to make 
show-cards for any business. The best 
way for a student to secure employment 
is to make personal application to 
several merchants, submitting samples 
of his work. Many merchants unable 
to employ a show-card writer constantly 
are glad to secure the occasional ser- 
vices of an expert when a contract can 
be made for a stated number of cards 
each week. By thus supplying several 
merchants, the competent person may 
build up a profitable business of his 
own. A student of the Advanced 
Show-Card Writing Course will find 
it profitable and a help in his work if 
he is employed as a salesman or clerk 
in a department store while studying 
his Course, though this is not necessary. 

The Student of A student of the 
Window Trim- Window Trimming 
J AND Mercantile 

mmg and Decoration 

Mercantile Course should en- 

Decoration deavor to secure em- 

ployment as a sales- 
man or a clerk in a dry-goods store 
or department store while studying his 
Course, so as to become familiar with 

23 



the stock and secure a business train- 
ing — a training that will be invaluable 
to him as a window trimmer and deco- 
rator. In such a position he will have 
plenty of opportunity to obtain practice 
in the work, and by the time he has 
finished his Course he will be qualified 
to take a position as trimmer. 

The Student of A student of the 
Steam Engi- Steam-E l e c t r i c 
° Course, the Com- 

neering plete Steam Engi- 

neering Course, the Engine and 
Dynamo Running Course, or the En- 
gine Running Course, without experi- 
ence in steam engineering but desiring 
employment, should finish the studies 
up to and including the Instruction Paper 
entitled Combustion, Firing, and Draft. 
He is then ready to fill a position as 
oiler, wiper, or fireman in a steam plant 
or an electric plant. He will be able to 
advance in position as he gains experi- 
ence and continues with his studies. 

The Student of The student of the 
Structural Structural Engi- 

T, . . neering Course 

Engineering ^^y, after he has 
finished the Instruction Paper entitled 
Details of Construction, start in as a 
tracer in a drafting room. Here he will 
receive a salary of from $50 to $75 a 
month. Or he may begin at about the 
same pay as an inspector of structural 
work, or even as assistant engineer. 
Many have been able to get a position as 
engineer, assistant engineer, or salesman 
for a small company manufacturing 
some specialty in building construction. 



Mechanical Engineering 
Course 



This Course is the Mechanical 
Course and the Shop Practice 
Course combined. 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 122 



Elements of Algebra 

Logarithms 

Geometry and Trigonom- 
etry 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Tables 



115 
20 

75 
32 

115 
37 



Geometrical Drawing 77 

Mechanical Drawing 161 

Sketching 47 

Practical Projection 100 

Development of Surfaces. 65 

Elementary Mechanics.. 

Hydromechanics 

Pneumatics 

Heat 

Elementary Graphical 

Statics 

Strength of Materials . . . 
Examination Questions. 

Keys 

Tables and Formulas. . . 



Steam and Steam Engines 

Applied Mechanics 

Steam Boilers 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Tables and Formulas 



64 
42 

46 

74 

85 

70 

62 

130 

5 

138- 

179 

169 

42 

71 

3 

19 Machine Design 232 

20 Dynamos and Motors 271 

Examination Questions. . . 40 

Keys 64 

21 Reading Working Draw- 

ings 68 

22 Measuring Instruments. . . 55 

23 Precision Measurements. . 38 

24 Lathe Work 283 

Examination Questions. . . 24 

Keys 32 



25 



1st Bound 

Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



32 
33 

34 
35 
36 
37 
38 
39 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

Working Chilled Iron 

Planer Work 

Shaper and Slotter Work . 

Drilling and Boring 

Milling-Machine Work. . . . 

Gear Calculations 

Gear-Cutting 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys. 

Tables 

Grinding 

Bench, Vise, and Floor 

Work 

Erecting 

Shop Hints 

Toolmaking 

Gauges and Gauge Making 
Dies and Die Making. . . . 



Jigs and Jig Making. 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Wood Working 

Wood Turning 

Pattemmaking 

Green-Sand Molding 

Core Making 

Dry-Sand and Loam Work 

Cupola Practice 

Mixing Cast Iron. 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Machine Molding 

Foundry Appliances 

Malleable Casting 

Brass Founding 

Blacksmith-Shop Equip- 
ment 

Iron Forging 

Tool Dressing 

Hardening and Tempering 

Treatment of Low-Carbon 
Steel 

Hammer Work 

Machine Forging 

Special Forging Opera- 
tions 

Examination Questions.. . 



PAGES 

23 

76 

37 

130 

205 

49 

40 

29 

4 

18 

1261 

112 

101 

72 

119 

48 

70 

33 

30 

3 

91 

48 

217 

168 

31 

49 

57 

65 

32 

1 

32 

95 

102 

39 

38 
53 
36 
45 

37 
36 
34 

54 
30 



7th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 

Illustrations, 3,706 
Instruction Papers, 103 
Drawing Plates, 43 
Bound Volumes, 10 

/ 
26 



8th Bound 
Volume 



9th Bound 
Volume 



10th Bound 
Volume 



.6 020 



Note — Subjects 8 and 9 may be omitted; no 
recitation is asked for in subject 14. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the student the math- 
ematical knowledge he requires in prac- 
ticing mechanical engineering. 

b. They include the elementary 
subjects of which the mechanical engi- 
neer must have a knowledge. 

c. They are replete with the best 
illustrations ever made of mechanical 
subjects. 

d. They are the most concise and clear 
ever prepared on mechanical engineering. 

e. They contain full instruction in 
the principles of machine design. 

/. They give the details of pattern- 
making, molding, casting, blacksmith- 
ing and forging, toolmaking, machine- 
shop practice, and erecting. 

0-. They give the student help in his 
work as soon as he begins to study. 

//. They do not require the student 
to spend time studying the derivation 
of formulas. 

/. They give rules and examples 
showing the application of the rules in 
practice. 

/. They are so thoroughly practical, 
frequent reference to them will give the 
student knowledge worth many times 
their cost — even if he has not time for 
systematic study and recitation. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mechanical Engineers. 

b. Managers and Superintendents 
whose work requires a knowledge of 
machine design and shop practice. 

27 



c. Draftsmen. 

d. Toolmakers, 

e. Machinists. 
/. Blacksmiths. 

g. Patternmakers. 

k. Foundrymen. 

i. College Graduates having studied 
mechanical courses. 

/. Inventors and Experimenters. 

Remarks 

Here is the chance for our Representa- 
tives to exercise nice discrimination in 
helping the prospective student select 
the Course best suited to his needs. 
This is a matter to which it is important 
for us to give careful attention. All 
persons whose work requires them to 
have a knowledge of machine design 
and the other advanced subjects that 
the mechanical engineer must under- 
stand, and all persons wanting to take 
up such work, should enroll for the 
Mechanical Engineering Course. 
Nothing less will meet their needs. But 
among the classes just listed there are 
many men that need no more instruc- 
tion than is contained in our Shop 
Practice Course. These are: (a) 
Mechanical Engineers wishing to broad- 
en their knowledge of shop practice; 
(6) Draftsmen desiring to take up the 
study of shop practice without advanc- 
ing into mechanical engineering; (c) 
Men running special lathes, milling 
machines, shapers, etc., and desirous of 
learning the theory of general shop 
practice as a step toward qualifying 
for foremanship; {d) College Graduates 
wanting to supplement their college 

28 



training with a special Course in up-to- 
date shop practice. All these will find 
that our Shop Practice Course, or 
possibly one of its Divisions, will amply 
meet their requirements and prove 
an easier path than our Mechanical 
Engineering Course to the positions 
desired. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The designer of every appliance or 
system used for producing or trans- 
mitting power must have the knowl- 
edge contained in our Course, in order 
to adapt his calculations to physical 
laws. 

b. The competent mechanical engi- 
neer is in demand in all branches of 
machine manufacture. No one has so 
great a variety of work that he can turn 
his hand to with such certainty of suc- 
cess. The young designer in a loco- 
motive works today, for example, may 
in less than a year be called to design 
turbine waterwheels at a big advance 
in salary; or, already in the engineering 
department of an electrical manufac- 
tory, he may receive big inducements to 
enter the locomotive works. And so 
he stands with almost unlimited oppor- 
tunities in whichever industry he finds 
most congenial. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time given. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
less than 3 years. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

29 



Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Mechanical 
Engineering Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready 
to study Geometrical Drawing. Our 
Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our students for $7.95. The stu- 
dent pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain all the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
Having successfully met the exacting 
reqmrements of thousands of corre- 
spondence students, it is evident that 
these Papers treat of the principles and 
the applications in mechanical engineer- 
ing with more thoroughness and con- 
ciseness than is possible in a work pre- 
pared on any other plan. 

b. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 

c. They are for reference purposes 
the most valuable work ever prepared 
on mechanical engineering. Some stu- 
dents have enrolled simply to secure 
these Bound Volumes, and have 
achieved success through the study of 
them alone, without even having taken 
time to submit written recitations to us. 



30 



Mechanical Course 



Nineteen subjects are taught in the 
Mechanical Course. The Bound Vol- 
umes of the Reference Library contain 
twenty, as follows : 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE! 

Arithmetic 122 

Elements of Algebra 115 

Logarithms 20 

Geometry and Trigonom- 
etry . . ._ 75 

Examination Questions.. . 32 

Keys 115 

Tables 37 



1st Bound 
Volume 



5 Geometrical Drawing 77 

6 Mechanical Drawing 161 

7 Sketching 47 

8 Practical Projection 100 

9 Development of Surfaces. 65 

10 Elementary Mechanics.. . . 64' 

1 1 Hydromechanics 42 

12 Pneumatics 46 

13 Heat 74 

14 Elementary Graphical 

Statics 85 

15 Strength of Materials 70 

Examination Questions.. . 62 

Keys 130 

Tables and Formulas 5 , 

16 Steam and Steam Engines 138' 

17 Applied Mechanics 179 

18 Steam Boilers 169 

Examination Questions. . . 42 

Keys 71 I 

Tables and Formulas 3 J 

19 Machine Design 2321 

20 D^mamos and Motors 271 I 5th Bound 

Examination Questions.. . 40 ( Volume 

Keys 64j 

Pages 2,753 

Illustrations, 1,451 
Drawing Plates, 43 
Instruction Papers, 33 
Bound Volumes, 5 

Note — Subjects 8 and 9 may be omitted; no 
recitation is asked for in subject 14. 

31 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the student the mathe- 
matical knowledge he requires in prac- 
ticing machine design. 

h. They include the elementary sub- 
jects of which the machine designer 
must have a knowledge. 

c. They are replete with the best 
illustrations that were ever made of 
mechanical subjects. 

d. They are the most concise and 
clear ever prepared on the subject of 
machine design. 

e. They give the student help in his 
work as soon as he begins to study. 

/. They do not require the student 
to spend time studying the derivation 
of formulas. 

g. ' They give rules, and examples 
showing how to apply them in practice. 

h. They are so thoroughly practical, 
frequent references to them will give 
the student knowledge worth many 
times their cost — even if he has no time 
for systematic study and recitation. 

i. They contain full instruction in 
sketching — teaching the student to 
make accurate pencil sketches of tools, 
machinery, etc. 

/. They give clear, concise instruc-. 
tion in mechanical drawing. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mechanical Engineers. 

h. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen whose work requires a knowl- 
edge of machine design. 

c. Draftsmen desirous of becoming 
proficient in machine design. 

32 



d. Toolmakers, Machinists, Black- 
smiths, Patternmakers, Foundrymen, 
etc. that already have a thorough knowl- 
edge of shop practice and are desirous 
of learning machine design. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Machine design cannot be con- 
ducted on guesswork. A little error in 
calculation may cause the loss of hun- 
dreds of dollars worth of labor and 
material . 

b. To insure accuracy, the designer 
must have a clear idea of the work to be 
done by a proposed machine, the diffi- 
culties to be overcome in doing that 
work, and the general plan of construc- 
tion most likely to secure maximum 
efficiency. 

c. Through this Course the student 
can acquire a practical knowledge of 
mathematics. The instruction in theo- 
retical and applied mechanics will 
enable him to understand clearly the 
principles involved in the construction 
and operation of mechanisms; and the 
instruction regarding strength of mate- 
rials, steam engines, steam boilers, 
dynamos and motors, and machine 
design will give him the knowledge he 
must have of these subjects before he 
can become a successful designer. 

d. Hundreds of lines of work have 
been revolutionized by labor-saving 
i-nachinery. There is a constant de- 
mand for special machines, and the 
competent designer is well rewarded. 
Our Course teaches the student the 
underlying principles of machine design 
md will enable him to work out intelli- 
gently his own ideas. 

2 33 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 2 years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Note — -The student may take up drawing in 
the Course as early as he pleases, without wait- 
ing till he has finished the mathematics. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Mechanical 
Course should have our Complete 
Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain all the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
Having successfully met the exacting 
requirements of thousands . of corre- 
spondence students, it is evident that 
these Papers treat of the principles and 
applications in machine design with 
more thoroughness and conciseness than 
would be possible if prepared on any 
other plan. 

b. They are for reference purposes 
the most valuable work ever prepared 

34 



on machine design. Some students 
have enrolled simply to secure these 
Boimd Volumes, and have achieved 
success through the study of them 
alone, without submitting written reci- 
tations to us after passing our examina- 
tions in the elementary subjects. 

c. They are fully indexed. Each 
important item is indexed with all 
initial letters under which it is likely 
to be sought. 



35 



Shop Practice Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

Reading Working Draw- 
ings 

Arithmetic 

Measuring Instruments. . . 
Precision Measurements. . 

Lathe Work 

Examination Questions. . . 
Keys 

Working Chilled Iron. ... 

Planer Work 

Shaper and Blotter Work . 

Drilling and Boring 

Milling-Machine Work. . . . 

Gear Calculations 

Gear-Cutting 

Examination Questions. . 

Keys 

Tables 



68 
52 
55 
38 
283 
24 
32 

23 

76 

37 
130 
205 

49 

40 

29 
4 

18 

1261 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Grinding 

Bench, Vise, and Floor 

Work 112 

Erecting 101 

Shop Hints 72 

Toolmaking 119 

Gauges and Gauge Making 48 

Dies and Die Making 70 

Jigs and Jig Making 33 

Examination Questions.. . 30 

Keys , 3 

Wood Working 91 

Wood Turning' 48 

Patternmaking 217 

Green-Sand Molding 168 

Core Making 31 

Dry-Sand and Loam Work 49 

Cupola Practice 57 

Mixing Cast Iron 65 

Examination Questions. . . 32 

Keys 1 

36 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



oq 


LIST OF SUBJECTS P 

Machine Molding 


AGES 

321 
95 
102 
39 

38 
53 
36 

45 

37 
36 
34 

54 
30, 

267 

ma\ 




30 
31 
32 
33 

34 
3i 


Foundrv x\ppliances 

Malleable Casting 

Brass Founding . 

Blacksmith-Shop Equip- 
ment 

Iron Forging 

Tool Dressing 


5th Bound 


36 
37 

3S 


Hardening and Temoering 
Treatment of Low-Carbon 

Steel 

Hammer W^ork 


Volume 


39 






40 Special Forginej Opera- 
tions 

Examination Questions. . . 

Pages 3 

Illustrations. 2,255 
Instruction Papers, 70 
Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subiects Nos. 1 and 6 


/ bp omitted. 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the student the mathe- 
matical knowledge he requires in shop 
work. 

b. They give reliable instruction 
based on the best practice of the most 
up-to-date shops. 

c. They give the details of pattem- 
niaking, molding, casting, blacksmith- 
ing and forging, toolmaking, and ma- 
chine-shop practice. 

d. They give the student help in his 
work as soon as he begins to study. 

e. They are so thoroughly practical, 
frequent reference to them will give 
the student knowledge worth many 
times their cost — even if he has not 
time for systematic stud 3^ and recita- 
tion. 



37 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Apprentices, Journeymen, and 
Foremen in machine shops, tool rooms, 
pattern shops, foundries, and black- 
smith shops. 

b. Draftsmen in all classes of engi- 
neering works. 

c. College Graduates having studied 
mechanical courses. 

d. Teachers in manual training 
schools and technical schools. 

e. Owners of manufacturing estab- 
lishments in which machine work is 
carried on. 

/. Managers and Superintendents 
wishing to gain a knowledge of how work 
is done in the most advanced shops. 

g. Mechanical Engineers desiring to 
familiarize themselves with the best 
shop practice. 

Note — The person wantin,e a knowledge of 
both machine design and shop practice should 
enroll for the Mechanical Engineering Course. 
If the prospective student already has a thorough 
knowledge of shop practice and desires to learn 
machine design, he should enroll for the Mechan- 
ical Course. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 2 years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Divisions of the Course 

There are five divisions of the Shop 
Practice Course: the Machine Shop 
Division; the Toolmaking Division; the 

38 



Patternmaking Division; the Foundry 
Work Division; and the Blacksmithing 
and Forging Division. The student 
may begin with any Division and take 
up the remaining Divisions in whatever 
order he wishes. Each student of any 
one or more Divisions is furnished with 
five Bound Volumes containing the 
entire Course. 

Subordinate Courses 

When the student desires only one 
Division of the Shop Practice Course, 
he enrolls for the Machine Shop 
Course; the Toolmaking Course; the 
Patternmaking Course; the Foundry 
Work Course; or the Blacksmithing 
and Forging Course, as the case may 
be. The instruction in each of these 
subordinate Courses is exactly the same 
as that given in the respective Divisions 
to the student that enrolls for the Shop 
Practice Course. Each student of 
any of these subordinate Courses is 
furnished with five Bound Volumes 
containing the entire Shop Practice 
Course. 

Time Required 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, 
finish a Division or a subordinate Course 
in about 5 months. The average stu- 
dent requires a little more time. 

Why Persons Should Enroll for the Shop 
Practice Course 

a. The apprentice usually begins 
with little or no knowledge of the 

39 



branch he is about to stud}^ One of 
the tendencies of all modem manufac- 
turing is to get the largest possible 
amount of work out of each man ; 
hence, the apprentice will be given a 
comparatively narrow line of work and 
will be confined to one machine as long 
as possible. Moreover, in most shops 
he will receive little or no instruction 
from the foreman or other men, aside 
from the general directions received 
when he is first put on a machine. If he 
is to gain a thorough knowledge of the 
principles of his machine and its cutting 
tools, the relative advantages of the 
different feeds, speeds, etc., the appren- 
tice must have such a Course as our 
Shop Practice Course. If he is in the 
blacksmith shop or the foiuidry, he can 
advance rapidly to a knowledge of the 
broader practice and better work of the 
shop by studying our Course. Follow- 
ing our instruction, he will obtain a ver}^ 
much larger variety of work and gain a 
m,ore thorough knowledge of his trade 
than will the man plodding along 
dependent on his observation alone. 
Our Course will help the apprentice 
become a broad, strong journeyman — 
one that will be able to command the 
highest wages paid in his trade. 

b. The old-style journeyman is rap- 
idly becoming a thing of the past. The 
majority of workmen are now unhappily 
mere machine runners. Thousands of 
these have at last awakened to the fact 
that they have perfected themselves in 
one specialty, and stuck to it so long 
that their restricted knowledge prevents 
their rising from the one machine with 
which they are familiar. To such our 

40 



Shop Practice Course comes as a 
liberator. It gives the specialist infor- 
mation that enables him to change from 
one machine to another and gain a 
knowledge of the underlying principles 
of all the branches of shop work. 

c. To the practical journeyman ma- 
chinist that has served an apprentice- 
ship and has gained a somewhat broad 
experience, our Shop Practice Course 
offers an opportunity to increase his 
knowledge greatly. From this Course 
he can obtain benefit equivalent to that 
derived from many years of traveling 
and working in different shops, and he 
can obtain many points that it would be 
impossible for any one man to gain by 
traveling and working. In other words, 
it places before him the details of the 
most modem shop practice — not only 
in his particular line, but in all allied 
lines. This Course will help journey- 
men machinists become toolmakers or 
foremen. 

d. Any workman that studies our 
Course thoroughly and is faithful in his 
work will be able to increase his earning 
capacity and reduce the liability of his 
being laid off in slack times. The gen- 
eral utility men, who can be used on 
more than one line, are usually the last 
to be laid off when the working force of 
a shop is being reduced. 

c. To the foreman or any man in 
charge of work in any branch of shop 
I practice, this Course offers an accumu- 
lation of experience that will enable him 
tM systematize and arrange his work in 
I lie very best manner, so that his 
i]c])artment will make the best possible 
showing. A careful study of the 

41 



Course should enable him to devise 
short methods of doing the work. It 
should enable him to tell whether or 
not the workmen are doing the required 
amoimt of work. In this day of rapid 
development, sharp competition, and 
constant change, every shop must 
either keep up with the latest practice 
or go to the wall. Hence, no foreman 
can be sure of holding his position 
unless he keeps abreast of the times and 
ahead of his men. The day is past when 
a man can learn all about his trade by 
experience, and it is only by taking 
advantage of results obtained by others 
that success is now attained. For this 
reason no foreman should be without 
our Shop Practice Course. 

/. Professors of manual training and 
those employed in the shops of tech- 
nical schools will find in this Course a 
very large amount of information for 
use in their lectures and all their instruc- 
tion work. One of the most difficult 
things associated with work in the col- 
lege shop, is to keep in touch with the 
rapidl}^ advancing methods outside. 
Many instructors are young men with- 
out extended experience. This Course 
offers such men an opportunity to 
broaden their knowledge and to gain 
more information than they could 
obtain from many years of travel and 
observation. 

g. The technical-school graduate will 
find our Shop Practice Course an 
excellent thing with which to supple- 
ment his previous training. It is in 
fact the only course from which he can 
quickly acquire a knowledge of modem 
shop methods — knowledge that he must 

42 



have, if he becomes successful in either 
designing or manufacturing. If a 
designer, he must adapt his plans to 
the most economical shop routine. If 
a superintendent or a manager, he must 
see that his shop routine is the most 
economical. 



43 



Draftsmen's Course 





LIST OF SUBJECTS 


PAGES 


1 


Arithmetic 


122 




2 


Elements of Algebra 


115 




3 


Logarithms 


20 




4 


Geometry and Trigonom- 




1st Bound 




etry 


75 


Volume 




Examination Questions . . . 


32 






Keys 


116 






Tables 


37 J 




5 


Geometrical Drawing 


77] 




6 

7 


Mechanical Drawing 

Sketching _. . ._ 


161 

47 


2d Bound 
Volume 


8 


Practical Projection 


100 


9 


Development of Surfaces. 


65 J 




10 


Elementary Mechanics. . . . 


64 




11 


Strength of Materials 


70 




12 


Applied Mechanics 


116 


3d Bound 


13 


Machine Design 


152 


Volume 




Examination Questions. . 


44 






Keys 


88, 






Pages 


1,501 






Illustrations, 790 








Drawing Plates, 43 








Instruction Papers, 21 








Bound Volumes, 3 







Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They will assist any student of 
average intelligence to qualify as a 
practical draftsman and machine de- 
signer. 

b. They are the most practical, 
thorough, and concise ever written on 
mechanical drawing. 

c. They contain full instruction in 
sketching — showing how to make accu- 
rate pencil sketches of tools, machinery, 
etc. 

d. They give full instruction in the 
making and reading of working draw- 
ings, and explain blueprinting. 



c. They were prepared with special 
reference to the needs of those engaged 
in the shop and the drafting room. 

/. They are iUustrated fully and in 
the greatest detail. 

g. They include the elementary sub- 
jects with which a first-class mechanical 
draftsman must be familiar. 

//. They contain nothing that is not 
of real value to the student. 

i. They contain instruction in letter- 
ing. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Machinists and Machinists' 
Apprentices. 

h. Employes in electrical and 
machine shops. 

c. Patternmakers. 

d. Toolmakers. 

e. Foundrymen. 
/. Blacksmiths. 

g. Employes in bridge works. 

h. Inventors and Experimenters. 

i. Young Men wanting to acquire a 
practical knowledge of mathematics, me- 
chanical drawing, and machine design. 

j. Draftsmen, Tracers, and Detailers. 

k. Graduates of high schools and 
manual training schools. 

/. Teachers wishing to prepare for 
giving instruction in practical mechani- 
cal drawing. 

m. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen whose work requires a knowl- 
edge of mechanical drawing and 
machine design. 

Note — The new Mechanical Drawing? Courses 
offer our Representatives an excellent opportunity 
to display nice judgment in assisting the pro- 
spective student in selecting the Course best 
suited to his needs. All persons wishing to make 

45 



drafting a profession should enroll for the 
Draftsmen's Course. Persons that do not 
wish to make a profession of drafting, but never- 
theless wish a knowledge of the subject and are 
deficient in mathematics, should enroll for the 
Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) 
Course. Students wanting only mechanical 
drawing should enroll for the Mechanical Draw- 
ing (Without Mathematics) Course. Among 
the classes listed there are many that desire to 
become mechanical engineers, superintendents, 
consulting engineers, etc.; these should enroll for 
our Mechanical Engineering Course or our 
Mechanical Course, preferably the former. 

The student may take up drawing in the Course , 
as early as he pleases, without waiting till he has 
finished the mathematics. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Mechanical drawing opens the 
way to advancement in almost every 
engineering and industrial line of work; 
it is the universal language of the 
mechanical world; it is the stepping- 
stone to mechanical engineering. For- 
merly, a knowledge of mechanical draw- 
ing and machine design could be 
acquired only through years of ob- 
servant practice; but our instruction 
shortens the period of plodding. Our 
Course enables the ambitious student 
to gain quickly a knowledge of me- 
chanical drawing and to forge ahead 
into the field of machine design. To 
the young man without a trade our 
Course offers a clean and profitable 
profession. To the mechanic, it offers 
promotion. 

b. A specially attractive feature of 
our Course is the instruction in sketch- 
ing. This Paper will be welcomed by 
persons desiring a knowledge of how to 
make accurate pencil sketches of 
machines, machine parts, and details 
for future reference or for working up 

46 



into finished drawings. Our Paper on 
sketching is the only practical work on 
this important subject. Facility in 
making sketches is invaluable to 
mechanical engineers, machine design- 
ers, and all classes of men engaged in 
the mechanical industries. 

c. Draftsmen will find our Course 
replete with the latest and best ideas 
relating to working drawings. Written 
by men of wide experience as draftsmen 
and machine designers, our instruction 
is thoroughly practical and up-to-date. 
Our Course will give the student 
engaged in the practice of drafting an 
enlarged working knowledge that will 
insure his promotion to the higher and 
better-paid positions. 

d. Our Course is the only Course 
that follows exactly the methods em- 
ployed in the best modem drafting 
rooms. Our instruction is in full 
accord with the best practice and 
will prepare students for positions as 
draftsmen along precisely the lines 
they will be called on to follow in 
actual work. 

e. To the young man that intends 
to become an erecting or supervising 
engineer a knowledge of mechanical 
drawing is indispensable. He must 
fully understand how to read working 
drawings correctly. Our Course will 
teach the mechanic or tradesman to 
interpret mechanical drawings quickly 
and accurately. 

/. There is no country in which the 
inventor finds more encouragement and 
a broader field than in the United States. 
Millions of dollars are reaped by suc- 
cessful inventors every year. Many 

47 



valuable ideas have been lost because 
the men conceiving them lacked ability 
to express them in the only way in which 
they could be intelligently expressed 
— by means of drawings. A man with 
an inventive mind and the knowledge 
to be obtained from our Draftsmen's 
Course will be able not only to 
work out secretly his own ideas, but 
also to economize by making his own 
drawings for the Patent Office. 

g. A knowledge of mechanical draw- 
ing is required in nearly all United 
States civil service examinations for 
technical positions. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 18 months. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Furnished 

A first-class Drawing Outfit is sent 
to the student as soon as he has paid 
$10. A student not prepared to pay 
cash in advance or $10 down, can 
study the mathematics of his Course 
until his payments amount to $10, 
when the Outfit will be furnished. The 
student pays express charges. 



48 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
They are the most valuable work ever 
prepared on mechanical drawing. They 
treat the subject fully and in detail. 
They are the only volumes in existence 
suitable for home study. The student, 
even though he may never recite to us, 
can study the Bound Volumes in spare 
time at home and almost without effort 
gain knowledge that will bring him a 
substantial increase in salary. 

b. They contain the latest and best 
ideas on mechanical drawing. There 
is no other single work so useful as these 
Bound Volumes. For reference pur- 
poses their value is almost unlimited. 
Nowhere else can the student find so 
clear, practical, authoritative answers 
to the many questions that arise in his 
daily practice. The student possessing 
these Bound Volumes has a complete 
up-to-date work unexcelled for clear- 
ness and conciseness, and containing 
exactly the information necessary to 
his success. 

c. They are fully indexed. Ever}^ 
important item is indexed with all the 
initial letters under which -it is likely to 
be sought. 



49 



Mechanical Drawing (With 
Mathematics) Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 122 " 

2 Elements of Algebra 115 

3 Logarithms 20 

4 Geometry and Trigonom- 

etry 75 

Examination Questions ... 32 

Keys 115 

Tables 37 J 

5 Geometrical Drawing 77 

6 Mechanical Drawing 161 

7 Sketching 47 

8 Practical Projection 100 

9 Development of Surfaces. 65 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 947 

Illustrations, 406 
Drawing Plates, 43 
Instruction Papers, 17 
Bound Volumes, 2 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They will enable any student of 
average intelligence to qualify as a 
practical draftsman. 

b. They give the student all the 
mathematical knowledge he requires in 
practicing mechanical drafting. 

c. They were prepared with special 
reference to the needs of those engaged 
in the shop and the drafting room. 

d. They are thoroughly practical. 
Written by men engaged in the daily 
practice of drafting, they represent the 
best methods of modem drafting rooms. 

e. They are the most clear, concise, 
and complete ever written on mechan- 
ical drawing. 

/. They teach how to make and read 
mechanical drawings. 

50 



g. They explain blueprinting. 

h. They contain no unnecessary 
operations. In every case the shortest 
and most practical methods have been 
adopted. 

i. They contain full instruction in 
sketching — teaching the student to 
make accurate pencil sketches of tools, 
machinery, etc. 

j. They are illustrated fully and in 
the greatest detail. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Machinists and Machinists' Ap- 
prentices. 

b. Employes in electrical and ma- 
chine shops. 

c. Patternmakers. 

d. Toolmakers. 

e. Foundrymen. 
/. Blacksmiths, 

g. Employes in bridge works. 

h. Inventors and Experimenters. 

i. Young Men desirous of acquiring 
a practical knowledge of mathematics 
and mechanical drawing. 

y. Draftsmen, Tracers, and Detailers. 

k. Graduates of high schools and 
manual training schools. 

/. Teachers wishing to prepare for 
teaching mechanical drawing. 

Note — The Mechanical Drawing (With 
Mathematics) Course is intended for persons 
desiring- a practical knowledge of mathematics 
and mechanical drawing only; it teaches how to 
make and read working drawings, and to perform 
the calculations necessary to lay out these' draw- 
ings. If the prospective student desires a knowl- 
edge of machine design, and does not care 
to study the subject as fully as treated in 
the Mechanical Engineering Course or the 
Mechanical Course, he should enroll for the 

51 



Draftsmen's Course. Students wanting me- 
chanical drawing only, should enroll for the Me- 
chanical Drawing (Without Mathematics) 
Course. 

The student may take up drawing in the Course 
as early as he pleases, without waiting till he has 
finished the mathematics. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Mechanical drawing is becoming 
more and more the universal language 
for the transmission of ideas in the 
industrial establishments of the world. 
To the laboring workman, a knowledge 
of this language is a sure ladder of pro- 
motion. To the young man that has 
not yet selected a trade, it opens an 
entrance to the world of industrial 
activity — dividing, perhaps, the drud- 
gery of a shop apprentice's manual 
labor. 

b. No one intending to make a living 
within the boundaries of the industrial 
field can afford to be without a knowl- 
edge of mechanical drawing. The study 
of this subject will immediately begin 
to increase the student's earning power 
and lead him to a more congenial occu- 
pation. 

c. Promotion to the more respon- 
sible positions in an industrial estab- 
lishment is generally had through the 
drafting room. An apprentice or a 
workman giving proof of his ability 
to make a neat drawing is the first 
selected from the shop to fill a vacancy 
in the drafting department. Through 
his previous knowledge of the work, he 
will cut short the long period usually 
spent in making blueprints and tracings, 
having duties requiring much more skill 
assigned to him. By careful observation 



of the construction and working of every 
machine detail, and by using his spare 
time for the studying of mechanical sub- 
jects, he will soon become a machine 
designer at a good salary and with' pros- 
pects of further advancement. 

d. Nearly all United States civil ser- 
vice examinations for technical posi- 
tions require a knowledge of mechanical 
drawing. 

e. Our instruction is in full accord 
with the modern drafting room. The 
student is taught to draw his Plates 
in exactly the same manner as he would 
be called on to make a drawing in actual 
practice. On entering a drafting room 
he is thus fully prepared to take up his 
work without having to wait to learn 
new methods; this is a decided advan- 
tage and will help the student make 
rapid progress. 

Drawing Outfit Furnished 

A first-class Drawing Outfit is sent 
to the student as soon as he has paid 
$10. A student not prepared to pay 
cash in advance or $10 down, can study 
the mathematics of his Course until his 
payments amount to $10, when the 
Outfit will be furnished. The student 
pays express charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
G days a week, finish the Course in 
about 1 year. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

53 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
They are the most valuable work ever 
prepared on mechanical drawing. They 
treat the subject fully and in detail. 
They are the only volumes in existence 
suitable for home study. The student, 
even though he may never recite to us, 
can study the Bound Volumes in spare 
time at home, and almost without effort 
gain knowledge that will bring him a 
substantial increase in salary. 

b. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all 
initial letters under which it is likely to 
be sought. 

c. They contain the latest and best 
ideas on mechanical drawing. Nowhere 
else can the student find such practical, 
helpful answers to the many different 
questions that come up in his daily 
practice. They contain exactly the 
information necessary to his success. 



54 



Mechanical Drawing (Without 
Mathematics) Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Geometrical Drawing 77 

2 Mechanical Drawing 161 

3 Sketching 47 

4 Practical Projection 100 

5 Development of Surfaces 65 

Pages 450 

Illustrations, 289 
Drawing Plates, 43 
Instruction Papers, 5 
Bound Volumes, 1 

Geometrical Drawing describes draw- 
ing instruments and materials, and 
teaches' how to use them and give 
them proper care ; gives full instruction 
in lettering and geometrical construc- 
tions; and explains the representation 
of objects. Five Drawing Plates are 
included: one devoted to geometrical 
problems ; two devoted to projections ; 
one to conic sections; and one to 
intersections and developments. 

Mechanical Drawing begins with 
thorough instruction in fundamental 
matters — such as center lines, sections 
and section lining, breaks, hidden parts, 
screw threads, repetition of parts, 
abbreviations, scales, etc. — preparing 
the student to make solid progress 
with the nineteen Drawing Plates that 
follow. These Drawing Plates are 
devoted to such practical subjects as 
the flange shaft coupling, the shaft 
hanger, the dynamo commutator, spur 
gears and bevel gears, the steam engine, 
etc. Full instruction is given in the 
reading of working drawings. Blue- 
printing is thoroughly explained. 

55 



Note — Mechanical Drawing is so called because 
it is done with drawing instruments instead of 
with the free hand. The term could be applied 
to every kind of drawing done with the aid of 
instruments; but custom restricts its meaning to 
projection drawing only, and furthermore does 
not usually apply it to architectural drawing. 
Mechanical Drawing is not restricted to the rep- 
resentation of machines and machine details; it 
has very little or nothing in common with machine 
designing, which is covered in our Mechanical 
Engineering Course, our Mechanical Course, 
and our Draftsmen's Course. 

Sketching begins with the representa- 
tion of the most elementary objects — 
such as bolts, bushings, etc. — and 
gradually proceeds until it finally takes 
up the sketching of complex machines; 
it fully explains the use of the different 
instruments required for ascertaining 
the dimensions of the objects sketched. 
The ability to make good sketches is 
an accomplishment that many drafts- 
men lack. Our student will not only 
learn how to make sketches, but also 
how to work up the drawings from 
sketches. A thorough knov\^ledge of 
machine sketching is invaluable to 
mechanical engineers, machine designers, 
and all classes of men engaged in the 
mechanical industries. 

Practical Projection treats of the 
representation of objects by means of 
drawings, showing the dimensions of 
objects as they really are, rather than 
as they appear to the eye. There are 
seven Drawing Plates. A careful study 
of this Paper will give the student a 
more thorough and far more practical 
knowledge of the theory of projection 
than is usually possessed by draftsmen 
and machine designers. 

Development of Surfaces teaches how 
to represent the outline of a figure 

56 



which, when cut out of paper, sheet 
tin, etc., may be folded into a desired 
shape. There are five Drawing Plates. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Machinists and Machinists' Ap- 
prentices. 

b. Employes in electrical machine 
shops. 

c. Patternmakers. 

d. Toolmakers. 

e. Foundrymen. 
/. Blacksmiths. 

g. Employes in bridge works. 

h. Inventors and Experimenters. 

i. Young Men desirous of acquiring 
a practical knowledge of mechanical 
drawing. 

j. Draftsmen, Tracers, and Detailers. 

k. Graduates of high schools and 
manual training schools. 

/. Teachers that wish to prepare for 
teaching mechanical drawing. 

Note — Among the classes listed there are 
some that need more instruction than is con- 
tained in our Mechanical Drawing (Without 
Mathematics) Course. Persons wanting a 
practical knowledge of mathematics besides 
mechanical drawing, should enroll for the 
Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) 
Course; persons wanting to become draftsmen 
in the fullest sense of the term — that not only 
want to be able to make working drawings, but 
also wish to study mathematics and mechanics 
as used in machine design — should enroll for the 
Draftsmen's Course; persons desiring to study 
machine design more fully than is treated in 
our Draftsmen's Course should enroll for 
the Mechanical Engineering Course or the 
Mechanical Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Mechanical Drawing opens the 
way to more pleasant employment and 

57 



increased pay; it is attractive to every 
man working at a small salary; it offers 
to young men just leaving school a 
clean and profitable profession just at 
the time of life when a choice of occu- 
pation is most difficult to make ; and 
to young women it opens a new sphere 
of usefulness with better income and 
shorter hotu-s than are had in the 
shops and the stores. Inventors with 
bright ideas, but with scanty means 
and a neglected education, are found 
in every village. To them a knowl- 
edge of mechanical drawing is not 
only useful; it is absolutely neces- 
sary. Our Mechanical Drawing Courses 
are needed by the majority, and will 
be useful to all. 

h. One of the greatest difficulties 
that presents itself to the young man 
on entering a modem drafting room is 
his lack of familiarity with practical 
drafting methods. He must learn 
methods in actual use before he can 
hope to succeed. Our Course, written 
by men of long experience as drafts- 
men and machine designers, is in per- 
fect harmony with the latest and best 
practice. The student is taught to 
draw his Plates in precisely the same 
manner as he would be called on to 
make a drawing were he engaged in 
the actual practice of drafting. Our 
instruction thus qualifies a sttident to 
take up at once the work in a drafting 
room without having to wait to famil- 
iarize himself with new methods; this 
is a decided advantage, and will help 
the student to make rapid progress. 
That our Drawing Courses are thor- 
oughly practical and meet with the 

58 



highest approval is shown by the fact 
that the General Electric Company — 
one of the largest maniifacturing con- 
cerns in the United States, employing 
over 600 draftsmen — is using our 
Instruction Papers in carrying on 
drawing instruction among its young 
men. This fact alone is sufficient proof 
that our Course is in full accord with 
the very best practice ; it is the only 
Course that will qualify the student as 
a practical draftsman. 

Drawing Outfit Furnished 

A first-class Drawing Outfit is sent to 
the student as soon as he has paid $10. 
A student not prepared to pay cash in 
advance or $10 down, can study the 
preliminary work on Geometrical Draw- 
ing in his Course until his payments 
amoimt to $10, when the Outfit will be 
furnished. The student pays express 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 
8 months. The average student re- 
quires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volume of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

The Bound Volume contains the 
Instruction Papers and the Drawing 
Plates of the Course. Each subject is 

69 



indexed with all initial letters under 
which it is likely to be sought. It 
contains the latest and best ideas on 
mechanical drawing. Nowhere else can 
the student find instruction so clearly 
written and illustrated. The student, 
even though he may never recite to us, 
can study the Bound Volume in spare 
time at home, and almost without effort 
gain knowledge that will bring him a 
substantial increase in salary. 



60 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



Complete Electrical Engineer- 
ing Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 122 

Elements of Algebra 115 

Logarithms 20 

Geometrv and Trigonom- 
etry 75 

Examination Questions ... 32 

Keys 116 

Tables 37. 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Mechanical Drawing 161 

Sketching 47 

Practical Projection 100 

Development of Surfaces. 65 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 47' 

Machine Elements 61 

Mechanics of Fluids 53 

Strength of Materials 37 

Heat and vSteam 27 

The Steam Engine 46 

The Indicator 37 

Engine Testing 50 

Governors 45 

Valve Gears 37 

Steam Turbines 23 

Examination Questions. . . 30 

Keys 39 

Electricity and Magnetism 35 

Electrodynamics 55 

Electrical Resistance and 

Capacity 59 

The Magnetic Circuit 72 

Electromagnetic Indue- 

tion 58 

Chemistry and Electro- 
chemistry 55 

Primary Batteries 78 

Electrical Measurements. . 216 

Examination Questions. . . 33 

Keys 33 

Dvnamos and Dvnamo 

Design 240 

Direct-Current Motors 100 

Alternating Currents 104 

Alternators 55 

Alternating-Current Appa- 
ratus 78 

Examination Questions.. . 25 

Keys 42 

61 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

Design of Alternating-Cur- 
rent Apparatus • 169 

Electric Transmission 78 

Line Construction 69 

Switchboards and Switch- 
board Appliances 89 

Power Transformation and 

Measurement 87 

Examination Questions. . . 17 

Keys 20 

Storage Batteries 86 



40 
41 


Incandescent Lighting. . . 
Arc Lighting 


. 115 
. 119 


42 


Interior "Wiring 

Examination Questions . . 
Keys 


. 179 
. 21 
. 21 


43 
44 
45 
46 


Electric Power Stations. . 

Telegraph Systems 

Telephone Systems 

Applied Electricity. 

Examination Questions. . 
Keys 


. 274 
. 120 
. 114 
65 
. 19 
. 26 


47 
48 


Electric-Railway System.= 
Line and Track 


66 
118 


49 
50 
51 
52 


Line Calculations 

Motors and Controllers. . 
Electric-Car Equipment. 
Multiple-Unit Systems. . . 
Examination Questions. . 


51 

. 79 
. 78 
. 58 
. 17 
. 13 




Pages 


5,005 




Illustrations, 2,523 
Instruction Papers, 76 
Drawing Plates, 43 
Bound Volumes, 9 





;6th Bound 
Volume 



7th Bound 
Volume 



8th Bound 
Volume 



9th Bound 
Volume 



Note — Subjects 8 and 9 may be omitted. 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject that 
is necessary in an electrical engineering 
Course. 

b. They embrace instruction in all 
the elementary subjects necessary to 
be understood before the study of 
electrical engineering is begun. 

62 



c. They contain examples that relate 
directly to the practical work of elec- 
trical engineering. 

d. They give the student valuable 
information and directions that help 
him in his daily work, as soon as he 
begins to study the technical part of 
his Course. 

e. They do not require the student 
to spend time studying the derivation 
of formulas. He learns rules and how 
to apply them in practical work. 

/. They are of necessity clearer than 
ordinary textbooks, because the I. C. S. 
student must study out of the presence 
of a teacher, 

g. They are profusely illustrated. 
Wherever an illustration will make the 
text more clear, it is put in. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Electrical Engineers. 
h. Employes of electrical factories 
desirous to become electrical engineers. 

c. Employes of machine shops desir- 
ing to become electrical engineers. 

d. Young Men attending school and 
desiring to pursue the study of electrical 
engineering outside of school hours. 

e. Men wishing to become managers 
or superintendents of large electric 
lighting and railway systems — men that 
want an intimate knowledge of the 
design of the apparatus as well as full 
information pertaining to its operation. 

/. Inventors and Experimenters. 

g. Draftsmen and Designers desir- 
ing a thorough knowledge of electrical 
designing. 

h. College Graduates whose train- 
ing has been in professions other than 

63 



electrical engineering, and whose work 
now requires a knowledge of that 
subject. 

i. Patent-Office Draftsmen. 

Remarks 

The duties of an electrical engineer 
are to calculate both the mechanical 
and the electrical proportions of electric 
machinery, and plan the construction 
of electrical plants. Besides being 
expert calculators, electrical engineers 
have to be practical electricians; but 
practical electricians do not have to 
be electrical engineers. This is a fact 
that is altogether too seldom understood 
by prospective students. The Com- 
plete Electrical Engineering 
Course is the only Course suitable for 
persons that want a thorough knowl- 
edge of electric machine design, power 
station design, and the management of 
extensive lighting and railway systems, 
and such persons are the only persons 
that should enroll for this Coiurse. 

If the prospective student does not 
desire to enter upon the Complete 
Electrical Engineering Course, but 
wishes to obtain a thorough knowledge 
of the elements of electricity and 
magnetism, steam and steam engines, 
and direct-current machine design, he 
should enroll for the Electrical En- 
gineering (Part 1) Course. This 
Course contains the subjects in the 
first five Bound Volumes of the chart. 

If the prospective student has had 
preliminary training equivalent to that 
given in the Electrical Engineering 
(Part 1) Course and desires to take 
up at once the most advanced work, 

64 



he should enroll for the Electrical 
Engineering (Part 2) Course; this 
Course, however, should never be 
recommended except to persons fully 
prepared to begin with the most dif- 
ficult work. 

Note — There is a mistaken notion that "engi- 
neering" always means "engine running." 
Nothing could be farther from the truth. The 
work of a man in a dynamo room — including 
even the chief engineer — requires no knowledge 
of electrical engineering (designing) in its broad- 
est sense. Besides being an expert engine runner, 
a chief engineer needs to be an expert installer, 
operator, and repairer of electric machinery. He 
may be ever so competent for his position with- 
out a knowledge of electrical designing. The 
Course for him is the Electric Lighting and 
Railways Course or the Steam-Electric 
Course — unless he wants to become an electrical 
engineer. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The use of electric dynamos, 
motors, lamps, and other appliances is 
increasing with astonishing rapidity. 
In fact the wide-spreading adoption of 
electric apparatus is the most remark- 
able feature of this w^onderfully indus- 
trial age. Any man looking forward 
to an engineering career will probably 
find his best opportunity in electrical 
engineering. 

b. There is a constant demand for 
new types of electric machinery, and 
there will therefore always be an 
urgent call for expert designers. 

c. New uses of electricity are dis- 
covered from day to day. Therefore, 
new machinery must be not only de- 
signed, but invented. 

d. To the engineer engaged in de- 
signing power stations, the combination 

3 65 



of instruction in steam and electric appli- 
ances given in our Course is of par- 
ticular value. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 4 
years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Experimental Apparatus Required 

The student of our Complete Elec- 
trical Engineering Course should 
have our Complete Electrical Outfit, or 
its equivalent, as soon as he is ready 
to study "Principles of Electricity and 
Magnetism." The I. C. S. Complete 
Electrical Outfit consists of the follow- 
ing: Galvanometer, for measuring small 
electric currents; Slide-Wire Bridge, for 
measuring electrical resistance ; Bar 
Magnet; Horseshoe Magnet; Two Re- 
sistance Coils; Leclanche Cell; Com- 
pass; Box of Iron Filings; Insulated 
Wire. The Outfit is valued at $20; we 
furnish it to our student for $8.50. 
The student pays express charges. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Complete Elec- 
trical Engineering Course should 
have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or 
an outfit equally good, as soon as he is 
ready to study Geometrical Drawing. 
Our Outfit is suitable for use in the 
drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we 
furnish it to our student for $7.95. 
The student pays express charges. 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
These Papers having successfully met the 
exacting requirements of thousands of 
students, it is evident that the Bound 
Volumes treat of principles and applica- 
tions in electrical engineering with more 
thoroughness and conciseness than is 
possible in a w^ork prepared on any other 
plan. They are in fact an epitome of 
common-sense application. For easy 
gradation ; for conciseness ; for intelli- 
gent adherence to the important features 
of their subjects ; and for practicability, 
they are unequaled. From no other 
source can a student get so quickly so 
much money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subject of electrical engi- 
neering, and the details of that subject 
are explained with thoughtful care and 
a proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all the 
initial letters under which it is likely to 
be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items classified and indexed, the stu- 
dent can find in a moment the solution 
of a problem it might otherwise take 
hours to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 

67 



avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary princi- 
ples and lead easily and quickly to the 
best theory and practice of the work 
of which they treat. The tried and 
proved facts, formulas, and processes 
used in the best electrical engineering 
practice in the country are here collected 
and bound into an orderly and syste- 
matic whole. 



68 



Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course 

Fifteen subjects are taught in the 
Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course. The Bound Volumes of the 
Reference Library contain twenty, as 
follows : 



10 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 102 

Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formiilas. ... 41 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 

Machine Elements 61 

Mechanics of Fluids 53 

Strength of Materials 37 

Elements of Electricity 

and Magnetism 66 

Heat and Steam 27 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Keys 97 

Dynamos and Motors 90 " 

Operation of Dynamos and 

Motors _ _. . 74 

Dynamo-Electric Machin- 
ery 72 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Mechanical Drawing 50 

Steam Heating 51 

Steam Turbines 23 

Examination Questions. . . 19 

Keys 23 

Alternating Currents 94 ' 

Electric Transmission. . . . 184 

Electric Lighting 325 

Examination Questions. 

Keys 

Electric Railways 

Interior Wiring 

Examination Questions. 
Keys 



30 

43 

401 

192 

28 
47 



1st Bound 

Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,395 

Illustrations, 1.350 

Drawing Plates, 16 

Instruction Papers, 31 

Bound Volumes, 4 
Note — Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. 
No recitations are asked for in subjects 5, 6, 8 
14, and 15. 



operation of Dynamos and Motors 

is devoted to the installing, operat- 
ing, and repairing of dynamo-electric 
machinery. It treats of all the causes, 
remedies, and preventives of the 
various troubles that occur in dynamos 
and motors. 

Dynamo-Electric Machinery explains 
the special use of all types of dyna- 
mos and motors. All the various arma- 
tures and magnetic fields are herein 
illustrated and described, and the 
advantages of each type are set forth. 

Electric Lighting is a thorough treatise 
on every branch of the subject. The 
methods of making the incandescent 
lamp, the measuring of its candlepower, 
and light distribution are described. 
The principle of the new Nernst lamp 
is explained, and arc lamps — both open 
and enclosed — are treated of. 

Electric Railways is beyond question 
the best treatise ever prepared on the 
subject of electric railways. This Paper 
treats of every important appliance and 
system of distribution known to the art. 
The most prominent systems of car 
wiring and methods of control are 
shown in diagram. Roadbed construc- 
tion and rail bonding are illustrated 
with numerous examples of every-day 
practice. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject of 
importance to a man that would be. a 
practical electrician. 

b. They do not treat of electrical 
designing. The student is therefore 

70 



not required to study subjects that 
only a designer must know. 

c. They teach how to install and 
operate all classes of power-house 
machinery and accessories. 

d. They thoroughly explain the 
construction of outdoor lines. 

e. They show how to wire buildings 
for lamps, motors, and other appliances. 

/. They give instruction in all the 
necessary elementary subjects. 

g. They explain how to apply rules 
and formulas in every-day work. 

h. They show clearly the solution of 
the practical electrician's problems. 

i. They are more concise and clear 
than ordinary textbooks. 

y. They are more freely illustrated 
than ordinary textbooks. Wherever 
illustrations will be helpful to the stu- 
dent, they are put in. 

k. They are so plain and practical, 
they will give the student valuable help 
as soon as he begins to study. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Employes of electrical factories 
— such as Battery-Cell Makers, Magnet 
Winders, Armature Winders, Lamp 
Makers, Instrument Makers, Testers, 
Machinists, Apprentices, etc. — who need 
to become not electrical designers, but 
expert practical electricians. 

6. Employes of machine shops — 
such as Superintendents, Foremen, Ma- 
chinists, and Apprentices — desiring to 
take up tne study of practical electricity 
without pursuing the study of electrical 
engineering or designing. Owing to the 
extensive use of electric motors, electric 
cranes, and other electric appliances, 



machine-shop men with an electrical 
training are always in demand. 

c. Electrical Linemen, Firemen, Dy- 
namo Tenders, Repairmen, Engineers, 
and Superintendents. Their work does 
not require them to be electrical engi- 
neers ; but they should be skilled practi- 
cal electricians. (The attention of dyna- 
mo tenders, firemen, engineers, super- 
intendents, and all electrical power- 
house men should be called to the 
Steam-Electric Course. This is the 
Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course and the Complete Steam En- 
gineering Course combined especially 
to give power-house men a training in 
both electricity and steam.) 

d. Telephone and Telegraph Em- 
ployes, who frequently are desirous of 
getting into the electric lighting and 
railway field. 

e. Men engaged in wiring buildings 
for electric lights, motors, bells, and 
gas lighters — who do not need to learn 
electrical engineering, but who should 
become expert in practical work. 

/. Municipal Electricians — ^men that 
take care of city electrical properties, 
such as fire-alarms, police calls, etc. 
Only after gaining a thorough knowl- 
edge of electric lighting and railway 
circuits can these men keep their own 
apparatus well protected against such 
circuits. Besides, the broad practical 
training that the Course gives will con- 
stantly be of help in all branches of 
their w^ork. 

Remarks 

It is the work of the electrical engi- 
neer to design dynamos, motors, and 

72 



general electric machinery and appli- 
ances, and plan the arrangement of 
power houses, power-house machinery, 
and all circuits and apparatus — both 
internal and external — that form a part 
of an electrical plant. Special pains 
should be taken to enroll the student 
for the Complete Electrical Engi- 
neering Course, or the Electrical 
Engineering (Part 1) Course, or the 
Electrical Engineering (Part 2) 
Course — in preference to any other 
electrical Course — if he really wants 
to learn electrical engineering rather 
than the work of the practical elec- 
trician. 

The work of the practical electrician 
is to install, operate, and repair electric 
machinery, appliances, and circuits. 
Particular care should be taken to 
enroll the student for the Electric 
Lighting and Railways Course — and 
not the Electrical Engineering Course — 
if he wants to become a practical elec- 
trician only. 

Why Persons Should Enroll for the 
Electric Lighting and Rail- 
ways Course 

a. The power-house electrician of 
today does not hold his position long 
if he practices the costly cut-and-try 
methods that used to be tolerated. 
He is expected to know the exact results 
of connections — not after the switch is 
thrown, but before. 

b. The rapid increase in electric- 
lighting systems and electric-railway 
systems has created an unsatisfied 
demand for trained men to operate 
the plants. In the electrical field, 

73 



trained men advance faster than in 
any other; for there is a scarcity of 
men competent to hold important 
positions. 

c. There are almost unlimited op- 
portunities for the right sort of men 
in the electrical industries, and our 
Courses are developing the men that 
the owners of electric plants are glad 
to pay well. 

d. Our Electric Lighting and 
Railways Course is in every sense a 
practical electrician's Course. It treats 
of all the best methods in practice, and 
the student is constantly learning 
things that are immediately helpful to 
him. 

e. The Electric Lighting and 
Railways Course embraces every sub- 
ject pertaining to Electric Lighting, 
Electric Railways, Dynamo Running, 
and Interior Wiring. Thus the student 
gets a thorough training in each of the 
branches of electric lighting and elec- 
tric-railway operating. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives to 
study. Some, studying 2 hours a 
day for 6 days a week, finish the 
Course in about IJ years. The average 
student requires a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Electric Light- 
ing and Railways Course should have 
our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an 
outfit equally good, if he is to study 

74 



Drawing. Our Outfit is suitable for 
use in the drafting room. It is worth 
$13.55; we furnish it to our student 
for $7.95. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why this Course is Valuable to Men 
Employed in Electric Lighting 
Plants, or at Work on Elec- 
tric Railway Systems 

Owners of electric machinery realize 
that their property is safe in skilled 
hands only. The man that, while at 
work, educates himself to fill a better 
position, will be the first man to be 
promoted. The best superintendent or 
manager "of an electrical property is the 
man that, while he was the best man in 
the fireroom, trained himself to be the 
best man in the dynamo room, and so 
on upward. 

Why the Electric Lighting and Railways 

Course Will Be of Value to Persons 

Not Doing Electrical Work, 

But Wanting to Engage 

in It 

As they study the Course they will be 
better and better qualified to secure 
employment. They will be getting a 
valuable ■ knowledge of electrical tech- 
nicalities, which knowledge will enable 
them to choose intelligently some 
special field to work in; and after they 
have obtained employment, they will 
be able to practice much better methods, 
advance much more rapidly than the un- 
trained workman, and command much 
better pay. It is a poor policy to 
postpone study till a position is secured. 

75 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the 
Course. These Papers having success- 
fully met the exacting requirements of 
thousands of students, it is evident that 
the Bound Volumes treat of principles 
and applications in electric lighting and 
railway operation with more thorough- 
ness and conciseness than is possible in 
a work prepared on any other plan. 
They are in fact an epitome of common- 
sense application. For easy gradation; 
for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence 
to the important features of their sub- 
jects; and for practicability, they are 
unequaled. From no other source can 
a student get so qtiickly so much 
money-earning knowledge . They are the 
best ever prepared for home study. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to 
the subjects of electric lighting and 
railways, and the details of these sub- 
jects are explained with thoughtful care 
and a proper regard for the possible 
shortcomings of the reader. Every 
important item is indexed according 
to all the initial letters under which it 
is likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can fxnd in a moment the 
solution of a problem it might other- 
wise take hours to master. 

76 



c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. The tried and 
proved facts, formulas, and processes 
used in the best electric lighting and 
railway practice in the country are 
here collected and bound into an 
orderly and systematic whole. 



Electric Lighting Course I 
Electric Railways Course 
Dynamo Running Course 

The subjects contained in the Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library of the 
Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course, from which the Electric 
Lighting Course, the Electric Rail- 
ways Course, and the Dynamo Run- 
ning Course are made up, are: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 102 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. ... 41 

3 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 

4 Machine Elements 61 

5 Mechanics of Fluids 53 

6 Strength of Materials 37 

7 Elements of Electricity 

and Magnetism 66 

8 Heat and Steam 27 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Keys 97 

9 Dynamos and Motors 90 

10 Operation of Dynamos and 

Motors . 74 

11 Dynamo-Electric Machin- 

ery 72 

12 Geometrical Drawing 77 

13 Mechanical Drawing 50 

14 Steam Heating 51 

15 Steam Turbines.... 23 

Examination Questions.. . 19 
Keys 23 

16 Alternating Currents 94 

17 Electric Transmission 184 

18 Electric Lighting. 325 

Examination Questions . . 30 
Kevs 43 J 

19 Electric Railways 401 

20 Interior Wiring 192 

Examination Questions. . . 28 
Keys 47 

Pages .2,395 

Illustrations, 1,350 
Drawing Plates, 16 
Bound Volumes, 4 



2d Bound 
Volume 



78 



Subjects Taught in the Courses 

In the Electric Lighting Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 
17, 18, and 20. Subjects 12, 13, and 
20 may be omitted. The four Bound 
Volumes containing the entire Elec- 
tric Lighting and Railways Course 
are furnished. 

In the Electric Railways Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 
17, and 19. Subjects 12 and 13 may be 
omitted. The four Bound Volumes con- 
taining the entire Electric Lighting 
and Railways Course are furnished. 

In the Dynamo Running Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, and 11. Sub- 
jects 3 and 4 may be omitted. Two 
Bound Volumes containing the sub- 
jects of the Course are furnished. 

Number of Instruction Papers in the 
Courses 

In the Electric Lighting Course: 
25 Instruction Papers; 16 Drawing 
Plates. 

In the Electric Railways Course: 
24 Instruction Papers; 16 Drawing 
Plates. 

In the Dynamo Running Course* 
12 Instruction Papers. 

Time Required to Finish the Courses 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 
days a week, finish the Electric 
Lighting Course or the Electric 
Railways Course in abotit 1 year, 
and the Dynamo Running Course in 

79 



/ 
about 9 months. The average stu- 
dent requires a httle more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Electric Light- 
ing Course or our Electric Rail- 
ways Course should have our Com- 
plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. If, how- 
ever," he does not wish to study draw- 
ing, no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
students for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. The student of the 
Dynamo Running Course does not 
need an outfit. 

Classes of Persons Among Which Pro- 
spective Students Should be Sought 

The same classes among which pro- 
spective students of the Electric 
Lighting and Railways Course are 
nought; but the student should be 
enrolled for the full Electric Light- 
ing AND Railways Course in prefer- 
ence to any of its subordinate Courses, 
whenever possible. 

Reasons That Should Induce Persons 
to Enroll for These Subor- 
dinate Courses 

.The same reasons that should induce 
them to enroll for the full Electric 
Lighting and Railways Course. 

Remarks 

Electric lighting and electric-railway 
operating, though different, are very 
often combined; and dynamo running 

80 



is always involved in both. The aver- 
age student will therefore need instruc- 
tion in all three subjects. 

In fact, almost every person that 
needs any of the four subordinate 
Courses, needs all of them. For this 
reason any person wanting a knowl- 
edge of electric railways, electric light- 
ing, dynamo running, or interior wiring, 
should be enrolled for the parent 
Course — the Electric Lighting and 
Railways Course — if possible. Our 
Representative will do the student a 
kindness by acquainting him with this 
fact. 

Occasionally a man is met that wishes 
to learn only some particular portion of 
a subject that he really ought to know 
all about. Certain subjects in the 
Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course are therefore omitted, when 
the demands of such a man are granted, 
and we give him whichever of the sub- 
ordinate Courses he wants. If he 
enrolls for the Electric Lighting 
Course or the Electric Railways 
Course, we furnish him with all four 
Bound Volumes containing the entire 
Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course; for every student of the Elec- 
tric Lighting Course or the Electric 
Railways Course should have the com- 
plete Electric Lighting and Rail- 
ways Course for reference, even though 
he will not study it all. If, however, 
he enrolls for the Dynamo Running 
Course, only two Bound Volumes are 
needed for reference : or if he enrolls for 
the Interior Wiring Course, only 
three Bound Volumes are needed for 
reference. 

81 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He 
Is Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
They therefore give full and clear treat- 
ment of the principles, facts, and proc- 
esses of electrical practice. They 
excel all ordinary textbooks in concise- 
ness of statement and clearness of 
explanation. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia, because they treat of 
each subject fully and in detail. They 
are indexed so completely that any par- 
ticular reference can be easily found. 

c. They contain information so 
practical that some students, after 
learning enough of the elementary 
mathematics to be able to apply the 
rules, have without further recitation 
been able to secure good positions and 
obtain large salaries in their trades and 
professions. 



82 



Interior Wiring Course 

Seven subjects are taught in the 
Interior AViring Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain seventeen, as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS P 

Arithmetic 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas .... 

Principles of Mechanics. . 

Machine Elements 

Mechanics of Fluids 

Strength of Materials 

Elements of Electricity and 

Magnetism 

Heat and Steam 

Examination Questions . . . 
Keys 

Dynamos and Motors 

Operation of Dynamos 
and Motors 

Dynamo-Electric Machin- 
ery 

Geometrical Drawing 

Mechanical Drawing 

Steam Heating 

Steam Turbines 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 



1021 

41 
47 
61 
53 
37 



27 
41 
97 

901 

74 

72 
77 
50 
51 
23 
19 
23 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



16 Electric Railways 

17 Interior Wiring 

Examination Questions. 
Kevs 



ion 

L92 I 3 
28 ( 
47 J 



401 

192 I 3d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1,719 

Illustrations, 940 
Drawing Plates, 16 
Bound Volumes, 3 

The Interior Wiring Course teaches 
how to wire btiildings for electric lamps, 
motors, and general electric appliances 
in conformity with the Fire Under- 
writers' requirements; and how to 
install electric bells, annunciators, and 
gas lighters. 

83 



Subjects Taught in the Course 

Nos. 1, 2, 7, 9, 12, 13, and 17. There 
are 13 instruction Papers and 16 Draw- 
ing Plates. Subjects 12 and 13 may- 
be omitted. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject that 
is necessary in an interior wiring course. 

b. They embrace instruction in all 
the elementary subjects necessary to be 
understood before beginning the study 
of interior wiring. 

c. They contain examples relating 
directly to the practical work of interior 
wiring. 

d. They give the student valuable 
information and directions that will 
help him in his daily work as soon as 
he begins to study. 

e. They do not require the student 
to spend time studying the derivation 
of formulas. 

/. They are of necessity clearer than 
ordinary electrical textbooks, because 
the I. C. S. student must study out of 
the presence of a teacher. 

g. They are illustrated more freely 
than ordinary electrical textbooks. 
Wherever an illustration will make the 
text more clear, it is put in. 

h. They contain numerous worked- 
out examples showing how to apply the 
rules and foraiulas. 

Persons That Should Enroll. 

a. Persons doing interior wiring, 
such as Wiring Contractors, Wire men. 
Apprentices, Helpers, etc. 

84 



b. Persons wanting to become Fire 
Underwriters' Inspectors, Wiring Con- 
tractors, or Wiremen. 

Any man of average intelligence with 
an inclination for mechanical work can 
become an expert wireman by studying 
our Instruction Papers and practicing 
in regular work the methods that we 
teach. Of course, practical experience 
must be had in the service of some 
employer engaged in the wiring busi- 
ness ; we make no claim that our stu- 
dent can avoid that. We do claim, 
however, to give him the best possible 
directions for serving his employer 
well, and for quickly acquiring a mas- 
tery of the interior wireman 's trade. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Interior wiring is a trade in which 
skilled workmen are in great demand, 
for the use of electric lights and motors 

I is rapidly increasing. Many new electric 
plants are constantly being added to the 

: large number already in operation, and 
every year there are thousands of build- 
ings to be wired for lamps, motors, etc. 

b. Interior wiring is one of the most 
important electrical trades, and no one 
should be permitted to have charge of 
wiring installations unless he can pass 
a rigid examination in relation to the 
safety and the permanence of his work. 
There is no doubt that the State legis- 
lative bodies will soon require wiremen 
to undergo such examinations. 

c. In order to be skilled, it is abso- 
lutely necessary for a wireman to have 
the theoretical training contained in our 
Course. Without it he cannot be quali- 
fied to make his work safe, substantial, 



and in accordance with the Fire Under- 
writers' rules. 

d. Our Instruction Papers give ex- 
plicit directions for placing wires so that 
no fire is likely to be caused by them. 

e. Well-trained wiremen are well 
paid. Interior wiring is a trade that 
may be taken up by young men looking 
for something profitable to do. A 
person not in the interior-wiring busi- 
ness, but wishing to become an expert 
wireman, should study our Instruction 
Papers and get employment as a wire- 
man's apprentice. He will soon learn 
the principles of electricity that a 
skilled wireman must know, and the 
practical work — which is not hard for 
any man of a mechanical turn of mind — 
will be doubly easy for him. This is 
one of the best openings of the day for 
young men seeking a profitable employ- 
ment. 

/. Many serious fires have occurred 
and people have been shocked to death 
because of the faulty wiring of buildings 
— -which has caused the insurance com- 
panies, with the authority of the State 
Governments, to take a firm stand in 
regard to what sort of interior wiring 
may be done. Faulty wiring is often 
installed by men that have had years 
. of experience and mean to do right ; but 
good intentions will not make up for 
lack of training. Such wiremen cause 
their emplo3^ers heavy losses; for the 
work must be done over until passed by 
the Fire Underwriters' Inspectors. 

g. Through the employment of elec- 
trical energy for operating lamps, 
motors, heaters, cooking utensils, and 
other appliances, the business of interior 



wiring has become one of the most im- 
portant branches of the electrical in- 
dustry. Engineers have devoted much 
thought and labor to the development 
of wiring systems that assure freedom 
from iire and personal shock, and the 
authorities have been quick to recognize 
the improvements and insist upon the 
general installation of these systems. 

Remarks 

The business of interior wiring is dis- 
tinct from electrical power-house mat- 
ters; but it is not so remote therefrom 
as might be thought. While interior 
wiring is a business that can be success- 
fully followed by persons without a 
knowledge of electric lighting and rail- 
ways, the better class of work is usually 
done by wiremen having that knowl- 
edge. Naturally these are the men that 
are never out of employment, and that 
get the best salaries. Wiremen can not 
only do better work if able to consider 
the technical features of an entire light- 
ing or railway system, but they are bet- 
ter prepared to take positions as general 
electricians. Our Electric Lighting 
AND Railways Course may therefore 
be preferred by those interested in the 
subject of interior wiring. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stti- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 9 months. The average stu- 
dent requires a little more time. 

87 



Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Interior Wiring 
Course should have our Complete 
Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. If, however, the 
student does not wish to study drawing, 
no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is suit- 
able for use in the drafting room. It 
is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
They therefore give full and clear treat- 
ment of the principles, facts, and proc- 
esses of electrical practice. They 
excel all ordinary textbooks in concise- 
ness of statement and clearness of 
explanation. 

h. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia, because they treat of 
each subject fully and in detail. They 
are indexed so completely that any 
particular reference can be easily found. 

c. They contain information so prac- 
tical that some students, after learning 
enough of the elementary mathematics 
to be able to apply the rules, have with- 
out further recitation been able to 
secure good positions and obtain large 
salaries in their trades and professions. 

88 



Electric Car Running Course 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 77 

2 Electricity and Magnetism 94 

3 Direct-Current Dynamos . 54 

4 Electric Motors 48 

5 Source and Distribution 

of Power 45 

6 Current-Collectors 40 

Examination Questions . . 23 

Keys 39 

7 Trunk Connections 77 

8 Resistance Coils and 

Cables 38 

9 Railway Motors 51 

LO Simple Control Circuits . . 30 

LI Series-Parallel Control ... 35 

L2 Metallic-Return Svstems . 42 

L3 Car-Wiring Diagrams .... 37 
L4 Electric Car Heating and 

Lighting 56 

L5 Hand-Brakes 47 

Examination Questions . . 20 

L6 Straight Air Brakes 711 

L7 Automatic Air Brakes 65 

L8 Electric Brakes and Sig- 
nals 41 

19 Mechanical Instructions . 46 

JO Operating Instructions . . 41 

Jl Trial Equipment 66 

12 Armature Repair Work . . 127 
23 Maintenance of Equip- 
ment , 52 

J4 Electrical Measurements 

and Tests 69 

Examination Questions . . 23, 

Pages 1 ,454 

Illustrations, 837 
Instruction Papers, 31 
Bound Volumes, 3 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace all the details 
regarding car equipment. 

h. They explain the principles and 
the purposes of motors, brakes, con- 
trollers, circuit-breakers, fuses, and 



3d Bound 
Volume 



other machines and appHances used on 
electric cars. 

c. They give concise and clear direc- 
tions for operating the machinery and 
appliances with the highest possible 
efficiency under all conditions arising 
in electric-railway practice. 

d. They contain valuable instruc- 
tion for the car-barn employe regarding 
the inspecting, testing, and repairing 
of motors, controllers, circuit-breakers, 
and other apparatus used on electric 
cars, and give general directions for the 
maintenance of equipment and for the 
arrangement of the car-bam shops. 

e. They embrace full information in 
regard to the repairing of railway- 
motor armatures. 

/. They contain all the illustrations 
and diagrams necessary in order for 
the student quickly to comprehend 
electric-car running. 

g. They are of necessity more concise 
and. clear than ordinary textbooks; for 
our students must study out of the 
presence of a teacher. 

h. They give the student much 
valuable information and directions that 
will help him in his daily work, as soon 
as he begins to study. 

i. They are written in a simple style, 
insuring ease of comprehension. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Motormen. 
h. Conductors. 

c. Persons wanting to become motor- 
men or conductors. 

d. Car- Barn Men. 

Note — All persons employed about an electric- 
car barn can make themselves worth much more 

90 



to their employers by acquiring a knowledge 
of how to keep the cars in repair. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The cost of operating an electric- 
railway system depends almost as much 
on the technical training of the men 
that run the cars as on the design of the 
machinery of the plant. In running a 
car at a certain speed over a certain 
length of track, many men consume 50 
per cent, more power than other men 
use. A car-runner's value is propor- 
tional to his technical knowledge. 

b. There is only one practicable way 
for electric-car operators to raise their 
wages: they must acquire technical 
training, and that is easiest obtained 
through correspondence instruction. 
The electric railway owner's profits are 
largely dependent on the technical 
ability of his men, and he is usually glad 
to add to their wages a fair portion of 
what their superior training enables 
them to save for him. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1^ 
years. The average student requires a 
little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

The Bound Volumes embrace all the 
^Instruction Papers, Examination Ques- 

91 



tions, and Keys of the Course. The Vol- 
umes treat of all the best methods of elec- 
tric-car operating, and the principles and 
facts are explained so clearly that the 
student can easily understand them. 
These volumes are indexed much more 
fully than other textbooks; every item 
that the reader would be likely to look 
up is indexed one or more times, accord- 
ing to the initial letter under which the 
item may be sought. Thus the student 
possesses a complete, concise, and up- 
to-date work on scientific electric-car 
running — which is sure to benefit him, 
even if he does no more than read it 
thoroughly without reciting to us. 



92 



Telephone Engineering 
Course 



1 


Arithmetic 


120 ^ 
30 




2 


Mensuration 




3 


Elements of Algebra .... 


76 




4 


Algebraic Equations and 






5 


Elements of Trigonom- 
etry 

Principles of Mechanics . . 


38 

47 


1st Bound 

Volume 


6 


Machine Elements 


61 






Examination Questions . . 


31 






Keys 


83 






Tables 


28 J 




7 


Electricity and Magnetism 


35] 




8 


Electrodynamics 


55 




9 


Electrical Resistance and 








Capacity 


59 




10 


The Magnetic Circuit 


72 




11 


Electromagnetic Induc- 




2d Bound 


12 


tion 

Chemistry and Electro- 


58 


Volume 




chemistry 


55 




13 


Primary Batteries 


78 




14 


Electrical Measurements . 


216 






Examination Questions . . 


33 






Keys 


33 




15 


Principles of Telephony. . 


45 




16 


Properties of Telephone 








Circuits 


41 




17 


Telephone Receivers .... 


38 




18 


Telephone Transmitters . 


37 




19 


Telephone Apparatus .... 


43 




20 


Magneto-Generators and 








Bells 


52 




21 


Circuits of Telephone In- 








struments 


40 




22 


Telephone Instruments . . 


49 


^ 3d Bound 


23 


Installation of Telephones 


37 


Volume 


24 


Line Disturbances and 








Transpositions 


44 




25 


Long-Distance Telephony 


49 




26 


Magneto-Switchboards . . 


84 




27 


Large Magneto-Switch- 








boards 


43 




28 


T e 1 e p h o n e-S witchboard 








Apparatus 


40 






Examination Questions . . 


26 






Keys 


37, 





93 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

29 Principles of Central-En- 

ergy Systems 35 

30 Central- Energy Systems. . 53 

31 Central-Energy Main and 

Branch Exchanges 49 

32 Common-Battery Signal- 

ing Systems 31 

33 Bell Central-Energy Sys- 

tem 68 

34 Bell Trunk Circuits 33 

35 Bell Toll and Testing Cir- 

cuits 43 

36 Kellogg Central -Energy 

System 53 

37 Party-Line Systems 88 

38 Exchange Wiring and Ex- 

tension Telephones .... 50 

39 Simultaneous Telephony 

and Telegraphy 75 

40 Storage Batteries 73 

Examination Questions . . 23 

Keys 35 

41 Automatic Telephone Sys- 

tems 110 

42 House Telephones 66 

43 Testing of Telephone Cir- 

cuits 116 

44 Telephone-Line Construc- 

tion 198 

45 Telephone Cables 59 

46 Power Equipment 127 

Examination Questions . . 23 

Keys 27 J 



Pages 

Illustrations, 1,134 
Instruction Papers, 62 
Bound Volumes, 5 



.3,148 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject prop- 
erly included in a telephone engineering 
course. 

h. They embrace instr,uction in all 
the elementary subjects necessary to be 
understood before the study of tele- 
phone engineering is begun. 

94 



c. They contain examples relating 
directly to the practical work of tele- 
phone engineering. 

d. They give the student valuable 
information and directions that immedi- 
ately help him in his daily work. 

e. They do not require the student 
to spend time studying the derivation 
of formulas. Instead, they teach rules 
and how to apply them in practical 
work. 

/. They are of necessity more concise 
and clear than ordinary textbooks, 
because our student must study out 
of the presence of a teacher. 

g. They are illustrated more freely 
than ordinary electrical textbooks. 
Wherever an illustration will make a 
statement more clear, it is put in. 

k. They contain numerous worked- 
out examples, showing how to apply all 
the rules. 

i. They treat each subject so thor- 
oughly that any person understanding 
them has no difficulty in understanding 
the little changes that are often made 
in systems. Yet the Instruction Papers 
are not encumbered with a description 
of every device that has ever been 
tried. 

Note — So many experiments are going on in 
the telephone industry, it is inadvisable to 
attempt to include in a Course all the variations 
of present-day systems. Such a procedure would 
make the Course exceedingly long — so long that 
by the time a student had finished it, much of 
the apparatus he had learned about would have 
fallen into disuse. Our Telephone Engineering 
Course explains the facts, principles, and proc- 
esses underlying the operation of all telephone 
systems, and explains them so thoroughly that 
the student finishing the Course will have all 
the knowledge required to analyze any system 
and understand its operation. 

95 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Telephone Linemen. 

b. Telephone Wiremen. 

c. Foremen of Telephone Construc- 
tion Work. 

d. Telephone Monitors (usually girls 
that have served as operators). 

e. Chief Operators. 
/. Inspectors. 

g. Cable Splicers. 

h. Wire Chiefs. 

i. Switchmen in automatic ex- 
changes. 

y. Troublemen. 

k. Managers. 

/. Superintendents. 

m. Employes of telephone manu- 
facturing companies. 

n. Municipal Electricians; Signal 
Corps Men; and Naval Electricians. 

o. Telegraph Operators and Con- 
struction Men along railroads now using 
the telephone as well as the telegraph, 

p. School Graduates desiring to 
engage in any branch of the telephone 
business. 

q. Young Men, either employed or 
unemployed, wanting to secure em- 
ployment with a telephone manufac- 
turing company or a telephone exchange 
company. As they study the Course, 
they will be better qualified to secure 
employment. They will be getting a 
valuable knowledge of telephone tech- 
nicalities, which knowledge will enable 
them not only to obtain a position, but 
to use much better methods and ad- 
vance much more rapidly than un- 
trained workmen 

96 



;-. Electricians and Electrical En- 
gineers wishing a better knowledge of 
telephones and telephone systems. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The rapid increase in telephone 
systems has created a heavy demand 
for trained men to manage them, keep 
them in good working order, and make 
extensions. 

b. Telephone work requires technical 
skill of the highest order, and the man 
possessing that skill can command a 
high salary. 

c. The owners of telephone systems 
realize that the volume and the profits 
of their business are dependent on the 
technical knowledge of their employes, 
and trained men are rapidly advanced 
to important and well-paying positions. 

d. The telephone industry is expe- 
riencing a wonderful growth. Instru- 
ments are being installed in thousands 
of homes and offices whose owners have 
not till lately appreciated the necessity 
of the service. Moreover, the com- 
panies no longer confine their operations 
to the city. First-class service at fair 
rates is being offered throughout the 
farming districts, and the rural circuits 
are becoming an important part of 

'every company's system. Naturally, 
the greater the increase in subscribers, 
the more valuable an instrument is to 
each; and, in view of the great utility of 
the service and the fact that that utility 
is just beginning to be recognized by 
hundreds of thousands heretofore indif- 
ferent to the advantages of the tele- 
phone, the immediate prospects for the 
industry are amazing. 

4 97 



e. There has always been a scarcity 
of telephone experts — persons knowing 
how to design, construct, install, and 
repair instruments and exchange appa- 
ratus — and the present increase in sub- 
scribers is resulting in a still greater 
demand for skilled men. 

Note— Occasionally a prospective student 
prefers to wait till he has secured a position with 
a telephone company before enrolling for our 
Telephone Engineering Course. This is a 
mistake. By mastering our Course or even a 
portion of it, before applying for employment, 
students often begin above the hard-work-at-low- 
pay positions that the novice is obliged to accept 
at first. 

Why the Telephone Engineering Course 

Will Be of Value to Persons Not Yet 

Engaged in Telephone Work 

iVs they study the Course, they will 
be better qualified to secure employ- 
ment. They will be getting a valuable 
knowledge of telephone technicalities, 
which knowledge will enable them to 
obtain employment, practice much 
better methods, and advance much 
more rapidly than untrained workmen. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in less than 
2 years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Experimental Apparatus Required 

The student of our Telephone Engi- 
neering Course should have our Com- 
plete Electrical Outfit, or its equivalent, 

98 



as soon as he is ready to study "Prin- 
ciples of Electricity and Magnetism." 
The I. C. S. Complete Electrical Outfit 
consists of the following : Galvanometer, 
for measuring small electric currents; 
Slide- Wire Bridge, for measuring elec- 
trical resistance; Bar Magnet; Horse- 
shoe Magnet; Two Resistance Coils; 
Leclanche Cell; Compass; Box of Iron 
Filings; Insulated Wire. The Outfit is 
valued at $20; we furnish it for $8.50. 
The student pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. All the Instruction Papers, Exam- 
ination Questions, and Keys of the 
Course are embraced in the Bound 
Volumes. These Papers virtually con- 
sist of a step-by-step series of practical 
directions to be followed by the student, 
not under the guidance of a present 
teacher, but according to his own inter- 
pretation. The Papers having success- 
fully met the exacting requirements of 
thousands of correspondence students, it 
is evident that the Bound Volumes treat 
of the principles and the applications in 
telephone practice with more thorough- 
ness and conciseness than is possible in 
j a work prepared on any other plan. 
I b. They contain worked-out solu- 
1! tions of all the important problems 
! that are known to be solvable in tele- 
i phone practice. 

|: c The Bound Volumes are fully 
indexed. 

L or c 99 



Telegraph Engineering 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

Arithmetic 122 

Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. ... 41 
Elementary Algebra and 
Trigonometric Func- 
tions 71 

Elementary Mechanics. ... 67 

Examination Questions. . . 42 

Keys 133 

Tables 18 

Principles of Electricity 

and Magnetism 142 

Electrical Measurements. . 98 

Batteries 109 

Examination Questions. . . 28 

Keys 47 

Elements of Telegraph 

Operating 60 

Telegraphy (Parts 1, 2, 

and 3).. 467 

Examination Questions. . . 20 

Keys 34 

Telegraphy (Parts 4, 5, 

and_6).: _. 489 

Examination Questions. . . 13 

Keys 32 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Vokime 



4th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,033 

Illustrations, 707 
Instruction Papers, 19 
Bound Volumes, 4 

Electrical Measurements treats of the 
instruments and the methods employed 
in measuring the electrical forces and 
properties of telegraph circuits. 

Elements of Telegraph Operating 
explains the Morse alphabet and gives 
the abbreviations generally used in 
telegraph operating; it describes keys, 
sounders, and gravity cells. It also 
gives information regarding the use of 
the typewriter in receiving. 

100 



A Few of the Important Subjects Treated 
in the Paper Entitled "Telegraphy" 

a. The principles of telegraphy; tele- 
graph systems; instruments; terminal 
switchboards ; intermediate switch- 
boards; and loop switchboards. 

b. The properties of line circuits and 
cable circuits. 

c. Dynamos and storage batteries 
and their use in large telegraph systems. 

d. Telegraph repeaters. 

e. Duplex, quadruplex, multiplex, 
automatic, printing, writing, high speed, 
and submarine systems. 

/. Simultaneous telegraph and tele- 
phone systems. 

g. Wireless telegraphy. 

h. District-messenger systems. 

i. Overhead, underground, and cable 
construction work ; tests for the location 
of grounds, crosses, and open circuits; 
electrostatic capacity and resistance of 
line and cable conductors. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject prop- 
erly included in a telegraph engineering 
course. 

b. They include instruction in all the 
elementary subjects necessary to be 
imderstood before the study of tele- 
graph engineering is begun. 

c. They contain examples relating 
directly to the practical work of tele- 
graph engineering. 

d. They give the student valuable 
information and directions that immedi- 
ately help him in his daily work 

101 



e. They do not require the student to 
spend his time studying the derivation 
of formulas; they teach rules and show 
how to apply them in practical work. 

/. They are of necessity concise and 
clear, because our student must study 
out of the presence of a teacher. 

g. They are illustrated freely. Wher- 
ever an illustration will make a state- 
ment more clear, it is put in. 

h. They contain worked-out exam- 
ples showing how to apply all the rules. 

i. They treat each subject so thor- 
oughly that any person understanding 
them has no difficulty in tmderstanding 
the little changes that are often made 
in systems. Yet the Instruction Papers 
are not encumbered with a description 
of every device that has ever been tried. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Telegraph Operators. 
h. Telegraph Linemen. 

c. Telegraph Wiremen. 

d. Foremen of Telegraph Construc- 
tion Work. 

e. Employes of manufacturers of 
telegraph apparatus. 

/. Naval Electricians. 

g. Signal Corps Men. 

h. Municipal Electricians. 

i. Electricians and Electrical Engi- 
neers that desire a better knowledge of 
telegraph systems. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. There is a great demand for skilful 
electricians in the field of telegraphy; 
and operators that have studied to 
become engineering experts are quickly 

102 



promoted to the most important posi- 
tions. The demand for skilled men 
does not come from the big telegraph 
companies alone, but from private- wire 
owners as well. 

b. There are almost unlimited oppor- 
tunities for the right sort of men in the 
higher branches of the telegraph busi- 
ness, and our Course enables operators 
to rise quickly to them, 

c. Our Telegraph Engineering 
Course is in every sense a practical 
Covirse. It treats of all the best sys- 
tems, appliances, and methods; and the 
student is constantly learning things 
that are immediately helpful to him. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
less than li^ years. The average stu- 
dent requires a little more time. 

Experimental Apparatus Required 

The student of our Telegraph 
Engineering Course should have our 
Complete Electrical Outfit, or its equiva- 
lent, as soon as he is ready to study 
"Principles of Electricity and Magne- 
tism." The I. C. S. Complete Electrical 
Outfit consists of the following: Gal- 
vanometer, for measuring small elec- 
tric currents; Slide-Wire Bridge, for 
measuring electrical resistance; Bar 
Magnet ; Horseshoe Magnet ; Two Resist- 
ance Coils ; Leclanche Cell ; Compass ; 
Box of Iron Filings; Insulated Wire. 

103 



The Outfit is valued at $20; we furnish 
it to our student for $8.50. The 
student pays express charges. 

Remarks 

We do not make telegraph operators ; 
we help them: 

It is not the object of this Course to 
teach sending and receiving. 

We do not furnish telegraph instru- 
ments. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Ref- 
erence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He 
Is Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. All the Instruction Papers, Exam- 
ination Questions, and Keys of the 
Course are embraced in the Botmd 
Volumes. These Papers virtually con- 
sist of a step-by-step series of practi- 
cal directions to be followed by the 
student, not under the guidance of a 
present teacher, but according to his 
own understanding. The Papers hav- 
ing successfully met the exacting 
requirements of thousands of corre- 
spondence students, it is evident that 
the Boimd Volumes treat of the prin- 
ciples and the applications in telegraph 
engineering with more thoroughness 
and conciseness than is possible in a 
work prepared on any other plan. 

b. The Boimd Volumes contain 
worked-out solutions of all the impor- 
tant problems that are known to be 
solvable in telegraph engineering. 

c. The Bound Volumes are fully 
indexed. Every important item is 

104 



indexed according to all initial letters 
under which it is likely to be sought. 

d. The possessor of the I. C. S. 
Telegraph Engineering Bound Volumes 
has a complete, concise, and up-to-date 
treatise on scientific telegraph design, 
construction installation, and man- 
asfement. 



105 



Complete Steam Engineering 
Course 

Thirty-six subjects are taught in 
the Complete Steam Engineering 
Course. The Bound Volumes of the 
Reference Library contain thirty-seven, 
as follows: 





LIST OF SUBJECTS 


PAGES 


1 


Arithmetic 


102] 




2 


Mensuration and Use of 








Letters in Formulas 


41 




3 


Principles of Mechanics. . . 


47 




4 


Machine Elements 


61 




5 


Mechanics of Fluids 


53 


^ 1st Bound 


6 


Strength of Materials 


37 


Volume 


7 


Elements of Electricity 








and Magnetism 


66 




8 


Heat and Steam 


27 






Examination Questions. . . 


41 






Keys 


97. 




9 


Dynamos and Motors 


90 




10 


Operation of Dynamos 








and Motors 


74 




11 


Dynamo-Electric Machin- 




12 


ery 

Geometrical Drawing 


72 

77 


. 2d Bound 
Volume 


13 


Mechanical Drawing 


50 


14 


Steam Heating 


51 




15 


Steam Turbines 


23 
19 






Examination Questions . . . 






Keys 


23 




16 


Types of Steam Boilers. . . 


361 




17 


Boiler Details 


23 

48 




18 


Boiler Fittings 




19 


Combustion, Firing, and 








Draft... 


25 




20 


Boiler Design 


58 




21 


Economic Combustion of 








Coal .■ 


25 




22 


Automatic Furnaces and 




, 3d Bound 




Mechanical Stokers 


19 


Volume 


23 


Boiler Installation 


42 




24 


Boiler Management 


44 




25 


Boiler Trials 


44 




26 


Boiler Feeding and Feed- 






water Problems 


56 




27 


Elevators 


231 






Examination Questions . . . 


38 






Keys ;. ... 


51, 





106 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

28 The Steam Engine 461 

29 The Indicator 37 

30 Engine Testing 50 

31 Governors 45 

32 Valve Gears 77 

33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 

34 Compound Engines 40 f Volume 

35 Engine Management 88 

36 Engine Installation 45 

37 Pumps 185 

Examination Questions. . . 38 

Keys 61 

Pages 2.531 

Illustrations, 1,057 
Drawing Plates, 17 
Bound Volumes. 4 
Note — No recitation is asked for in subject 11. 

Remarks 

A student of steam engineering should 
study electrical subjects 7, 9, and 10 
because there are comparatively few 
steam plants in which the engineer is 
not required to run electric machinery 
of some kind. In fact the steam engi- 
neer of today is deficient in training 
unless he is thoroughly familiar with 
both the theory and the working of dyn- 
amos and electric motors. The elec- 
trical papers in our Complete Steam 
Engineering Course — entitled "Ele- 
ments of Electricity and Magnetism," 
"Dynamos and Motors," and "Opera- 
tion of Dynamos and Motors" — 
embrace all the general electrical in- 
struction that the up-to-date steam 
engineer must have. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject that 
is necessary in a steam engineering 
course. 

107 



b. They include instruction in all 
the elementary subjects necessary to be 
understood before the study of steam 
engineering is begun. 

c. They contain examples relating 
directly to the practical work of steam 
engineering. 

d. They give the student valuable 
information and directions that will 
help him in his daily work, as soon as 
he begins to study. 

e. They do not require the student 
to spend time studying the derivation 
of formulas; they give rules and teach 
how to apply them in practical work. 

/. They are of necessity made clearer 
than ordinary textbooks, because our 
student must study out of the presence 
of a teacher. 

g. They contain many more illustra- 
tions than do ordinary textbooks. 

h. They contain worked-out exam- 
ples showing how to apply all the rules. 

i. They are prepared so as to help 
the student qualify for license examina- 
tion; but they are in no sense a set of 
cut-and-dried questions and answers 
restricted to examination requirements. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Stationary Engineers. 

b. Stationary Firemen. 

c. Employes of machine shops where 
steam engines and boilers are built. 

d. Men emiployed about electrical 
power houses. 

e. Young Men wanting to become 
steam engineers. 

/. Inventors and Experimenters. 
g. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen whose work requires them to 

108 



form intelligent opinions about power- 
plant operation. 

h. Oilers, Wipers, Water Tenders, 
etc. wishing to rise to more responsible 
positions. 

i. Draftsmen and Designers desiring 
a knowledge of steam and steam appa- 
ratus. 

j. Patent-Office Draftsmen. 

k. Men that sell steam engines, 
boilers, pumps, packing, and general 
steam appliances and fittings; and men 
that wish to qualify for becoming such 
salesmen. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The steam-plant employe's oppor- 
tunity for advancement lies in his 
ability to make his employer's plant 
give high service at low expense. Mil- 
lions of dollars are expended yearly 
in the production of steam, and owners 
of steam plants — realizing that a con- 
siderable portion of the cost is owing 
to wasteful methods — are quick to 
increase the responsibility and the pay 
of the employe showing ability to keep 
expenses as low as they should be. 

h. The profits in steam-plant opera- 
tion are largely dependent on the fire- 
man's ability to get the greatest degree 
of heat from a given quantity of coal, 
and to provide for a free transfer of 
the heat to the water in the boiler. 
The value of the boiler-room employe 
whose methods are economical does not 
long go unrecognized. Our Course 
gives instruction in the principles of 
combustion and teaches how to practice 
the highest economy in fuel consump- 
tion. 

109 



c. Steam engineers, too, must thor- 
oughly understand economical boiler 
firing; otherwise they are unable to 
direct their subordinates intelligently. 
Engineers, as well as firemen, must 
understand how to operate and care for 
boilers ; how to remove scale and prevent 
incrustation; how properly to use 
pumps, injectors, feedwater heaters, 
and kindred appliances; and how to 
set and care for safety valves. Our 
Course teaches these things. 

d. As a safeguard to the public, 
stationary engineers are in many states 
required to obtain licenses before they 
are permitted to take charge of plants. 
In New York, and other large cities, an 
engineer is required to have a special 
license for each plant he operates; and 
he cannot take charge of a plant of a 
higher grade without being examined 
for a new license. The National Asso- 
ciation of Stationary Engineers and the 
American Order of Steam Engineers are 
endeavoring to secure the passage of 
license laws in states that do not now 
require the examining and licensing of 
engineers. The license system will soon 
be so general that the poorly trained 
man will be unable to get a position as 
a steam engineer. Our Course helps 
men qualify for license examinations. 

The Value of the Course to a Person Not 
Yet Engaged in Steam Engineering 

As he studies the Course, he will be 
getting knowledge that will enable him 
to advance to the engine room much 
more quickly than a fireman that has 
not studied the theory of steam engi- 
neering. 

110 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, 
finish the Course in about 2 years. The 
average student requires a little more 
time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Complete Steam 
Engineering Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The stu- 
dent pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the 
Course. These Papers having success- 
fully met the exacting requirements of 
thousands of students, it is evident 
that the Bound Volumes treat of prin- 
ciples and applications of steam engi- 
neering with more thoroughness and 
conciseness than is possible in a work 
prepared on any other plan. They are 
in fact an epitome of common-sense 
application. For easy gradation; for 
conciseness; for intelligent adherence 
to the important features of their sub- 
jects; and for practicability, they are 

111 



unequaled. From no other source can 
a student get so quickly so much money- 
earning knowledge. 

h. They are invaluable for refer- 
ence purposes. They are better than 
an encyclopedia. The volumes are 
devoted to the subject of steam engi- 
neering, and the details of that subject 
are explained with great care and a 
proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all 
the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so thor- 
oughly are all items classified and 
indexed, the student can find in a 
moment the information relating to 
any particular point or problem in 
which he is interested. 



112 



Advanced Engine Running 
Course 

Twenty-seven subjects are taught in 
the Advanced Engine Running 
Course. The Bound Vokimes of the 
Reference Library contain thirty-seven, 
as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

Arithmetic 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas .... 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 

Machine Elements 

Mechanics of Fluids 

Strength of Materials. . . . 

Elements of Electricity and 
Magnetism 

Heat and Steam 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Dynamos and Motors 

Operation of Dynamos and 
Motors 

Dynamo-Electric Machin- 
ery 

Geometrical Drawing 

Mechanical Drawing 

Steam Heating 

Steam Turbines 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Types of Steam Boilers 

Boiler Details 

Boiler Fittings 

Combustion, Firing, and 
Draft 

Boiler Design 

Economic Combustion of 
Coal 

Automatic Furnaces and 
Mechanical Stokers 

Boiler Installation 

Boiler Management 

Boiler Trials 

Boiler Feeding and Feed- 
water Problems 

Elevators. 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 



PAGES 
102 

41 
47 
61 
53 
37 

66 
27 
41 
97 
901 

74 

72 

77 

50 

51 

23 

19 

23 

361 

23 

48 

25 
58 

25 

19 
42 
44 
44 

56 

231 

38 

51 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



I. 3d Bound 
Volume 



113 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE; 

28 The Steam Engine 46 

29 The Indicator 37 

30 Engine Testing 50 

31 Governors 45 

32 Valve Gears 77 

33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 

34 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 

35 Engine Management 88 

36 Engine Installation 45 

37 Pumps 165 

Examination Questions ... 38 

Keys 61 

Pages 2,531 

Illustrations. 1,057 

Instruction Papers, 32 

Drawing Plates, 17 

Bound Volumes, 4 
Note — Subjects 12 and 13 may be omitted. 
•No recitations are asked for in the subjects in 
light-face type. 

The four Bound Volumes containing the 
entire Complete Steam Engineering Course 
are furnished to each person enrolling for the 
Advanced Engine Running Course. 

Heat and Steam states the modem 
theory of heat, explains the measuring 
of temperature, describes the effects of 
the apphcation of heat to Hquids, and 
treats of the general properties of 
steam. 

Boiler Details treats of the methods 
of connecting boiler plates and the 
kinds of riveted joints. Stresses on 
boiler shells are explained, and rules 
for calculating safe working pressures 
are given. 

Boiler Fittings is the title of a full 
treatise on safety valves, steam gauges, 
gauge-cocks, water gauges, water col- 
umns, and boiler fittings in general. 
The construction of low-water alarms 
and their method of operation is 
explained. Domes, steam drums, man- 
holes, and handholes are fully de- 
scribed. This paper also includes much 

114 



i 



valuable instruction relative to feed- 
piping, whistles, furnace fittings, and 
damper regulators. 

Boiler Feeding and Feedwater Prob- 
lems treats of apparatus and processes 
that pertain to the title. The princi- 
pal types of injectors are finely illus- 
trated and explained, and thorough 
instruction is given in their manage- 
ment. The effects of the various 
impurities in feedwater, tests for im- 
purities, and means of neutralizing 
impurities are thoroughly explained. 

The Indicator is devoted to the 
details of indicators and the reducing 
motions used in their operation. Full 
directions are given for taking dia- 
grams. This Paper describes fully and 
plainly the meaning of the lines of an 
indicator diagram, and explains how 
the position and shape of the lines 
reveal various faults of valve setting. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Stationary Engineers. 

b. Stationary Firemen. 

c. Employes of machine shops where 
steam engines and boilers are built. 

d. Men employed about electrical 
power houses. 

e. Young Men wanting to become 
steam engineers. 

/. Inventors and Experimenters. 

g. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen whose work requires them to 
form intelligent opinions about power- 
plant operation. 

h. Oilers, Wipers, Water Tenders, 
etc. wishing to rise to more responsible 
positions. 

115 



i. Draftsmen and Designers desiring 
a knowledge of steam and steam 
apparatus. 

j. Patent-Office Draftsmen. 

k. Men that sell steam engines, 
boilers, pumps, packing, and general 
steam appliances and fittings; and men 
that wish to qualify for becoming such 
salesmen. 

Note — The Advanced Engine Running 
Course is a part of the Complete Steam Engi- 
neering Course. If the prospective student 
wants a more thorough knowledge of steam 
engineering, he should enroll for the Complete 
Steam Engineering Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The men in charge of a steam 
plant must understand how to operate 
and care for boilers; how to remove 
scale and prevent incrustation; how to 
properly use pumps, injectors, feed- 
water heaters, and kindred appliances; 
and how to set and care for safety 
valves. Our Course teaches these 
things. 

h. As a safeguard to the public, 
stationary engineers are, in many 
states, required to obtain licenses before 
they are permitted to take charge of 
plants. In New York and other large 
cities, an engineer is required to have a 
special license for each plant that he 
operates; and he cannot take charge of 
a plant of a higher grade without being 
examined for a new license. The 
National Association of Stationary 
Engineers and the American Order of 
Steam Engineers are endeavoring to 
secure the passage of license laws in 
states that do not now require the 
examining and licensing of engineers. 

116 



The license system will soon be so gen- 
eral that the poorly trained man will be 
unable to get a position as a steam 
engineer. Our Course helps men qualify 
for license examinations. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogther on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about Ih 
years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Advanced Engine 
Running Course should have our Com- 
plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready 
to study Geometrical Drawing. If, 
however, the student does not wish to 
study drawing, no outfit is needed. 
Our Outfit is suitable for use in the 
drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we 
furnish it to our student for $7.95. 
The student pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the 
Course. These Papers having success- 
fully met the exacting requirements of 
thousands of students, it is evident that 
the Bound Volumes treat of principles 

117 



and applications of steam engineering 
with more thoroughness and conciseness 
than is possible in a work prepared on 
any other plan. They are in fact an 
epitome of common-sense application. 
For easy gradation; for conciseness; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are unequaled. From no 
other source can a student get so quickly 
so much money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. The volumes are devoted 
to the subject of steam engineering, 
and the details of that subject are 
explained with great care and a proper 
regard for the possible shortcomings 
of the reader. Every important item 
is indexed according to all the initial 
letters under which it is likely to be 
sought. Indeed, so thoroughly are all 
items classified and indexed, the student 
can find in a moment the information 
relating to any particular point or 
problem he is interested in. 

c. They are written in simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary princi- 
ples and lead easily and quickly to the 
best theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. The tried and 
proved facts, formulas, and processes 
used in the best steam-engineering 
practice in the country are here col- 
lected and assembled into an orderly 
and systematic whole. 

118 



Engine Running Course 

Twenty-one subjects are taught in the 
Engine Running Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain thirty-seven, as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 




Arithmetic 


1021 




Mensuration and Use of 






Letters in Formulas .... 


41 




Principles of Mechanics. . . 


47 




Machine Elements 


61 




Mechanics of Fluids 


53 


1st Bound 


Strength of Materials 


37 


Volume 


Elements of Electricity and 






Magnetism 


66 




Heat and Steam 


27 
41 




Examination Questions. . . 




Keys 


97. 




Dynamos and Motors 


90] 




Operation of Dynamos and 






Motors 


74 




Dynamo-Electric Machin- 






ery 


72 
77 




Geometrical Drawing 


2d Bound 
Volume 


Mechanical Drawing 


50 


Steam Heating 


51 




Steam Turbines 


23 




Examination Questions. . . 


19 




Keys 


23. 




Types of Steam Boilers.. . . 


36 




Boiler Details 


23 

48 




Boiler Fittings 




Combustion, Firing, and 






Draft 


25 




Boiler Design 


58 




Economic Combustion of 






Coal 


25 




Automatic Furnaces and 




, 3d Bound 


Mechanical Stokers 


19 


Volume 


Boiler Installation 


42 




Boiler Management 


44 




Boiler Trials 


44 




Boiler Feeding and Feed- 




water Problems 


56 




Elevators 


231 




Examination Questions. . . 


38 




Keys 


51. 





119 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PA( 

28 The Steam Engine 46' 

29 The Indicator 37 

30 Engine Testing 50 

31 Governors 45 

32 Valve Gears 77 

33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 

34 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 

35 Engine Management 88 

36 Engine Installation 45 

37 Pumps 165 

Examination Questions. . . 38 

Keys 61^ 

Pages 2,531 

Illustrations, 1,057 

Instruction Papers, 32 

Drawing Plates, 17 

Bound Volumes, 4 
Note — Subjects 7, 9, 10, and 27 may be 
omitted. No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. 

Ihe four Bound Volumes containing the 
entire Complete Steam Engineering Course 
are furnished to each person enrolling for the 
Engine Running Course. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They include all necessary sub- 
jects pertaining to successful engine 
running. 

b. They give instruction in all the 
elementary subjects necessary to be 
understood before the study of engine 
running is begun. 

c. They contain examples relating 
directly to engine running. 

d. They give valuable information 
and directions that will help the student 
in his daily work as soon as he begins 
to study. 

e. They do not treat of the deriva- 
tion of formulas. Instead, they give 
concise rules and show how to apply 
them in practical work. 

120 



/. They are of necessity made 
clearer than ordinary textbooks, for 
our student must study out of the 
presence of a teacher. 

g. They contain many more iUus- 
trations than do ordinary textbooks. 
Wherever illustrations will make a 
statement more clear, we use them. 

h. They contain worked-out exam- 
ples, showing how to apply the rules. 

i. They will help the student qualify 
for license examination. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Stationary Engineers. 

b. Stationary Firemen. 

c. Employes of machine shops where 
steam engines and boilers are built. 

d. Men employed about electrical 
power houses. 

e. Young Men wanting to become 
steam engineers. 

/. Inventors and Experim.enters. 

g. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen whose work requires them to 
form intelligent opinions about poM'^er- 
plant operation. 

h. Oilers, Wipers, Water Tenders, 
etc. wishing to rise to responsible 
positions. 

i. Owners of steam plants too small 
to have an engineer. 

/. Draftsmen and Designers desiring 
a knowledge of steam and steam 
apparatus. 

k. Patent-Office Draftsmen. 

/. Men that sell steam engines, boil- 
ers, pumps, packing, and general steam 
appliances and fittings; and men that 
wish to qualify for becoming such sales- 
men. 

121 



Note — The Engine Running Course is a 
part of the Complete Steam Engineering 
Course. If the prospective student wants a 
more thorough knowledge of steam engineering, 
he should enroll for the Complete Steam Engi- 
neering Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. An engineer's advancement de- 
pends on his merit. The main reason 
for a man's holding a poorly paid posi- 
tion is that he is not worthy of any- 
thing better. He may think that 
because he has run an engine for years 
his length of service should command 
increased pay; but it does not. He 
works for the same sum month in and 
month out with never a thought of 
getting more by making himself worth 
more. Such a man cannot win ad- 
vancement. Indeed, he has no right to 
expect it unless he merits it. In steam 
engineering, as in every other field, the 
man that learns and uses what he learns 
is the man that goes to the top. 

h. Thousands of men throughout the 
country are today desirous of qualifying 
for positions as steam engineers. The 
onl}^ thing preventing their advance- 
ment is a lack of technical knowledge of 
engine running, with which naturally is 
associated the care and operation of 
steam boilers. This technical knowl- 
edge, sufficient to enable an intelligent 
person to operate successfully a small 
steam plant, is given in the Engine 
Running Course. 

c. The engineer or fireman that sup- 
plements his practical experience with 
the knowledge contained in our Course 
is always in a position to take imme- 
diate advantage of any opportunity for 

122 



advancement, while he that is content 
to work along in a rut will never be 
ready to seize the opportunity, and in 
all probability will never fill any better 
position than he already holds. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 
1 year. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He 
Is Unable to Send Us Writ- 
ten Recitations 

a They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the 
Course. These Papers having success- 
fully met the exacting requirements of 
thousands of students, it is evident that 
the Boimd Volumes treat of principles 
and applications of steam engineering 
with more thoroughness and concise- 
ness than is possible in a work prepared 
on any other plan. They are in fact 
an epitome of common-sense applica- 
tion. For easy gradation ; for concise- 
ness; for intelligent adherence to the 
important features of their subjects; 
and for practicability, they are un- 
equaled. From no other source can a 
student get so quickly so much money- 
earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for refer- 
ence purposes. They are better than 

123 



an encyclopedia. The volumes are 
devoted to the subject of steam engi- 
neering, and the details of that subject 
are explained with great care and a 
proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item, is indexed according to all 
the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so thor- 
oughly are all items classified and 
indexed, the student can find in a 
moment the information relating to 
any particular point or problem he is 
interested in. 

c. They are w^ritten in simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The informa- 
tion they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary princi- 
ples and lead easily and quickly to the 
best theory and practice of the work 
of which they treat. The tried and 
proved facts, formulas, and processes 
used in the best steam-engineering prac- 
tice in the country are here collected 
and assembled into an orderly and 
systematic whole. 



124 



Engine and Dynamo Running 
Course 

Twenty-two subjects are taught in the 
Engine and Dynamo Running Course. 
The Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain thirtv-seven, as follows" 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 102 

Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. ... 41 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 

Machine Elements 61 

Mechanics of Fhiids 53 

Strenj?th of Materials 37 

Elements of Electricity and 

Magnetism 66 

Heat and Steam 27 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Keys 97 

Dynamos and Motors 90 

Operation of Dynamos and 
Motors 

Dynamo-Electric Machin- 
ery 

Geometrical Drawing 

Mechanical Drawin? 

Steam Heating 

Steam Turbines 

Examination Questions." . . 

Keys 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Types of Steam Boilers. . . . 

Boiler Details 

Boiler Fittings 

Combustion, Firing, and 
Draft 

Boiler Design 

Economic Combustion of 
Coal _.. 

Automatic Furnaces and I 3d Bound 

Mechanical Stokers 19 | Volume 

Boiler Installation 42 

Boiler Management 44 

Boiler Trials 44 

Boiler Feeding and Feed- 
water Problems 56 

Elevators 231 

Examination Questions. . . 38 

Keys 51 J 

125 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

28 The Steam Engine 46" 

29 The Indicator 37 

30 Engine Testing 50 

31 Governors 45 

32 Valve Gears 77 

33 Condensers 48 I 4th Bound 

34 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 

35 Engine Management 88 

36 Engine Installation 45 

37 Pumps 165 

Examination Questions. . . 38 

Keys 61, 

Pages 2,531 

Illustrations, 1,057 

Instruction Papers, 32 

Drawing Plates, 17 

Bound Volumes, 4 
Note — Subject 27 may be omitted. No reci- 
tations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

The four Bound Volumes containing the 
entire Complete Steam Engineering Course 
are furnished to each person enrolling for the 
Engine and Dynamo Running Course. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They include all necessary sub- 
jects pertaining to successful engine and 
dynamo running. 

b. They give instruction in all the 
elementary subjects necessary to be 
understood before the study of engine 
and dynamo runnirfg is begun. 

c. They contain examples relating 
directly to engine and d5niamo running. 

d. They give valuable information 
and directions that will help the student 
in his daily work as soon as he begins 
to study. 

e. They do not treat of the deriva- 
tion of formulas. Instead, they give 
concise rules and show how to apply 
them in practical work. 

126 



/. They are of necessity made clearer 
than ordinar}'' textbooks, because the 
I. C. S. student must study out of the 
presence of a teacher. 

g. They contain more and better 
illustrations than do ordinary text- 
books. Wherever illustrations will make 
a statement clearer, we put them in. 

h. They contain worked-out exam- 
ples showing how to apply the rules. 

-i. They will help the student qualify 
for license examinations. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Men engaged in operating small 
electric-lighting and power plants, such 
as Managers, Superintendents, Engi- 
neers, Foremen, Repairmen, Dynamo 
Tenders, Firemen, Helpers, Oilers, 
Water Tenders, Wipers, etc. 

b. Engineers and Assistant Engi- 
neers not now associated with electrical 
work, but desirous of securing employ- 
ment as engineers in electrical power 
houses. 

c. Firemen that want to qualify for 
employment and rapid advancement in 
electrical power houses or lighting 
stations. 

d. Men that want to take up the 
operative side of electrical power-house 
and electric lighting-plant work, and 
want to become proficient in the theory 
of it in order to obtain employment and 
merit advancement. 

e. Draftsmen and Designers desiring 
a knowledge of the operation of elec- 
trical machinery and small steam plants. 

/. Men that sell steam-plant and 
electric machinery and appliances, or 
that wish to become such salesmen. 

127 



Note — The Engine and Dynamo Running 
Course is intended for persons that desire a 
knowledge of engine and dynamo running that 
will enable them to take full charge of small 
electric power houses or lighting plants, and to 
install and operate such apparatus as may be 
placed in their charge. The Steam-Electric 
Course is, however, to be recommended to all 
persons wanting a thorough Course in every 
branch of electric power-house operation. 

The student of the Engine and Dynamo 
Running Course may take up first either the 
Engine R.unning section or the Dynamo Running 
section. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. There are almost unlimited oppor- 
tunities for the right sort of men in 
electrical power houses, and the I. C. S. 
Courses are developing the men that 
the owners of electric plants are glad 
to pay well. 

h. The Engine and Dynamo Run- 
ning Course is in every sense a prac- 
tical engineers and electricians' Course. 
It treats of the best modem practice, and 
the student is constantly learning things 
that are immediately helpful to him. 

c. The Engine and Dynamo Run- 
ning Course embraces all the impor- 
tant subjects pertaining to engine and 
dynamo running. Thus the student 
gets a thorough training in each of the 
branches of electric power-house and 
lighting-station operation, 

d. The men in charge of an electric 
plant must understand how to operate 
and care for engines, dynamos, motors, 
boilers, and all other usual equipment. 
Our Course furnishes this information 
in the best possible manner. 

e. Any power-house and electric- 
light plant employe that studies our 
Course thoroughly and is faithful in 

128 



his work will be able to increase his 
earning power. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about IJ 
years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
Their information relating to the oper- 
ation of steam plants and electric 
machinery can be made use of by 
students not possessing a knowledge of 
higher mathematics. Every fact, prin- 
ciple, and process is concisely stated and 
clearly explained. 

h. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia, because they treat each 
subject fully and in detail. They are 
completely indexed, and any reference 
can be easily fotmd. 

c. They contain information so prac- 
tical that many students, after learning 
enough of the elementary mathematics 
to be able to apply the rules, have with- 
out further recitation been able to secure 
prominent positions and obtain large 
salaries in their trades and professions. 

5 129 



Steam-Electric Course 



10 



21 
22 
23 

24 

25 
26 

27 

28 
29 
30 
31 

32 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 102 1 

Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas .... 41 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 

Machine Elements 61 

Mechanics of Fluids 53 

Strength of Materials 37 

Elements of Electricity 

and Magnetism 66 

Heat and Steam. ........ 27 

Examination Questions ... 41 

Keys 97^ 

Dynamos and Motors 90 

Operation of Dynamos 

and Motors 74 

Dynamo-Electric Machin- 
ery 72 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Mechanical Drawing 50 

Steam Heating 51 

Steam Turbines. . . ._ 23 

Examination Questions .. . 19 

Keys 23. 

Alternating Currents 94' 

Electric Transmission. ... 184 

Electric Lighting 325 

Examination Questions. . . 30 

Keys 43. 

Electric Railways 401 

Interior Wiring ...... 192 

Examination Questions. . . 28 

Keys 47 

Types of Steam Boilers. . . 36 

Boiler Details 23 

Boiler Fittings 48 

Combustion, Firing, and 

Draft 25 

Boiler Design 58 

Economic Combustion of 

Coal 25 

Automatic Furnaces and 

Mechanical Stokers 19 

Boiler Installation 42 

Boiler Management 44 

Boiler Trials 44 

Boiler Feeding and Feed- 
water Problems 56 

Elevators 231 

Examination Questions ... 38 

Keys 51 

130 



^ 5th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

33 The Steam Engine 46 ' 

34 The Indicator 37 

35 Engine Testing 50 

36 Governors 45 

37 Valve Gears 77 

38 Condensers 48 I 6th Bound 

39 Compound Engines 40 ( Volume 

40 Engine Management 88 

41 Engine Installation 45 

42 Pumps 165 

Examination Questions. . . 38 

Keys 61. 

Pages 3,875 

Illustrations. 1.893 
Instruction Papers, 65 
Drawing Plates, 16 
Bound Volumes, 6 

What the Steam-Electric Course Is 

The Steam-Electric Course is the 
Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course combined with the Complete 
Steam Engineering Course. 

The Advantages of Combining These 
Courses 

Such a combination enables us to 
offer instruction in combustion, steam 
making, boilers and boiler accessories, 
steam engines and engine appliances, 
dynamos, electric lamps, electric motors, 
etc., all embraced in a single Course. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They include all subjects of 
importance to a man whose work 
reqtiires him to be both a thoroughly 
up-to-date steam engineer and a skilled 
practical electrician. 

h. They give instruction in all the 
elementary subjects necessary to be 

131 



understood before the study of steam 
engineering and electricity is begun. 

c. They contain examples that relate 
directly to steam engineering and the 
operating of electric machinery and 
appliances. 

d. They give information and direc- 
tions that will help the student as soon 
as he begins to study. 

e. They do not treat of the deriva- 
tion of formulas. Instead, they give 
concise rules and show how to apply 
them in practical work. 

/. They are of necessity made clearer 
than ordinary textbooks, because the 
I. C. S. student must study out of the 
presence of a teacher. 

g. They contain more illustrations 
than do ordinary textbooks. Wher- 
ever illustrations will make a statement 
more clear, we put them in. 

h. They contain worked-out exam- 
ples showing how to apply the rules. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Men engaged in operating electric- 
lighting plants and electric-railway 
systems, such as Managers, Superin- 
tendents, Chief Engineers, Foremen, 
Repairmen, Dynamo Tenders, Firemen, 
Helpers, etc. 

h. Engineers not now associated 
with electrical work, but desirous of 
securing employment as engineers in 
electrical power houses. 

c. Firemen that want to qualify for 
employment and rapid advancement in 
electrical power houses. 

d. Men that want to take up elec- 
trical power-house work, and want to 
become proficient in the theory of it in 

132 



order to obtain employment and merit 
advancement. 

c. Inventors and Experimenters. 

/. Draftsmen and Designers desiring 
a knowledge of electrical power-house 
machinery and methods. 

g. isiMen that sell power-house ma- 
chinery and appliances, or that wish to 
become such salesmen. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Great strides have been made in 
electrical power-house methods within 
the last few years. In the up-to-date 
plant the expense account is no longer 
a matter of chance. Statistics are in 
hand for determining about what the 
cost should be for producing a certain 
amount of energy under given condi- 
tions. The men in charge are held 
responsible for getting the greatest 
amount of energy from the fuel; for 
running the machinery with a minimum 
quantity of oil and supplies; and for 
keeping the entire plant in good order 
with the least possible loss from break- 
downs and expenditure for repairs. 

b. Steam engines and appliances and 
electric machinery, no matter how well 
constructed, are extremely sensitive to 
inattention and abuse. Owners of 
power houses have learned from sad 
experience that inefficient men are, in 
the long run, more expensive than poor 
machinery. A skilled man will, in fact, 
often get better results from a poor 
plant than an unskilled man can get 
from a good plant. Besides, the best 
machinery is soon ruined in imtrained 
hands. Knowing all this, is it to be 
wondered at that power-house owners 



are quick to employ men competent to 
bear responsibility? Is it strange that 
good power-house men command high 
salaries ? 

c. Our Steam-Electric Course 
covers every detail of the best practices 
in the fireroom, the engine room, the 
repair room, and so on to the manager's 
office. Besides treating of electric- 
lighting stations, the Course includes 
thorough instruction in the installation, 
operation, and repair of electric-railway 
systems, and in the wiring of buildings 
for electric lamps, motors, etc., in accord 
with the Fire Underwriters' rules. 

d. Power-house men wanting to 
advance to high positions must have a 
knowledge of mechanical stokers, draft 
apparatus, feedwater heaters and piu-i- 
fiers, pumps, boilers, engines, con- 
densers, dynamos, electric motors, and 
switchboards. 

e. The electric switchboard is no 
longer the simple contrivance that it was 
a few years ago. Each generating set at 
a power house now has its own panel in 
the board, with voltmeters, ammeters, 
groimd detectors, rheostats, etc. ; and 
there are circiiit-breakers and devices for 
connecting dynamos together, besides 
series alternating arc-lighting appliances 
and kindred apparatus. 

/. The best inventive genius and 
mechanical skill in the world does not 
make machinery that will withstand 
the neglect and abuse of the untrained 
operator; in his hands the finest and 
most economical equipment is but little 
better than its coarser and less efficient 
predecessor. Has a power-house em- 
ploye a right to demand promotion and 

134 



a higher salary so long as he refuses to 
accept the technical training required 
by the position he covets? 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
stud3dng, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in less than 
3 years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Steam-Electric 
Course should have our Complete 
Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
These Papers having successfully met 
the exacting requirements of thousands 
of students, it is evident that the Bound 
Volumes treat of principles and applica- 
tions in steam engineering with more 
thoroughness and conciseness than is 
possible in a work prepared on any 
other plan. They are in fact an 

135 



epitome of common-sense application. 
For easy gradation ; for conciseness ; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are imequaled. From no 
other source can a student get so quickly 
so much money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to the 
subject of steam engineering, and the 
details of this subject are explained 
with thoughtful care and a proper 
regard for the possible shortcomings of 
the reader. Every important item is 
indexed according to all the initial letters 
under which it is likely to be sought. 
Indeed, so carefully are all items classi- 
fied and indexed, the student can find in 
a moment the solution of a problem it 
might otherwise take hours to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood— even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. The tried and proved 
facts, formulas, and processes used in the 
best steam-engineering practice in the 
country are here collected and bound 
into an orderly and systematic whole. 



136 



Advanced Electric Lighting 
Course 

Advanced Electric Railways 
Course 

These Courses are made up from the 
Steam-Electric Course, which con- 
tains the following subjects: 



10 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

Arithmetic 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas. . . . 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 

Machine Elements 

Mechanics of Fluids 

Streng-th of Materials 

Elements of Electricity 
and Magnetism 

Heat and Steam 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Dynamos and Motors 

Operation of Dynamos 
and Motors 

Dynamo-Electric Machin- 
ery 

Geometrical Drawing 

Mechanical Drawing 

Steam Heating 

Steam Turbines 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Alternating Currents 

Electric Transmission .... 

Electric Lighting 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Electric Railways 

Interior Wiring". 

Examination Questions. . . 
Keys 



PAGES 
102 

41 
47 
61 
53 
37 



27 
41 
97 
90 

74 

72 

77 

50 

51 

23 

19 

23 

94 

184 

325 

30 

43 

401 

192 

28 

47 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Botind 
Volume 



13< 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

21 Types of Steam Boilers. . . 36 

22 Boiler Details 23 

23 Boiler Fittings 48 

24 Combustion, Firing, and 

Draft 25 

25 Boiler Design 58 

26 Economic Combustion of 

Coal 25 

27 Automatic Furnaces and l 5th Bound 

Mechanical Stokers 19 f Volume 

28 Boiler Installation 42 

29 Boiler Management 44 

30 Boiler Trials 44 

31 Boiler Feeding and Feed- 

water Problems 56 

32 Elevators 231 

Examination Questions. . . 38 

Keys 51 

33 The Steam Engine 46 

34 The Indicator 37 

35 Engine Testing 50 

36 Governors 45 

37 Valve Gears 77 

38 Condensers 48 I 6th Bound 

39 Compound Engines 40 l Volume 

40 Engine Management 88 

41 Engine Installation 45 

42 Pumps 165 

Examination Questions ... 38 

Keys 61 _ 

Pages 3,875 

Illustrations, 1,893 
Drawing Plates, 16 
Bound Volumes, 6 

Note — The six Bound Volumes containing the 
entire Steam-Electric Course are furnished to 
each, person enrolling for the Advanced Electric 
Lighting Course or the Advanced Electric 
Railways Course. 



What the Advanced Electric Lighting 
Course Is 

The Advanced Electric Lighting 
Course is the Advanced Engine Run- 
ning Course and the Electric Light- 
ing Course merged for those wanting 
to study both in combination. 

138 



What the Advanced Electric Railways 
Course Is 

The Advanced Electric Railways 
Course is the Advanced Engine Run- 
ning Course and the Electric Rail- 
ways Course combined. 

Subjects Taught in the Courses 

In the Advanced Electric Light- 
ing Course, thirty-one subjects: Nos. 

1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 

16, 17, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 31, 
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 39, 40, and 42. 
Subjects 12, 13, and 20 may be omitted. 
(There are forty-five Instruction 
Papers.) 

In the Advanced Electric Rail- 
ways Course, thirty subjects: Nos. 1, 

2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 

17, 19, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 
36, 37, 39, 40, and 42. Subjects 12 
and 13 may be omitted. (There are 
forty-four Instruction Papers.) 

Time Required to Finish the Courses 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Advanced 
Electric Lighting Course or the 
Advanced Electric Railways Course 
in about 2 years. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Advanced Elec- 
tric Lighting Course or our Advanced 
Electric Railways Course should 

139 



have our Complete Drawing Outfit, or 
an outfit equally good, as soon as he 
is ready to study Geometrical Drawing. 
If, however, the student does not wish 
to study drawing, no outfit is needed. 
Our Outfit is suitable for use in the 
drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we 
furnish it to our student for $7.95. 
The student pays express charges. 

Remarks 

The classes of persons that should 
enroll for the Advanced Electric 
Lighting Course or the Advanced 
Electric Railways Course are the 
same as those that should enroll for the 
Steam-Electric Course. It is well 
to bear in mind that the Steam-Elec- 
tric Course is the Complete Steam 
Engineering Course combined with 
the Electric Lighting and Railways 
Course; that the Advanced Electric 
Lighting Course and the Advanced 
Electric Railways Course are subor- 
dinate to the Steam-Electric Course. 
being made up from it and including 
no instruction not contained in it; and 
that these subordinate Courses should 
be studied by the same classes of persons 
for the same reasons that the parent 
Course, the Steam-Electric Course, 
should be studied. (See pages 132 and 
1 33 in this book. ) We divide the parent 
Course into subordinate Courses because 
occasionally a student is desirous to 
gain a knowledge of steam-engine run- 
ning and electric lighting, though he 
may have no interest in electric rail- 
ways; or, to learn steam-engine running 
and electric-railway operation, though 
he may have no desire to study electric 

140 



lighting. It is, however, unquestion- 
ably better for any student to study 
the entire Steam-Electric Course; 
for modem practice has made kindred 
the arts of steam-engine running, elec- 
tric lighting, and electric-railway opera- 
tion. And though a person may prefer 
to enroll for one of the subordinate 
Courses, we furnish him with the 
Bound Volumes of the full Steam- 
Electric Course, in order that he 
may have them for consultation even 
if he does not choose to include all their 
contents in his regular course of study 
and recitation. 



141 



1st Bound 
Volume 



Marine Engineers' Course 

Fifteen subjects are taught in the 
Marine Engineers' Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain nineteen, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 102 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. ... 41 

3 Principles of Mechanics. . . 47 

4 Machine Elements 61 

5 Mechanics of Fluids 53 

6 Strength of Materials 37 

7 Elements of Electricity and 

Magnetism 66 

8 Heat and Steam 27 

Examination Questions. . 41 

Keys 97 

9 Dynamos and Motors 90" 

10 Operation of Dynamos and . 

Motors 74 

11 Dynamo-Electric Machin- 

ery 72 

12 Geometrical Drawing 77 

13 Mechanical Drawing 50 

14 Steam Heating 51 

15 Steam Turbines.... 23 

Examination Questions .. . 19 

Keys 23. 

16 Steam and Steam Boilers. 227 

17 Steam Engines 191 

18 The Machinery of Western 

River Steamboats 66 

19 Recent Developments in 

Marine Engineering. ... 57 
Examination Questions. . . 31 
Keys 39. 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1,662 

Illustrations, 752 

Instruction Papers, 25 

Drawing Plates, 16 

Bound Volumes, 3 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. Subjects 12 and 13 
may be omitted. 

142 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They provide the theoretical 
knowledge the student must have to 
become a marine engineer. 

h. They treat of the principles of 
electricity and magnetism and explain 
the operation of dynamos and motors. 

c. They show how to take indicator 
diagrams and how to calculate the 
horsepower of the engine from them. 

d. They treat of valve gears. The 
setting of valves is clearly explained. 

e. They describe and explain the 
operation of compound and other 
multiple - expansion engines. Beam 
engines are given due consideration. 

/. They take up refrigerating and 
ice-making machinery in general. 

g. They give directions for the care 
and operation of steam boilers. 

h. They describe the machinery of 
western river steamboats, taking up 
both the fixed cut-off and the variable 
cut-off engines and the laying out of 
cams for them. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Chief Engineers. 

b. Assistant Engineers. 

c. Oilers. 

d. Water Tenders. 

e. Firemen. 

/. Coal Passers. 

g. Employes of machine shops where 
marine engines and boilers are built. 

h. Stationary Engineers and Loco- 
motive Engineers wanting to become 
marine engineers. 

i. United States Navy Machinists. 

143 



/. Young Men wanting to become 
marine engineers. 

Note — The rules and regtdations of the 
United States Board of Supervising Inspectors 
of Steam Vessels require an applicant to have 
3 years of actual sea service before applying for 
a license; or 3 years of apprenticeship in building 
steam engines, and 1 year of sea service; or 
3 years of locomotive engineering or stationary 
engineering and 1 year of sea service. The 
examinations are in writing and are graded 
according to the grade of the license applied for. 
An applicant must first pass the examination 
for the lowest grade and serve the required time 
in that position before he can try for the next 
higher grade. 

Our Course will not enable any one to procure 
a license if he has not had the required legal sea 
service prior to his application. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. There are three distinct condi- 
tions the student must fulfil before he 
can serve as a marine engineer. They 
are: first, practical experience; second, 
technical training; and third, a marine 
engineer's license. The student must 
himself acquire the first; we give him 
the second; and then, as a result of 
these, he can obtain the third. Our 
Course is the opportunity for the man 
employed in a minor position on a 
steamship By spending his time "off 
watch" studying our Marine Engi- 
neers' Course he can in a short time 
pass the examination for a marine 
engineer's license. With our help the 
man of the forecastle can obtain license, 
change his quarters, mess with the 
engineers, and be an officer of the ship. 
We can help the student become chief 
engineer. 

b. Economy in fuel consumption is 
imperative on shipboard, where only a 
small supply of coal can be carried. 

144 



The fireman must make every pound 
of coal count, and he cannot do this 
unless he thoroughly understands the 
principles of combustion and economic 
liring. Our Course takes up combustion 
and fuels and tells how to prevent losses 
through improper firing. In short, we 
teach the student how to practice the 
highest economy in fuel consumption. 

c. Life is too short for the ambitious 
assistant engineer, oiler, water tender, 
fireman, or coal passer to learn by slow 
experience all the things he will have 
to know before he can rise. The wide- 
awake man grasps the opportunity our 
instruction offers, and he is soon ready 
for the examination and among the 
eligibles for promotion. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 18 months. The average stu- 
dent requires a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Marine Engi- 
neers' Course should have our Com- 
plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. If, however, the 
student does not wish to study drawing, 
no outfit is needed. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He 
Is Unable to Send Us 
Written Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Drawing Plates, Examination 
Questions, and Keys of the Course, 
which were prepared to meet the 
requirements of the home-study stu- 
dent. Our ceaseless endeavor to pro- 
vide ideal instruction for home-study 
has made our Bound Volumes the most 
practical textbooks in existence. They 
are exactly suited to the needs of the 
student that must study with no 
instructor by his side and must there- 
fore have instruction so forcefully 
written that he can take it into his 
mind unaided. 

b. They are invaluable for refer- 
ence purposes, not only to the man 
preparing for license examinations but 
to the practicing engineer. The Bound 
Volumes contain the subjects properly 
included in a marine engineer's course 
and give the student the practical 
information he needs in his daily work 
in the engine room. Some students 
think they cannot get any benefit from 
their Courses unless they answer the 
Examination Questions and send their 
work to our Instructors to be examined 
and corrected. This is a mistaken 
notion; for while it is true that the stu- 
dent that keeps in close touch with our 
Instructors and receives the benefit of 
their attention and advice will get the 
greatest possible good from his Course, 
it is equally true that systematic study 

146 



of our Bound Volumes — even if he 
never sends a recitation to the Schools 
— will repay a student many times what 
his Course cost him. Some of our 
students by carefully reading our 
Bound Volumes have been able to 
pass examinations and secure licenses. 
c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all the 
initial letters under which it is likely 
to be sought. 



147 



1 



stationary Firemen's Course 

Ten subjects are taught in the 
Stationary Firemen's Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain twenty-seven, as fol- 
lows : 





LIST OF SUBJECTS 


PAGES 


1 


Arithmetic 


102 




2 


Mensuration and Use of 








Letters in Formulas .... 


41 




3 


Principles of Mechanics. . . 


47 




4 


Machine -Elements 


61 




5 


Mechanics of Fluids 


53 


1 1st Bound 


6 


Strength of Materials 


37 


Volume 


7 


Elements of Electricity 








and Magnetism 


66 




8 


Heat and Steam 


27 






Examination Questions . . . 


41 






Keys 


97. 




9 


Dynamos and Motors 


90' 




10 


Operation of Djmamos and 








Motors 


74 




11 


Dynamo-Electric Machin- 






12 


ery 

Geometrical Drawing 


72 
77 


. 2d Bound 


13 


Mechanical Drawing 


50 


V (JlLlillC 


14 


Steam Heating 


51 




15 


Steam Turbines 


23 






Examination Questions. . . 


19 






Kevs 


23 
36" 




16 


Types of Steam Boilers. . . . 




17 


Boiler Details 


23 




18 


Boiler Fittings 


48 




19 


Combustion, Firing, and 








Draft 


25 




20 


Boiler Design 


58 




21 


Economic Combustion of 








Coal 


25 




22 


Automatic Furnaces and 




^ 3d Bound 




Mechanical Stokers 


19 


Volume 


23 


Boiler Installation 


42 




24 


Boiler Management 


44 




25 


Boiler Trials 


44 




26 


Boiler Feeding and Feed- 






water Problems 


56 




27 


Elevators 


231 






Examination Questions. . . 


38 






Keys 


51. 






Pages 1,791 





148 



Illustrations, 835 
Instruction Papers, 33 
Drawing Plates, 17 
Bound Volumes 3 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They represent the best fireroom 
practice. 

h. They give in a clear and under- 
Istandable way the information the 
student must have to become a com- 
petent fireman. 

c. They explain the causes that 
produce scale in boilers and what 
remedies to apply. 

d. They show how to fire a boiler 
so as to get the best results. 

e. They treat of heat, the vapor- 
ization of water, and the combustion 
of fuels. 

/. They describe various common 
types of boilers, such as the plain 
cylindrical, flue, vertical, return-tubular, 
and water-tube boilers. 

g. They show the various details of 
boilers and explain the construction 
and operation of boiler fittings most 
universally employed. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Stationary Firemen. 

b. Persons wanting to become fire- 
men or water tenders in all kinds of 

1 steam plants. 

c. Persons working in minor posi- 
'' tions in steam plants and wishing to 

advance to the higher and better- 
paying positions of fireman or water 
' tender. 

149 



d. Young Men desirous of becoming 
stationary firemen. 

Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of 
steam engineering shoiild enroll for the Complete 
Steam Engineering Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Millions of dollars are expended 
annually in the production and use of 
steam, and in these days of strong com- 
petition the progressive manufacturer 
is ever on the alert to cut down his 
expense of power production. He is 
glad to advance the employe that 
effects reductions in expenses or 
increases the efficiency of his plant. 
That employers appreciate the import- 
ance of boiler-room economy is shown 
by the fact that in hundreds of plants 
the engineer is required to make a 
daily report of the number of pounds 
of fuel used and the horsepower 
developed. The even register of the 
recording steam gauge is a silent 
witness to the care and watchfulness 
of the fireman, just as heavy increases 
or reductions in the pressure line, or 
indications of frequent "pops" of the 
safety valve, are certain signs of waste- 
ful methods and unsatisfactory service. 
The fireman's opportunity for advance- 
ment lies in high-class boiler practice 
at a minimum expense. To fire a boiler 
efficiently and economically, the fireman 
must understand the principles of com- 
bustion. Employers everywhere are 
looking for the man that can save them 
money and they are glad to reward him 
with promotion and better pay. Our 
Course teaches the student how to fire 
boilers in the most economical manner. 

150 



b. The fireman's first duty is to 
make steam fast enough to meet . all 
demands. His second, is to see that 
the desired pressure is steadily main- 
tained at the least expense. In order 
to secure the largest volume of steam 
with a given quantity of coal, the 
fireman must have a knowledge of the 
construction and care of boilers; how 
to prevent scale and foaming; how to 
use pumps, injectors, and feedwater 
heaters; and how to set and care for 
safety valves. We teach him this. 

c. The best positions in boiler plants 
are open to only those that have com- 
bined practical experience with techni- 
cal training. The man that has supple- 
mented his boiler-room work with our 
instruction never need be without a 
good position. The knowledge he 
obtains from our Course insures him 
against failure in obtaining employ- 
ment or winning promotion. 

d. Efficiency and economy of opera- 
tion are the chief considerations in 
every boiler plant, and they can be 
maintained only by competent men. 
Our instruction is of benefit not only 
to the beginner, but also to the man 
already engaged in firing; it gives a good 
working knowledge of the construction, 
operation, and intelligent care of boilers 
and their appurtenances, and enables 
the student to do his work according to 
the latest and best methods. 

e. Within the last 10 years boiler 
pressures have been doubled. Ten 
years ago a pressure of 80 pounds was 
common, and instances of 100 pounds 
unusual. Today a pressure of 160 
pounds is common and 200 pounds not 

151 



infrequent. As a precaution to insure 
safety and the employing of competent 
men only, some states have passed laws 
requiring boilers to be inspected and 
the licensing of those in charge. Similar 
laws will be enacted in all states; and 
the incompetent fireman will have to 
get a license or get out of the business. 
Every fireman possessing any ambition 
wants to progress, earn more, and make 
his position secure. To do this he must 
know the best fireroom practice. Our 
Course gives it. Our instruction will 
enable him to care for and operate 
boilers with the greatest efficiency, 
economy, and safety. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 6 months. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Drawing Plates, Examination 
Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
The Bound Volumes give the student 
instruction obtained from the most 
practical and reliable sources and 
presented by a simplified method of 
teaching that has been tried and proved 
a success. Our constant endeavor to 

152 



iprovide ideal instruction for the stu- 
dent that must study out of the presence 
of a teacher has made our Bound 
Volumes the best textbooks in existence 
for home study. 

b. They contain arranged in a 
logical order all the subjects properly 
included in a stationary fireman's 
course. The Bound Volumes place 
before the student the best fireroom 
practice in the country and give him 
a store of knowledge that it would take 
years for him to pick up by experience 
alone. The Bound Volumes embrace 
much valuable information on kindred 
subjects sure to interest every fireman. 
Many successful firemen attribute their 
success to the studious reading of our 
Bound Volumes. 

c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all initial . letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 



153 



Civil Engineering Course 

Forty- two subjects are taught in 
the Civil Engineering Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain forty-seven, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 

2 Elements of Algebra .... 115 

3 Logarithms 20 

4 Geometry and Trigonom- I 1st Bound 

etry 75 ( Volume 

Examination Questions . . 32 

Keys 114 

Tables 37J 

5 Elementary Chemistry . . i 

6 Chemistry and Chemical 

Operations J 

7 Blowpiping ^n 2d Bound 

8 Mmeralogy 89^ Volume 

9 Assaymg 1^ 

10 Geology i: 

Examination Questions . . '. 

Keys : 

11 Elementary Mechanics . . < 

12 Hydromechanics 

13 Pneumatics 

14 Heat ' 

15 Elementary Graphical I 3d Bound 

Statics 85 f Volume 

16 Strength of Materials ' 

Examination Questions . . < 

Keys 1' 

Tables and Formulas 

17 Steam and Steam Engines i: 

18 Applied Mechanics 1' 

19 Steam Boilers 1< 

Examination Questions . . 

Keys 

Tables and Formulas 

20 Machine Design 2; 

21 Dynamos and Motors ... 2' 
Examination Questions . . 
Keys I 

154 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Hydraulics 76" 

Surveying 92 

Land Surveying 47 

Mapping 71 

Railroad Location 56 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Mechanical Drawing .... 49 

Descriptive Astronomy. . . 126 

Examination Questions . . 35 

Keys 73 

Tables and Formulas 21 

Railroad Construction. . . . 159 

. Trackwork 133 

Jlailroad Structures 132 

L'^-'comotives 197 

gxl^mination Questions . . 33 

Key§ 44 

Anai\Nsis of Stresses 121 

Propor.^io^i^g the Material 87 
Details""'?^ Construction. . . 109 
Details, 'Bills, and Esti- 
mates .. .-\- ■••■■• : 84 

Examination Questions . . 66 

Keys \ • 231. 

Drainage 92 

Sewerage 89 

Streets and Highwavs-. • • • 105 

Paving ; • 83 

Electric Railways. "11-3- 

Examination Questions . . 65 

Keys 87 

Tables and Formulas 7. 

Waterwheels 91 

Hydraulic Machinery .... 105 
Water Supply and Distri- 
bution 146 

Irrigation 114 

Electric Lighting 113 

Examination Questions . . 36 

Keys 58 



6th Bound 
Volume 



7th Bound 
Volume 



8th Bound 
Volume 



9th Bound 
Volume 



10th Bound 
Volume 



.6,336 



Pages 

Illustrations. 2,756 
Instruction Papers, 66 
Drawing Plates, 14 
Mapping Plates, 6 
Bound Volumes, 10 

Note — No recitations are asked for in subjects 

9, 12, 18, and 20. 

Twenty dollars must be paid on the Civil 
Engineering Course before the Bound Volumes 
will be delivered. 



155 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a They will assist any student of 
average intelHgence to become a sur- 
veyor or an assistant to a civil engineer 

b. They are practical, thorough, and 

concise. . . -^^i^ 

c They are written m a siniple 
style, insuring ease of comprehension 
d They contain nothing that is not 
of real value to the _ student, jws^ 
mathematics not essential to a ^^^^^ 
understanding of the subject are gj.^._ 

nated. 

e. They give instruction ir ^^^ ^^^_ 
mentary subjects that must ^^^ under- 
stood before the study of cr>^^-| engineer- 
ing is begun. 

/. They are fuUy p^,^^ clearly illus- 
trated. . --'' 

g, ■ 'They contaiij f^jj directions for the 
use and C3^^. 9c surveying instruments. 

h. They include detailed instruction 
in mechanical and topographical drawing. 

i. They are prepared with special 
reference to the needs of men actually 
engaged in surveying and civil engineer- 
ing. 

y. They contain numerous problems 
relating directly to the practical work 
of civil engineering. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Civil Engineers and Assistants. 

b. Consulting Engineers and Experts. 

c. Surveyors and Assistants. 

d. Transitmen and Levelmen. 

e. Topographers. 

/. Draftsmen in Engineers and Sur- 
veyors' offices. 

156 



g. Railroad Engineers. 

h . Roadmasters , Resident Engineers , 
Division Engineers, and Railroad Super- 
intendents. 

i. Persons engaged in railroad or 
bridge construction. 

j. Bridge Engineers. 

k. Bridge Draftsmen and Designers. 

/. Bridge Inspectors. 

m. Hydraulic Engineers. 

n. Persons engaged in the designing 
or constructing of waterworks, sewerage 
systems, or hydraulic power plants. 

o . Municipal Engineers. 

p. City Engineers. 

q. Persons engaged in the construc- 
tion, maintenance, or superintendence 
of streets and roads. 

r. Persons employed in engineering 
corps. 

s. Young Men desiring to take up 
the study of civil engineering, beginning 
with the most elementary subjects. 

Note — Our Civil Engineering Course con- 
tains five special Courses, any one of which may 
be taken separately, namely the Surveying 
AND Mapping Course; the Bridge Engineering 
Course; the Railroad Engineering Course; 
the Municipal Engineering Course; and the 
Hydraulic Engineering Course. Each of 
these special Courses is a thorough treatment of 
the subject with which it deals. A person enroll- 
ing for the Civil Engineering Course may 
take up the study of the main stibdivisions or 
branches of the Course in whatever order he 
wishes. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. There is an ever increasing 
demand for competent men in civil 
engineering. No new enterprise that 
involves the use of lands, buildings, etc., 
can proceed without the aid of the 
surveyor or the engineer. Formerly it 

157 



was thought that no one but a college 
graduate could hope to attain the posi- 
tion of civil engineer. But now our 
instruction enables a man to get the 
necessary theoretical knowledge while 
he is gaining practical experience. To 
the young man without a college educa- 
tion, or even a trade, our Course offers 
the opportunity to enter an important 
and profitable profession. To the man 
engaged as rodman, chainman, transit- 
man, etc., it offers promotion. 

b. An especially attractive feature of 
our Course is the instruction in bridge 
design. Draftsmen in bridge engineer- 
ing offices can by means of our instruc- 
tion obtain a theoretical knowledge of 
bridge designing that will enable them 
to advance rapidly and to become, with 
practical experience, bridge engineers. 
Elaborate drawings are given illustra- 
ting fully the different parts of a bridge, 
and every detail of the work is carefully 
explained. 

c. Our Course is the only Course 
including instruction suited to the 
needs of the man just starting in civil 
engineering. It is also valuable to the 
man holding a good position and desir- 
ing advancement, but lacking the pre- 
liminary education necessary to enable 
him to understand textbooks on civil 
engineering. Our instruction includes 
the methods used in the best civil engi- 
neering practice, and the examples given 
are similar to those problems commonly 
met with in actual practice. 

d. To the young man intending to 
take charge of railroad work, the knowl- 
edge of railroad engineering contained 
in our Course is indispensable; for 

158 



without this he is unable to direct his 
work intelligently 

e. To a man holding' a position in 
the engineering department of a city 
government our Course offers valuable 
instruction in the details of municipal 
engineering, such as paving, design and 
construction of sewers and waterworks, 
etc. 

/. Our Instruction Papers have been 
prepared by men of wide experience in 
engineering and educational work. Each 
branch of our Civil Engineering 
Course has been written under the 
direction of men that have made a 
specialty of that particular line of civil 
engineering. The Course is therefore 
reliable, in accord with the best engi- 
neering methods, and gives the student 
much knowledge nowhere else so easily 
obtainable. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
sttidying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 3 years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Civil Engineer- 
ing Course should have our Complete 
Drawdng Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is "worth $13.55; we furnish it to cur 
student for S7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 

159 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, Mapping Plates, and Keys 
of the Course. The information con- 
tained in these volumes, relating to the 
theory and the practice of civil engi- 
neering, can be made use of by students 
not possessing a knowledge of higher 
mathematics. Every fact, principle, 
and process is concisely stated and 
clearly explained. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia, because they treat of 
each subject fully and in detail. They 
are indexed completely, and any par- 
ticular reference can be easily found. 

c. They contain information so prac- 
tical that many students, after learning 
enough of the elementary mathematics 
to be able to apply the rules, have with- 
out further study been able to secure 
prominent positions and obtain large 
salaries in their trades and professions. 



160 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Railroad Engineering Course 

Seventeen subjects are taught in the 
Railroad Engineering Course. The 

Bound Volumes of the Reference Li- 
brary contain twenty-two, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 

2 Elements of Algebra 115 

3 Logarithms 20 

4 Geometry and Trigonom- I 1st Bound 

etry 75 ( Volume 

Examination Questions . . 32 

Kevs 114 

Tables 37 

5 Elementary Mechanics . . 64 

6 Hydromechanics 42 

7 Pneumatics 46 

8 Heat 74 

9 Elementary Graphical 

Statics 85 

10 Strength of Materials .... 70 

Examination Questions . . 63 

Keys 130 

Tables and Formulas 5 

Hydraulics 76 

Surveying 92 

Land Surveying 47 

Mapping 71 

Railroad Location 56 

Geometrical Drawing .... 77 

Mechanical Drawing .... 49 

Descriptive Astronomy. . . 126 

Examination Questions . . 35 

Keys 73 

Tables and Formulas 21 

Railroad Constrtiction. ... 159" 

Trackwork 133 

Railroad Structures 132 

Locomotives 197 

Examination Questions . . 33 

Keys 44 



3d Bound 

Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,513 

Illustrations, 1,288 
Instruction Papers, 35 
Drawing Plates, 14 
Mapping Plates., 6 
Bound Volumes, 4 
Note— No recitations are asked for in subjects 
14, 15, 22, 29, and 33. 



161 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain practical problems 
relating to railroad engineering. 

b. They give instruction in survey- 
ing and mapping. 

c. They are fully illustrated. 

d. They include instruction in all 
the elementary subjects of which a 
knowledge is necessary before the study 
of railroad engineering is begun. 

e. They give instruction in railroad 
location. 

/. They treat of railroad construction. 

g. They contain instruction in track- 
work. 

h. They embrace instruction in rail- 
road structures, such as wooden trestles, 
water stations, turntables, and section 
buildings. 

i. They are so thoroughly practical, 
frequent reference to them will give the 
student knowledge worth many times 
their cost. 

j. They explain the laying out of 
box culverts, tile culverts, and arched 
culverts. 

k. They teach the student how to 
calculate the quantity and the cost of 
excavation work. 

/. They give full instruction in the 
planning and staking out of curves by 
the methods in actual practice. 

m. They have been prepared to meet 
the requirements of busy people — those 
that must get an education, if they get 
it at all, by means of home study and 
out of the presence of a teacher. It is 
essential that the instruction for this 
purpose be so written and illustrated as 

162 



to make impossible a misunderstanding 
of what is read. It is because our 
Instruction Papers are so written and 
illustrated that they are universally 
accepted as the best for home study. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Railroad Engineers and Assist- 
ants. 

h. Railroad Surveyors and Assist- 
ants. 

c. Transitmen and Levelmen. 

d. Topographers and Topographical 
Draftsmen. 

e. Railroad Superintendents, Divi- 
sion Engineers, Resident Engineers, 
Roadmasters, Supervisors, and Inspec- 
tors. 

/. Persons engaged in railroad con- 
struction and maintenance. 

g. Rodmen, Chainmen, and all per- 
sons employed in railroad engineering 
corps. 

;' h. Young Men desiring to follow 
[railroad engineering as a profession. 

i. Foremen, Section Men, and all 
persons whose work requires a knowl- 
edge of the construction and mainte- 
jnance of railroads. 

Note — The Railroad Engineering Course 
'is intended for persons wishing to specialize in 
this branch of engineering — persons desiring to 
jprepare themselves for positions in the con- 
struction department or in the maintenance-of- 
way department of a railroad. If the prospec- 
tive student wants a knowledge of civil engi- 
peering. he should enroll for the Civil Engi- 
neering Course. 

After finishing the Mathematics and the Geo- 
metrical Drawing, the student of our Railroad 
Engineering Course may take up the work in 
Surveying and Mapping. 

163 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Railroad engineering offers to 
young men some of the best opportuni- 
ties for advancement. New railroads 
are constantly being planned and 
built; and old ones are being extended, 
rebuilt, and kept in repair. This work 
gives employment to thousands of per- 
sons and produces a steady demand for 
skilled men. Section men, track inspec- 
tors, surveyors, and assistant engineers 
can with our help qualify quickly for 
better positions and higher salaries. 

b. Men competent to deal with 
problems met with in railroad engineer- 
ing are scarce. Railroad companies 
everywhere are searching for capable 
men, and persons that will qualify 
themselves for railroad engineering can 
command responsible positions and good 
salaries. Our Course — a concise and 
easily understood treatise prepared by 
practical men — is intended to train men 
to survey, locate, and superintend the 
construction of railroads. 

c. The man in charge of railroad 
location cannot successfully carry on 
his work without a thorough knowledge 
of railroad engineering. The earning 
power of the railroad "will depend to a 
large extent on his judgment. He must 
understand the economic conditions 
governing the intended road, calculate 
the cost of the different routes, and 
consider the determining factors in 
deciding which is the best road; for the 
shortest line between the terminal 
points is in all probability not the 
cheapest road to build nor the most 
economical to operate. 

164 



d. To the student engaged in the 
construction or the maintenance of a 
railroad our Course will give an enlarged 
insight that will enable him to suggest 
methods whereby the cost of construc- 
tion and of maintenance can be reduced ; 
this means quick recognition, rapid 
promotion, and increase in salary. 

e. The young man intending to 
inake a profession of railroad engineer- 
ing can get a start by securing employ- 
ment in a railroad surveying corps or 
in a railroad engineer's drafting room — 
probably the two main channels of pro- 
motion to the more responsible posi- 
tions. The man giving proof of his 
ability to make accurate surveys or to 
draw neat and correct maps is the first 
man to be selected for advancement. 
Through our Course the student will 
shorten considerably the time usually 
spent as rodman. chainman, etc., or in 
making tracings or blueprints. Duties 
requiring more skill will be assigned to 
him; and as experience supplements the 
knowledge he obtains from our Course 
he is sure to advance. 

/. The rapid growth in population, 
the opening up and settling of new sec- 
tions of the country, the continued 
development of sparsely populated dis- 
tricts, and the consequent increase in 
traffic require the building of new lines 
of railroad and the extension of old 
lines. All this brings employment to 
thousands of railroad engineers; and 
competent men are sure of work at 
good pay. 

g. Our Course is a practical Course 
on railroad engineering; it will prove of 
great value not only to persons that 

165 



contemplate becoming railroad engi- 
neers, but also to those already engaged 
in that profession. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 18 
months. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Railroad Engi- 
neering Course should have our Com- 
plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready 
to study Geometrical Drawing. Our 
Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish it 
to our student for $7.95. The student 
pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and 
Keys of the Course. They are an epit- 
ome of common-sense application. For 
easy gradation; for conciseness; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are unequaled. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 

166 



encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subject of railroad engi- 
neering, and the details of that subject 
are explained with thoughtful care and 
a proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all 
the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
solution of a problem it might otherwise 
take hours to master. 

c. They are written in simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
is so set forth as to be easily under- 
stood — even by the man of little educa- 
tion. They begin with the simplest and 
most elementary principles and lead 
easily and quickly to the best theory 
and practice of the work on which they 
treat. The tried and proved facts, for- 
mulas, and processes used in the best 
railroad engineering practice in the 
country are here collected and bound 
into an orderly and systematic whole. 



167 



Surveying and Mapping 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PA 

Arithmetic 

Elements of Algebra .... 

Logarithms 

Geometrical Drawing 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Tables 

Geometry 

Plane Trigonometry 

Chain Surveying 

Compass Surveying 

Transit Surveying 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Tables 

Leveling 

Circular Curves 

Stadia and Plane-Table 
Surveying 

Topographic Surveying. . . 

Hydrographic Surveying . 

United States Land Sur- 
veys 

Mapping 

Practical Astronomy 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



1341 
116 

20 

77 

27 
102 

29 
102 
123 

30 

64 
108 

28 

46 

63 

901 

50 



43 

34 

77 I 3d Bound 
Volume 

95 
101 
125 

34 

38 



1,756 



Pages 

Illustrations, 679 

Instruction Papers, 28 

Drawing Plates, 5 

Mapping Plates, 5 

Bound Volumes, 3 
Note— Mine Surveying is not included in the 
Surveying and Mapping Course. _ Mine Sur- 
veying is embraced in the following Courses 
The Full Mining Course; the Complete Coal 
Mining Course; and the Metal Mining Course. 
The student that finishes the Surveying and 
Mapping Course, however, can readily adapt 
himself to mine surve^dng; the principles of 
surveying are the same underground and above 
ground. 

168 



What the Instruction Papers on Survey- 
ing Treat Of 

The Instruction Papers on surveying 
describe various surveying instruments, 
explain their uses, and give directions 
in chain surveying, compass surveying, 
transit surveying, stadia surveying, 
plane-table surveying, and leveling. 

What the Instruction Papers on Map- 
ping Treat Of 

The Instruction Papers on mapping 
begin with simple instruction in the 
platting of angles and proceed until 
they finally take up the making of an 
elaborate village map showing all the 
topographical features. Five Mapping 
Plates are included, the titles of which 
are as follows : Platting iVngles — I ; 
Platting Angles — II; Map of Railroad 
Location; Profiles and a Contour Map; 
Stadia Survey and Hachures; Map of 
a Portion of a Town; and a Map of a 
ViUage. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain examples relating 
to the practical work of surveying. 
h. They explain triangulation. 

c. They give instruction in hydro- 
graphic surveying, stadia surveying, 
plane-table surveying, topographical 
surveying, and mapping. 

d. They explain the method em- 
ployed by the United States Govern- 
ment in surveying public lands. 

e. They explain the different meth- 
ods of computing areas and show how 
to use the planimeter. 

169 



/. They give instruction in the cal- 
culation of latitude and longitude 
ranges (latitude and departure). 

g. They contain instruction in the 
laying out of railroad curves. 

h. They contain the best methods 
for determining the true meridian and 
tell how to find the latitude and longi- 
tude of a place. A clear description of 
the solar attachment is included. 

i. They have been prepared to meet 
the requirements of busy people — those 
that must get an education, if they get 
it at all, by means of home study and 
out of the presence of a teacher. It is 
essential that the instruction for this 
purpose be so written and illustrated as 
to make impossible a misunderstanding 
of what is read. It is because our 
Instruction Papers are so written and 
illustrated that they, are universally 
accepted as the best for home study. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Surveyors and Assistants. 

b. Transitmen and Levelmen. 

c. Topographers and Topographical 
Draftsmen. 

d. Engineers' Assistants. 

e. Rodmen; Chainmen; persons em- 
ployed in an engineering corps. 

/. Draftsmen in surveyors' offices. 

g. Young Men desiring to engage in 
surveying work. 

h. Graduates of high schools and 
academies. 

NoTK — The Surveying and Mapping Course 
is intended for persons desiring a working knowl- 
edge of surveying and mapping — persons wish- 
ing to become practical surveyors and engineers' 
assistants. If the prospective student intends 

170 . 



to specialize in some branch of engineering, 
such as bridge engineering, railroad engineering, 
etc., he should enroll for the Course devoted to 
the particular line of work he wants to take up. 
Persons desiring a full knowledge of civil engi- 
neering should enroll for the Civil Engineering 
Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Surveying offers many oppor- 
tunities for advancement ; it is the step- 
ping-stone to civil engineering. Many 
successful engineers began their careers 
in the surveying corps or in the drafting 
room of some surveyor or engineer — 
the two main entrances to the field of 
engineering. A young man desiring to 
rise to a responsible position in the 
engineering profession, but undecided 
as to what particular branch of engi- 
neering he wishes to follow and unable 
to attend a college, cannot do better 
than enroll for our Surveying and 
Mapping Course and then obtain em- 
ployment either in a surveying corps 
or in the drafting room of some surveyor 
or engineer. By this arrangement the 
student will be brought at once in 
touch with both the theoretical and the 
practical sides of the work, getting into 
the various branches of engineering 
practice an insight that will enable him 
to decide wisely which branch he desires 
for his life profession. 

b. As long as boundary lines must be 
established, roads located, town sites 
laid out, and general surveying done, 
competent surveyors are sure of prof- 
itable work. In almost every town 
there is an opportunity for an ambitious 
person to open a surveyor's office; he 
may build up a profitable business for 

171 



himself, beginning without capital other 
than his surveying outfit and the 
knowledge acquired from our Course. 

c. Young men employed as drafts- 
men in engineers and surveyors' ofEces 
have excellent opportunities for becom- 
ing practical surveyors. Their work 
gives them a valuable knowledge of the 
principles of surveying and of the 
manner of keeping notes and platting 
therefrom. By supplementing his prac- 
tical experience with the knowledge con- 
tained in our Course the student can 
learn quickly to make accurate sur- 
veys. This means rapid promotion and 
more pay. 

d. The chief difference between the 
surveyor and his subordinates is a 
difference of education. Young men 
working in surveying corps can quickly 
become surveyors themselves through 
our instruction; for with their practical 
experience the only thing preventing 
advancement is the lack of theoretical 
knowledge. 

e. A young man's spare time is his 
best capital, and the use he makes of it 
will to a large extent determine his suc- 
cess. Any young man of average intel- 
ligence that will use his spare time 
studying as we direct and is faithful 
in his work can, through his practical 
experience and our instruction, become 
a surveyor well qualified to do general 
surveying in both the field and the office. 

/. Our Surveying and Mapping 
Course is in every sense a practical 
Course; it explains the theory and 
practice of surveying and mapping and 
will give the student a good working 
knowledge. 

172 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studjang, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Surveying and 
Mapping Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The student 
pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and 
Keys of the Course. They are in fact 
an epitome of common-sense applica- 
tion. For easy gradation; for concise- 
ness; for intelligent adherence to the 
important features of their subjects; 
and for practicability, they are un- 
equaled. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to the 
particular subject of surveying and 
mapping, and the details of that subject 

173 



are explained with thoughtful care and 
a proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all the 
initial letters under which it is likely to 
be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items classified and indexed, the student 
can find in a moment the solution of a 
problem it might otherwise take hours 
to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work on 
which they treat. The tried and 
proved facts, formulas, and processes 
used in the best surveying and mapping 
practice in the country are here col- 
lected and bound into an orderly and 
systematic whole. 



174 



Bridge Engineering Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 

2 Algebra 105 

3 Logarithms 20 

4 Geometry and Trigonom- 
etry 75 



Elementary Mechanics 

Hydromechanics 

Pneumatics 

Elementary Graphical 
Statics 

Examination Questions. . . 

Strength of Materials .... 

Analysis of Stresses 

Proportioning the Material 

Details of Construction. . . 

Details, Bills, and Esti- 
mates 

Examination Questions . . . 

Geometrical Drawing 

Mechanical Drawing .... 

Tables and Formulas 

Keys 



64 
42 
46 

85 
79 
601 

121 

87 

109 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



84 
75 
77- 
49 
84, 
471 4th Bd. Vol. 



3d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1,854 

Illustrations, 634 
Instruction Papers, 27 
Drawing Plates, 14 
Bound Volumes 4 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain instruction in the 
analysis of stresses — showing by the 
graphical method how to determine 
accurately the stresses in the different 
members of a bridge. 

b. They give instruction in bridge 
design. 

c. They teach the student how to 
calculate the strength of iron or steel 
columns, beams, girders, etc. 

d. They teach the student how to 
make shop lists, orders for materials, 
shipping bills, erection diagrams, and 
estimates of the weight of bridges. 

175 



e. They give instruction in the 
designing of floorbeams. 

/. They explain the details of con- 
struction of both the tension members 
and the compression members of a 
bridge, giving due consideration to live 
loads, dead loads, and wind pressure. 

g. They will enable the student to 
calculate the stresses, bearing values, 
and working strength of rivets, pins, etc. 

h. They show the constructive details 
of a bridge. 

i. They give instruction in all the 
elementary subjects necessary to be 
understood before the study of bridge 
engineering is begun. 

y. They have been prepared to meet 
the requirements of busy people — those 
that must get an education, if they get 
it at all, by means of home study and 
out of the presence of a teacher. It is 
essential that the instruction for this 
purpose be so written and illustrated as 
to make impossible a misunderstanding 
of what is read. It is because our 
Instruction Papers are so written and 
illustrated that they are universally 
accepted as the best for home study. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Bridge Engineers and Assistants. 

h. Draftsmen and Designers in 
bridge-engineering offices and bridge 
works. 

c. Bridge Inspectors. 

d. Bridge Supervisors. 

e. Employes in bridge works. 

/. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen of bridge works. 

g. Young Men desiring to qualify 
for positions as draftsmen, designers, or 

176 



computers in the engineering depart- 
ment or the construction department of 
a bridge manufacturing company. 

h. Young Men wanting to become 
bridge engineers. 

i. Graduates of high schools and 
manual training schools. 

j. Railroad Engineers. 

k. Structural Iron Workers. 

Note — The Bridge Engineering Course is 
intended for persons desiring a good working 
knowledge of the principles of bridge design and 
bridge construction. If the prospective student 
wishes a knowledge of civil engineering, he 
should enroll for the Civil Engineering Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. There is no lack of opportunity in 
bridge engineering; and the pay of com- 
petent bridge engineers is all that could 
be desired. Every bridge company — 
and there are hundreds in the country 
— ^maintains its own drafting and design- 
ing departments, giving employment to 
a number of draftsmen and designers. 
Railroad companies, too, employ a 
large number of engineers whose duty 
is the inspecting of bridges along the 
line of the road. Besides, there are 
thousands of highway bridges being 
designed and built in this country every 
year. All these things create a demand 
for competent men — ^men able not only 
to design bridges but also to superin- 
tend their construction and erection. 
Our Course covers the general design of 
bridges, and is clear and concise in its 
treatment of the design of practical 
shop details. The student that com- 
pletes this Course will, with practical 
experience, be able to design and super- 
intend the construction of bridges. 

177 



b. Probably no branch of engineer- 
ing requires so thorough a knowledge of 
the principles of mechanics and the 
strength of materials as bridge engi- 
neering. Bridges cannot be designed 
on guesswork. An error in calculation 
may result in disaster. Through our 
instruction the student can learn to 
calculate the exact strength and weight 
of a finished bridge even before a foun- 
dation stone is laid or a girder cast. 

c. A young man wishing to enter the 
bridge engineering profession can do so 
through the medium of the drafting 
room. By enrolling for our Bridge 
Engineering Course and taking the 
drawing section first the student can 
quickly qualify for a position as drafts- 
man. Then, by supplementing his 
drafting-room experience with further 
study of our Course, he can acquire the 
technical knowledge essential to any 
one desirous of becoming a bridge engi- 
neer. 

d. Bridge draftsmen are well paid. 
The ability to make neat and accurate 
bridge drawings is the result of faithful 
work and the right kind of training. 
Many of our students have qualified for 
good-paying positions as bridge drafts- 
men. Our Course offers to young men 
whose present work is uncongenial and 
unremunerative the opportunity to 
qualify for more agreeable and better- 
paying positions. 

e. A bridge worker's value increases 
in just the proportion that he qualifies 
himself for advancement. The man 
that is ambitious — that seriously wants 
to better his condition — will find our 
Course the way to promotion. Through 

178 



his practical experience and our instruc- 
tion he may become a bridge engineer. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, 
finish the Course in about 2 years. The 
average student requires a little more 
time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Bridge Engi- 
neering Course should have our Com- 
plete drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The stu- 
dent pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
They are in fact an epitome of common- 
sense application. For easy gradation; 
for conciseness; for intelligent adherence 
to the important features of their sub- 
jects; and for practicability, they are 
unequaled. From no other source can 
a student get so quickly so much money- 
earning knowledge. 

h. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 

179 



encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subject of bridge engineer- 
ing, and the details of that subject are 
explained with thoughtful care and a 
proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all 
the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
solution of a problem it might otherwise 
take hours to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work on 
which they treat. The tried and proved 
facts, formulas, and processes used in 
the best bridge works in the country 
are here collected and bound^into an 
orderly and systematic whole. 



180 



Municipal Engineering 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 

Arithmetic 

Algebra 

Logarithms 

Geometry and Trigonom 

etry ■ • • • 

Elementary Mechanics . . 

Hydromechanics 

Pneumatics 

Strength of Materials. . . . 
Examination Questions. . 

Surveying. . ._ 

Land Surveying 

Mapping 

Drainage 

Sewerage 

Streets and Highways . . . 

Paving _ 

Examination Questions. . 
Geometrical Drawing. . . . 
Mechanical Drawing . . . 

Keys 

Tables and Formulas .... 



■AGES 

. 121 

105 

20 

75 

64 

42 

46 

70 

71 

. 92 1 

, 47 

71 

92 

. 89 

. 105 

83 

. 74 

20 \ 
. 12/ 
. 3101 
. 110/ 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2dlBound 
Volume 



3d?Bound 
Volume 

4th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1J19 

Illustrations, 593 
Instruction Papers, 28 
Drawing Plates, 12 
Mapping Plates, 6 
Bound Volumes, 4 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give instruction in the 
design and the construction of sewer- 
age systems. Both circular and egg- 
shaped sewers are treated. 

h. They describe various surveying 
instruments, explain their uses, and 
give directions in compass surveying, 
transit surveying, and leveling. 

c. They contain instruction in map- 
ping. 

181 



d. They explain the laying out of 
cities and towns and show the location 
and arrangement of streets and avenues. 

e. They treat of the construction and 
the maintenance of streets and high- 
ways. 

/. They treat of paving materials, 
and give directions for the construc- 
tion of stone, asphaltum, coal-tar, and 
brick pavements. 

g. They treat of the flow of sewage — 
giving due consideration to the condi- 
tions effecting the slope of sewers. 

h. They require the student to cal- 
culate the dimensions of sewers. 

i. They give the student instruction 
in all the elementary subjects necessary 
to be understood before the study of 
municipal engineering is begun. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Municipal Engineers and Assist- 
ants. 

h. City Engineers. 

c. Sanitary Engineers and Contrac- 
tors. 

d. City Surveyors and Assistants. 

e. County Surveyors and Assistants. 
/. Road Commissioners. 

g. Inspectors of public works. 

h. Draftsmen in municipal engineer- 
ing offices. 

i. Transitmen; Levelmen; Chain- 
men ; Rodmen ; all persons employed in 
a municipal engineering corps. 

j. Men engaged in laying out and 
superintending the construction of 
streets and highways. 

k. Men engaged in laying out addi- 
tions to cities or towns. 

182 



/. Men employed in the engineering 
departments or the pubHc-works depart- 
ments of cities. 

m. Persons engaged in inspecting 
the materials for pavements. 

}i. Young Men desiring a knowledge 
of municipal engineering. 

o. Graduates of high schools and 
academies. 

p. Persons desiring a knowledge of 
how to lay out property on the out- 
skirts of a city or a town. 

Note — The Municipal Engineering Course 
is intended for persons wishing to become pro- 
ficient in municipal engineering matters such as 
drainage, sewerage, pavements, the arrange- 
ment of blocks, and the location, construction, 
and maintenance of streets and highways. If 
the prospective student wants a knowledge of 
civil engineering, he should enroll for the Civil 
Engineering Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The demand for qualified munici- 
pal engineers is great, and it is con- 
stantly increasing. Many city engineers, 
as well as their assistants, are men of 
insufficient special knowledge and theo- 
retical training for the important work 
in which they are engaged. These men 
are constantly dealing with municipal 
engineering problems which they do not 
fully understand. Our Course offers 
to men already engaged in municipal 
engineering the opportunity to supple- 
ment their practical knowledge with 
the theory and principles underlying 
their work; it will give them a new and 
better insight. 

b. To the man engaged in the con- 
struction and maintenance of pave- 
ments our Course will prove invaluable. 

183 



It will enable him to select judiciously 
the pavement to meet the requirements 
of certain traffic; to establish the 
correct grade and cross-section of the 
pavement; and to lay the foundation 
and the surface material. 

c. Drainage, or storm-water sewer- 
age, is one of the most complex and 
least-understood subjects with which 
the municipal engineer has to deal. 
Our Course describes the subject of 
drainage in an easy manner. It treats 
of the rate of rainfall and the proportion 
of storm water that will reach the 
sewer during the period of greatest flow, 
and gives numerous hydraulic formulas 
used in the best municipal engineering 
practice in various cities. The student 
is taught how to represent graphically 
the equations for the rate of rainfall 
and the flow of storm water. Instruc- 
tion is given in the flow of water in 
conduits; and the design of egg-shaped 
sewers is treated. 

d. The greatly increased valuation 
of cit}^ property due to concentration of 
population has created a demand for 
more accurate and systematic surveys. 
Property lines, the extension of streets, 
and the laying out of new additions — 
all require skill and good judgment and 
improved methods of making surveys. 
Our Course will enable the student to 
make accurate surveys and to lay out 
new additions to towns or cities. 

e. In thickly populated communi- 
ties, good sewerage is absolutely essen- 
tial to good health. Ability to design 
and construct efficient systems is ac- 
quired through our Course. 

184 



/. The amount of money spent for 
roads and streets is astonishing. Many- 
states appropriate large sums for this 
purpose yearly, and enterprising cities 
and towns are spending money freely 
to improve their streets and avenues. 
Much of this money is wastefully spent 
by men that have not had the right 
kind of training. Our Course describes 
the laying out of streets and avenues; 
shows the best forms and sizes of city 
blocks and lots; treats of the complex 
problem of street intersections; and 
gives instruction in street grading, 
marking, and perpetuating street and 
property lines, and setting, witnessing, 
and recording monuments. This knowl- 
edge a municipal engineer must have in 
order to fill satisfactorily his important 
position. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 18 
months. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Municipal 
Engineering Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth S13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The stu- 
dent pays express charges. 

185 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to .the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and 
Keys of the Course. They are in fact 
an epitome of common-sense applica- 
tion. For easy gradation; for concise- 
ness; for intelligent adherence to the 
important features of their subjects; 
and for practicability, they are 
unequaled. From no other source can 
a student get so quickly so much 
money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to the 
particular subject of municipal engi- 
neering, and the details of that subject 
are explained with thoughtful care and 
a proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all 
the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
solution to a problem that might other- 
wise take hours to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style., 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 



theory and practice of the work on 
which they treat. The tried and proved 
facts, formulas, and processes used in 
the best municipal engineering practice 
in the country are here collected and 
bound into an orderly and systematic 
whole. 



187 



Hydraulic Engineering 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 122 

Algebra 105 

Logarithms 20 

Geometry and Trigonom- 
etry _ 75 

Elementary Mechanics . . 64 

Hydratdics 75 

Pneumatics 46 

Strength of Materials 70 

Surveying 92 

Examination Questions ... 83 

Surveying and Mapping . . 81 

Steam and Steam Engines 130 

Steam Boilers 149 

Waterwheels 91 

Hydraulic Machinery _. 105 

Water Supply and Distri- 
bution 146 

Irrigation 114 

Examination Questions. . . 61 _ 

Geometrical Drawing 20 1 

Mechanical Drawing .... 9 J 

Keys 3241 

Tables and Formulas 145/ 

2,127 



1st Bound 

Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 

4th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 

Illustrations, 891 
Instruction Papers, 32 
Drawing Plates, 10 
Mapping Plates, 5 
Bound Volumes, 4 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They teach how to design and 
install water-power plants, hydraulic 
machinery, and water-supply and irri- 
gation systems. 

b. They describe surveying instru- 
ments and explain their uses — giving all 
the directions in compass surveying, 
transit surveying, and leveling required 
by the hydraulic engineer. 

188 



c. They teach the principles of hy- 
draulics — treating of the flow of water 
in pipes, conduits, channels, brooks, and 
rivers. 

d. They contain descriptions of im- 
pulse turbines, reaction turbines, and 
overshot, breast, and undershot water- 
wheels. 

e. They show the best construction 
of sluices, flumes, penstocks, and gates. 

/. They show how to calculate the 
efficiency and the horsepower of water- 
wheels and turbines. 

g. They clearly explain the princi- 
ples of hydrostatics. 

]i. They teach how to calculate the 
sizes of pipes and conduits to convey 
given quantities of water. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Hydraulic Engineers and Assist- 
ants. 

b. Surveyors and Assistants. 

c. Persons engaged in designing and 
constructing waterworks and hydraulic 
power plants. 

d. Draftsmen and Designers in hy- 
draulic engineers' offices. 

e. City Engineers. 

/. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen of water-supply companies. 

g. Transitmen; Levelmen; all per- 
sons employed in a hydraulic engineer- 
ing corps. 

h. Men working in establishments 
where waterwheels and hydraulic ma- 
chinery are manufactured. 

i. Contractors and Builders of dams, 
reservoirs, and water-supply systems. 

y. Clerks in water companies' offices. 

189 



k. Mechanics that install water- 
wheels, turbines, and hydraulic machin- 
ery. 

/. Your^g Men desiring to practice 
hydraulic engineering as a profession. 

m. Men engaged in the laying out, 
the construction, and the maintenance 
of pipe lines and reservoirs. 

n. Men whose work requires a 
knowledge of the construction and the 
maintenance of water-purification plants. 

o. Men employed in the water- 
supply departments of large cities. 

p. Salesmen of hydraulic machinery. 

Note — The Hydraulic Engineering Course 
is a branch of the Civil Engineering Course 
and is intended for persons desiring a knowledge 
of waterwheels, waterworks, water-supply and 
irrigation systems, hydratdic machinery, and the 
development of water-power. If the prospective 
student wishes a broad knowledge of civil engi- 
neering, he should enroll for the Civil Engineer- 
ing Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The using of a portion of the 
enormous supply of energy at Niagara 
Falls and its transmission to adjacent 
cities and surrounding country has been 
for some years a matter of widespread 
public interest. Water-powers, because 
of their cheapness and practically inex- 
haustible supply, are being bought up 
by capitalists appreciating that much 
of the work of the future will be done 
by electricity — men realizing that elec- 
trical energy can be produced at the 
greatest profit by utilizing water-power 
now going to waste. There are hun- 
dreds of hydraulic-power plants in- 
stalled every year. It is evident that 
there is a large field for engineers making 
a specialty of water-power development. 

190 



b. The young man in search of a pro- 
fession can get a start in hydrauHc engi- 
neering by working as chainman or 
rodnian in a hydrauHc engineering corps, 
or by securing work as a draftsman in 
an establishment where hydrauHc ma- 
chinery is manufactured. Then, by 
supplementing his practical experience 
with the information contained in our 
Course, he can rapidly advance. There 
is in the whole range of civil engineering 
no field more promising than that of 
hydraulic engineering. 

c. The protection it affords against 
fire, the convenience it provides for the 
disposal of sewage, and the security it 
gives from disease — all make a good 
water supply a necessity in every com- 
munity. Wherever this necessity is felt 
and met, an opportunity is offered to 
the hydraulic engineer to establish a 
reputation and make money. 

d. There is a wide and growing field 
for engineering experts in irrigation. In 
the arid regions of the West there is an 
abundance of good land, and all it needs 
to become valuable is water. In Cali- 
fornia, Colorado, and other sections of 
the West, land formerly unproductive 
and valueless has through irrigation 
been made to yield profitable crops. 
The reclaiming of these vast sections 
involves large expenditures of money 
and gives employment to hundreds of 
engineers. Besides, the United States 
Government is reclaiming thousands of 
acres of arid land, constructing large 
dams and extensive irrigation systems, 
and opening up desirable opportunities 
for trained men 

191 



c. The larger cities are paying more 
attention each year to their water-sup- 
ply systems, expending large sums in 
the construction of dams and reservoirs 
to insure an unpolluted supply of drink- 
ing water. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 18 
months. The average student requires 
a'little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Hydraulic Engi- 
neering Course should have our Com- 
plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The student 
pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason 
He is Unable to Send Us 
Written Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and 
Keys of the Course. They are therefore 
an epitome of common-sense application. 
For easy gradation; for conciseness; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are unequaled. From 

192 



no other source can a student get so 
quickly so much money-earning knowl- 
edge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subject of hydraulic engi- 
neering, and the details of that subject 
are explained with thoughtful care and 
a proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all the 
initial letters under which it is likely to 
be sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items' classified and indexed, the student 
can find in a moment the solution of a 
problem it might otherwise take hours 
to master. 

c. They are written in simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of which 
they treat. The tried and proved facts, 
formulas, and processes used in the best 
hydraulic engineering practice in the 
country are here collected and bound 
into an orderly and systematic whole. 



193 



Complete Architectural 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 122 

2 Formulas 12 

3 Geometry and Mensura- 

tion 60 

4 Masonry _. 320 

Examination Questions. . . 39 

Keys 96 

5 Carpentry 146 

6 Joinery 105 

7 Stair Building 56 

8 Geometrical Drawing 77 

9 Architectural Drawing ... 98 

10 Estimating and Calctila- 

ting Quantities 97 

11 Specifications 58 

Examination Questions ... 23 

Keys 24 

12 Architectural Engineer- 

ing 298 

13 Ornamental Ironwork. ... 118 
Examination Questions ... 22 
Keys 50 

14 Ornamental Drawing 29^ 

15 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

16 History of Architecture . . 187 

17 Architectural Design 257 

Examination Questions. . . 15 

Keys. 10 

18 Heating and Ventilation 

of Buildings 196 

19 Painting and Decorating . 138 

20 Building Superintendence 143 
Examination Questions. . . 19 
Kevs 16 

21 Roofing 116 

22 Sheet-Metal Work 61 

23 Electric-Light Wiring and 

Bellwork 77 

24 Plumbing and Gas-Fitting 166 

25 Contracts and Perrnits . . . 104 
Examination Questions .. . 29 
Keys 26 J 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 3,487 

Illustrations. 1,933 
Instruction Papers, 33 
Drawing Plates, 46 
Bound Volumes 6 



194 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the mathematical 
knowledge the student must have to 
practice architecture. 

b. They contain full instruction in 
dramng — showing how to make plans, 
sections, elevations, and details. 

c. They treat fully of masonry. 
Fireproofing and plastering are clearly 
explained. 

d. They teach how to estimate and 
calculate quantities, giving a worked- 
out example showing exactly how to 
estimate the cost of a modem wooden 
house. 

e. They give instruction in the 
graphic analysis of stresses — showing 
how to determine accurately by means 
of diagrams the stresses in frame struc- 
tures, such as roof trusses, etc. 

/. They teach the student how to 
calculate the strength of timber, steel 
columns, beams, girders, and trussed 
girders. 

g. They will enable the student to 
calculate the stresses, bearing loads, and 
working strength of rivets, pins, etc. 

h. They give thorough instruction 
regarding the various building mate- 
rials, such as cement, mortar, con- 
crete, brick, and stone. 

i. They contain tables giving the 
weights of different materials for walls, 
floors, and roofs. 

;. They treat thoroughly of orna- 
mental ironwork. 

k. They give the student full instruc- 
tion in the proportionment of classic 
orders — such as the Tuscan, the Doric, 

195 



the Ionic, etc. — enabling him to give the 
proper proportions to any particular one 
he may be called on to design. 

/. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of the history of architecture. 

m. They teach architectural de- 
signing. 

n. They thoroughly explain the 
heating and ventilating of buildings. 
Reliable instruction in plumbing and 
gas-fitting is given. 

o. They give instruction in painting 
and decorating. Graining, stenciling, 
gilding, marbling, and paper hanging 
are treated of. 

p. They show how to superintend 
the erection of buildings. 

q. They treat of roofing. 

r. They explain the construction 
of sheet-metal work, such as metal roofs, 
cornices, gutters, skylights, ventilators, 
etc. 

5. They treat of the legal relations 
of the owner, architect, and builder, and 
give instruction as to the manner of pro- 
curing building permits, making con- 
tracts, etc. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Architects. 

h. Building Superintendents and 
Foremen. 

c. Contractors and Builders. 

d. Building Inspectors. 

e. Architectural Draftsmen. 

/. College Graduates having studied 
architecture. 

g. Structural Engineers. 

h. Students and Graduates of high 
schools wishing to study architecture. 

196 



i. 


Clerks in architects and 


ers' ( 


offices. 


/• 


Carpenters. 


k. 


Joiners. 


I. 


Lumber Dealers. 


m. 


Mill Men. 


n. 


Stair Builders. 


o. 


Real-Estate Dealers. 


P- 


Insurance Adjusters. 


q- 


Masons. 


r. 


Plasterers. 


s. 


Bricklayers. 


t. 


Youne Men wanting to 


architecture. 


u. 


Estimate Clerks. 



build- 



study 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Never before has there been so 
great a building boom. Never has the 
architect been busier; and never were 
the opportunities better for the young 
man to enter the pleasant and well-paid 
profession of architecture. There is 
probably no calling today that has a 
brighter future or one that yields the 
earnest worker more self-satisfaction or 
keener pleasure. The work has a pecu- 
liar fascination that increases as the 
student proceeds, constantly inspiring 
him to excel every previous effort. Our 
instruction is just what the young man, 
tired of irksome work at low pay and 
determined to better his condition, is 
looking for; it provides him with the 
information he must have to reach the 
highest and best-paid positions. Our 
Course will increase the architectural 
draftsman's usefulness and multiply his 
chances for promotion. To the prac- 
ticing architect it will bring increased 
opportunities and income. 

197 



b. Hundreds of young men are today 
in good-paying positions as a result of 
our architectural instruction. It does 
not take an architect long to discover 
the employe that is trying to win pro- 
motion. And when the architect does 
learn, the promotion soon follows. Our 
Course forms the solid foundation upon 
which the student can build a successful 
career. 

c. The architect designs the building 
to meet the requirements it is intended 
for. His plans must represent a pleas- 
ing and useful structure. A building 
may be artistic and still be a failure 
from a utilitarian standpoint, or it may 
meet the demands of utility and yet 
present a bad appearance. To design 
a building in which artistic effect and 
utility are harmoniously combined, the 
architect must know the principles of 
architectural design and the details of 
building construction. Our Course gives 
them. 

d. By supplementing his knowledge 
of drawing with our instruction, the 
architectural draftsman can soon be- 
come a full-fledged architect, able to 
design a modem building and to super- 
intend its erection. Some of the stu- 
dents of our Complete Architectural 
Course are in business for themselves 
and are earning from $5,000 to $10,000 
a year. 

e. Knowledge is the most valuable 
asset a young man can have: it is the 
safest investment; for no one can rob 
him of knowledge, and he can coin it 
into dollars. Architectural knowledge 
is in demand, and with our help and his 
spare time the student can increase his 

198 



earning power and multiply his use- 
fulness. 

/. By enrolling for our Complete 
Architectural Course and taking the 
drawing section first, the student can 
soon qualify for a paying position in 
an architect's office. Once started, by 
putting into practice what he learns from 
our Course, the student can materi- 
ally shorten the time spent in making 
blueprints, tracings, etc., and have 
more responsible work assigned to him. 
Through further study and his daily 
work at the office, the student will 
acquire proficiency and forge ahead 
rapidly. 

g. The first step toward increased 
pay for the carpenter, mason, and other 
building tradesman is the ability to read 
working drawings. To such men the 
knowledge contained in our Course is 
the key that releases them from a life 
spent in subordinate, poorly paid, and 
uncertain positions into a field of work 
that is more pleasant, better paid, and 
in which there are practically unlimited 
opportunities for advancement. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 
2 years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Complete Archi- 
tectural Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 

199 



equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The student 
pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course, 
which were prepared to give the student 
that must study out of the presence of 
a teacher a good knowledge of archi- 
tecture. Instruction for such a stu- 
dent must be so forcefully written as to 
make impossible a misunderstanding of 
what is read. Because our Bound Vol- 
umes meet this exacting requirement, 
they are universally accepted as the 
best for home study. So clearly are 
they written, the student can take the 
knowledge into his mind unaided. 

b. They contain the best that is 
known about architecture and building 
construction, and are invaluable as 
reference books. Indeed, no reference 
library on architecture is complete with- 
out them. Some students have won 
promotion by studying the Bound Vol- 
umes in spare time at home and without 
submitting recitations to us. The vol- 
umes are so fully indexed, the student 
can find in an instant any subject of 
which they treat. Much of the infor- 
mation they contain cannot be found 
elsewhere w4th anything like so much 

200 



ease. The United States Government 
uses our Architectural Bound Volumes 
as a reference work in the office of the 
supervising architect at Washington. 
This fact alone proves their inestimable 
value for reference purposes. 

c. They are a storehouse of archi- 
tectural knowledge, and no one inter- 
ested in this subject can afford to be 
without them. Bearing directly on 
the subject of architecture, they explain 
the thousand and one details that arise 
in architectural design and building 
construction. 



201 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Building Contractors' Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 122 1 

2 Formulas 12 

3 Geometry and Mensura- 

tion 60 

4 Masonry 320 

Examination Questions. . . 39 

Keys 96 

5 Carpentry 146 

6 Joinery 105 

7 Stair Building 56 

8 Geometrical Drawing 77 

9 Architectural Drawing ... 98 

10 Estimating and Calcula- 

ting Quantities 97 

11 Specifications 58 

Examination Questions ... 23 

Keys 24 J 

Pages 1,333 

Illustrations, 702 
Instruction Papers, 14 
Drawing Plates, 17 
Bound Volumes, 2 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the mathematical- 
knowledge the student requires in prac- 
ticing building contracting. 

h. They treat fully of both stone 
and brick masonry. Fireproofing and 
plastering are clearly described. 

c. They show how to design and 
construct stairways. 

d. They teach how to draw plans, 
sections, and elevations, and to make 
tracings. Blueprinting is explained. 

e. They furnish reliable instruction 
in estimating and calculating quanti- 
ties — showing in detail by a worked-out 
example how to estimate the cost of a 
house. This information is of vital 
importance to the contractor; for he 

202 



must set his price before he starts to 
build and unless he can estimate accu- 
rately the cost of work he may lose 
money. 

/. They enable the student to write 
correct specifications. 

g. They include instruction in car- 
pentry and joinery. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Contractors. 

b. Builders. 

c. Carpenters. 

d. Joiners. 

e. Stair Builders. 
/. Stone Cutters. 
g. Masons. 

h. Plasterers. 

i. Bricklayers. 

j. Clerks employed in contractors' 
and builders' offices. 
[^jik. Architectural Draftsmen. 

/. Building Inspectors. 
■'' m. Persons wanting to become fore- 
men or independent contractors. 

n. Foremen. 

o. Teamsters. 

' Note — The Building Contractors' Course 
is intended for those wanting a good knowledge 
of building operations, but that do not want to 
study architecture. This Course will help the 
student become a contractor and builder; it 
will qualify him to contract for and to build 
modem wooden structures. The person wanting 
a full knowledge of architecture should enroll for 
the_ Complete Architectural Course. _ Those 
desiring to take up architectural drawing and 
designing — but designing not so fully as treated 
in our Complete Architectural Course 
— should enroll for the Architectural Drawing 
and Designing Course. Persons wanting to 
study only architectural drawing should enroll 
for the Architectural Drawing Course. 

203 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Thousands of buildings are being 
erected every year. Never before were 
building operations conducted on so 
great a scale; never has the contractor 
and builder had better opportunities 
than at present. But to succeed he 
must understand both the practical and 
the theoretical sides of his business. 
He must know how to make plans, 
figure the cost of materials, write speci- 
fications, and superintend building 
operations. Building contracting is a 
business open to every ambitious build- 
ing tradesman ; and our Course opens the 
door of independence and success to 
every carpenter, mason, plasterer, and 
other artisan no longer content to work 
for wages and under the direction of a 
foreman or a contractor. Our instruc- 
tion will help the student become a 
builder's superintendent or a contractor 
and builder. A number of students of 
our Building Contractors' Course 
have succeeded in acquiring large and 
profitable businesses for themselves. 

h. The contractor and builder is 
usually a man that has acquired by 
experience a practical knowledge of 
carpentry, masonry, or some other 
branch of the building trades. He 
starts in business for himself by con- 
tracting for that part of the work with 
which he is most familiar. If he is a 
man of good judgment and business 
ability, he may meet with fair success; 
but he soon learns that to become a 
successful contractor he must have tech- 
nical knowledge that he cannot get by 
experience. He finds himself hampered 

204 



by his inability to estimate accurately 
the cost of material, labor, etc., and in 
drawing up correct specifications. Our 
Course is specially suited to the man 
just entering the building contracting 
field; it will enable him to make accu- 
rate estimates, draw up contracts, and 
fulfil them with satisfaction to the owner 
and with profit to himself. Through our 
instruction the student gets a thorough 
knowledge of general building opera- 
tions ; it will help him become a success- 
ful contractor. 

c. To do his work successfully a 
building contractor must know how 
to read architects' working drawings. 
Indeed, without this knowledge it is 
unsafe for him to engage in building; 
for unless he clearly understands the 
drawings, he cannot carry out the work 
correctly — and an error in construction 
may cost him his reputation as a 
builder. Our Building Contractors' 
Course is his surest protection; it will 
enable him to read working drawings, 
make plans, sections, and elevations of 
buildings, and to carry out his work 
according to specifications. 

d. The building of wooden stairways 
is probably the highest branch of 
joinery. More care is required in their 
planning, more ingenuity in setting 
them out, and more skilful M^orkman- 
ship in their construction than in any 
other part of a building. The stair 
builder is usually a carpenter or a joiner 
that has been promoted because of his 
skill, and he is well paid. In no way 
can the carpenter or the joiner more 
quickly advance to the stair builder's 
position than through our help. By 

205 



studying our Course, the student can 
soon learn to design and construct stair- 
ways; and the employer is quick to 
notice this ability and to advance the 
man that has it. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Building Con- 
tractors' Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready 
to study Geometrical Drawing. Our 
Outfit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The student 
pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They embrace the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw- 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course, and 
give a clear and concise treatment of 
building contracting. 

b. They are for reference purposes 
the most valuable work ever prepared 
on building contracting. Containing 
as they do in logical order all the sub- 
jects properly included in a building 

206 



contractors' course, the Bound Volumes 
give information that will greatly 
enlarge the student's knowledge and 
multiply his usefulness. They are fully 
indexed. Every important item is 
indexed according to all initial letters 
under which it is likely to be sought. 

c. They were prepared to meet the 
needs of the student that must study 
with no instructor by his side. Instruc- 
tion for this purpose must be so force- 
fully written that the student can take 
it into his mind unaided. So well does 
our instruction meet this requirement, 
many of our students, by studying in 
spare time at home, have acquired a 
good knowledge of building contracting 
— knowledge that has placed them in 
good positions. It is because our 
Bound Volumes are so clearly writiien 
and illustrated as to make impossible 
a misunderstanding of what is read 
that they are universally accepted as 
the best for home study. 



207 



structural Engineering Course 



121 



38 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 1 

Arithmetic 

Geometry , and Mensura- 
tion 

Elements of Algebra .... 
Algebraic Equations and 
Elements of Trigonom- 
etry 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Structural Drafting 107 

Examination Questions ... 32 

Keys 102 

Tables of Natural Sines, 

Cosines, etc 18 

Loads in Structures 32" 

Properties of Sections .... 46 
Materials of Structural 

Engineering 106 

Beams and Girders 226 

Columns and Struts 128 

Details of Construction. . . 52 
Graphical Analysis of 

Stresses 161 

Examination Questions ... 41 

Kevs 47 

Statics of Masonry 213 



1st Bound 
Volume 



Heavy Foundations. 

Retaining Walls 

Fireproofing 

Roof-Truss Design 

Wind Bracing 

Specifications 

Examination Questions . , 
Keys 



70 
34 
110 
176 
67 
62 
30 
40 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,272 

Illustrations, 1,117 
Instruction Papers, 36 
Drawing Plates, 20 
Bound Volumes, 3 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They are the most thorough, prac- 
tical, and comprehensive ever prepared 
on structural engineering. 

b. They contain numerous examples 
relating to the practical work of struc- 
tural engineering. 

208 



c. They give full instruction in the 
graphical analysis of stresses — showing 
how to determine accurately by means 
of diagrams the stresses in any frame 
structure, such as a roof truss or a 
wind brace. 

d. They contain thorough instruc- 
tion in roof-truss design — showing noted 
architects' and engineers' working draw- 
ings of both wood and steel trusses. 

e. They teach the student how to 
calculate the strength of timber, iron or 
steel columns, beams, girders, and 
trussed girders. 

/. They thoroughly treat of rein- 
forced concrete construction — giving 
rules for calculating the strength of 
beams, columns, and floors. 

g. They embrace thorough instruc- 
tion in the stability of arches, buttresses, 
retaining walls, and heavy foundations. 

h. They will enable the student to 
calculate the stresses, bearing loads, and 
working strength of rivets, pins, joints, 
etc. 

i. They give full instruction in wind 
bracing. 

y. They teach the student how to 
determine the "moment of inertia," 
"radius of gyration," and "section 
modulus" of the various sections used 
in modern building construction. 

k. They are replete with illustrations. 
A large number of these illustrations are 
actual working drawings, and are in- 
valuable to the student having to design 
timber, masonry, and structural details. 

/. They explain fireproofing. 

w. They treat of eccentric loads on 
columns and explain the provisions 
necessary to sustain such loads. 

209 



n. They give thorough instruction 
regarding the various building materials, 
such as cement, mortar, concrete, brick, 
and stone. 

o. They contain tables giving the 
weights of different materials for floors 
and roofs. 

p. They are so practical, frequent 
reference to them will give the student 
knowledge worth many times their cost 
— even if he has no time for systematic 
study and recitation. 

q. They contain tables giving the 
strength of structural columns and of 
the moments of inertia of structural 
steel shapes. 

r. They teach the student expanded- 
metal, or monolithic, construction. 

5. They thoroughly treat of dead 
loads and live loads of buildings. Full 
information is given regarding snow 
loads and wind pressure. 

t. They give instruction in the design 
of timber, cast-iron, and steel column 
connections. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Structural Engineers. 

h. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen of construction companies and 
structural engineering concerns. 

c. Structural Iron and Steel Con- 
tractors and Builders. 

d. Draftsmen in steel mills and in 
the offices of architects, structural engi- 
neers, and contractors. 

e. Steel Workers and Steel Erectors. 
/. Civil Engineers. 

g. Mechanical Engineers. 
h. Municipal Engineers. 
i. Architects. 

210 



;. Building Inspectors. 

k. Students and Graduates of our 
Architectural Courses. 

/. College Graduates having studied 
civil engineering, mechanical engineer- 
ing, or architecture. 

m. Mill Contractors and Builders. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Great progress has been made in 
modem building construction and the 
use of structural steel in the last ten 
years. The construction of a high 
office building — the "sky-scraper" — 
requires the highest engineering skill. 
From the very foundation every beam 
and girder must be carefully designed 
and every column and strut properly 
proportioned. The greatest care is 
required in erection. Every precaution 
for safety must be taken; and flaws in 
construction must be discovered and 
corrected. Our Course is specially 
suited for superintendents and foremen 
of structural engineering concerns; it 
will give them a thorough knowledge of 
large building construction ; will enable 
them to design and superintend the 
building of heavy timber, iron, steel, 
concrete, and fireproof structures; it 
is the only thorough, practical, up-to- 
date Course in structural engineering. 

h. Probably no portion of a great 
structure requires more careful atten- 
tion than the foundation. In fact, the 
foundation for a high building to be 
erected on treacherous soil probably 
constitutes the most difficult problem 
with which the structural engineer has 
to contend. The designing of the 



foundation cannot be done on guess- 
work. Failure to distribute the load 
correctly may cause the structure to 
settle unevenly or crack, which may 
cost thousands of dollars. Our Course 
gives full instruction in the manner in 
which heavy foundations are designed 
for all kinds of soil. 

c. Increasing city population and 
the consequent scarcity and high price 
of building lots, together with the 
demand for fireproof construction, have 
made imperative the development of 
iron, steel, and concrete "sky-scraper" 
construction. Builders, foremen, and 
other mechanics competent to handle 
the work are scarce. Architects and 
contractors are in need of capable men. 
As a result, high salaries are paid. The 
building mechanic, the foreman, or the 
contractor that acquires a practical 
knowledge of structural engineering 
will have many opportunities to make 
money in the next few years. 

d. Because of the scarcity of men 
competent to design and superintend 
steel, heavy timber, and concrete con- 
struction, most of such work is left to 
a few engineers and construction com- 
panies. But there is no good reason 
why architects and builders should 
allow these big contracts to pass. They 
can handle this remunerative work 
themselves if they acquire a thorough 
knowledge of structural engineering. 
In fact, the architect and the builder 
m.ust learn to do this work for self-pro- 
tection . With most of the office , munici- 
pal, hotel, and mill buildings being 
erected by large structural companies, 
the field of the architect and the builder 

212 



is practically narrowed down to house 
erection. By supplementing his present 
knowledge of building design and con- 
struction with the information con- 
tained in our Course, the architect or 
the builder can successfully plan and 
build according to the most scientific 
principles of structural engineering. 

t-. Our Course is the only Struc- 
tural Engineering Course that can 
be studied by persons not having a 
knowledge of higher mathematics. Our 
Course gives exact and reliable informa- 
tion concerning the designing of modern 
large buildings, in so far as their frame- 
work, walls, foundations, etc. are con- 
cerned; and this is accomplished by 
using only the most elementary princi- 
ples of mathematics. 

/. Structural draftsmen are always 
in demand, and are probably the best- 
paid class of draftsmen. Our Paper on 
structural drafting is in accord with 
the best drafting- room practice. We 
teach our student to draw his Plates 
exactly as he will be called on to make 
drawings in actual practice. On enter- 
ing a drafting room he will thus be 
fully prepared to begin his work with- 
out having to wait to learn new meth- 
ods. This is a decided advantage and 
will help him make rapid progress. 

g. Written by men of long experi- 
ence as structural engineers and design- 
ers — men that have designed and super- 
intended the erection of some of the 
largest and finest buildings in the 
country — our Course is replete with 
the latest and best ideas in modern 
building construction. 

213 



h. To the steel worker and the steel 
erector our Structural Engineering 
Course offers an opportunity to 
advance from the laborious work of 
the shop or the field to the less arduous 
and better-paid position of foreman 
or superintendent, or to a position in 
direct line of promotion in the engineer- 
ing department. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 2 years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Structural 
Engineering Course should have our 
Complete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for S7.95. The student 
pays express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
These Papers having successfuly met 
the exacting requirements of thousands 
of students, it is evident that the Bound 



Volumes treat of principles and applica- 
tions in structural engineering with 
more thoroughness and conciseness than 
is possible in a work prepared on any- 
other plan. They are in fact an epitome 
of common-sense application. For easy 
gradation ; for conciseness ; for intelligent 
adherence to the important features of 
their subjects; and for practicability, 
they are unequaled. From no other 
source can a student get so quickly so 
much money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subject of structural 
engineering, and the details of that 
subject are explained with thoughtful 
care and a proper regard for the possible 
shortcomings of the reader. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
solution of a problem it might other- 
wise take hours to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. The tried and proved 
facts, formulas, and processes used in the 
best structural engineering practice in 
the country are here collected and bound 
into an orderly and systematic whole. 

215 



General Chemistry Course 

Eight subjects are taught in the 
General Chemistry Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain twenty-one, as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE! 

Arithmetic 134 

Elementary Algebra 59 



30 
166 
35 
97 
10 



Mensuration 

Physics 

Examination Questions 

Keys 

Tables 

Inorganic Chemistry 543 1 

Examination Questions. . . 22 > 

Keys 22 J 

Qualitative Analysis 240 

Quantitative Analysis 232 

Examination Questions. . . 17 

Keys 14 

Quantitative Analysis 425 

Examination Questions 

Keys 

Organic Chemistry 490 

^ • • - ■• 16 

16 J 



t251 
13 
12] 



Examination Questions. . . 
Keys 

Sulphuric Acid 116 

Alkalies and Hydrochloric 

Acid 224 

Manufacture of Iron 67 

Manufacture of Steel 191 

Examination Questions .. . 16 

Keys . 17 

Packing-House Industries 168 
Cottonseed Oil and Prod- 
ucts 138 

Manufacture of Leather . . 95 

Manufacture of Soap 178 

Examination Questions. . . 14 

Keys 12 

Manufacture of Cement . . 110 

Manufacture of Paper. ... 156 

Manufacture of Sugar. ... 119 

Petroleum and Products . 126 

Manufacture of Gas 84 

Examination Questions .. . 15 

Keys 15 

Pages 4,454 

216 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



7th Bound 
Volume 



8th Bound 
Volume 



Illustrations, 836 
Instruction Papers, 68 
Bound Volumes, 8 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. 

The eight Bound VoltTmes containing the 
entire Chemistry and Chemical Technology 
Course are furnished to each student of the 
General Chemistry Course. 

Arithmetic, Elementary Algebra, and 
Mensuration give the student the mathe- 
matical knowledge he needs in reading 
chemical formulas, making analyses, 
and performing the calculations that 
the chemist has to do. 

Physics treats of matter and its 
properties; and of gravitation, heat 
light, magnetism, and electricity. 

Inorganic Chemistry treats of chemi- 
cal elements and their compounds and 
of the principles of chemical theory, 
such as the laws of chemical combina- 
tion, atomic weights, molecular weights, 
chemical calculations, etc. Each ele- 
ment is treated separately in regard 
to its properties, appearances, and 
behavior toward other elements or 
compounds. 

Qualitative Analysis teaches how to 
separate and identify the ingredients 
contained in substances. 

Quantitative Analysis teaches how to 
discover how much of the ingredients 
is contained. 

Organic Chemistry treats of the 
numerous chemical compounds that 
always contain carbon and hydrogen, 
and in which other elements such as 
oxygen, nitrogen, etc. are frequently 
found. Organic chemistry is some- 
times called the chemistry of the 
carbon compounds. 

217 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject that 
it is necessary for the student to study 
in order to gain a general knowledge of 
chemistry. 

b. They include instruction in all 
the elementary subjects necessary to 
be understood before the study of 
chemistry is begun. 

c. They require the student to study 
no more mathematics than he has to 
use in chemistry. 

d. They give the student actual 
practice in analysis. They require him 
to exercise his skill in making analyses 
for the Schools. 

e. They contain all the detailed 
illustrations necessary to give the stu- 
dent a thorough knowledge of how to 
use chemical apparatus. 

/. They are of necessity concise and 
clear; for the student studies them out 
of the presence of a teacher. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Chemical Engineers. 

h. Chemists and Chemists' Assistants. 

c. Employes in iron and steel works. 

d. Persons employed in chemical 
works. 

e. Persons engaged in the manufac- 
ture of photographic supplies. 

/. Employes in electric storage-bat- 
tery factories. 

g. Salesmen of chemicals and chem- 
ical apparatus. 

h. Drug Clerks. 

i. Mining Engineers. 

j. Assayers. 

218 



k. Young Men attending school that 
desire to pursue the study of chemistry 
outside of regular school hours. 

/. Experimenters and Inventors. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Chemistry is the mother of all 
sciences. To her we look for the knowl- 
edge that enables us to select pure 
foods; to retard the progress of disease; 
to quicken the processes of life. Stu- 
dents ambitious of achieving success in 
some branch will find limitless oppor- 
tunities in pharmaceutical chemistry. 
To such our General Chemistry 
Course is offered. The Course is not 
in any sense a Course in pharmacy; but 
it gives the student the general knowl- 
edge of chemistry he must have in 
order to understand the composition of 
medicinal substances. 

h. Analytic chemistry is becoming 
more important every year. Manufac- 
turers, realizing that the value of their 
finished products is dependent on the 
purity of their raw materials, are eager 
to secure skilled analysts and are glad 
to pay good salaries. 

c. Mining engineers and metallur- 
gists must know the composition of 
their ores in order to decide what fluxes 
are required in obtaining the metals. 
None but the analytic chemist can give 
this knowledge, and he is well paid for 
his services. 

d. There is a broad field for students 
that will prepare themselves for the 
work of the toxicologist, which pertains 
to poisons, their effects, antidotes, and 
recognition. Our General Chemistry 

219 



Course teaches how to analyze adul- 
terated foods and discover the poisons 
contained therein. 

e. The student may build up a large 
and profitable business for himself, 
beginning without capital other than 
his analytic outfits and the knowl- 
edge acquired from our General 
Chemistry Course. Physicians need 
the services of analysts; householders 
require analysis of their drinking watei;; 
operators of boiler plants want their 
feedwater tested in order that its im- 
purities may be neutralized; fertilizers 
are to be examined ; and dairy products 
are to be analyzed. In fact, there is in 
almost every community a good deal 
of important chemical work that has to 
be either left undone or sent to some 
far-away laboratory, simply because 
there is no one at hand to perform it. 

Remarks 

The General Chemistry Course is 
intended for those that desire a general 
knowledge of chemistry and chemical 
analysis. When a student wants to 
study the application of chemical prin- 
ciples to manufacturing processes, he 
should enroll for the Chemistry and 
Chemical Technology Course, or one 
of its subordinate Courses whose title 
indicates that it treats of the subject he 
is especially interested in. For example : 
if a student wants to study the manu- 
facture of soap, he should enroll for the 
Chemistry and Chemical Technology 
Course, or the Chemistry and Manu- 
facture OF Soap Course. In no event 
will the instruction in soap manufacture 
be given apart from the full Chemistry 

220 



AND Manufacture of Soap Course ; for 
the stvident cannot comprehend the tech- 
nique of soap manufacture without a 
thorough knowledge of the preceding in- 
struction. This example applies to all 
the Courses subordinate to the Chem- 
istry AND Chemical Technology 
Course. 

To a person already enrolled for our 
General Chemistry Course we will 
furnish instruction in applied chemistry 
— such as Manufacture of Soap, Manu- 
facture of Iron, etc. — for an additional 
charge of $5 for each subject. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 2 years. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Laboratory Apparatus Required 

The student requires two analytic 
outfits; one for qualitative analysis, 
which may be bought through the 
Schools for $21 cash; and one for 
quantitative analysis, which may be 
bought through the Schools for $23.50 
cash. Express charges must be paid 
by the student. The student is not 
required to buy his outfits through the 
Schools, although he will undoubtedly 
save money by doing so. The con- 
tents of these outfits are too many to 
be described here; a complete descrip- 
tion is given in the circular entitled 
"Applied Chemistry." 

221 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They embrace the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, and 
Keys of the Course, and give a full and 
clear treatment of the principles, facts, 
and processes of general chemistry and 
chemical manufacture. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia, because they treat of 
each subject fully and in detail. They 
are indexed so completely that any par- 
ticular reference can be easily found. 
They excel in conciseness of statement 
and clearness of explanation. 

c. They contain information so prac- 
tical that some students, after learning 
enough of the elementary mathematics 
to be able to apply the rules, have with- 
out further recitation been able to 
secure prominent positions and obtain 
large salaries in their trades and 
professions. 



222 



Chemistry and Chemical Tech- 
nology Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 134^ 

Elementary Algebra 59 

Mensuration 30 

Physics 166 

Examination Questions. . . 35 

Keys 97 

Tables 10 



10 



Inorganic Chemistry .... 543 ' 

Examination Questions ... 22 

Keys 22 

Qualitative Analysis . . . 
Quantitative Analysis. . . 
Examination Questions . . 

Keys 

Quantitative Analysis. . . . 425" 

Examination Questions. . . 13 

Kej^s 12, 

Organic Chemistry 490 " 

Examination Questions. . . 16 

Keys 16. 

Sulphuric Acid 116" 

Alkalies and Hydrochloric 

Acid 224 

Manufacture of Iron .... 67 

Manufacture of Steel 191 

Examination Questions. . . 16 

Keys 17. 

Packing-House Industries 168" 
Cottonseed Oil and Prod- 
ucts 138 

Manufacture of Leather . . 95 

Manufacture of Soap 178 

Examination Questions .. . 14 

Keys 12 J 

Manufacture of Cement . . 110 

Man-ufacture of Paper. ... 156 

Mantifacture of Sugar. ... 119 

Petroleum and Products. . 126 > 

Manufacture of Gas 84 

Examination Questions. . . 15 

Keys 15 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



7th Bound 
Volume 



8th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 4,454 

Illustrations, 836 
Instruction Papers, 68 
Bound Volumes 8 



223 



Sulphuric Acid gives the student a 
clear idea as to just what sulphuric acid 
is, and what place it occupies among 
the oxides and the acids of sulphur. 
The formation of sulphuric acid is 
fully explained, and the principles 
governing its manufacture are clearly 
set forth. Raw materials are described 
and classified. The production of sul- 
phur dioxide or burner gas is thor- 
oughly treated, and clear illustrations 
and descriptions of furnaces and burners 
are given. Then follows a thorough 
explanation of the apparatus and the 
processes involved in all stages of sul- 
phuric-acid manufacture. 

Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid treats 
of the processes of obtaining salt from 
natural and artificial brines; and the 
chemical, electrolytic, and analytic 
methods pursued in the manufacture of 
soda, hydrochloric acid, bleaching 
powder, and kindred products. 

Manufacture of Iron treats of the 
various materials, appliances, and proc- 
esses employed in casting pig iron. 
Furnaces of superior dimensions for 
different kinds of stock are described, 
and their various parts — such as tuyeres, 
notches, bells and hoppers, explo- 
sion doors, etc. — are illustrated and 
explained. Clear and concise instruc- 
tion is given on the charging, blowing 
in, and blowing out of furnaces. Fur- 
nace reactions, slags, and calculations 
of the proportions of the constituents 
necessary to produce the required 
slag are included. The elements con- 
tained in iron and the present methods 
of classifying and grading it are de- 
scribed. 

224 



Manufacture of Steel explains the 
details of the open-hearth, the Bes- 
semer, and the crucible processes of 
production. Furnaces of standard types 
are illustrated, and their operation is 
clearly and concisely described. Full 
instrviction is given in the making of 
producer gas. Tables are included 
showing the analyses of fuels and slags, 
and the other analyses of value in steel 
manufacture. Attention is paid to 
alloy steels, such as tungsten steel, 
manganese steel, nickel steel, chrome 
steel, etc. The making of steel castings 
is elaborately explained. 

Packing-House Industries gives briefly 
the history and breadth of the meat- 
packing industry, and explains the 
methods of conducting modern estab- 
lishments. The various animal prod- 
ucts and their dispositions are fully 
explained. The manufacture of all 
kinds of lards, tallows, greases, and 
oils is followed from the beginning of 
the processes to the delivery of the 
finished products. Excerpts are given 
from the amended rules regulating the 
transactions in lard among the members 
of the New York Produce Exchange. 
Detailed instruction is given in meat 
canning and in the manufacture of 
beef extract, butterine, and glue. Prod- 
ucts such as blood albumin and digest- 
ive ferments (pepsin, peptone, and the 
like) are given account of. The manu- 
facture of fertilizers is clearly set forth, 
and formulas are given for fertilizer 
mixtures. A considerable part of this 
instruction is devoted to analytic 
methods and tests of products, and to 
the determination of grade of oils, 



tallows, greases, etc. This treatise is 
replete with detailed illustrations show- 
ing the construction of special machin- 
ery and the arrangement of plants. 

Cottonseed Oil and Products gives the 
history and development of cottonseed- 
oil manufacture, explains the applica- 
tion of chemistry in the industry, and 
describes the mills and general principles 
involved in the production of oil. 
Excerpts are included from the rules 
of the New York Produce Exchange, 
regulating transactions in cottonseed 
oil. The rules of the Interstate Cotton- 
seed Crushers' Association are also 
given. The analytic methods appli- 
cable to cottonseed products are fully 
set forth. This instruction is thor- 
oughly illustrated. 

Manufacture of Leather gives thor- 
ough instruction regarding the various 
tanning agents, tanning materials, etc. 
The leaching of bark is described, and 
grinding mills and machinery for drum 
leaching are illustrated in detail. A 
fine illustrated description of the 
structure of animal skin is given. The 
preparatory treatment and the tanning 
of sole-leather hides are concisely 
explained. Instruction is given in the 
manufacture of upper leather; bleach- 
ing; dyeing; the measurement of leather; 
and the analysis of tanning materials. 
The machinery used in leather manu- 
facture is illustrated. 

Manufacture of Soap begins with a 
complete definition of soap, and a 
general outline of the manufacture of 
a settled soap. An exhaustive treatise 
on animal and vegetable soap stocks is 
given; and the manufacture of alkalies 

226 



is described. The instruction in the 
chemistry of soap manufacture treats 
of glycerides and their properties, the 
behavior of fats and oils toward 
saponif3ang agents, etc. This is fol- 
lowed with a thorough explanation of 
the processes of soap manufacture, 
containing fine illustrations of the 
machinery and appliances used. The 
chemical examination of raw materials 
and products is concisely and clearly 
set forth. 

Manufacture of Cement gives a brief 
history of the early use of lime as a 
binding agent for stone, brick, and 
other materials, and follows with an 
important treatise on the discoveries 
and steps that have led to the modern 
methods of cement making. The chemi- 
cal nature of limestone, the burning of 
lime, and similar subjects are treated of. 
Full instruction is given in the manu- 
facture of the following cements: 
natural (Roman, or Rosendale) ; puz- 
zolan; slag; slag Portland; silica Port- 
land; magnesium; and Portland. The 
calculation of cement mixtures is thor- 
oughly explained, and analyses of the 
materials used in the manufacture of 
cements are given. In that part of the 
instruction devoted strictly to cement 
manufacture, the various mills, kilns, 
and other machines are illustrated and 
described in detail. The testing of 
Portland cement is elaborately set 
forth. The chemical analysis of Port- 
land cement and raw materials is thor- 
oughly taught. 

Manufacture of Paper clearly and con- 
cisely explains the details of paper 
making, and illustrates and describes 

227 



the machinery used. The materials 
used in the manufacture of paper are 
carefully considered, and the making of 
the various pulps is treated of. Then 
follows complete instruction in all the 
methods involved in the making of the 
finished product. 

Manufacture of Sugar treats of the 
composition of sugar cane and the 
making of cane sugar. Defecation, 
clarification, concentration, granulation, 
and curing are thoroughly set forth. 
The details of the beet-sugar industry 
are explicitly taught. The planting, 
cultivating, and harvesting of beets are 
explained. Sugar-making plants are 
illustrated, and the manufacture of 
beet sugar, from the receiving of the 
beets to the delivery of the refined 
sugar, is given thorough treatment. 

Petroleum and Products treats of the 
nature and the composition of petro- 
leum; the techno-chemical examination 
of crude oil; production; and trans- 
portation. The theories of the origin 
of natural gas are recited, and the 
analysis of Findlay gas is given. The 
refining of illuminating oils, the chem- 
ical treatment of the distillate for burn- 
ing oils, and the refining of naphtha are 
treated of. Explanation is given of 
the details of paraffin manufacture. An 
exhaustive treatise on the production 
and manufacture of lubricating oils is 
included. The manufacture of vaseline, 
waxes, etc. is explained. Thorough 
instruction is given in the performing of 
all the various tests of petroleum and 
petroleum products. Railroad specifi- 
cations and State requirements are 
given. 

228 



Manufacture of Gas gives a complete 
explanation of the manufacture of coal 
gas. The composition of the purified 
gas is stated, and the various processes 
of producing it — from the distillation of 
the coal to the delivery of the gas to 
the holder — are fully explained. A 
thorough description is given of water- 
gas apparatus and the manufacture of 
water gas. Acetylene gas is treated of, 
and safet}^ regulations regarding acety- 
lene apparatus are given. Photom- 
eters are illustrated, and their use is 
clearly explained. 

Note — This instruction is in no sense a treatise 
on the design and erection of gas-making plants. 
It is intended to give the student a thorough 
working knowledge of apparatus, and a knowl- 
edge of the chemistry of gas manufacture. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They help the student become an 
expert specialist; after giving him thor- 
ough instruction in chemistry in general, 
they teach him how to apply his knowl- 
edge in manufacturing. 

b. They embrace all the elementary 
subjects necessary to be understood 
before the study of chemistry is begun. 

c. They require the student to study 
no more mathematics than he has to 
use in chemistry. 

d. They give the student practice in 
analysis: they require him to exercise 
his skill in making analyses for the 
Schools. 

e. They contain all the detailed 
illustrations necessary to give the stu- 
dent a thorough knowledge of how to 
use chemical apparatus. 

229 



/. They are of necessity concise and 
clear; for the student studies them out 
of the presence of a teacher. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Chemical Engineers. 

b. Chemists and Chemists' Assist- 
ants. 

c. Employes in iron and steel works. 

d. Packing-House Employes. 

e. Persons employed in the manufac- 
ture of cottonseed oil and its products. 

/. Employes in tanneries and leather 
factories. 

g. Persons engaged in the manufac- 
ture of soap. 

h. Employes in paper mills. 

i. Men engaged in sugar manufac- 
ture. 

y. Persons employed in all branches 
of the petroleum industry. 

k. Employes in gas plants. 

L Food Inspectors. 
. m. Health Officers. 

n. Salesmen of the various products 
named in the titles of the Courses. 

o. Persons desirous of securing em- 
ployment in any of the industries of 
which the instruction treats. 

p. Inventors and Experimenters. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. In the manufacture of soap, 
sugar, cement, or any other thing 
treated of in the Chemistry and 
Chemical Technology Course, the 
quality of the product is dependent on 
two things: first, the thoroughness of 
the workmen's general knowledge of 
chemistry; second, their ability to 
I 
230 



exercise that general knowledge in con- 
centrating their efforts on the produc- 
tion of the article. The men that can 
make the best product and practice the 
highest economy will be called to the 
best positions and receive the highest 
salaries. 

b. Shiftless workmen and hit-or-miss 
methods last but a short time in the 
domain of chemical technology. The 
manufacturer has learned that his 
profits come and go largely according 
to the talent at work in his chemical 
department. He knows that high sal- 

li aries paid to men of ability are his 
j most profitable investment. 

c. Chemistry is fascinating to per- 
i sons of all ages. Each fact learned 
\ stimulates the desire for further knowl- 
i edge. So interesting is the work, the 
; student attains a surprising degree of 

proficiency in analysis, etc., almost 
before he realizes what a complex sub- 
ject he has in hand. Chemistry offers 
golden opportunities to people ambi- 
tious of entering upon careers of useful- 
ness to the world and consequent profit 
to themselves. No class of persons is 
today in more urgent demand than 
those skilled in chemistry and the 
application of its principles to manu- 
facturing. 

d. The instruction given in the 
Chemistry and Chemical Technology 
Course will benefit every one in any 
way associated with the respective 
industries. It will be of value to the 
apprentice, the operator, the foreman, 
or the manager. 



231 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in less than 
3 years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Laboratory Apparatus Required 

The student requires two analytic 
outfits: one for qualitative analysis, 
which may be bought through the 
Schools for $21 cash; and one for 
quantitative analysis, which may be 
bought through the Schools for $23.50 
cash. Express charges must be paid 
by the student. The student is not 
required to buy his outfits through the 
Schools, although he will undoubtedly 
save money by doing so. The contents 
of these outfits are too many to be 
described here; a complete descrip- 
tion is given in the circular entitled 
"Applied Chemistry." 



232 



Courses Extracted From the 

Chemistry and Chemical 

Technology Course 

There are twelve Courses made up 
from the Chemistry and Chemical 
Technology Course, which contains 
the following subjects: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 134 

2 Elementary Algebra 59 

3 Mensuration 30 

4 Physics 166 

Examination Questions. . . 35 

Keys 97 

Tables 10 

5 Inorganic Chemistry .... 543 
Examination Questions ... 22 
Keys 22 

6 Qualitative Analysis .... 240 

7 Quantitative Analysis. . . . 232 
Examination Questions. . . 17 

Keys 14 

Quantitative Analysis. . . . 425 "1 

Examination Questions. . . 13 > 

Keys 12 J 

8 Organic Chemistry 490 1 

Examination Questions. . . 16 > 

Keys 16 J 

9 Sulphuric Acid 116 

10 Alkalies and Hydrochloric 

Acid 224 

11 Mam^acture of Iron .... 67 

12 Mamifacture of Steel 191 

Examination Questions ... 16 

Keys 17 

13 Packing-House Industries 168 ~ 

14 Cottonseed Oil and Prod- 

ucts 138 

15 Manufacttire of Leather . . 95 

16 Manufacture of Soap 178 

Examination Questions. . . 14 

Keys 12 

233 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



7th Bound 
Volume 



8th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

17 Manufacture of Cement . . 110 

18 Manufacture of Paper. ... 156 

19 Manufacture of Sugar. ... 119 

20 Petroleum and Products . 126 

21 Manufacture of Gas 84 

Examination Questions. . . 15 

Keys 15 

Pages 4,454 

Illustrations, 836 
Instruction Papers, 68 
Bound Volumes, 8 

Note — ^The eight Bound Volumes containing 
the entire Chemistry and Chemical Tech- 
nology Course are furnished to each student of 
any of its subordinate Courses. 

Titles of the Courses 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Sulphuric Acid Course, consisting of 
subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 9. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid 
Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 10. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Iron and Steel Course, consisting of 
subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 11, and 12. 

Chemistry and Packing-House 
Industries Course, consisting of sub- 
jects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (Parts 1 to 9 
inclusive), 7 (Parts 1, 7, 8, and 9), 
and 13. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Cottonseed Oil and Products 
Course, consisting of subjects Nos. 1, 
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 14. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Leather Course, consisting of subjects 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (Parts 1, 2, 3, and 4), 
7, and 15. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of- 
Soap Course, consisting of subjects;; 

234 



Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (Parts 1 and 2), 
7, and 16. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Cement Course, consisting of subjects 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6* (Parts 1, 2, 3, and 4), 
7 (Parts 1 to 7, inclusive), and 17. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Paper Course, consisting of subjects 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (Parts 1 and 2), 
7 (Parts 1 to 7, inclusive), and 18. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Sugar Course, consisting of subjects 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 (Parts 7 and 8), 
and 19. 

Chemistry, Petroleum, and Manu- 
facture OF Products Course, con- 
sisting of subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 
and 20. 

Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Gas Course, consisting of subjects 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 (Parts 1 and 2), 
and 21. 

Remarks 

The student of each of these subor- 
dinate Courses cannot take up subject 
No. 9 nor any of the succeeding subjects 
before he has passed in whatever of the 
preceding subjects (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 
or 8) are included in his Course. This 
is because the ability required in making 
sulphuric acid, steel, leather, soap, 
sugar, etc. is really no more nor less 
than the ability to apply general 
chemical principles to special processes. 
There is but one way for the student to 
acquire expertness in chemical tech- 
nology: he must first learn the general 
principles of chemistry, and then learn 
to apply these principles in manufac- 
turing. 

235 



To a person already enrolled for any 
of the Courses made up from the 
Chemistry and Chemical Technology 
Course we will furnish instruction in 
other branches of Applied Chemistry 
not included in his Course for an addi- 
tional charge of $5 for each subject. 

Time Required to Finish the Chemical 
and Chemical Technology Course, 
or One of the Courses Subor- 
dinate to It 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Chemistry and Chem- 
ical Technology Course in less than 
2^ years, and some finish one of its 
subordinate Courses in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Laboratory Apparatus Required 

The student of our Chemistry and 
Chemical Technology Course, Chem- 
istry AND Manufacture of Sulphuric 
Acid Course, Chemistry and Manu- 
facture of Alkalies and Hydro- 
chloric Acid Course, Chemistry and 
Manufacture of Iron and Steel 
Course, Chemistry and Manufacture 
of Cottonseed Oil and Products 
Course, Chemistry and Manufacture 
of Leather Course, Chemistry and 
Manufacture of Cement Course, or 
Chemistry and Manufacture of 
Paper Course, requires Part 1 (price 
$21) of our Complete Chemistry Outfit 
as soon as he is ready to study Inor- 
ganic Chemistry; and Part 2 (price 

236 



$23.50) is required as soon as he is 
ready to study Qualitative Analysis. 

The student of our Chemistry and 
Manufacture of Soap Course requires 
only Part 1 of the Complete Chemistry 
Outfit, which should be secured as 
soon as he is ready to study Inorganic 
Chemistry. Express charges must be 
paid by the student. The student need 
not buy his outfits through the Schools, 
although he will undoubtedly save 
money by doing so. The contents of 
these outfits are too many to be 
described here; a complete descrip- 
tion is given in the circular entitled 
"Applied Chemistry." 



237 



General Illustrating Course 

Thirteen subjects are taught in the 
General Illustrating Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference' Li- 
brary contain thirty-two, as follows: 



13 



41 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

Arithmetic 121 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas . . 

Elementary Algebra and 
Trigonometric Func- 
tions 

Logarithms 

Elementary Mechanics . . 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 



71 
20 
64 
44 
140 

Tables 37 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Freehand Drawing 84 

Elements of Perspective . . 71 

Perspective Drawing 39 

Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

Architectural Drawing ... 98 
Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2 
Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

Rendering in Water Color 54 
Drawing From Nature. . . . 

Drawing From Cast 

Elements of Figure Draw- 
ing 

Drawing From the Figure 
Examination Questions . . . 

Historic Ornament 

Elements of Ornament . . . 

Practical Design 55 

Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

238 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color. 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- [ 5th Bound 

signing 25 f Volume 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola ... 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination- Questions. . . IS 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1 378 

Drawing Plates. 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 rnay be omitted. No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

While the Course includes only the subjects in 
bold-face type in the chart and contained in the 
first three Bound Volumes, we furnish for refer- 
ence purposes two more Bound Volumes con- 
taining the remainder of the text of our Arts 
and Crafts Courses. Thus each student that 
enrolls for our General Illustrating Course 
receives the five Bound Volumes containing all 
our Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the General Illustrating 
Course desiring instruction in anj^ subject or 
subjects included in any other Course in the 
School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruc- 
tion for SIO a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will enable him to make a 
finished drawing or a rough sketch for 
any object or idea he wishes to convey 
by means of an illustration. 

b. They will train him to make, in 
pen and ink, finished drawings that will 
be correct in line and composition, and 
acceptable to publishers or others inter- 
ested in reproducing work. 

c. They will enable him to compre- 
hend style in illustrating, through the 

239 



criticisms of numerous illustrations that 
are reproduced from drawings of most 
successful pen-and-ink illustrators. 

d. They will enable him to render 
his drawings in pencil, brush, wash, pen 
and ink, or crayon. 

e. They will train him in the char- 
acteristic proportions of the human 
figure and in its value in illustrating 
and designing. 

/. They will train him in freehand 
water-color work directly from nature, 
and also give him instruction in the 
elements and application of perspective, 
particularly as applied to architectural 
details. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. All persons desiring a practical 
Course of study in the principal 
branches of drawing. 

h. Persons interested in making 
drawings for commercial purposes — 
whether they have received previous 
training or not. 

c. Persons desiring specific training 
in the proportioning of drawings for 
reproduction. 

d. Those desiring to make carica- 
tures and cartoons. 

e. All persons desiring to express on 
paper ideas that cannot be described in 
words. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. There are thousands of magazines 
published in this country and abroad 
that are illustrated in order to add 
interest to the text, and all these illus- 
trations are made from the drawings of 

240 



comparatively few people. Good illus- 
trators are always in demand and 
receive excellent pay for their services. 
Advertising firms carry large forces of 
illustrators to prepare sketches and 
finished drawings for advertising pur- 
poses. An employe in any branch of 
business can assist his employer greatly 
by making sketches for advertisements. 

b. The work is attractive and can be 
applied advantageously to nearly every 
vocation man may choose to follow. 

c. This Course of instruction will not 
only develop the student's inventive 
genius and originality, but will train 
him to apply it logically so the appli- 
cation will have a commerical value. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 1 
year. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
xVrts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 

241 



These Papers having successfully met 
the exacting requirements of thousands 
of students, it is evident that the Bound 
Volumes treat of principles and appli- 
cations in general illustrating with more 
thoroughness and conciseness than is 
possible in a work prepared on any 
other plan. They are in fact an 
epitome of common-sense application. 
For easy gradation; for conciseness; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are unequaled. From 
no other source can a student get so 
quickly so much money-earning knowl- 
edge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to the 
subject of general illustrating, and the 
details of that subject are explained 
with thoughtful care and a proper 
regard for the possible shortcomings of 
the reader. Every important item is 
indexed according to all the initial 
letters under which it is likely to be 
sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items, classified and indexed, the stu- 
dent can find in a moment the solution 
of a problem it might otherwise take 
hours to master. 

c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. 

242 



71 I 1st Bound 
^'- ^ Volume 



Newspaper Illustrating Course 

Ten subjects are taught in the News- 
PAPER Illustrating Course. The 

Bound Volumes of the Reference Li- 
brary contain thirty-two, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 1 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. . . 41 

3 Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric Func- 
tions 

4 Logarithms 20 

5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 
Examination Questions ... 44 

Kevs 140 

Tables 37 

6 Geometrical Drawing 77 

7 Freehand Drawing 84 

8 Elements of Perspective . . 71 

9 Perspective Drawing 39 

10 Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

1 1 Architectural Drawing ... 98 

12 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2 

13 Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

14 Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

15 Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

1 6 Rendering in Water Color . 54 

17 Drawing From Nature ... 83 

18 Drawing From Cast 66 

19 Elements of Figure Draw- 

ing 82 

20 Drawing From the Figure 17 
Examination Questions. . . 7. 

21 Historic Ornament 293 

22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 

23 Practical Design 55 

24 Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

243 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE! 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- 

signing 25 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola ... 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions. . . 18 



5th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,369 

Illustrations. 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note— Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

While the Course includes only the subjects in 
bold-face type in the chart and contained in the 
first three Bound Volumes, we furnish for refer- 
ence purposes two more Bound Volumes con- 
taining all our Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the Newspaper Illustrating 
Course desiring instruction in any subject or 
subjects included in any other Course in the 
School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruc- 
tion for $10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will enable him to make of 
people and of every-day objects sketches 
that can be worked up into finished 
illustrations for magazines and news- 
papers. 

5. They will teach him to sketch 
freehand in perspective any piece of 
furniture or machinery, any building or 
group of buildings, or any other object. 

c. They will train him to make 
mechanically correct perspective draw- 
ings. 

d. They will enable him to render in 
pen-and-ink, wash, pencil, or crayon, 



drawings suitable for use in the various 
processes of photo reproduction. 

c. They will teach him to draw from 
nature, draperies, and the human figure, 
and to render the drawings suitable for 
newspaper use. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

All persons desiring to get a Course of 
training in quick rough sketching suit- 
able for publication in books, magazines, 
and newspapers. 

Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of 
all the principal branches of illustrating should 
enroll for the General Illustrating Course. 

The essential difference between newspaper 
illustrating and general illustrating lies more 
particularly in the difference between the quali- 
ties of the materials used in printing. Drawings 
have to be made to suit the paper on which they 
are printed and the ink used. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Newspaper illustrating within the 
last few years has developed more 
rapidly perhaps than any other branch 
of illustrating. The public demands 
that our newspapers shall illustrate, as 
well as print, the news. Good illus- 
trations increase the sales of a news- 
paper by adding interest and entertain- 
ment to its pages. A news illustrator 
is always sure of employment at good 
wages if when visiting the scene of an 
event he is able to sketch or photograph 
the surrounding details and then make 
a drawing that will give the readers of 
his paper a good idea of the scene. 

h. Good advertisement illustrators 
are always in demand, and receive good 
pay. As the sale of advertising space 
is a great source of income to publishers, 

245 



many of them employ professional 
illustrators to make designs for adver- 
tisers. The person that can invent and 
draw effective illustrations is sure to 
please customers. This means more 
business for his employer and more pay 
for himself; for the employer is quick 
to see the value of the work and is glad 
to show his appreciation on pay day. 

c. There are many lines of business 
to which illustrating relates. iVny per- 
son with a liking for drawing can be 
sure of finding work suited to his tastes 
after he has qualified himself for it. 

d. Any person of average intelligence 
studying our Course thoroughly and 
faithfully will have little difficulty in 
securing a good position in some branch 
of illustrating. 

e. That the pay of the newspaper 
illustrator is all that could be desired 
is shown by the fact that a number of 
illustrators doing work for the largest 
New York and Chicago newspapers 
earn from $75 to $100 a week. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 1 
year. The average student requires a 
little more time. 

246 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
These Papers having successfully met 
the exacting requirements of thousands 
of students, it is evident that the Bound 
Volumes treat of principles and appli- 
cations in illustration and design with 
more thoroughness and conciseness than 
is possible in a work prepared on any 
other plan. They are in fact an 
epitome of common-sense application. 
For easy gradation; for conciseness; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are unequaled. From no 
other source can a student get so quick- 
ly so much money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to the 
subjects of illustration and design, 
and the details of these subjects are 
explained with thoughtful care and a 
proper regard for the possible short- 
comings of the reader. Every impor- 
tant item is indexed according to all 
the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
solution of a problem it might otherwise 
take hours to master. They are the 
very best textbooks ever prepared for 
home study. 

247 



c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. 



248 



Architectural Rendering 
Course 

Twelve subjects are taught in the 
Architectural Rendering Course. 
The Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain thirty- two, as fol- 
lows : 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

1 Arithmetic 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. . . . 

3 Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric Func- 
tions 

4 Logarithms 

5 Elementary Mechanics . . . 
Examination Questions . . . 

Ke vs 

Tables 

6 Geometrical Drawing 

7 Freehand Drawing 

8 Elements of Perspective . . 

9 Perspective Drawing 

10 Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 

11 Architectural Drawing. . . . 

12 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 

Examination Questions . . 

13 Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 

14 Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 

15 Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 

16 Rendering in Water Color . 

17 Drawing From Nature. . . . 

18 Drawing From Cast 

19 Elements of Figure Draw- 

ing 

20 Drawing From the Figure 
Examination Questions . . . 

21 Historic Ornament 

22 Elements of Ornament . . . 

23 Practical Design 

24 Applied Design 

Examination Questions. . . 

249 



PAGES 
121 

41 



71 
20 
64 
44 
140 
37 

77 
84 
71 
39 

83 
98 

77 
2 



82 
17 
7) 

293 

67 
55 
84 
25 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- I 5tli Bound 

signing 25 | Volume 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola ... 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions ... 18 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 
Drawing Plates, 87 
Instruction Papers, 37 
Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subjects Nos. 1 and 12 may be omitted. 
No recitations are asked for in the subjects in 
light-face type. 

The student of the Architectural Render- 
ing Course is furnished with the five Bound 
Volumes containing all our Arts and Crafts 
Courses. 

The student of the Architectural Render- 
ing Course wanting instruction in any subject 
or subjects included in any other Course in the 
School of Arts and Crafts can secure such instruc- 
tion for .$10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will enable him to render 
from the architect's working drawings 
a perspective, in pen and ink or in 
water color, showing the building as it 
will appear when finished and in its 
surrounding landscape. 

b. They will train him to make for 
interiors perspective sketches archi- 
tecturally correct and attractively ren- 
dered in black and white or in colors. 

c. They will give him a clear knowl- 
edge of the architectural orders and 
their characteristics, and train him to 
make studies and detailed drav/ings of 

250 



the various parts of a building or of 
its whole exterior or interior appearance. 

d. They will train him to make 
colored bird's-eye views and perspec- 
tive sketches for proposed parks, private 
grounds, etc. 

e. They will enable him to render 
from photographs or other pictures, and 
in pen and ink or in water color, 
details for use either as illustrations or 
as accessories to his architectural 
perspectives. 

/. They will teach him to sketch 
freehand, and with rapidity and exact- 
ness, details of buildings, scenery, etc. 
for use in his architectural Avork. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Persons desiring a working knowl- 
edge of water-color rendering or pen- 
and-ink rendering for architectural, 
illustrative, or decorative purposes. 

b. Architects and Architectural 
Draftsmen wishing to know how to 
render in colors perspective views of 
proposed buildings. 

c. Salesmen and Representatives of 
Interior Decorating or Upholstery 
Firms, who would thus be qualified to 
sketch rapidly for a prospective cus- 
tomer a concise and convincing picture 
of the final appearance of the interior 
to be decorated. 

d. Landscape Gardners wishing to 
make preliminary sketches for gardens 
or layouts for parks or private grounds. 

e. Stained-Glass Window Designers. 
/. Interior Decorators. 

g. Sign Painters. 

h. Persons whose talent has been 
limited to natural ability to sketch in 

251 



pencil and that now desire to learn to 
sketch in water colors and in pen and ink. 

NoTE-^The Architectural Rendering 
Course is intended for persons wanting to study 
the artistic rather than the structural side of archi- 
tectural drawing. Persons desiring to become 
architectural draftsmen should enroll for the 
Architectural Drawing Course or the 
Architectural Drawing and Designing 
Course. Those wishing a full knowledge of 
architecture — the designing and construction of 
buildings, except steel-framed structures (which 
are treated of in our Structural Engineering 
Course) — should enroll for our Complete 
Architectural Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The architectural draftsman 
should be able to render, from the 
architect's working drawings, perspec- 
tives in pen and ink or in water color 
showing how the proposed building 
will look in its surroundings. Such a 
draftsman makes himself of greater 
value to his employer and receives cor- 
respondingly increased pay. As few 
persons can get from working drawings 
a clear idea of the final appearance of 
a building, the architect in submitting 
his plans is often required to furnish a 
water-color perspective shovv^ing the 
finished building and its surrounding 
landscape. Our Architectural Ren- 
dering Course will train the student 
to make such colored perspective views. 

h. Architectural rendering is a rap- 
idly advancing and a well-paying pro- 
fession. Artists that make a specialty 
of rendering and have a thorough 
training in such work can earn in their 
own studios from $10 to $25 a day and 
never be in want of orders. 

c. Our Architectural Rendering 
Course is thorough in every respect 

252 



and eminently practical. Following 
our plan of teaching, the student — 
unless he is already a draftsman — 
begins with simple drawings and is 
gradually enabled to produce work the 
attractiveness and accuracy of which 
will soon bring him commissions for 
perspective renderings. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 2 years. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
They treat fully and clearly of how to 
draw correctly proportioned perspec- 
tive views and how to color them 
attractively so as to impress and con- 
vince a possible client. 

b. They are an unequaled reference 
work. The principles and processes of 
architectural rendering are explained 

253 



so as to be easily understood even by 
the man of little education. They 
were prepared to meet the requirements 
of people that must get an education, 
if they get it at all, by means of home 
study and out of the presence of a 
teacher. By systematic study of the 
Bound Volumes the student can learn 
to render, in pen and ink or in water 
color, perspectives that will show the 
buildings finished and amid their 
surrounding landscapes. The Bound 
Volumes are so fully indexed, the stu- 
dent can find in an instant the descrip- 
tion of the processes of perspective 
drawing, the details of architectural 
orders, the methods of rendering, the 
details for interior or exterior decora- 
tions, and other valuable information 
in concrete form that nowhere else can 
be found with anything like so much 
ease as in the Bound Volumes. 

c. They contain text and illustra- 
tions treating of various fields of 
design, as well as of illustration and 
architectural drawing, all of which will 
greatly increase the student's general 
knowledge and culture and enlarge his 
scope of work. 



254 



1st Bound 
Volume 



Architectural Drawing Course 

Twelve subjects are taught in the 
Architectural Drawing Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Librar}'- contain thirty- two, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 

2 Mensuration and Use of • 

Letters in Formulas. ... 41 

3 Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric Func- 
tions 71 

4 Logarithms 20 

5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 
Examination Questions ... 44 

Kevs 140 

Tables 37 

6 Geometrical Drawing 77 

7 Freehand Drawing 84 

8 Elements of Perspective . . 71 

9 Perspective Drawing 39 

10 Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

11 Architectural Drawing. ... 98 

12 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2 

13 Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

14 Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

15 Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

16 Rendering in Water Color 54 

17 Drawing From Nature . . . 

18 Drawing From Cast 

19 Elements of Figure Draw- 

ing 

20 Drawing From Figure. . . . 
Examination Questions. . . 

21 Historic Ornament 

22 Elements of Ornament . . . 

23 Practical Design 55 

24 Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

255 



83 
66 

82 

17 

7) 

293 

67 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



?,F, 


LIST OF SUBJECTS 


PAGES 

. 361 
31 
59 

. 24 

. 25 

47 

104 

27 

18. 




?,(\ 


Distemper Color. . 




27 
28 
29 

30 
31 
3? 


Bookcover Designing 

Carpet Designing 

Oilcloth and Linoleum De 

signing 

Wallpaper Designing. . . . 
The American Vignola . . . 


. 5th Bound 
Volume 




Examination Questions. . 
Pages 






2,369 





Illustrations, 1,378 
Drawing Plates, 87 
Instruction Papers, 37 
Bound Volumes 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

The student of the Architectural Drawing 
Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes 
containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the Architectural Drawing 
Course wanting instruction in any subject or 
subjects included in any other Course in the 
School of Arts and Crafts can secure such 
instruction for $10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will train him. in the historic 
orders and their characteristics and the 
proper methods of detailing various 
parts of a building — qualifying him to 
fill the position of junior draftsman in 
an architect's office, where he will be 
required to carry out accurately the 
architect's directions in preparing pre- 
liminary colored elevations and detail- 
ing certain structural parts . 

b. They will instruct him in the ele- 
ments of architecture. He will thus be 
qualified to work more intelligently, 
even if in a minor position, and be of 
more value to his employer. 

256 



c. They will teach him to make 
shaded or colored sketches of an 
intended building or the details of its 
construction, and to make them intel- 
ligible and attractive to a person intend- 
ing to build and to whom working draw- 
ings would be meaningless. 

d. They will enable him to make of 
buildings, parts of buildings, or other 
architectural details, freehand sketches 
that can be used as memoranda for 
work to be done later; and they will 
teach him to put these memoranda into 
definite drawings correctly propor- 
tioned in perspective outline. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Persons feeling that they have 
artistic taste and ability, but not caring 
to do either decorative or illustrative 
work. 

h. Persons wanting to learn archi- 
tectural drawing and having a greater 
liking for the artistic than for the 
structural. 

c. Draftsmen and Tracers working 
in a mechanical way in architects' 
offices and realizing that in order to 
advance they must have a more intel- 
ligent understanding of their work. 

d. Architects and Architectural 
Draftsmen desiring to prepare pre- 
liminary sketches and colored eleva- 
tions and whose present knowledge 
includes the structural part of archi- 
tecture only. 

e. Stained-Glass Window Designers 
that are frequently called on to intro- 
duce into their designs architectural 
details or ornament in harmony with 

9 257 



the style of building tor which the 
glass is intended. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. No branch of drawing has more 
practical value than that dealing with 
architecture. The young man that 
would become an architectural drafts- 
man has to choose between a college 
training — for which he may have 
neither time nor money — or a long 
apprenticeship in some archit^ect's office. 
As few architects have time or inclina- 
tion to play the part of teacher, the 
apprentice makes slow progress unless 
he gets outside help. Our Course 
furnishes the needed instruction and 
helps the student make rapid progress. 

h. Our Architectural Drawing 
Course is a boon not only to the 
apprentice, but to the self-supporting 
person ambitious of entering the archi- 
tectural field. To the apprentice our 
Course offers the means of rapid 
advancement; it fits in with his daily 
work and supplies just what he needs. 
To the outsider desiring to become an 
architectural draftsman, but unable to 
leave his present work before qualify- 
ing for the new, our Course opens the 
way to junior draftsmanship in an 
architect's office. Once in that position 
he can with our training perform _ his 
duties intelligently and forge rapidly 
ahead. 

c. After making plans and drawings 
for a building, the architect is often 
required to show how it will look in its 
surroundings. Our Course qualifies the 
student to make from the architect's 

258 



working drawings a perspective of the 
building, in pen and ink or in water 
color, showing the grass, trees, water, 
and other features of the landscape. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 2^ years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Complete Drawing Outfit as soon as he 
has paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
They give a clear and full treatment of 
architectural drawing. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They explain the subject of 
architectural drawing with thoughtful 
care and a proper regard for the pos- 
sible shortcomings of the reader. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 

c. They contain instruction in sub- 
jects other than architectural drawing. 

259 



This instruction will greatly enlar^ 
the student's scope. 

d. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of architectural 
drawing. 



260 



1st Bound 
Volume 



Perspective Drawing Course 

Seven subjects are taught in the 

Perspective Drawing Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain thirty-two, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas. .. . 41 

3 Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric Func- 
tions 71 

4 Logarithms 20 

5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 
Examination Questions. . . 44 

Keys 140 

Tables 37 

6 Geometrical Drawing 77 

7 Freehand Drawing 84 

8 Elements of Perspective . . 71 

9 Perspective Drawing 39 

10 Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

1 1 Architectural Drawing .... 98 

12 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions ... 2 

13 Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

14 Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

15 Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

1 6 Rendering in Water Color . 54 

17 Drawing From Nature. ... 83 

18 Drawing From Cast 66 

19 Elements of Figure Draw- 

ing 82 

20 Drawing From the Figure 17 
Examination Questions. . . 7 

21 Historic Ornament 293 

22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 

23 Practical Design 55 

24 Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

261 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGE 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- I 5th Bound 

signing 25 f Volume 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola ... 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions. . . 18 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Voltmies, 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

The student of the Perspective Drawing 
Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes 
containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the Perspective Drawing 
Course wanting instruction in any subject or 
subjects included in any other Course in the 
Schools of Arts and Crafts can secure such in- 
struction for $10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will enable him to take a 
set of plans from an architect's office 
and render therefrom an acctirate per- 
spective drawing, architecturally cor- 
rect, of the building as it will appear 
when finished. The ability to do this 
will place a higher value on the employe 
than were he to understand only sec- 
tional plans and working drawings. 

b. They will train him to draw and 
properly render details of sky, foliage, 
water, etc., which may be incorporated 
in his perspective sketches, thus making 
of them not only accurate drawings 
but artistic pictures. 

262 



c. They will train him to make per- 
spective views, whether for illustrative 
or for sectional diagrams, of any objects 
of which he already has the plans and 
measurements. 

d. They will give him the ability to 
sketch rapidly, freehand, details of 
buildings or landscapes to be used as 
memoranda for future Avork. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Architects and Draftsmen familiar 
with only the structural part of archi- 
tectural drafting, and to whom the 
ability to make perspective pictures 
of the proposed building would mean 
increased business or higher wages. 

h. Portrait and Landscape Painters 
desiring to render accurately the per- 
spective of any backgrounds or dis- 
tances that they wish to include in 
their pictures. 

c. Scene Painters. 

d. Lithograph Designers. 

e. Stained-Glass Window Designers. 
/. Glass Painters. 

g. Landscape Gardeners. 

h. Interior Decorators. 

Note — The Perspective Drawing Course is 
a comprehensive Course in the elements of 
perspective drawing; it is intended to teach the 
student the essentials of correct drawing and 
especially the art of drawing objects, buildings, 
etc. in perspective. A perspective drawing is a 
drawing showing an object just as it appears 
to the eye. A good photograph is a perfect 
perspective representation. Our Perspective 
Drawing Course is of great value not only to 
the architectural draftsman, but also to the 
mechanical draftsman, artist, interior decorator, 
and any one to whom the ability to make per- 
spective sketches of proposed constructions 
would mean increased business and profit. 

263 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Owing to the fact that their 
duties have mainly to do with working 
drawings only, comparatively few drafts- 
men clearly understand the principles 
of perspective. And it is impossible 
for a draftsman to make an accurate 
perspective unless he has a thorough 
knowledge of the principles governing 
the direction of lines and their vanish- 
ing points. Ability to make correct 
perspective drawings will increase the 
worth of a' draftsman to his employer. 

b. A knowledge of perspective draw- 
ing is absolutely necessary if the 
draftsman is to place himself at the 
head of his profession. 

c. Working drawings, made for the 
guidance of the builder, are to the 
average property holder but a con- 
fusion of lines and figures. Hence 
there is the demand for perspective 
drawings to show the owner how his 
structure will look amid its surround- 
ings. Of course a draftsman that can 
make accurate perspective drawings 
from ground plans and sectional eleva- 
tions has an advantage that assures 
steady employment and commands a 
higher salary than he could otherwise 
obtain. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

264 



Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
x\rts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
They constitute a valuable treatise on 
the principles of perspective drawing, 
and furnish information indispensable 
to every one requiring a knowledge of 
this subject. They excel in concise- 
ness of statement and clearness of expla- 
nation; and for practicability they are 
unequaled. 

b. They possess great value as 
reference books. They begin with 
thorough instruction in the elements 
and the principles of perspective and 
gradually lead the student into the 
more complicated work of drawing 
perspective views of houses, etc. with 
all their elaborate details. The student 
by systematic and diligent study of the 
Bound Volumes can familiarize himself 
with the practical work of perspective 
drawing as carried on in architects' 
offices; he can learn to make, from 
ground plans and sectional elevations, 
perspectives that will not only be 
correct in their measurements, but will 
also show how the buildings will look 
when finished. 

265 



c. They are free frora ambiguous 
expressions, particular care having been 
taken to avoid unusual words. The 
Bound Volumes are easily understood 
by the man of little education. They 
are so fully indexed, any subject can 
be found in an instant. 

d. They contain text and illustra- 
tions of various 'fields of design, as well 
as illustration and architectural draw- 
ing, all of which will greatly increase 
the student's general knowledge and 
enlarge his scope of work. 



206 



General Design Course 

Ten subjects are taught in the Gen- 
eral Design Course. The Bound Vol- 
umes of the Reference Library contain 
thirty-two, as follows: 



10 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 121 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas 

Elementary Algebra and 
Trigonometric F u n c - 
tions 

Logarithms 

Elementary Mechanics. . . 

Examination Questions. . 

Keys 



41 



71 
20 
64 
44 
140 



Tables 37 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Freehand Drawing 84 

Elements of Perspective. . 71 

Perspective Drawing 39 

Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

Architectural Drawing ... 98 
Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions . . 2 
Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

Rendering with Pen and 

Brush 50 

Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

Rendering in Water Color 54 

Drawing From Nature ... 83 

Drawing From Cast 66 

Elements of Figure Draw- 
ing 82 

Drawing From the Figure 17 

Examination Questions . . 7 

Historic Ornament 293 

Elements of Ornament. .. . 67 

Practical Design 55 

Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

267 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum De- 

signing 25 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola ... 104 

32 Color Harmon3^ 27 

Examination Questions. . . 18 



5th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No 
recitations are asked for in the sulDJects in light- 
face type. 

The student of the General Design Course 
is furnished with the five Bound Volumes con- 
taining all the Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the General Design Course 
desiring to pursue some specific branch not 
taught in this Course will — after he has finished 
the subjects taught in the General Design 
Course — be given special instruction in the 
desired branch by means of personal letters from 
the Principal of the School of Arts and Crafts. 

"What the Details of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will train him in the ele- 
m.ents of both geometrical and mechan- 
ical drawing and the construction of 
geometrical combinations. 

b. They will enable him to make 
freehand sketches of any objects for the 
purpose of illustrating an idea or ma- 
king a memorandumx of some design. 

c They will teach him to lay out 
with brush, pen, or pencil, designs suit- 
able for reproduction by any of the 
standard methods used by manufac- 
turers, publishers, and lithographers. 

268 



d. They will enable him to under- 
stand, appreciate, and execute, when 
necessary, ornamental designs in his- 
toric style according to principles recog- 
nized as characteristic of historic periods. 

e. They will teach him how to intro- 
duce details of mechanical, architec- 
tural, or artistic character into any 
style of design for any particular pur- 
pose that may be desired. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Wood Carvers. 
h. Furniture Makers. 

c. Cabinet Makers. 

d. Ornamental Iron Workers. 

e. Designers of gas fixtures and elec- 
tric fixtures. 

/. Lace Designers. 

g. Designers of dress goods, damask 
linens, etc. 

h. Jewelry Designers. 

i. China Decorators. 

j. Artists. 

k. Clerks in the upholstery, hanging, 
and dress-goods departments of stores. 

I. Designers of mosaic or other tiled 
floors. 

m. Stained-Glass and Leaded-Glass 
Workers. 

Note — The underlying principles that govern 
the designing of a lace pattern are the same as 
those that govern the designing of a wallpaper 
or a bookcover — the only difference being in the 
application of these principles to some partictdar 
material and purpose. The General Design 
Course teaches these principles thoroughly; it 
is a broad, general treatise on the subject of 
ornamental design, without particular reference 
to any of the applied arts, such as wallpaper 
designing, bookcover designing, etc. The Gen- 
eral Design Course should be studied by all 
persons wishing a knowledge applicable to any 
branch of designing; it is best for those undecided 

269 



as to what special line of designing they prefer. 
A specialty may be chosen after the student has 
learned the underlying principles; besides, he 
will then be in a better position to know what 
work appeals most to his tastes. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Designing, from a money-making 
standpoint, is attractive work. There 
are many lines of business in which the 
earning power of an employe is greatly 
increased if he understands designing. 
Besides, designing is a recreation as 
well as a distinct accomplishment. 
Persons having spare time and desir- 
ing to use it in work that is pleasant, 
profitable, and of a refined nature, can- 
not make a better investment than to 
enroll for our General Design Course. 
Designing can be done at home and 
the work may be sold by mailing it to 
possible purchasers. Many firms that 
purchase designs deal altogether with 
independent designers, finding that in 
this way they get better work and a 
greater variety of ideas than they would 
by employing designers to work for 
them exclusively. 

b. The range of subjects to which 
designing relates is so wide that there 
is no danger that the market will ever 
be flooded with acceptable work. In 
fact it is often difficult to find persons 
able to prepare good designs for special 
purposes. Simple designs not requir- 
ing more than a few hours' work bring 
from $5 to $10, while larger and more 
elaborate drawings bring proportionate 
prices. 

c. There is a great demand for appro- 
priate designs to be used in connection 
with programs, menus, monograms, 

270 



initial letters for books and magazines, 
college pins, etc. A good design finds 
a ready market and a high price, and 
paves the way for future business rela- 
tions between the designer and the buyer. 

d. Our instruction will develop the 
student's invention and encourage his 
originality and individuality; these are 
two important qualifications in design- 
ing and count for much in commercial 
work. 

e. Manufacturing concerns whose 
products are marketed in packages or 
cans realize the value of a striking 
label design, and pay well for one that 
will assist in selling the goods. 

/. Women engaged in art needle- 
work will find the instruction contained 
in our General Design Course of 
great practical value ; it will enable them 
to create new and attractive designs for 
embroidery, lace work, etc. — designs 
that Avill bring a much higher price 
than the old stereotyped patterns. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he 
has paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

271 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
These Papers having successfully met 
the exacting requirements of thousands 
of students, it is evident that the Bound 
Volumes treat of principles and appli- 
cations in ornamental design with more 
thoroughness and conciseness than is 
possible in a work prepared on any 
other plan. They are in fact an epit- 
ome of common-sense application. 
For easy gradation; for conciseness; for 
intelligent adherence to the important 
features of their subjects; and for prac- 
ticability, they are unequaled. From no 
other source can a student get so quickly 
so much money-earning knowledge. 

h. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to 
the subject of ornamental design, and 
the details of that subject are explained 
with thoughtful care and a proper 
regard for the possible shortcomings of 
the reader. Every important item is 
indexed according to all the initial 
letters under which it is likely to be 
sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items classified and indexed, the stu- 
dent can find in a moment the solution 
of a problem it might otherwise take 
hours to master. They are the very 
best textbooks ever prepared for home 
study. 

272 



c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theor}^ and practice of the work of 
which they treat. The tried and proved 
facts and processes used in the best 
ornamental design practice in the 
country are here collected and bound 
into an orderly and systematic whole. 



273 



1st Bound 
Volume 



Carpet Design Course 

Eleven subjects are taught in the 
Carpet Design Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain thirty- two, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 1 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas 41 

3 Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric F u n c - 

tions 71 

4 Logarithms 20 

5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 
Examination Questions ... 44 

Keys 140 

Tables 37 

6 Geometrical Drawing 77 

7 Freehand Drawing 84 

8 Elements of Perspective 71 

9 Perspective Drawing 39 

10 Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

11 Architectural Drawing ... 98 

1 2 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2 ^ 

13 Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

14 Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

15 Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

16 Rendering in Water Color 54 

17 Drawing From Nattire ... 83 

18 Drawing From Cast 66 

19 Elements of Figure Draw- 

ing 82 

20 Drawing From the Figure 17 
Examination Questions. . . 7 

21 Historic Ornament 293 

22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 

23 Practical Design 55 

24 Applied Design. 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

274 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum I 5th Botind 

Designing 25 | Volume 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions. . . 18 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

The student of the Carpet Design Course is 
furnished with the five Bound Volumes con- 
taining the text of all our Arts and Crafts Courses. 
The student of the Carpet Design Course 
wanting instruction in any subject or subjects 
included in any other Course in the School of 
Arts and Crafts can secure such instruction for 
$10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will enable him to make 
carpet designs artistic and technically 
correct from the manufacturer's stand- 
point. Such designs are always salable. 

b. They will train him in the study 
of plant form and the conventionaliza- 
tion of various parts of flowers and 
leaves for use in carpet designs. 

c. They will give him a working 
knowledge of color harmony and color 
matching and a training in the mix- 
ing and using of distemper color, the 
medium in which carpet designs are 
rendered. 

275 



d. They will give him a knowledge of 
the principles of general design, ena- 
bling him to make designs for programs, 
menu cards, calendars, monograms, 
school and college pins, etc. in addi- 
tion to his carpet designing. 

e. They will teach him to under- 
stand and use intelligently ornament 
or details of an 57 historic style. 

/. They will enable him to make free- 
hand sketches for the purpose of illus- 
trating an idea or making a memoran- 
dum for future use in designs. 

g. They will train him in the geo- 
metrical shapes and combinations used 
as methods of repeats in carpet designs. 

h. They will give him a history 
and a description of the best grades of 
rugs and carpets and their processes of 
weaving. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Persons whose early attempts at 
drawing and whose present tastes show 
a trend towards picture or designs con- 
taining groups of flowers, leaves, trees, 
etc. 

h. Persons liking color work, but 
having no desire to do illustrating of 
any kind. 

c. Employes in carpet factories and 
in upholstery and drapery depart- 
ments. 

d. Carpet and Rug Salesmen desir- 
ing to understand more thoroughly the 
goods they sell. 

e. Interior Decorators. 
/. Painters. 

g. General Designers having a knowl- 
edge of ornamental forms and deco- 
rations and desiring a knowledge of 

276 



\ie technical requirements for carpet 
bsigns. 

Note — The Carpet Design Course is the 
ENERAL Design Course with the instruction 
[ carpet designing added. The General 
iESiGN Course is a broad, general treatise on 
-namental design, without particular reference 
) anv branch of applied design; it lays a good 
mndation for the practice of any line of artistic 
tx^ionino- Persons undecided as to what special 
ne'of desisming they prefer should enroll for the 

ENERAL Design Course. A specialty may be 
losen after the student has learned the under- 
nncr principles; besides, he will then be m a 
ett'er position to know what work appeals most 
) his taste. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The demand for new designs for 
Loor coverings of every Mnd is con- 
tantly increasing. Improved machm- 
ry and the introduction of new fabrics 
.nd styles of weaving have resulted 
^ the production of beautiful designs 
n even the cheaper grades of carpets 
md rugs. Carpet designing is one of 
,he best fields of work !or the orna- 
nental designer. 

b. Every carpet manufacturer con- 
stantly strives to produce more salable 
ioor coverings and to give better 
^-alue than his competitors in quality 
3,nd appearance. But in order to do 
this he must secure better designs than 
other manufacturers. A good design 
consequently finds a ready market and 
a high price, and paves the way for 
future business relations between the 
designer and the buyer. Carpet manu- 
facturers will at almost any time buy 
a design embodying taste, skill, and 
style. 

c. The finest carpets and rugs come 
from oriental countries, and the maker 

277 



of new designs is required to instil into 
his work the feeHng and color effects 
that have made the oriental fabrics 
famous. The designer must therefore 
be familiar with all the devices and 
methods used by the modern weaver in 
causing his loom to reproduce mechan- 
ically the characteristics of the oriental; 
hand work. To do this, the designer 
must know how to study rugs and 
carpets, as well as understand their 
design. 

d. Our Carpet Design Course has 
been prepared by a practical designer 
thoroughly familiar with the theoretical 
side of the subject. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of: 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little; 
raore time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our; 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he 
has paid $10. The student pays ex- 
press charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course 

278 



nd give a full and clear treatment of 
arpet designing. , , , , 

b They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They explain the details of 
arpet designing with thoughtful care 
nd a proper regard for the possible 
hortcomings of the reader. Every 
mportant item is indexed accordmg to 
11 the initial letters under which it is 
ikely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
ully are all items classified and indexed, 
he student can find in a moment the 
iescription of any method of rendering 
)r process of weaving, or any other 
ietail that it would ordinarily require 
lOurs or even days to find elsewhere, 
if it could be found at all. 
1 c They contain excellent full-page 
colored reproductions of many oriental 
ruc^s and carpets. The designer is thus 
furnished with high-class motifs for his 
own designs. 

i d They contain text and illustra- 
tions treating of other fields of design 
Ls well as illustration and architectural 
drawino- all of which will increase the 
student's general knowledge and enlarge 
his scope of work. 



279 



Wallpaper Design Course 

Eleven subjects are taught in the 
Wallpaper Design Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference Li 
brary contain thirty- two, as follows: 



10 



13 



15 

16 

17 
18 
19 

20 

21 
22 
23 
24 



41 



71 
20 
64 
44 
140 



IIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 121 

Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas .... 
Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric F u n c - 

tions 

Logarithms 

Elementary Mechanics . . . 
Examination Questions . . . 

Keys 

Tables 37 

Geometrical Drawing. . . . . 77 

Freehand Drawing 84 

Elements of Perspective. 71 

Perspective Drawing 39 

Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

Architectural Drawing ... 98 
Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2 
Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

Rendering in Water Color 54 
Drawing From Nature ... 83 

Drawing From Cast 66 

Elements of Figure Draw- 



Drawing From the Figure 17 

Examination Questions. . . 7 

Historic Ornament 293 

Elements of Ornament ... 67 

Practical Design 55 

Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

280 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Plant Analysis 36 

Distemper Color 31 

Bookcover Designing 59 

Carpet Designing 24 

Oilcloth and Linoleum I 5th Bound 

Designing -. . . . 25 | Volume 

Wallpaper Designing 47 

1 The American Vignola . . . 104 

2 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions . . 18 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes. 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No 
ecitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
ace type. 

The student of the Wallpaper Design 
JouRSE is furnished with the five Bound Vol- 
umes containing the text of all our Arts and 
Drafts Courses. 

The student of the Wallpaper Design 
Course wanting instruction in any subject or 
subjects included in any other Course in the 
School of Arts and Crafts can secure such in- 
struction for SIO a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish for the Student 

a. They will enable him to make 
wallpaper designs artistic and tech- 
nically correct from the manufacturer's 
standpoint. Such designs are always 
salable. 

b. They will train him in the study 
of plant form and the conventionaliza- 
tion of the various parts of flowers and 
leaves for use in wallpaper designs. 

c. They will give him a working 
knowledge of color harmony and color 
matching and a training in the mix- 
ing and using of distemper color, 
the medium in which wallpapers are 
rendered. 

281 



d. They will give him a knowledg(, 
of the principles of general design; 
enabling him to make designs fo,' 
menu cards, monograms, trade marks, 
initial letters, etc. in addition to hii: 
wallpaper designing. 

e. They will teach him to understanc' 
and use intelhgently ornament or details 
of any historic style. 

/. They will enable him to make 
freehand sketches for the purpose o:' 
illustrating an idea or making a memo- 
randum for future use in designs. 

g. _ They will train him in the geo-' 
metrical shapes and combinations usee 
as methods of repeats in wallpaper, 
designs. 
_ h. They will give him clear descrip- 
tions and illustrations of the best wall- 
papers of this and other countries. The 
student is thus furnished with a high 
standard to work to. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. _ Persons whose early attempts at! 
drawing and whose present tastes show! 
a trend toward pictures or designs con- 
taining groups of flowers, leaves, trees,,' 
etc. 

h. Persons liking color work, but' 
having no desire to do illustrating of 
any kind. 

c. Employes in wallpaper factories! 
and upholstery and drapery depart- 
ments. 

d. Wallpaper Hangers. 

e. Interior Decorators. 
/. Painters. 

g. General Designers having a knowl- 
edge of ornamental forms and decora-, 
tions and desiring a knowledge of the 

282 



:hnical requirements for wall-paper 

^^^^Artists whose illustration work 
:asionally includes interiors of rooms 
Dmng wall surface and drapenes that 
ist be historically correct. 
sfoTE— The Wallpaper Design Course is the 
NER^L Design Course with the instruction 
walipaper designing added. The General 
sTgx Course is a broad, genera treatise on 
famental design, without particular reference 
i am branch of apphed design; it lays a good 
Imdation for the practice of any line of artistic 
! ?gning. Persons undecided as to what special 
e of disigning they prefer should enroll for the 
cneral Design Course A specialty may be 
osen after the student^as learned the under^ 
ng principles of designing; besides, he will then 
in a better position to know what work 
pealslmost to his taste. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a Wallpaper design is one of the 
ost attractive and profitable branches 
- ornamental design. The competition 
fnong wallpaper manufacturers is 
een and those that can furnish the 
lost popular designs at reasonable 
rices naturally secure the greatest com- 
lercial advantages. Wallpaper manu- 
icturers are constantly on the lookout 
Dr practical and original designs. 

b The wallpaper designer must not 
Inly be familiar with the various 
nethods of manufacture, but he naust 
omprehend thoroughly the hmitations 
mposed by the character of the machm- 
iry used and the methods of its opera- 
iion He must understand the theory 
3f plant analysis and its practical appli- 
cation in design, and also the handling 
)f distemper color, so as to obtain the 
Dest results at the smallest expense m 
-nanufacture. Our Wallpaper Design 



283 



Course is thorough. The Hmitatioi- 
ot wallpaper-prmting machines and tl: 
manufacturer's requirements, from hot 
the technical and the artistic sides ai 
clearly explained. The demands ( 
popular taste and the varying cond 
tions of locaHty and season are full 
treated. The student is well prepare 
to make salable designs. 

c. The salary of an expert wallpape 
designer is dependent on the wor 
he produces. Designers working inde 
pendently receive an average of froii 
$30 to $40 for good designs. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan o 
studying, and the time he gives. Some 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days j 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year 
The average student requires a littl< 
more time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with ouJi 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
cnarges. = 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Kevs of the Course, 
and give a full and clear treatment of 
wall-paper designing. 

284 



b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They explain the details of 
jwallpaper designing with thoughtful 
tare and a proper regard for the possible 
shortcomings of the reader. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
description of the proper methods of 
rendering and the processes of print- 
ing, and any other details that it would 
ordinarily take hours to find elsewhere, 
if they could be found at all. 

c. They contain excellent illustra- 
tions of the best grade of wallpapers. 
These illustrations cultivate the stu- 
dent's taste and give him, as motifs 
for his own designs, arrangements of 
ornament that are correct in artistic 
style and technically suited to wall 
decoration. 

d. They contain text and illustra- 
tions treating of other fields of design, 
as well as of illustration and architec- 
tural drawing, all of which will increase 
the student's general knowledge and 
culture and enlarge his scope of work. 



285 



Linoleum Design Course 

Eleven subjects are taught in the 
Linoleum Design Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain thirty-two, as follows: 



13 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 1211 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formiilas .... 41 

Elementary Algebra and 
Trigonometric F u n c - 
tions 71 



Logarithms . 
Elementary Mechanics . 
Examination Questions. 

Keys 

Tables 



20 
64 
44 
140 
37 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Freehand Drawing ....... 84 

Elements of Perspective. . 71 

Perspective Drawing 39 

Historic Ornamental 

Drawing 83 

Architectural Drawing ... 98 
Advanced Architectural 

Drawing _ 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2 
Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 

Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

Rendering in Water Color 54 
Drawing From Nature . . 

Drawing From Cast 

Elements of Figure Draw- 
ing 

Drawing From the Figure 
Examination Questions . . . 

Historic Ornament 

Elements of Ornament . . . 

Practical Design 55 

Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions . . 25 

286 



1st Bound 
Volume 



50 



83 
66 

82 
17 
7J 
293 

67 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

15 Plant Analysis 36^ 

}6 Distemper Color 31 

§7 Bookcover Designing 59 

S8 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth and Linoleum I 5th Bound 

Designing 25 ( Volume 

JO Wallpaper Designing 47 

51 The American Vignola ... 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions. . . 18 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. _ No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face tvpe. ^ _ 

The student of the Linoleum Design Course 
is furnished with the five Bound Volumes con- 
taining all our Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the Linoleum Design Course 
wanting instruction in any subject or subjects 
included in any other Course in the School of 
Arts and Crafts can secure such instruction for 
$10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish to the Student 

a. They will show him how linoleum 
is printed and teach him to make 
designs that the manufacturer can 
carry out without alteration. 

b. They will train him in the study 
of plant analysis and the conventionaH- 
zation of the various parts of flowers and 
leaves for use in linoleum designs. 

c. They will give him instruction in 
the elements of both geometrical and 
mechanical drawing and the construc- 
tion of geometrical combinations, which 
are the basis of all good linoleum designs. 

d. They will train him to make free- 
hand sketches of any object for the 

287 



purpose of illustrating an idea or ma-i 
king a memorandura for future use in' 
his designs. 

e. They will instruct him in what he 
should know about popular tastes at 
various times and seasons, the different 
requirements of various manufacturers, 
and how best to prepare and present his ' 
designs to a manufacturer. This knowl- 1 
edge is indispensable to the student in-j- 
tending to make oilcloth and linoleum' 
designing his life work. He must have 
it to make salable designs. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Persons whose early sketches 
show a talent for designing, but whose 
tastes run toward the more strictly 
geometrical and mechanical shapes : 
rather than the foliated ornament, 
such as seen in wallpaper designs, etc. 

h. Persons already making linoleum 
designs and having worked up through 
the trade without any special artistic 
training. 

c. Designers of hardwood floors or 
mosaic tiling. 

d. Oilcloth Makers or Mosaic Tile 
Workers knowing the manufacturing 
side of the industry but lacking artistic 
training. 

Note — The Linoleum Design Course is the 
General Design Course with the instruction 
in oilcloth and linoleum designing added. The 
General Design Course is a broad, general 
treatise on ornamental design, without particular 
reference to any branch of applied design; it lays 
a good foundation for the practice of any line of 
artistic designing. Persons undecided as to what 
special line of designing they prefer should enroll 
for the General Design Course. A specialty 
may be chosen after the student has learned the 
underlying principles of designing; besides, he 
will then be in a better position to know what 
work appeals most to his taste. 

288 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. New and striking designs are 
leeded every season for the thousands 
)f patterns of oilcloth and linoleum 
nanufactured. Expensive linoleums 
ire now manufactured in large varieties 
md there is need for skill in preparing 
iesigns. Original ideas correctly ren- 
|iered are always in demand; and as 
|ood prices are paid, the student will 
md this branch of design both pleasant 
md profitable. 

6. Few linoleum designers work as 
salaried employes. Manufacturers buy 
;heir designs from outside sources and 
Da}^ liberal prices. With our help the 
ptudent can learn to invent salable 
iesigns. There are many that earn 
arge incomes as independent designers. 

c. To be successful the linoleum de- 
signer must have a thorough knowledge 
)f geometrical ornament and the laws 
)f contrast in light and shade and color. 
Se must also have a clear understand- 
ng of the limitations of design and the 
Drocesses of manufacture, in all of which 
horough instruction is given in our 
bourse. 

d. The instruction contained in our 
Linoleum Design Course is of great 
v^alue to those engaged in making par- 
quetry or mosaic designs. The prin- 
nples of design are the same; and the 
iesigner knowing them has only to 
sxpress his own individuality in using 
them and then adapt his design to the 
biaterial. In fact, we guide the stu- 
ient through all the subjects in which 
fie rnust be skilled in order to be a suc- 
iiessful oilcloth and linoleum designer. 

10 289 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu-- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of i 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, , 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days aa 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. , 
The average student requires a little e 
more time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays expresSi. 
charges. • 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course, 
and give a clear and concise treatment i 
of oilcloth and linoleum design. 

b. They are invaluable for reference e 
purposes. They explain the details off 
oilcloth and linoleum design withb 
thoughtful care and a proper regard fori 
the possible shortcomings of the reader. 
Every important item is indexed accord- 
ing to all the initial letters under which 
it is likely to be sought. Indeed, so 
carefully are all items classified and 
indexed, the student can find in a 
moment the description of the proper 
methods of rendering and the processes 
of printing, or any other details it would 
ordinarily take hours to find elsewhere, 
if they could be found at all. 

290 



c. They contain excellent illustra- 
tions of oilcloth and linoleum patterns 
now in vogue. These illustrations give 
the student a good idea of what is 
being asked for by the public, upon 
which point he must be well informed 
in order to make designs that will sell. 

d. They contain text and illustra- 
tions treating of other fields of design, 
as well as of illustration and architec- 
tural drawing, all of which w411 increase 
the student's general knowledge and 
enlarge his scope of work. 



291 



Bookcover Design Course 

Eleven subjects are taught in the 
Bookcover Design Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain thirty- two, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 121 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas .... 41 

3 Elementary Algebra and 

Trigonometric Func- I 1st Bound 

tions 71 I Volume 

4 Logarithms 20 

5 Elementary Mechanics ... 64 
Examination Questions. . . 44 
Keys 140. 

6 Geometrical Drawing 77 

7 Freehand Drawing 84 

8 Elements of Perspective .. 71 

9 Perspective Drawing 39 

10 Historic Ornamental I 2d Bound 

Drawing 83 f Volume 

1 1 Architectural Drawing ... 98 

12 Advanced Architectural 

Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 2. 

13 Elements of Pen-and-ink 

Rendering 66 

14 Rendering With Pen and 

Brush 50 

15 Elements of Water-Color 

Rendering 23 

16 Rendering in Water Color 54 

17 Drawing From Nature ... 83 

18 Drawing From Cast 66 

19 Elements of Figure Draw- 

ing 82 

20 Drawing From the Figure 17 
Examination Questions. . . 7, 

21 Historic Ornament 293 

22 Elements of Ornament ... 67 

23 Practical Design 55 

24 Applied Design 84 

Examination Questions. . 25 

292 



3d Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGEf 

25 Plant Analysis 36 

26 Distemper Color 31 

27 Bookcover Designing 59 

28 Carpet Designing 24 

29 Oilcloth _ and Linoleum I 5th Bound 

Designing 25 i Volume 

30 Wallpaper Designing 47 

31 The American Vignola . . . 104 

32 Color Harmony 27 

Examination Questions. . . 18. 

Pages 2,369 

Illustrations, 1,378 

Drawing Plates, 87 

Instruction Papers, 37 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subject No. 1 may be omitted. No 
recitations are asked for in the subjects in light- 
face type. 

The student of the Bookcover Design 
Course is furnished with the five Bound Volumes 
containing all our Arts and Crafts Courses. 

The student of the _ Bookcover Design 
Course wanting instruction in any subject or 
subjects included in any other Course in the 
School of Arts and Crafts can secure such in- 
struction for $10 a subject. 

What the Points of Information Con- 
tained in These Instruction Papers 
Will Accomplish to the Student 

a. They will train him to prepare 
bookcover designs technically correct 
from the manufacturer's standpoint and 
at the same time artistic and attractive. 
Such designs are always salable. 

b. They will instruct him in plant 
analysis and the conventionalizing of 
flower and leaf forms for application to 
bookcover designs. 

c. They will give him instruction in 
color harmony and color matching, 
enabling him to discriminate between 
good and bad color schemes and to 
prepare successful schemes of his own. 
They will teach him the mixing and 

293 



using of distemper color and give him 
a knowledge of other mediums (pen- 
and-ink, wash, water color, etc.) in 
which bookcover designs are sometimes 
rendered. 

d. They will so train him in historic 
styles of bookbinding and bookcover 
designing that he will not only have 
the best work of former times for 
motifs but will be enabled to prepare 
designs historically correct. 

e. They will enable him to make 
freehand sketches for the purpose of 
illustrating an idea or making a memo- 
randum for future use in his designs. 

/. They will train him in the geo- 
metrical shapes and combinations used 
as the basis of symmetrical repeats in 
bookcover designs. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Persons having a liking for draw- 
ing and whose early sketches consisted of 
symmetrical flower groups, cartouches, 
shields, decorative ribbons, etc. 

b. Persons whose tastes run toward 
decorative effects, bold and striking 
color schemes, and so-called "poster" 
designs. (Persons attracted by good 
bookcovers or magazine covers on the 
news stands are of this class.) 

c. General Designers having artistic 
training and desiring to know how a 
design for a bookcover or a magazine 
cover must be prepared in order to be 
technically correct for the publisher 
and at the same time artistic and 
attractive enough to be salable. 

d. Bookbinders and Workers in pub- 
lishing houses desiring to design book- 
covers but lacking the artistic training. 

294 



c. Wallpaper Designers, Carpet De- 
signers, Stained-Glass Window Design- 
ers, etc. having the technical and artistic 
training in their own work but desiring 
a knowledge of the technical require- 
ments of bookcover design. 

Note — The Bookcover Design Course is the 
Gener.\l Design Course with the instruction 
in bookcover designing added. The General 
Design Course is a broad, general treatise on 
ornamental design, without particular reference 
to any branch of applied design; it lays a good 
foundation for the practice of any line of artistic 
designing. Persons undecided as to what special 
line of designing they prefer should enroll for the 
General Design Course. A specialty may be 
chosen after the student has learned the under- 
lying principles of designing; besides, he will then 
be in a better position to know what work 
appeals most to his taste. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The practical bookcover designer 
must be familiar with the materials 
and the methods used in bookcover. 
manufacture. He must be able to 
decide the number of dies advisable to 
use and the relative importance of the 
cover design to the contents. He must 
know how to approach the publisher 
to get his ideas, and how to estimate 
the cost of reproduction. These things 
are thoroughly explained in our Course. 

b. Every first-class book or magazine 
has a specially designed cover, the 
character of which may influence the 
sale of the book. Once a designer has 
demonstrated his ability to originate 
good cover designs, he will not lack 
opportunities to place his work before 
the public. A design of the simplest 
character brings from So to $10, and a 
design of the best class sells for from 
$50 to $75. 

295 



c. The BooKcovER Design Course 
teaches the student the practical require- 
ments of bookcover design. It gives 
him instruction in the history and the 
development of bookbinding, the effect 
of the old methods of binding, the 
evolution of machine-bound books, and 
the details of modem binding. In 
addition, the designs of old French and 
Italian binders are illustrated and 
described, and details peculiar to differ- 
ent countries or styles are pointed out. 
This valuable instruction is followed by 
a treatise on the principles of artistic 
bookcover design and the modem meth- 
ods of hand tooling and machine print- 
ing. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
. studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Arts and Crafts Outfit as soon as he 
has paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Drawing Plates, Examina- 
tion Questions, and Keys of the Course, 

296 



and give a clear, full, and practical treat- 
ment of bookcover design. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They explain the details of 
bookcover design with thoughtful care 
and a proper regard for the possible 
shortcomings of the reader. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. Indeed, so care- 
fully are all items classified and indexed, 
the student can find in a moment the 
description of the methods of render- 
ing and the processes of hand tooling 
and machine printing, or any other 
details that it would ordinarily take 
hours or even days to find elsewhere. 

c. They contain text and illustra- 
tions treating of other fields of design, 
as well as of illustration and archi- 
tectural drawing, all of which will 
increase the student's general knowl- 
edge and culture and enlarge his scope 
of work. 



297 



Complete Plumbing and Heat- 
ing Course 



PAGES 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

Arithmetic 122 

Mensuration and Use of 
Letters in Formulas. . . . 

Principles of Mechanics. . . 

Hydromechanics 

Pneumatics 

Strength of Materials .... 

Elementarj^ Chemistry . . . 

Contracts 

Geometrical Drawing 

Principles of Mechanical 
Drawing 

Plumbing and Heating 
Drawing 

Reading Architects' Draw- 





ings 


20 




Examination Questions . . . 


33 




Keys 


75 




Tables, 


10 J 
48] 


1r! 




14 


Gas Supply and Distribu- 






tion 


71 


15 


Domestic Uses of Gas. . . . 


82 


16 


Plumbing Materials and 






Tools 


89 


17 


Soldering and Wiping .... 


61 \ 


IS 


Lead Work 


49 
30 


19 


Pipework 


20 


Washing and Drinking 






Fixtures 


59 


21 


Baths and Urinals 


39 




Examination Questions. . . 


25 




Keys 


31 


00, 


Water Closets 


581 
71 


0-3, 


House Drains 


24 


Soil, Waste, and Vent 




Stacks 


67 


'?5 


Traps and Vents 


40 


26 


Drainage and Sewerage . . 


56 


27 


Sewage Disposal 


30 


28 


Sources of Water Supply. 


53 t 

39 r 

71 


9q 


Water Filtration 


30 


Cold-Water Supply 


31 


Hot-Water Supply 


54 


32 


Plumbing Inspection .... 


39 


33 


Plumbing Plans and Speci- 






fications 


36 




Examination Questions . . . 


27 




Keys 


29 



298 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 




Pipes and Fittings 


59^ 




Steam-Fitting Accessor- 






ies 


51 




Radiators and Coils 


72 




Heating and Power Boil- 




4th Bound 


ers 


63 
63 




Boiler Fittings 


Volume 


Principles of Heating. . . . 


81 




Principles of Ventilation .. 


122 




Examination Questions. . . 


17 




Keys 


20 J 




Steam Generation 


66 ^ 




Pipe-Fitting Tools 


53 




Pipe-Fitting Practice 


145 




Steam-Heating Pipe Sys- 






tems 


100 




Exhaust and Vacuum Sys- 






tems 


51 


. 5th Bound 


Hot-Water Heating Sys- 




Volume 


tems 


74 




Hot-Water Heating Appa- 






ratus 


26 




Central-Station Heating. . 


61 




Examination Questions. . . 


23 




Keys 


26 




Hot-Air Heating 


126 




Blower Systems of Heat- 






ing 


156 




Drying and Cooking by 






Steam 


45 




Engine-Room Equipment 


55 


^ 6th Bound 


High-Pressure Pipe Fit- 




Volume 


ting 


43 




Heating Plans and Speci- 






fications 


66 




Examination Questions. . . 


22 




Keys 


28 





Pages 3,651 

Illustrations, 1,994 
Instruction Papers, 69 
Drawing Plates, 14 
Bound Volumes, 6 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They teach the fundamental 
principles of sanitary plumbing, heat- 
ing, and ventilation. 

b. They teach workshop practice. 

299 



c. They explain the arrangement of 
baths, wash basins, water closets, sinks, 
and laundry tubs. 

d. They contain instruction in cop- 
per bit work, joint wiping, lead burning, 
brazing, sheet-lead work, and pipe 
fitting. 

e. They will enable plumbers and 
fitters to understand architects' plans 
and specifications. 

/. They show how to do gas-fitting. 

g. They describe various systems of 
sewage disposal — including the Durham, 
or wrought-iron, system. 

h. They explain how plumbing and 
heating contractors can make and per- 
form contracts; estimate accurately on 
work; prepare plans for filing with the 
Board of Health or the Bureau of 
Buildings; make working drawings; 
superintend plumbing and heating work ; 
and keep records of both time and mate- 
rials. The Instruction Papers give 
the information the student must have 
to become a successful plumbing and 
heating contractor or engineer. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Sanitary Engineers. 

h. Heating and Ventilating Engi- 
neers. 

c. Plumbing Inspectors. 

d. Master Plumbers. 

e. Journeymen Plumbers, Appren- 
tices, and Helpers. 

/. Steam Fitters and Steam-Fitters' 
Helpers. 

g. Gas-Fitters and Gas-Fitters' 
Helpers. 

h. Furnacemen, Tinners, and Sheet- 
Metal Workers. 

300 



i. Hardware-Store Employes. 

j. Salesmen of supplies pertaining 
to sanitary plumbing, heating, and 
ventilation. 

k. Architects and Builders. 

/, Building Superintendents. 

m. Persons whose work requires a 
knowledge of the layingout and the 
installing of plumbing, heating, and 
ventilation systems. 

Remarks 

In all large cities where unions exist, 
and where the plumbers do not work at 
steam fitting, nor steam fitters at plumb- 
ing, the Courses subordinate to the 
Complete Plumbing and Heating 
Course may be preferred by those 
engaged in the respective branches of 
work. These Courses are the Complete 
Plumbing Course; the Complete 
Heating Course; the Plumbers and 
Steam Fitters' Course; the Steam 
Fitters' Course; the Short Plumbing 
Course ; and the Plumbing Inspectors' 
Course. 

After finishing Mechanics, the student 
may take up either the plumbing sec- 
tion, the heating section, or the steam- 
fitting section of the Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The plumbing, heating, and ven- 
tilating trades are advancing so rapidly 
that the man engaged in them must 
keep abreast of the times, or fall behind 
to give place to a workman more con- 
versant with the science of his work. 

b. That the plumbing of buildings 
shall in every possible way conduce to 

301 



good health, is required by common 
sense and demanded by the authorities. 
The proper work can be done by only 
those workmen that thoroughly under- 
stand the requirements and know the 
best methods of fulfilling them. In 
cities, plumbers are compelled to pass 
examinations before properly consti- 
tuted boards of examiners. Men that 
cannot pass the examinations and 
thereby become registered by a Board 
of Health, must either work as helpers 
at reduced pay, or get out of the busi- 
ness. All plumbers' apprentices should 
therefore take our Course. 

c. The heating of dwelling houses, 
public halls, etc. — which has only in 
late years begun to receive due atten- 
tion — has been developed into a nice 
art. Success never comes from guess- 
work in planning a heating system. 
The man that would succeed as an 
expert in heating must understand the 
theory of combustion, steam-making, 
condensation, hot- water circulation, 
convection and radiation of heat, etc. 

d. People are becoming more and 
more convinced that the ventilation of a 
building is a matter of first importance. 
Along certain lines there may be con- 
tention as to what are or are not laws 
of health; but on this one point all are 
agreed: pure air is vitally essential. 
Every building should have its ducts 
and flues to secure in the various 
rooms a sufficient influx and circula- 
tion of fresh air, as well as a proper 
escape of foul air. Considerable skill is 
necessary to meet these requirements. 
The man knowing the principles of air 
circulation is the man that can do the 

302 



best work and therefore demand the 
best salary. 

c. The trade of gas-fitting is one of 
the most important relative to Hghting 
and heating. To locate burners, deter- 
mine what are the best fixtures and 
burners for each location, and install a 
first-class system of piping in a house, 
requires a fund of good judgment and 
technical skill. What is more annoying 
than leaky joints and wabbly fixtures? 
Who is more unwelcome in a home than 
the workman that leaves them? Who 
has greater difficulty in obtaining 
employment and gets less pay for 
his services? Our Course contains full 
instruction in gas-fitting; it describes 
the best practice and quickly teaches 
the student how to do fitting in a 
workmanlike manner. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 2 years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Complete Plumb- 
ing AND Heating Course should have 
our Complete Drawing Outfit, or an . 
outfit equally good, as soon as he is 
ready to study Geometrical Drawing. 
Our Outfit is suitable for use in the 
drafting room. It is worth $13.55; we 
furnish it to our student for $7.95. The 
student pays express charges. 

303 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, and Keys of the Course. 
These Papers having successfully met 
the exacting requirements of thousands 
of students, it is evident that the Bound 
Volumes treat of principles and applica- 
tions in sanitary plumbing, heating, 
and ventilation with more thoroughness 
and conciseness than is possible in a 
work prepared on any other plan. 
They are in fact an epitome of common- 
sense application. For easy gradation; 
for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence 
to the important features of their sub- 
jects; and for practicability, they are 
unequaled. From no other source can 
a student get so quickly so much 
money-earning knowledge. 

h. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subjects of sanitary plumb- 
ing, heating, and ventilation, and the 
details of these subjects are explained 
with thoughtful care and a proper 
regard for the possible shortcomings of 
the reader. Every important item is 
indexed according to all the initial 
letters under which it is likely to be 
sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items classified and indexed, the student 
can find in a moment the solution of a 
problem it might otherwise take hours 
to master. 

304 



c. They are written in a simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary principles 
and lead easily and quickly to the best 
theory and practice of the work of 
which they treat. The tried and proved 
facts, formulas, and processes used in 
the best sanitary plumbing, heating, and 
ventilation practice in the country are 
here collected and bound into an orderly 
and systematic whole. 



305 



Complete Plumbing Course 

Complete Heating Course 

Plumbers and Steam Fitters' 

Course 

Steam Fitters' Course 

Short Plumbing Course 

Plumbing Inspectors' Course 

These Courses are made up from the 
Complete Plumbing and Heating 
Course, which contains the following 
subjects: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 122" 

2 Mensuration and Use of 

Letters in Formulas .... 42 

3 Principles of Mechanics. . 43 

4 Hydromechanics 50 

5 Pneumatics 26 

6 Strength of Materials 25 

7 Elementary Chemistry ... 75 

8 Contracts 37 

9 Geometrical Drawing 77 

10 Principles of Mechanical 

Drawing 29 

11 Plumbing and Heating 

Drawing 19 

12 Reading Architects' Draw- 20 

ings 20 

Examination Questions ... 33 

Keys 75 

Tables 10 

13 Gas Making .. 48 

14 Gas Supply and Distribu- 

tion 71 

15 Domestic Uses of Gas. ... 82 

16 Plumbing Materials and 

Tools 89 

17 Soldering and Wiping. ... 61 I 2d Bound 

18 Lead Work 49 f Volume 

19 Pipework ... 30 

20 Washing and Drinking 

Fixtures 59 

21 Baths and Urinals. 39 

Examination Questions ... 25 

Keys 31 J 

306 



1st Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 



Vent 



Water Closets 

House Drains 

Soil, Waste, and 

Stacks 

Traps and Vents 

Drainage and Sewerage. . . 

Sewage Disposal 

Sources of Water Supply. . 

Water Filtration 

Cold- Water Supply 

Hot- Water Supply 

Plumbing Inspection 

Plumbing Plans and Speci- 
fications 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Pipes and Fittings 

Steam-Fitting Accessories 

Radiators and Coils 

Heating and Power Boilers 

Boiler Fittings _ 

Principles of Heating 

Principles of Ventilation . 
Examination Questions. . . 
Keys 

Steam Generation 66 

Pipe-Fitting Tools 53 

Pipe-Fitting Practice 145 

Steam-Heating Pipe Sys- 
tems 100 

Exhaust and Vacuum Sys- 
tems 51 

Hot-Water Heating Sys- 
tems 74 

Hot-Water Heating 

Apparatus 26 

Central-Station Heating. . 61 

Examination Questions ... 23 

Keys 26 

Hot- Air Heating 126' 

Blower Systems of Heating 156 
Drying and Cooking by 

Steam 45 

Engine-Room Equipment 55 
High-Pressure Pipe Fitting 43 
Heating Plans and Speci- 
fications 66 

Examination Questions. . . 22 

Keys 28 



58 
71 

67 
40 
56 
30 
53 
39 
71 
54 
39 

36 

27 
29 

59 

51 
72 
63 
63 
81 
122 
17 
20 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



Pages . 



.3 651 



307 



Illustrations, 1,994 

Instruction Papers, 69 

Drawing Plates, 14 

Bound Volumes, 6 
Note — Three Bound Volumes containing the 
subjects of his Course are furnished to each 
student of the Complete Plumbing Course, the 
Steam Fitters' Course, the Short Plumbing 
Course, and the Plumbing Inspectors' Course. 
The student of the Complete Heating Course 
receives four Bound Volumes containing the sub- 
jects of his Course, and the student of the Steam 
Fitters' Course, five Bound Volumes. 

Subjects Taught in the Courses 

In the Complete Plumbing Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 
23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 
and 33. 

In the Complete Heating Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 
44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 
and 54. 

In the Plumbers and Steam Fitters' 
Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 
17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 
31, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 44, 
and 45. Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 
may be omitted. 

In the Steam Fitters' Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 
41, 42, 43, 44, and 46. Subjects 1, 2, 
3, 4, 5, and 6 may be omitted. 

In the Short Plumbing Course: 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 16, 17, 18, 19, 
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, and 31. 
Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 may be 
omitted. 

In the Plumbing Inspectors' 
Course: Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 
10, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 
23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 30, 31, 32, and 33. 

308 



Subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 may be 
omitted. 

Time Required to Finish the Courses 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Complete Plumb- 
ing Course or the Complete Heating 
Course in about 1^ years, and the 
Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course, 
the Steam Fitters' Course, the Short 
Plumbing Course, or the Plumbing 
Inspectors' Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of the Complete Plumb- 
ing Course, the Complete Heating 
Course, or the Plumbing Inspectors' 
Course should have our Complete 
Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 



309 



10 



11 



12 



15 



18 



Full Mining Course 

Thirty-six subjects are taught in the 
Full Mining Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain thirty-eight, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 124" 

2 Formulas 13 

3 Geometry and Trigo- 

nometry 75 

4 Mine Surveying and Map- 

ping 192 

5 Geometrical Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Keys 118 

Tables 25 J 

6 Mechanics 96 

7 Steam and Steam Boilers 44 

8 Steam Engines 46 

9 Air and Air Compression . 60 
Hydromechanics and 

Pumping. 

Mine Haulage 

Examination Questions. . . 

Keys 

Hoisting and Hoisting 

Appliances 106 

Prospecting 59 

Placer and Hydraulic 

Mining 105 

Preliminary Operations at 

Metal Mines 95 

Metal Mining 148 

Surface Arrangements at 

Metal Mines 48 

Examination Questions ... 20 

Keys... 15, 

Percussive and Rotary 

Boring 108 

Dynamos and Motors. . . . 292 
Ore Dressing and Milling 239 
Examination Questions ... 38 

Keys 46 , 

Gases Met With in Mines 77" 

Mine "Ventilation 141 

Surface Arrangements of 

Bituminous Mines .... 
Surface Arrangements of 

Anthracite Mines 

Examination Questions . . . 
Keys 

310 



103 
123 

53 

67 J 



105 

161 
34 
38 J 



6th Bound 
Voltime 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

25 Economic Geology of Coal 71 

26 Prospecting for Coal and 

Location of Openings . . 57 

27 Shafts, Slopes, and Drifts 77 

28 Methods of Working Coal 

Mines 146 

29 Electric Haulage and 

Hoisting 33 

30 Electric Pumping, Signal- 

ing, and Lighting 53 

31 Electric Coal-Cutting 

Machinery 27 

32 Compressed-Air Coal-Cut- 

ting Machinery 27 

Examination Questions ... 34 

Keys 33 

33 Elementary Chemistry . . 88 

34 Chemistry and Chemical 

Operations 31 

35 Blowpiping 81 

36 Mineralogy 89 

37 Assaying 143 

38 Geology. 128 

Examination Questions. . . 24 

Keys 28 

Pages 4,302 

Illustrations, 1,960 
Instruction Papers, 48 
Drawing Plates, 5 
Mapping Plates, 5 
Bound Volumes. 7 

Note — Subjects 33 and 34 are not included 
in this Course. 



7th Botmd 
Volume 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give instruction in the 
methods of working both coal and 
metal mines. 

b. They treat of placer and hydraulic 
mining. 

c. They describe the different sys- 
tems of mine haulage and treat of 
hoisting and hoisting appliances. 

d. They show the surface arrange- 
ments at both coal' and metal mines. 



311 



e. They give the student a good 
knowledge of coal preparing and of ore 
dressing and milling. 

/. They explain the sinking of 
shafts and slopes and the driving of 
tunnels and drifts. 

g. They enable the student to get a 
good understanding of mine surveying 
and mapping, mine timbering, and 
mine ventilating. 

h. They furnish reliable information 
pertaining to prospecting, blowpiping, 
and assaying. 

i. They treat of mine gases; explain 
the principle of the safety lamp; show 
various types of lamps ; and teach how 
to test for gas. 

j. They embrace instruction in both 
geology and mineralogy. 

k. They explain the application of 
electricity in mining. 

/. They treat of mine pumping and 
drainage. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mine Owners. 

h. Operators, Managers, and Super- 
intendents of mining properties. 

c. Mining Engineers and Mine In- 
spectors. 

d. Mine Foremen and Assistants. 

e. Fire-Bosses. 

/. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. 

g. Draftsmen in mining engineers' 
offices. 

k. Deputy Mineral Surveyors, 

i. Miners. 

j. Laborers. 

k. Hoisting Engineers, Haulage En- 
gineers, Pumpmen, etc. 

312 



/. Mine Mechanics, Machine Run- 
ners, Drill Men, Machinists, Black- 
smiths, Carpenters, Trackmen, etc. 

m. Breaker Bosses and Men in 
charge of concentrating mills, amalga- 
mating plants, smelters, and refineries. 

n. Weighmasters, and Clerks and 
Accountants in mining stores and 
mining offices. 

0. Contractors for mills, breakers, 
washeries, and other mine buildings. 

p. Metallurgists, Assayers, and 
Amalgamators. 

q. Prospectors. 

r. Persons engaged in sinking shafts 
or slopes and driving tunnels or drifts. 

5. Men that sell mining machinery 
and appliances, and men that wish to 
become such salesmen. 

t. Persons interested in mining or 
living in localities where mining is 
carried on. 

u. Students and Graduates of mi- 
ning schools and colleges. 

V. Professors and Teachers in mining 
schools and colleges. 

w. Editors of mining journals and 
newspapers in mining regions. 

X. Mine Brokers and Stock Dealers. 

Note — Prospective students wanting a full 
knowledge of mining — both coal and metal 
mining — should enroll for the Full Mining 
Course. Those wishing to study coal mining 
only, should enroll for the Complete Coal 
Mixing Course. Persons desiring to take up 
metal mining alone, should enroll for the Metal 
Mixing Course. 

After finishing the mathematics, the student 
of the Full Mining Course may take up the 
Coal-Mining Section, the Metal-Mining Section, 
or the Mine-Mechanical Section. If a student 
desires he can take up Mine Surveying and 
Mapping immediately after finishing the mathe- 
matical work of the Course. The drawing 

313 



required in this Course may be done at any 
time, but the student must finish all the Geo- 
metrical Drawing Plates before taking up Mine 
Surveying and Mapping. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Enormous amounts of money 
have been invested in mining, and 
operations are now conducted on a 
larger scale than ever before. The 
mining engineer is in constant demand 
and well paid for his services. It used 
to be that a young man wanting to 
become a mining engineer had to spend 
4 years in acquiring his education at 
some technical school or college. But 
today a student that has finished our 
Full Mining Course can at once begin 
to practice as a mining engineer with- 
out having to go to college. By enroll- 
ing for our Full Mining Course and 
taking up Mine Surveying and Mapping 
first, the student can in a few months 
qualify for a position in a drafting 
room or in a mine-surveying corps — the 
two principal entrances to the field of 
mining engineering. The student hav- 
ing once secured a foothold, his progress 
is a matter of experience and further 
study. With the knowledge obtained 
from our Course, the student advances 
rapidly. He puts into practice the 
information as fast as he learns it. 

b. The demand in the mining indus- 
try today is for economy in operation. 
In order to fill his position satisfactorily 
the mine superintendent must know 
how to obtain the coal or mineral with 
the smallest expense and how to save 
the largest quantity in its preparation. 
To accomplish this the superintendent 

314 



is obliged to keep himself informed in 
regard to improved methods and labor- 
saving machinery. And in no other 
way can he do this so readily as through 
our Full Mining Course. Our Course 
contains the best that is known con- 
cerning mining ; it is both thorough and 
practical, and gives instruction in 
exactly the subjects of which a mine 
superintendent must have knowledge. 
The possession of such money-saving 
knowledge will enable the superintend- 
ent to advance his own interests by 
increasing the confidence of his employ- 
ers in his ability to serve them to the 
greatest advantage. 

c. Even though the student intends 
to make a specialty of some one branch 
of mining, a general knowledge of all 
branches of the work is essential. 

d. Professors and teachers in mining 
schools and colleges will find in our 
Course a store of knowledge that will 
be of inestimable value in their class- 
room work. Our instruction will enable 
them to give their students a thorough 
knowledge of mining operations as 
carried on in actual practice — a feature 
so often lacking in college courses but 
of paramount importance to the college 
man about to engage in mining as a 
profession. 

e. In no class of mining does theo- 
retical knowledge count for so much as 
in coal or metal mining. The most val- 
uable qualification a miner can have is 
to know where to look for coal or ore, 
and how to find deposits that have been 
cut off by faults or lost from other causes. 
The man that relies on experience 
alone will never make the headway 

315 



that he would if he had supplemented 
his experience with a knowledge of the 
different subjects contained in our 
Full Mining Course. Our instruction, 
written by practical raining men, will 
teach the student to discriminate 
between barren and productive coal 
measures and to trace ore deposits and 
mineral-bearing rocks. It will qualify 
him to work intelligently. 

/. Education is essential to the mine 
worker that would advance. Without 
it he cannot pass the state examination 
for a certificate of competency, which 
in many states he must have before he 
can become a mine official. Our 
Course is well adapted to the needs of 
those preparing for examinations for 
fire-boss, mine foreman, and mine 
inspector. It is a significant fact that 
a large number of the mine inspectors 
in the United States have been or are 
our students. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 
2 J years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Full Mining 
Course should have our Complete 
Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 

316 



It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Complete Blowpiping Outfit as soon as 
he is ready to study Blowpiping, and 
has paid $20. The student pays 
express charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Drawing Plates, Examination 
Questions, and Keys of the Course. 
They are of the greatest value to those 
desiring to study at home and therefore 
requiring forceful and well-arranged 
instruction. Few persons wanting to 
use their spare time for home study 
are wise enough to plan out for them- 
selves a progressive Course; and few 
are faithful enough to plod through 
such a Course when made up of average 
textbooks. It is here our specially 
planned Bound Volumes exactly meet 
the requirements of those that would 
otherwise have endless trouble in 
rightly selecting and arranging an order 
of studies suited to their needs. Our 
Bound Volumes contain in a logical 
order all the subjects properly included 
in a full mining course. The instruc- 
tion is so forcefully written and illus- 
trated that the student can take it 
into his mind unaided. By thoughtfully 

317 



reading the Bound Volumes, the stu- j 
dent can get a good knowledge of both 
coal and metal mining. 

b. They contain the best that has 
been learned concerning mining. They 
are invaluable to the student wanting 
to make a comparative study of both 
coal and metal mining. Our experience 
in preparing textbooks enables us to 
make our Bound Volumes superior to 
all others for reference purposes. It. is 
the universal verdict that nowhere else 
can the student get so readily so much 
reliable information pertaining to both 
coal and metal mining. 

c. They are admirably suited to the 
needs of mine officials and mine inspect- 
ors engaged in mining districts that 
include both coal and metal mines. 

d. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all 
initial letters under which it is likely to 
be sought. 



318 



Complete Coal Mining Course 

Twenty-six subjects are taught in 
the Complete Coal Mining Course. 
The Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Librar}'- contain twenty-seven, as fol- 
lows : 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 124 

Formulas 13 

Geoinetry and Trigonom- 
etry 75 

Mine Surveying and Map- 
ping 192 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Kevs 118 

Tables 25 

Mechanics 96 

Steam and Steam Boilers 44 

Steam Engines 46 

Air and Air Compression 60 
Hydromechanics and 

Pumping 103 

Mine Haulage 123 

Examination Questions ... 53 

Keys ■ 67J 

Dynamos and Motors . . . 292 
Percussive and Rotary 

Boring 108 

Ore Dressing and Milling. . 239 

Examination Questions ... 38 

Keys 46 

Gases Met "With in Mines 77 

Mine Ventilation 141 

Hoisting and Hoisting 

Appliances 106 

Surface Arrangements of 

Bituminous Mines .... 105 
Surface Arrangements of 

Anthracite Mines 161 

Examination Questions. . . 34 

Keys 38 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



319 



71 



146 



LIST OF SUBJECTS ] 

Economic Geology of Coal 

Prospecting for Coal and 
Location of Openings. . 

Shafts, Slopes, and Drifts 

Methods of Working Coal 
Mines 

Electric Haulage and 
Hoisting _. . . . . 33 

Electric Pumping, Signal- 
ing, and Lighting 53 

Electric Coal-Cutting Ma- 
chinery 27 

Compressed-Air Coal-Cut- 
ting Machinery 27 

Examination Questions. . . 34 

Keys 33 



5th Bound 
Vokime 



Pages 3,200 

Illustrations, 1,483 
Instruction Papers, 39 
Drawing Plates, 5 
Mapping Plates, 5 
Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — Subject No. 14 is not included in this 
Course. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give instruction in mine 
ventilating, mine timbering, and mine 
surveying and mapping. 

b. They explain the application of 
electricity in coal mining. 

c. They show the surface arrange- 
ments of both anthracite and bitumi- 
nous mines. 

d. They explain pillar-and-chamber 
methods and long-wall methods of 
working coal mines. 

e. They describe the different sys- 
tems of mine haulage. 

/. They explain the sinking of 
shafts and slopes and the driving of 
drifts. 

g. They contain instruction in the 
geology of coal — enabling the student 

320 



to recognize coal-bearing strata and 
discriminate between that and strata 
in which coal is never found. 

h. They treat of mine pumping and 
drainage. 

i. They are so clear and easy of 
comprehension, the student readily 
grasps the principles involved without 
the presence of a teacher. 

;'. They are made clear with frequent 
illustrations. 

k. They contain numerous worked- 
out examples, showing the methods of 
solving practical mining problems. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Coal Operators. 

b. Managers and Superintendents of 
coal properties. 

c. Mining Engineers. 

d. Mine Inspectors. 

e. Mine Foremen and Assistants. 
/. Fire-Bosses. 

g. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. 

h. Hoisting Engineers, Haulage 
Engineers, Pumpmen, etc. 

i. Miners. 

j. Laborers. 

k. Clerks and Accountants in mining 
stores and offices. 

/. Mine Mechanics, Machine Run- 
ners, Drill Men, Machinists, Blacksmiths, 
Carpenters, Trackmen, etc. 

m. Men in charge of or operating 
rolls, crushers, conveyers, and other 
breaker machinery. 

n. Contractors for breakers, wash- 
eries, and other mine buildings. 

o. Persons engaged in sinking shafts 
or slopes and driving tunnels or drifts. 

11 321 



p. Men that sell mining machinery 
and appliances, and men wishing to 
become such salesmen. 

q. Persons interested in coal mining, 
or living in localities where coal mining 
is carried on. 

r. Professors and Teachers in mining 
schools and colleges. 

5. Graduates of high schools and 
Students in mining schools and colleges. 

t. Editors and Lawyers in mining 
districts, Mine Brokers, and Dealers in 
mining stocks. 

Note — Persons wanting a knowledge of coal 
mining only, shotdd enroll for the Complete 
Coal Mining Course. Persons wanting a knowl- 
edge of both coal and metal mining should enroll 
for the Full Mining Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Many states have passed laws 
requiring mine officials to hold certifi- 
cates of competency. It is probably 
only a question of time when all mining 
states will pass similar laws. The 
examinations for state certificates are 
becoming more dif&cult from year to 
year. Our Course is especially suited 
to the needs of the student preparing 
for the examinations for fire-boss, mine 
foreman, and mine inspector. 

h. Before the mine worker can 
advance he must add to his practical 
experience a knowledge of mining con- 
ditions and the principles involved in 
mining operations. This knowledge, 
and this alone, will bring him promotion 
and increase in wages. The man that 
supplements his practical work with 
the knowledge contained in our Course 
can qualify for any position in or about 
the anthracite or the bituminous mines. 

322 



c. The mine official should know 
how to work a mine with the greatest 
safety to his men. The responsibility of 
having men's lives in his charge should 
alone be sufficient incentive for him to 
instruct himself for their protection. 

d. Wonderful progress has been 
made in the coal-mining industry within 
the last few years. Indeed, so scien- 
tifically is coal mining now carried on 
that little of real value is lost either in 
mining or preparing. Coal that for- 
merly could not be worked except at a 
loss is now being mined at a profit, and 
the finer sizes of coal — previously classed 
as culm and placed in the refuse bank — 
are now saved and bring good prices. 
With improved methods has come a 
demand for men whose knowledge 
qualifies them to secure the coal with 
the least expense and save the largest 
per cent, in its preparation. 

e. Mining companies everywhere are 
searching for men competent to direct 
operations. The opportunities for 
trained men were never better. Through 
our instruction a man can learn to 
locate, open, and equip a mine; to 
direct operations; and to deal intelli- 
gently with the problems that daily 
arise. 

/. The superintendent's position is 
one of great importance and responsi- 
bility. On him depends, in a great 
measure, the success or the failure of 
the mine. To perform his duties 
efficiently, the superintendent must 
know how to direct his subordinates. 
If he lacks a technical education he will 
daily meet questions he cannot answer; 

323 



he will find his lack of systematic knowl- 
edge a constant stumbling block. 

g. By enrolling for our Complete 
Coal Mining Course and taking up 
the mine surveying and mapping section 
first, a student can quickly qualify for 
a position in a mine surveying corps or 
in a drafting room. Then by supple- 
menting his practical experience with 
the knowledge contained in our Course, 
he can rapidly advance. Many success- 
ful mining engineers began their careers 
in a surveying corps or in a drafting 
room. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1^^ years. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Complete Coal 
Mining Course should have our Com- 
plete Drawing Outfit, or an outfit 
equally good, as soon as he is ready to 
study Geometrical Drawing. Our Out- 
fit is suitable for use in the drafting 
room. It is worth $13.55; we furnish 
it to our student for $7.95. The stu- 
dent pays express charges. 



324 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and 
Keys of the Course. These Papers hav- 
ing successfully met the exacting 
requirements of thousands of students, 
it is evident that the Bound Volumes 
treat of principles and applications in 
coal mining with more thoroughness 
and conciseness than is possible in a 
work prepared on any other plan. 
They are in fact an epitome of common- 
sense application. For easy gradation; 
for conciseness ; for intelligent adherence 
to the important features of their sub- 
jects; and for practicability, they are 
unequaled. From no other source can 
a student get so quickly so much 
money-earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted to 
the subject of coal mining, and the 
details of that subject are explained 
with thoughtful care and a proper regard 
for the possible shortcomings of the 
reader. Every important item is 
indexed according to all the initial 
letters under which it is likely to be 
sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items classified and indexed, the student 
can find in a moment the solution of a 
problem it might otherwise take hours 
to master. They are the very best text- 
books ever prepared for home study. 

325 



c. They are written in a simple 
style, particular care having been 
taken to avoid unusual words. The 
information they contain is so set forth 
as to be easily understood, even by the 
man of little education. They begin 
with the simplest and most elementary 
principles and lead easily and quickly 
to the best theory and practice of the 
work of which they treat. The tried 
and proved facts, formulas, and proc- 
esses used in the best coal-mining 
practice in the country are here col- 
lected and bound into an orderly and 
systematic whole. 



326 



1st Bound 
Volume 



Short Coal Mining Course 

Ten subjects are taught in the Short 

Coal Mining Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain fourteen, as foUows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 124 

2 Mensuration and Trigono- 

metric Functions 32 

3 Gases Met With in Coal 

Mines 48 

4 Mine Ventilation 51 

5 Mine Surveying 93 

6 Mine Machinery 96 

Examination Questions. . . 46 

Keys 136 

Tables 25 J 

7 Economic Geology of Coal 71 

8 Prospecting for Coal and 

Location of Openings. . . 57 

9 Shafts, Slopes, and Drifts 77 

10 Methods of Working Coal 

Mines 146 

11 Electric Haulage and 

Hoisting 33 

12 Electric Pumping, Signal- 

ing, and Lighting 53 

13 Electric Coal-Cutting Ma- 

chinery 27 

14 Compressed-Air Coal-Cut- 

ting Machinery 27 

Examination Questions. . . 34 

Keys 33 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1,238 

Illustrations, 537 
Instruction Papers, 16 
Bound Volumes, 2 
Note— No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They explain pillar-and-chamber 
methods and long-wall methods of 
mining. 

b. They contain instruction in the 
geology of coal — enabling the student 

327 



to recognize coal-bearing strata and 
discriminate between them and strata 
in which coal is never found. 

c. They treat of the sinking of 
shafts and slopes and the driving of 
drifts. 

d. They treat of mine gases, explain 
the principle of the safety lamp and 
show various types of lamps, and 
teach how to test for firedamp. 

e. They furnish instruction in mine 
ventilation. 

/. They will enable the student to 
understand the principles of mine 
surveying. 

g. They explain the principles of 
mechanics and teach how to calculate 
the sizes of engines and the horsepower 
of boilers. 

h. They describe mining machinery 
such as drums, cages, air compressors 
and pumps, drilling and coal-cutting 
machines, etc. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mine Foremen and Assistants. 

b. Fire-Bosses. 

c. Driver Bosses. 

d. Miners. 

e. Laborers. 

/. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. 

g. Mine Mechanics, Machine Run- 
ners, Drill Men, Machinists, Black- 
smiths, Carpenters, Trackmen, Timber- 
men, etc. 

h. Breaker Bosses, Docking Bosses. 

i. Headmen, Footmen. 

j. Weighmasters and Check Weigh- 
men. 

k. Clerks and Accountants in mining 
stores and offices. 

328 



I: Persons owning coal mines or coal 
lands and wanting to get a fair knowl- 
edge of coal mining in order to talk 
intelligently on mining topics and to 
guard better their own interests. 

m. Persons living in localities where 
coal mines are operated and desiring to 
understand in a general way how the 
mining is carried on. 

n. Persons employed in or about the 
coal mines. 

Note — The Short Coal Mining Course— an 
abridgment of the Complete Coal Mining 
Course — is intended for persons wanting to 
prepare in the shortest time possible _ for the 
examinations for fire-boss, assistant mine fore- 
man, and mine foreman; or for those wishing 
simply to take up or review the subject of coal 
mining in a short and concise form without 
studying it so fully as treated in our Complete 
Coal Mining Course. If the prospective 
student has time and desires a better preparation 
for the examination or a more comprehensive 
knowledge of coal mining than that given in the 
Short Coal Mining Course he should enroll 
for the Complete Coal Mining Course. We 
should not in any case recommend the Short 
Coal Mining Course to men desiring a full 
knowledge of coal mining. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Mere manual labor and mechan- 
ical drudgery are never profitable; and 
mining is no exception. So long as 
the mine worker toils with his hands 
only, his lot will be a hard one. With- 
out a mining education he will always 
be down; for he is in competition with 
cheap labor and labor-saving machinery. 
To hold his own he must make his brains 
direct and help the work of his hands; 
and to advance and become a success 
he must get a thorough knowledge of 
mining conditions and the principles 
involved in mining operations. In no 

329 



other way can the mine worker get so 
readily so much information pertaining 
to practical mining as through our 
instruction. It will lift him from the 
rut in which he has worked all his life, 
and give him that intelligent grasp of 
mining principles so essential to success. 
Without a mining edu.cation the mine 
worker cannot pass the state examina- 
tion for a certificate of competency, 
which he must have in some states 
before he can become a mine official. 

b. Positions are no longer secure 
without an education. The mine fore- 
man must keep himself informed or 
else step aside for a man that combines 
education and experience. 

c. Mining is a progressive art. The 
whole tendency in mining is toward 
economy and increased efficiency. 
Economical methods are constantly 
being adopted and better appliances 
introduced. These improvements call 
for men that can use them to the 
greatest advantage. 

d. The miner or the laborer that 
appreciates what opportunities will 
come to him through an increased 
technical knowledge, and makes an 
effort to obtain this knowledge, is 
usually rewarded with an advance 
in both salary and position. Our 
Course opens the doors of hope and 
opportunity to all ambitious miners 
and laborers. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 

330 



week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a Httle 
more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Quesiions, and 
Keys of the Course. The Bound Vol- 
umes are exactly suited to the needs of 
the student that failed to get an educa- 
tion in his youth and now finds he 
needs it in his work. Our instruction 
is so forcefully written, the student can 
take it into his mind unaided. By 
thoughtfully reading the Bound Vol- 
umes in spare times at home, the stu- 
dent can get a good idea of the methods 
and principles of coal mining. 

b. They are a valuable reference 
library. The Bound Volumes contain 
in logical order all the subjects properly 
included in a short coal-mining course. 
Each subject is treated as fully as neces- 
sary to give the student a good under- 
standing of it. The information given 
in the Bound Volumes will increase the 
mine worker's ability to accomplish 
work in the mines at less cost of time 
and labor, thus making him more 
valuable to himself and to his employer. 

c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all 
initial letters under which it is likely 
to be sought. 

d. They are well illustrated and 
give worked-out examples of how to 
solve practical mining problems. 

331 



Metal Mining Course 

Twenty-three subjects are taught in 
the Metal Mining Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain twentv-six, as follows: 



12 



15 



18 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 124 

Formulas 13 

Geometry and Trigonom- 
etry 75 

Mine Surveying and Map- 
ping 192 

Geometrical Drawing 77 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Keys 118 

Tables 25 

Mechanics . 96 

Steam and Steam Boilers 44 

Steam Engines 46 

Air and Air Compression 60 
Hydromechanics and 



Pumping. . . 
Mine Haulage. 



103 
123 
53 
67 



Examination Questions 

Keys 

Hoisting and Hoisting Ap- 
pliances 106 

Prospecting 59 

Placer and Hydraulic 

Mining 105 

Preliminary Operations at 

Metal Mines 95 

Metal Mining 148 

Surface Arrangements at 

Metal Mines 48 

Examination Questions ... 20 

Keys 15 

Percussive and Rotary 

Boring 108 

Dynamos and Motors .... 292 
Ore Dressing and Milling. 239 
Examination Questions ... 38 
Keys 46. 

332 



1st Bound 
Vohime 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

21 Elementary Chemistry ... 88 

22 Chemistry and Chemical 

Operations 31 

oA 21°'''^?'''^ li I 5th Bound 

24 Mmeralogy Sn Volume 

25 Assaymg 143 

26 Geology 128 

Examination Questions. . . 24 
Keys 28 

Pages 2,988 

Illustrations, 1,541 
Instrtiction Papers, 34 
Drawing Plates, 5 
Mapping Plates, 5 
Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — No recitations are asked for in sub- 
jects 18, 21, and 22. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They furnish full instruction in 
metal mining. 

b. They supply the student with a 
thorough knowledge of placer and 
hydraulic mining. 

c. They show how to determine 
the approximate composition of min- 
erals. 

d. They will enable the student to 
prospect intelligently. Our instruction 
in prospecting will save a vast amount 
of time and futile labor to the would-be 
prospector. 

e. They contain instruction in both 
wet and dry methods of assaying the 
principal metals. 

/. They take up fully the subjects of 
geology and mineralogy, explaining rock 
formations and enabling the student to 
recognize various rocks and minerals by 
their distinguishing characteristics. 

g. They show the surface arrange- 
ments at metal mines. 

333 



h. They describe the different sys- 
tems of mine haulage. 

i. They treat of mine pumping and 
drainage. 

j. They tell how to recover gold and 
silver from ores by the processes of 
amalgamation. Amalgamating appa- 
ratus is shown and described. 

k. They give instruction in ore 
dressing and milling. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mine Owners. 

h. Managers, Superintendents, and 
Foremen of ore properties. 

c. Mining Engineers. 

d. Mine Surveyors and Assistants. 

e. Hoisting Engineers, Pumpmen, 
etc. 

/. Metal Miners and Placer Miners. 

g. Clerks and Accountants in Mi- 
ning offices. 

h. Mine Mechanics, Drill Runners, 
Drill Helpers, Machinists, Blacksmiths, 
Carpenters, Trackmen, Timbermen, etc. 

i. Prospectors. 

j. Deputy Mineral Surveyors and 
Assistants. 

k. Assayers and Assistants. 

/. Contractors for mills, concen- 
trating plants, and other mine buildings. 

m. Contractors engaged in sinking 
shafts or slopes, driving tunnels, dia- 
mond drilling, or deep-well drilling. 

n. Men that sell mining machinery 
and appliances, and men that wish to 
become such salesmen. 

o. Persons interested in metal mi- 
ning, or living in localities where it is 
carried on. 

334 



p. Professors and Teachers in mi- 
ning schools and colleges. 

q. Graduates of high schools, and 
Students in mining schools and colleges. 

r. Editors and Lawyers in mining 
districts, Mine Brokers, and Dealers in 
mining stocks. 

Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of 
both coal and metal mining should enroll for the 
Full Mining Course. After finishing the 
mathematics the student of the Metal Mining 
Course may take up the Metal-Mining Section 
or the Mine-Mechanical Section. If a student 
desires he may take up Mine Surveying and 
Mapping immediately after finishing the Geomet- 
rical Drawing and the mathematical work of his 
Course. The student may take up drawing as 
soon as he pleases, without waiting until he has 
finished the mathematics. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Metal mining is undergoing a 
transformation. Old and wasteful meth- 
ods are being pushed aside by scien- 
tific methods and modem machinery. 
Many mines that a few years ago 
could not be worked except at a loss 
are today being operated at a profit. 
There is a constant advancement in the 
standard of knowledge required of 
mine officials. The mine official that 
does not know how to manage every 
branch of the business — to do the best 
possible for his employers — is not qual- 
ified for his position. He must educate 
himself or step aside for a better man. 
Our Metal Mining Course is a boon 
to the untrained official; it enables him 
to supplement his practical experience 
with a thorough knowledge of the 
theory of metal mining — to qualify 
himself to fill his position successfully. 

335 



b. Every mine worker wanting to 
improve his condition and get more pay 
should systematically study the sub- 
jects necessary to make him proficient. 
It is by showing himself a better man 
than his fellow workmen that the 
ambitious mine worker can rise. The 
man determined to get ahead and 
realizing that to do it he must have the 
proper training, can advance easily 
and quickly through study of our 
Course. Through our instruction the 
student is given a practical working 
knowledge of mine surveying and map- 
ping; he learns the best methods of 
mining; and becomes familiar with 
various kinds of mining and milling 
machinery. This knowledge coupled 
with his practical experience is a valu- 
able recommendation for the position of 
foreman or superintendent. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 
2 J years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Drawing Outfit Required 

The student of our Metal Mining 
Course should have our Complete 
Drawing Outfit, or an outfit equally 
good, as soon as he is ready to study 
Geometrical Drawing. Our Outfit is 
suitable for use in the drafting room. 
It is worth $13.55; we furnish it to our 
student for $7.95. The student pays 
express charges. 

336 



Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Complete Blowpiping Outtit as soon as 
he is ready to stud}^ Blowpiping, and 
has paid $20. The student pays express 
charges. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
Drawing Plates, Mapping Plates, and 
Keys of the Course, which were prepared 
to meet the needs of the student that 
must get an education, if he gets it at 
all, by means of home study and w4th 
no instructor by his side. Instruction 
for this purpose must be so forcefully 
w^ritten that the student can take it 
into his mind unaided. So well does 
our instruction meet this requirement, 
many students have obtained a good 
knowledge of metal mining by thought- 
fully reading the Bound Volumes in 
spare time at home. It is because our 
Bound Volumes are so clearly written 
and illustrated as to make impossible a 
misunderstanding of what is read that 
they are universally accepted as the 
best for home study. 

b. They are for reference purposes 
better than any other work of the kind 
ever published. Our Bound Volumes 
keep the student in touch with the 
best metal-mining practice, and give 
him a fund of reliable information, much 
of which he cannot obtain elsewhere. 

3.37 



That our Bound Volumes are consid- 
ered superior to ordinary textbooks is 
shown by the fact that many of the 
leading mining schools and colleges are 
using them for reference purposes. The 
Bound Volumes are fully indexed. 
Every important item is indexed with 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 

c. They have been written and 
arranged with the idea of providing the 
student with a practical working knowl- 
edge of metal mining that will help 
him secure a good position and to fill it 
satisfactorily. 

d. They are replete with illustrative 
examples, showing the methods of solv- 
ing practical mining problems. 



338 



Metal Prospectors' Course 

Six subjects are taught in the Metal 
Prospectors' Course. The Bound 
Volumes of the Reference Library con- 
tain twelve, as follows: 



10 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Elementary Chemistry . . 88 
Chemistry and Chemical 

Operations 31 

Blowpiping 81 

Mineralogy 89 

Assaying." 143 

Geology 128 

Examination Questions . . 24 

Keys 28 

Hoisting and Hoisting Ap- 
pliances 106 

Prospecting 59 

Placer and Hydraulic Mi- 
ning 105 

Preliminary Operations at 

Metal Mines 95 

Metal Mining 148 

Surface Arrangements at 

Metal Mines 48 

Examination Questions . . 20 

Kevs 15 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1,008 

Illustrations, 532 
Instruction Papers, 6 
Bound Volumes, 2 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. 

Blowpiping gives the student a 
knowledge of the fundamental principles 
of qualitative analysis by means of the 
blowpipe; describes the apparatus and 
the reagents used in making blowpipe 
tests; explains clearly the examination 
of a substance before the blowpipe; 
takes up the reduction of metallic 
oxides with soda; and contains tables 
showing the colors imparted by various 
minerals to the flame and to both 



339 



borax and phosporous beads, as well 
as a table giving the most characteristic 
reactions for the more common metallic 
oxides. The purpose of blowpiping is 
to furnish a rapid method for deter- 
mining the approximate composition 
of ores and minerals. Blowpipe tests 
indicate the presence of the different con- 
stituents, not the proportions. With 
the information given in our Paper, 
the student should have no difficulty 
in distinguishing the principal ores 
and oxides of metals — information 
invaluable to a prospector. 

Mineralogy takes up the physical 
characteristics of minerals, explaining 
clearly how the different minerals can 
be recognized by such properties as 
hardness, specific gravity, color, cleav- 
age, fracture, streak, etc. ; describes the 
form in which minerals occur, giving 
the various systems of crystallography; 
familiarizes the student with the impor- 
tant metallic minerals, telling him how 
to identify them; contains tables of 
the minerals constituting metallic ores 
of secondary importance, as well as 
a table of the minerals sent with the 
Blowpipe Outfit; and embraces reliable 
information about precious stones. 

Assaying teaches how to make quanti- 
tative analyses of ores by both wet and 
dry methods. The apparatus used is 
clearly described and the student can 
obtain a thorough theoretical knowl- 
edge of gold and silver assaying, which 
can be readily put to practical use. 
The determination of iron, copper, 
lead, sulphur, etc. is given careful 
treatment. Many of our former stu- 
dents are now working as assay ers. 

340 



Geology gives the student a knowl- 
edge of the earth's history as recorded 
in the rocks. It explains the various 
agencies instrumental in changing the 
form of the earth ; describes the structure 
of rocks; gives valuable information 
about mineral veins and ore deposits; 
shows fossils characteristic of the dif- 
ferent periods; and tells about the 
occurrence of minerals of commercial 
importance, such as gold, silver, lead, 
copper, etc. 

Prospecting teaches how to search 
intelligently for mineral veins and ore 
deposits; tells how to locate placer 
claims and lode claims according to 
United States practice as well as 
British Columbian practice; deals with 
the location and recording of mill sites ; 
takes up prospecting for gems and 
precious stones, underground pros- 
pecting, drilling, magnetic prospecting; 
gives examples of prospecting regions; 
and tells about the most important 
prospectors' tools and shows how to 
keep them in repair. The information 
contained in this Paper is invaluable 
to every prospector; it will save him 
a vast amount of time and futile labor 
and put him in possession of knowledge 
that will be a potent factor in his 
success. 

Placer and Hydraulic Mining explains 
the origin of gold placers; takes up 
placer mining, describing the apparatus 
and methods used in placer and hy- 
draulic mining ; deals with the important 
subject of water supply, telling how to 
build reservoirs, dams, ditches, and 
flumes, and explains how to measure 
the flow of water: and gives examples 

341 



of placers and tells about the practical 
way in which they have been worked. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Prospectors. 

b. Placer Miners. 

c. Assayers and Assistants. 

d. Contractors engaged in drilling, 
etc. 

e. Trappers, Hunters, Lumbermen, 
etc. 

_/. Persons interested in mines or 
mineral lands. 

g. Deputy Mineral Surveyors. 

h. Persons living in metal-mining 
regions. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. To prospect intelligently for 
precious metals, the prospector must 
have a thorough knowledge of the condi- 
tions under which the ores occur. He 
must know in what rocks he may rea- 
sonably hope to discover rich deposits. 
Without this knowledge he cannot 
discriminate between promising regions 
and those regions barren of prospects, 
and he will probably waste both time 
and money in fruitless search. Our 
Course embraces just the information 
the student must have to become a 
successful prospector, and this infor- 
mation is given in the best possible 
way. The student does not have to 
make an exhaustive study of many 
books to find what he must know. We 
have epitomized the best known about 
metal prospecting, and the student 
gets the whole thing in a nutshell. Our 
instruction is invaluable to every one 

342 



searching for rich ore deposits or in 
any way connected with metal pros- 
pecting. 

b. The discovery of every new 
mining field rekindles the mining fever, 
and thousands rush to the new field in 
search of fortune. Few of these as a 
rule are equipped with practical train- 
ing or technical education. Many have 
never seen a mine and are unable to 
distinguish glittering pyrites from free 
gold. And where one haphazard pros- 
pector succeeds, thousands fail. If the 
man having no practical experience and 
wanting to prospect would devote some 
time to the study of blowpiping, miner- 
alog}^ assaying, and geology before be- 
ginning his search for valuable mineral 
deposits, his chances of success would 
be immeasurably increased. Our Metal 
Prospectors' Course will equip the 
student with exactly the instruction he 
must have to prospect in the most in- 
telligent manner. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Complete Blowpiping Outfit as soon as 
he is ready to study Blowpiping, and 
has paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dents' concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 
days a week, finish the Course in about 
6 months. The average student re- 
quires a little more time. 

343 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, and 
Keys of the Course, and give the stu- 
dent knowledge that will enable him to 
prospect intelligently for mineral veins 
and ore deposits — knowledge that will 
save much time and trouble and 
increase greatly the chances of making 
rich discoveries. 

b. They are invaluable to the student 
realizing the tragedy of idle moments 
and the infinite possibilities of spare- 
time study. Replete with practical 
information, our Bound Volumes are 
full of knowledge indispensable to 
the student ; written in a style so simple 
as to preclude misunderstanding, and 
indexed so thoroughly that every 
important subject can be found in an 
instant. 

c. They are thorough, practical, 
and easy to understand— three features 
essential to success in home study, and 
which our long experience and constant 
endeavor to provide ideal instruction 
has enabled us to fill to the letter. 
Our instruction was originally prepared 
by practical men, then carefully gone 
over by our own textbook writers and 
adapted to the peculiar needs of the 
home student. 



344 



lst!_Bound 
Volume 



Complete Cotton Course 

Forty-seven subjects are taught in 
the Complete Cotton Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference Library 
contain fifty-five, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 124 

2 Mensuration 17 

3 Mechanical Definitions ... 38 

4 Mechanical Calculations . . 17 

5 Yarn Calculations, Cotton 22 

6 Yam Calculations, Vv^'oolen 

and Worsted 26 

7 Yarn Calculations. Gen- 

eral 39 

8 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 26 

9 Cloth Calculations, Wool- 

en and Worsted 28 

10 Draft Calculations 33 

11 Reading Textile Drawings 34 
Examination Questions. . . 38 

12 Cotton 34^ 

13 Pickers 74 

14 Cotton Cards 117 

15 Drawing Rolls 41 

16 Railway Heads and Draw- 

ing Frames 41 

17 Combers 78 

18 Fly Frames 83 

Examination Questions. . . 28.* 

Ring Frames 73 

Cotton Mules 116 

Twisters 37 

Spoolers 27 

Beam Warpers 30 

Slashers 57 

Chain Warping 85 

Examination Questions. . . 23 

Yarns 95 

Cloth Rooms 72 

Mill Engineering 178 

Reeling and Baling 33 

Winding. 32 

Examination Questions. . . 19 

345 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 

Volume 



31 

32 

33 

34 
35 
36 
37 
38 
39 
40 
41 

42 
43 

44 
45 

46 

47 
48 
49 

50 

51 

52 
53 
54 
55 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Woolen and "Worsted Cam- 
Looms 48 

Woolen and Worsted 

Fancy Looms 95 

Woolen and Worsted 

Loom Fixing 37 

Plain Looms 46 

Fixing Looms 31 

Loom Attachments 29 

Automatic Looms 29 

Dobbies 33 

Leno Attachments 34 

Box Motions 29 

Jacquards 112 

Examination Questions ... 29 

Glossary of Weaves 35 

Elementary Textile De- 
signing 30 

Analysis of Cotton Fabrics 25 
Analysis of Woolen and 

Worsted Fabrics 27 

Twill Weaves and Deriva- 
tives 35 

Satin and Other Weaves. . 22 

Combination Weaves 27 

Construction of Spot 

Weaves 26 

Weaves for Backed Cotton 

Fabrics • 22 

Woolen and Worsted Ply 

Weaves 38 

Leno Weaves 65 

Pile Weaves 34 

Color in Textile Designing 87 

Designing in General 17 

Examination Questions. . . 38. 



5th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,895 

Illustrations, 1,461 

Instruction Papers, 76 

Bound Volumes, 6 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the sub- 
jects in light-face type. 

The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is 
carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the 
direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always 
glad to furnish any special information about the 
Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write 
to him whenever they need his help. Address: 
C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Depart- 
ment, International Correspondence Schools, New 
Bedford, Mass. 

346 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the information the 
student must have in order to make 
cotton-mill calculations, 

b. They treat of raw cotton — de- 
scribing fully the different varieties and 
qualities of cotton, the characteristics 
of the cotton fiber, and the selecting of 
cottons. 

c. They explain the construction, 
operation, and care of cotton card-room 
machinery, such as pickers, cotton cards, 
railway heads and drawing frames, 
combers, and fly frames. 

d. They treat of spinning machinery, 
describing the construction, adjustment, 
and operation of both ring frames and 
mules. The characteristics of yarns 
and the various forms of putting them 
up for the market by means of reeling, 
winding, spooling, warping, baling, and 
other machinery are fully described. 

e. They describe the processes of 
preparing warps, including spooling, 
warping, slashing, and drawing-in cot- 
ton warps. 

/. They explain the construction, 
adjustment, and operation of weaving 
machinery, including plain looms, loom 
attachments, automatic looms, dobbies, 
box motions, and jacquards. The fix- 
ing of looms is given due consideration. 

g. They explain cloth-room proc- 
esses, describing the machinery used 
and the baling of cloth for shipment. 

h. They give instruction in cotton 
fabric designing, including a thorough 
description of elementary textile design- 
ing. 

347 



i. They take up the analysis of 
cotton fabrics, and show how to deter- 
mine the weave and reproduce fabrics 
from given samples, make the necessary 
calculations, and prepare the chain and 
harness drafts. With certain of the 
designing Instruction Papers, actual 
samples of various fabrics are supplied 
for practice in cloth analysis. 

/. They describe the leading weaves 
for fabrics made from cotton yams, 
such as twill weaves and derivatives, 
satin weaves, basket weaves, stripes 
and checks, spot weaves of various 
kinds, weaves for backed-cotton fabrics, 
piques, Bedford cords, and others. 

k. They treat of leno weaves and 
describe leno-weaving attachments. 

/. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of color in textile designing; 
of the classification of colors; of simple 
and compound colorings; and of the 
use of color in regular and irregular 
stripes and checks, two or more color 
effects, and combinations with fancy 
weaves. 

m. They give instruction in design- 
ing in general, and supply the student 
with a reference glossary of 400 weaves. 

n. They treat of pile weaves, inclu- 
ding weaves for velvets, velveteens, 
plush, and Turkish toweling. 

o. They describe the features of 
mill construction, including excavation, 
foundation walls, brickwork, roofs, and 
interior construction. They explain 
the details of mill equipment, such as 
power plants, heating, ventilation, and 
lighting plants, fire protection, plumb- 
ing, and water supply. 

348 



p. They show how to plan the 
machinery layout for a cotton mill. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mill Owners. 

h. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and 
Superintendents . 

c. Cotton Samplers. 

d. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss 
Weavers, and other Overseers and Fore- 
men in cotton mills. 

e. Second Hands and Third Hands 
in picking, carding, spinning, weaving, 
and other departments of cotton mills. 

/. Grinders, Strippers, Machine 
Operators, and Oilers in cotton-card 
rooms. 

g. Spinners and Doffers. 

h. Slasher Tenders. 

i. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain 
Builders, and Spare Hands in weave 
rooms. 

j. Designers, Assistant Designers, 
and Pattern Weavers. 

k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, 
and Erectors of machinery in cotton 
mills. 

/. Young Men learning the cotton- 
mill business, and persons wishing to 
qualify for positions in cotton mills. 

m. Mill Engineers and Draftsmen. 

n. Dealers in cotton-mill machinery 
and supplies and their Salesmen. 

o. Cotton- Yarn Agents, Cotton Mer- 
chants, and their Salesmen. 

p. Cloth Commission Agents and 
their »Salesmen. 

q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and 
Clerks in mill ofhces, storerooms, and 
other departments. 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Textile manufacturing is one of 
the most important industries. The 
manufacture of cotton into yarns and 
cloths, as well as the producing and 
the handling of raw materials, gives 
employment to a vast army of workers. 
The textile field offers splendid oppor- 
tunities to the man fully understanding 
the business. To hold a position pay- 
ing a good salary, however, the textile 
worker must thoroughly understand the 
various processes of manufacturing a 
be familiar with the constructic ■' 
operation, and care of textile machinei 
And in no way can he obtain tl 
knowledge so quickly as through o 
instruction. Indeed, our Course is t. 
only practical way; for other than o" 
instruction there is comparatively litt 
reliable information to be had on Ame 
ican methods and processes. Oi 
Course, written under the supervisic 
of one of the recognized authorities c 
textile matters, is in full accord wit 
the latest and best practice; it gives tht 
student in simple language the precis 
information he must have to fill sue 
cessfully any position in a cotton mill 
it will help the second hand become ai 
overseer; give the overseer the knowl 
edge he must have to rise to the positioi 
of superintendent; enable the superin 
tendent to run the mill in the mosi 
economical manner; furnish the mil. 
agent with reliable information about 
the kinds, qualities, etc. of cotton, 
cotton yams, and cotton fabrics; and 
broaden the treasurer's ideas and give 
him a better insight into the business. 

350 



b. Time was when a person wishing 
to rise to a high position in the textile 
tield had to get a knowledge of mill 
methods either by slow experience or 
by attending some textile school. Both 
these methods are good ; but theory and 
practice should go hand in hand. It is 
here that our Course offers the ideal 
solution of the problem for the mill 
hand determined to win promotion. 
By supplementing his mill experience 
with the information contained in our 
Complete Cotton Course, the student 
-■ 'm — without leaving his work — quickly 
" p,m not only the theory of cotton 
Y^nufacturing, but also the best mill 
^ftactice. Our instruction contains the 
■ 4st that is known about cotton manu- 
-ijcturing; it explains in detail the vari- 
ftts processes the cotton undergoes 
.Ilom the time it is received at the mill 
•.ktil it finally leaves in the form of 
ikished yam or cloth. 
i c. Presidents of textile corporations, 
firectors, agents, superintendents, and 
"■fhers in responsible positions in textile 
iSiills should study our Course in order 
'p get a better knowledge of the cotton 
^usiness and so be able more effectively 
IP direct the work of the different 
.iepartments. 

^ d. So rapid has been the growth of 
[)he textile industry, comparatively few 
people realize the great opportunities it 
■i)ffers. New inventions and improve- 
inents made in textile machinery have 
oroadened immeasureably the field of 
,the textile worker. Each new inven- 
tion leads either to new industries or to 
a greater development of those already 
^existing. 
I 
1 351 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days 
a week, finish the Course in about 
1| years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers and Examination Questions of 
the Course, and give the student the 
best that is known about cotton 
manufacturing. 

b. They are for reference purposes 
the most valuable volumes ever pub- 
lished on cotton manufacturing. Con- 
taining as they do in logical order all 
the subjects properly included in a com- 
plete cotton course, the Bound Volumes 
give the latest and most improved 
methods used in modern textile mills. 
No reference library on textile manu- 
facturing is complete without our 
Bound Volumes. They contain a vast 
store of knowledge nowhere else obtain- 
able and put the student in possession 
of just the information he must have to 
rise to a responsible position. 

c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 



352 



1 



Courses Extracted From the 
Complete Cotton Course 

There are five Courses made up from 
the Complete Cotton Course, The 
subjects contained in the Bound Vol- 
umes of the Reference Library of the 
Complete Cotton Course are : 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

1 Arithmetic 

2 Mensuration 

3 Mechanical Definitions . . . 

4 Mechanical Calculations. . 

5 Yam Calculations, Cotton 

6 Yam Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 

7 Yam Calculations, Gen- 

eral 

8 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 

9 Cloth Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 

LO Draft Calculations 

LI Reading Textile Drawings 

Examination Questions. . . 

L2 Cotton 

L3 Pickers 

L4 Cotton Cards 

L5 Drawing Rolls 

L6 Railway Heads and Draw- 
ing Frames 

L7 Combers 

L8 Fly Frames 

Examination Questions. . . 

Ring Frames 

Cotton Mules 

Twisters 

Spoolers 

Beam Warpers 

Slashers 

Chain Warping 

Examination Questions. . . 

Yams 

Cloth Rooms 

Mill Engineering 

Reeling and Baling 

Winding 

Examination Questions. . . 

353 



PAGES 

124 
17 
38 
17 
22 

26 

39 
26 

28 
33 
34 
38 
341 
74 
117 
41 

41 
78 
83 
28 J 
73 

116 
37 
27 
30 
57 
85 
23 
95 
72 

178 
33 
32 
19 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 

Volume 



4th Bound 

Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS P. 

31 Woolen and Worsted Cam- 

Looms 

32 Woolen and Worsted 

Fancy Looms 

33 Woolen and Worsted 

Loom Fixing 

34 Plain Looms 

35 Fixing Looms 

36 Loom Attachments 

37 Automatic Looms 

38 Dobbies 

39 Leno Attachments 

40 Box Motions 

41 Jacquards 

Examination Questions. . . 

42 Glossary of Weaves 

43 Elementary Textile De- 

signing 

44 Analysis of Cotton Fab- 

rics 

45 Anah'sis of Woolen and 

Worsted Fabrics 

46 Twill Weaves and Deriva- 

tives 

47 Satin and Other Weaves 

48 Combination Weaves 

49 Construction of Spot 

Weaves 

50 Weaves for Backed Cotton 

Fabrics 

51 Woolen and Worsted Ply 

Weaves 

52 Leno Weaves 

53 Pile Weaves 

54 Color in Textile Designing 

55 Designing in General 

Examination Questions. . . 



48 

95 

37 
46 
31 
29 
29 
33 
34 
29 
112 
29 

351 

30 

25 

27 

35 
22 

27 

26 

22 

38 
65 
34 
87 
17 
38 



5th Bound 
Volume 



6th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,895 

Ilhistrations, 1,461 
Instruction Papers, 76 
Bound Volumes, 6 

Note — The instruction in our Courses in Tex- 
tiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under 
the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always 
glad to furnish any special information about the 
Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to 
write to him whenever they need his help. Ad- 
dress: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile 
Department, International Correspondence 
Schools, New Bedford, Mass. 

354 



Titles of the Courses 

Cotton Carding and Spinning 
Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 
19, 20, and 21. 

Cotton Warp Preparation and 
Plain Weaving Course, consisting of 
subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 11, 22, 23, 24, 
25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 36, and 37. 

Fancy Cotton Weaving Course, 
consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 
11, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 36, 37, 
38, 39, 40, and 41. 

Cotton Carding, Spinning, and 
Plain Weaving Course, consisting of 
subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 
14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 
25, 34, 35, 36, and 37. 

Cotton Designing Course, con- 
sisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 11, 
22, 23, 24. 25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 36, 37, 
38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 46, 47, 48, 
49, 50, 52, 53, 54, and 55. 

Note — Four Bound Volumes containing the 
subjects of his Course are furnished to each stu- 
dent of the Cotton Carding and Spinning 
Course; the Cotton Warp Preparation and 
Plain Weaving Course; the Fancy Cotton 
Weaving Course; and the Cotton Carding, 
Spinning, and Plain Weaving Course. The 
student of the Cotton Designing Course re- 
ceives five Bound Volumes containing the sub- 
jects of his Course. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mill Ovv^ners. 

b. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and 
Superintendents . 

c. Cotton Samplers. 

d. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss 
Weavers, and other Overseers and Fore- 
men in Cotton Mills. 

3.55 



e. Second Hands and Third Hands 
in picking, carding, spinning, weaving, 
and other departments of cotton mills. 

/. Grinders , Strippers , Machine 
Operators, and Oilers in cotton card 
rooms. 

g. Spinners and Doffers, 

k. Slasher Tenders. 

i. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain 
Builders, and Spare Hands in weave 
rooms. 

j. Designers, Assistant Designers, 
and Pattern Weavers. 

k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, 
and Erectors of machinery in cotton 
mills. 

/, Young Men learning the cotton- 
mill business and persons wishing to 
qualify for positions in cotton mills. 

m. Mill Engineers and Draftsmen. 

■n. Dealers in cotton-mill machinery 
and supplies and their Salesmen. 

0. Cotton- Yarn Agents, Cotton 
Merchants, and their Salesmen. 

p. Cloth Commission Agents and 
their Salesmen. 

q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and 
Clerks in mill offices, storerooms, and 
other departments. 

Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of 
cotton manufacturing should enroll for the Com- 
plete Cotton Course. Those desiring to study 
textile designing — both cotton and wool — should 
enroll for the Complete Textile Designing 
Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The rapid development of the 
cotton industry and the increase in 
the number of mills and in the manu- 
facture of fine and fancy fabrics have 
created a great demand for technically 

356 



trained mill men understanding the 
latest and best methods of cotton 
manufacture and the care and operation 
of textile machinery. We help the stu- 
dent qualify for the highest and best- 
paid positions in the textile field by 
giving him the information necessary 
to advancement. 

b. The man with a knowledge of 
both the theory and practice of textile 
manufacturing is the man mill owners 
want and are glad to pay well. We 
teach the theory of cotton manu- 
facturing and give instruction in the 
latest and best textile mill methods. 
Our Course gives indispensable infor- 
mation to the student that would be 
an overseer or a superintendent. 

c. Promotion to the position of 
overseer is a possibility that every 
second hand looks eagerly forward to 
from the time he enters the mill. But 
before a second hand can advance to 
the position of overseer he must have a 
good knowledge of mill calculations, and 
textile machinery construction, for with- 
out this knowledge he cannot solve the 
problems constantly arising. We give 
the student the information he requires 
to fill successfully the overseer's position. 

Time Required to Finish the Courses 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Cotton Card- 
ing AND Spinning Course, the Cotton 
Warp Preparation and Plain Weav- 
ing Course, the Fancy Cotton Weav- 
ing Course, or the Cotton Carding, 

357 



Spinning, and Plain Weaving Course 
in about 6 months, and the Cotton 
Designing Course in about 10 months. 
The average student requires a Httle 
more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He 
Is Unable to Send Us Writ- 
ten Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers and Examination Questions 
of the Course, which contain in simple 
language the best that is known about 
cotton manufacturing and textile de- 
signing, and give the student a fund 
of information that cannot be obtained 
elsewhere. 

h. They are invaluable for refer- 
ence purposes. Indeed, no reference 
library on textile subjects is complete 
without them. Our Bound Volumes 
contain much valuable information 
never before published. They are the 
only volumes treating thoroughly and 
from a practical standpoint American 
methods and processes of cotton manu- 
facture. They are fully indexed. 
Every important item is indexed 
according to all the letters under which 
it is likely to be sought. 

c. They have been written and 
arranged with the idea of providing 
the student with a practical working 
knowledge of the various processes of 
cotton manufacturing — knowledge that 
will enable him to secure a position and 
to fill it satisfactorily. 



358 



Complete Woolen Course 

Thirty- two subjects are taught in 
the Complete Woolen Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain fifty-one, as follows: 



10 
11 

12 
13 
14 
15 
16 

17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 
25 
26 



1st Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 124 

Mensuration 17 

Mechanical Definitions 38 

Mechanical Calculations. . 17 

Yam Calculations, Cotton 22 
Yarn Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 26 

Yam Calculations, General 39 

Cloth Calculations, Cotton 26 
Cloth Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 28 

Draft Calciilations 33 

Reading Textile Drawings. 34 

Examination Questions ... 38 

Yarns 95^ 

Cloth Rooms 72 | 

Mill Engineering 178 I 2d Bound 



Reeling and Baling 33 j 

Winding 32 

Examination Questions. . . 19 J 

Wool 33 

Wool Scouring 39 

Wool Drying 18 

Burr Picking 25 

Carbonizing 16 

Wool Mixing 31 

Wool Oiling 15 

Woolen Carding 138 

Woolen Spinning 88 

Woolen and Worsted Warp 

Preparation 78 

Examination Questions. . . 30 



Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



359 



27 

28 

29 

30 
31 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 
37 

38 
39 

40 

41 

42 

43 
44 
45 

46 

47 

48 
49 
50 
51 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Woolen and Worsted Cam- 
Looms 48 

Woolen and Worsted 

Fancy Looms 95 

Woolen and Worsted Loom 

Fixing 37 

Plain Looms 46 

Fixing Looms 31 

Loom Attachments 29 

Automatic Looms 29 

Dobbies 33 

Leno Attachments 34 

Box Motions 29 

Jacquards 112 

Examination Questions. . . 29. 

Glossary of Weaves 

Elementary Textile Design- 
ing 

Analvsis of Cotton Fab- 
rics 

Analysis of Woolen and 

Worsted Fabrics 

Twill Weaves and Deriva- 
tives 

Satin and Other Weaves . . 

Combination Weaves 

Construction of Spot 

Weaves 

Weaves for Backed Cotton 

Fabrics 

Woolen and Worsted Ply 

Weaves 

Leno Weaves 

Pile Weaves 

Color in Textile Designing 

Designing in General 17 

Examination Questions. . . 38 



4th Bound 
Volume 



5th Bound 
Volume 



Pages... 2,462 

Illustrations, 1,256 

Instruction Papers, 67 

Bound Volumes, 5 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the sub- 
jects in light-face type. 

The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is 
carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the 
direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always 
glad to furnish any special information about tlae 
Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write 
to him whenever they need his help. Address: 
C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Department, 
International Correspondence Schools, New Bed- 
ford, Mass. 



360 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the information the stu- 
dent must have in order to make calcu- 
lations regarding woolen-mill machinery 
and processes, yarns, and fabrics. 

b. They give instruction on raw 
wool, describing the different varieties 
and qualities, the characteristics of 
the fiber, and wool selecting and sorting. 

c. They explain the scouring and 
drying of wool. Scouring materials 
and the processes and machines used 
for scouring and drying are described. 

d. They treat of the burr picking, 
carbonizing, mixing, and oiling of 
wools; of the various types of machines 
and materials used in such processes, 
and of the best methods of using them. 

e. They explain woolen carding, 
including the construction, operation, 
and care of various types of carding 
machinery. 

/. They treat of the woolen spinning 
mule, describing its construction, opera- 
tion, and adjustment. The character- 
istics of yams and the different forms 
of putting them up for market are 
explained. 

g. They explain the processes of 
preparing woolen and worsted warps, 
including spooling, dressing, reeling, 
beaming, and drawing in and reeding. 

h. They describe the construction, 
adjustment, and operation of woolen 
and worsted weaving machinery, inclu- 
ding cam-looms and fancy looms, of 
both the Knowles and the Crompton 
types. The fixing of looms is thor- 
oughly treated of. 

361 



i. They give instruction in woolen 
fabric designing, including a thorough 
description of elementary textile design- 
ing. 

j. They take up the analysis of 
woolen and worsted fabrics; show how 
to determine the weave and repro- 
duce fabrics from given samples ; make 
the necessary calculations; and pre- 
pare both chain and harness drafts. 
With certain of the designing Instruc- 
tion Papers, actual samples of various 
fabrics are supplied for practice in 
cloth anal3^sis. 

k. They describe the leading weaves 
for fabrics made from woolen yams, 
including t^vill weaves, satin weaves, 
corkscrew weaves, spot weaves, stripes 
and checks, filling-backed fabrics, warp- 
backed fabrics, double cloths, double 
plain weaves, and triple cloth. 

/. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of color as used in textile 
designing; of the classification of colors; 
of simple and compound colorings; of 
the use of color in regular and irregular 
stripes and checks, two or more color 
effects, and combinations w^ith fancy 
weaves. 

fn. They supply the student with a 
reference glossary of 400 weaves. 

n. They describe the features of 
mill construction including excavation, 
foundation walls, brickwork, roofs, 
and interior construction. They explain 
the details of mill equipment, such as 
power plants; heating, lighting, and 
ventilating plants ; fire-protection ; 
plumbing; and water supply._ Cotton- 
mill planning is given due consideration. 

362 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mill Owners. 

b. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and 
Superintendents. 

c. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, Boss 
Dressers, Boss Weavers, and other 
Overseers and Foremen in woolen mills. 

d. Second and Third Hands in 
carding, spinning, weaving, and other 
departments of woolen mills. 

e. Wool Sorters and Scourers, and 
workers in the scouring and drying 
departments of woolen mills. 

/. Grinders, Strippers, and other 
workers in wool card rooms. 

g. Fixers, Spinners, Doffers, 

Spoolers, and Dresser Tenders. 

h. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain 
Builders, and Assistants in weave 
rooms. 

i. Burlers, Perchers, and Cloth 
Inspectors. 

;'. Designers, Assistant Designers, 
and Pattern Weavers. 

k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, 
and Machinery Erectors. 

/. Young Men learning the mill 
business, and persons wishing to qualify 
for positions in woolen mills. 

m. Woolen-Mill Engineers and 
Draftsmen. 

n. Dealers in woolen-mill machinery 
and supplies, and their Salesmen. 

o. Woolen- Yarn Agents, Woolen 
Merchants, Salesmen, and Clerks. 

p. Woolen-Cloth Commission Agents 
and their Salesmen and Clerks. 

q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and 
Clerks in woolen-mill offices, store- 
rooms, and other departments. 

36.3 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Never were there better oppor- 
tunities for trained men in the textile 
industry; and never has the textile 
worker been better paid. New mills 
are constantly being established, and 
competent men are needed to take 
charge. Old mills formerly making 
only coarse or plain goods are now 
manufacturing fine yarns and fancy 
fabrics, and men understanding the new 
processes are in demand. With our help, 
the superintendent, the boss weaver, or 
the designer can learn to manufac- 
ture fancy and elaborate fabrics and 
obtain reliable information about the 
newest processes. Spinners, weavers, 
and others can become more efficient 
and rise to higher and better-paying 
positions through our instruction. 

h. Owing to the strict discipline 
in textile mills, and to the unwillingness 
of the heads of departments to give 
information to the heads of other depart- 
ments, it is difficult for an overseer to 
get a knowledge of the various branches 
of mill work sufficient to advance him 
to the superintendent's position. Our 
Course is the overseer's opportunity. 
Written by men of long experience in 
the textile industry, our instruction is 
in full accord with the latest and best 
woolen-mill practice ; it gives the student 
a thorough knowledge of the various 
processes of woolen manufacturing — a 
knowledge it would take him years to 
get by slow experience, and one that 
coupled with his mill experience will be 
a valuable recommendation for the 
position of superintendent. 

364 



c. The way for the textile worker 
to win promotion is through special 
training, and we can give him this. 
Our instruction fully covers the field 
of woolen manufacturing and gives 
the student a thorough knowledge 
of the various processes the wool 
undergoes from the time it leaves the 
fleece until it is made up into yarn 
or cloth. The man possessing this 
information is in demand, and gets 
good pay. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 1 year. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers and Examination Questions of 
the Course, and are exactly suited 
to the needs of the student that must 
get his education by home study and 
with no instructor by his side. Instruc- 
tion for this purpose must be so force- 
fully written and illustrated that the 
student will take it into his mind 
unaided. So well do our Bound 
Volumes meet this requirement, they 
are universally accepted as the best for 
home study. 

365 



b. They stand without an equal 
as a reference Hbrary, and are invaluable 
to every one in any way connected 
with the manufacture of woolen and 
worsted fabrics. Each volume is a 
mine of practical information. The 
instruction given is accurate and 
represents the latest and best practice. 
Nowhere else can the student get so 
much authoritative information on 
woolen manufacturing. We have 
epitomized the most important data 
of textile manufacturing and present 
it to our students in clear and concise 
language. 

c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all the 
initial letters under which it is likely 
to be sought. 



366 



Courses Extracted From the 
Complete Woolen Course 

Five Courses are made up from the 
Complete Woolen Course. The sub- 
jects contained in the Bound Volumes 
of the Reference Library of the Com- 
plete Woolen Course are: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 124 1 

2 Mensuration 17 

3 Mechanical Definitions ... 38 

4 Mechanical Calculations . . 17 

5 Yam Calculations, Cotton 22 

6 Yam Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 26 

7 Yam Calculations, Gen- 

eral 39 

8 Cloth Calculations, Cotton 26 

9 Cloth Calculations.Woolen 

and Worsted 28 

10 Draft Calculations 33 

11 Reading Textile Drawings 34 
Examination Questions. . . 38 

12 Yams 95 

13 Cloth Rooms 72 

14 Mill Engineering 178 

15 Reeling and Baling 33 

16 Winding 32 

Examination Questions. . . 19 J 

17 Wool 331 

18 Wool Scouring 39 

19 Wool Drying 18 

20 Burr Picking 25 

21 Carbonizing 16 

22 Wool Mixing 31 

23 Wool Oiling 15 

24 Woolen Carding 138 

25 Woolen Spinning 88 

26 Woolen and Worsted 

Warp Preparation .... 78 

Examination Questions. . . 30 

367 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

27 Woolen and Worsted Cam- 

Looms 48 

28 Woolen and Worsted 

Fancy Looms 95 

29 Woolen ' and Worsted 

Loom Fixing 37 

30 Plain Looms 46 

31 Fixing Looms 31 

32 Loom Attachments 29 

33 Automatic Looms 29 

34 Dobbies 33 

35 Leno Attachments 34 

36 Box Motions 29 

37 Jacquards 112 

Examination Questions ... 29 

38 Glossary of Weaves 35 

39 Elementary Textile De- 

signing 30 

40 Analysis of Cotton Fabrics 25 

41 Analysis of Woolen and 

Worsted Fabrics 27 

42 Twill Weaves and Deriva- 

tives 35 

43 Satin and Other Weaves . . 22 

44 Combination Weaves 27 

45 Construction of Spot 

Weaves 26 

46 Weaves for Backed 

Cotton Fabrics 22 

47 Woolen and Worsted Ply 

Weaves 38 

48 Leno Weaves 65 

49 Pile Weaves 34 

50 Color in Textile Design- 

ing 87 

51 Designing in General 17 

Examination Questions .. . 38 



Pages 2,462 

Illustrations, 1,256 
Instruction Papers, 67 
Bound Volumes, 5 

Note — The instruction in our Courses in 
Textiles is carried on from New Bedford, Mass., 
under the direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He 
is always glad to furnish any special information 
about the Textile Courses, and Field Men are 
urged to write to him whenever they need his 
help. Address: C. P. Brooks, Principal of the 
Textile Department, International Correspond- 
ence Schools, New Bedford, Mass. 



5th Bound 
Volume 



368 



Titles of the Courses 

Woolen Carding and Spinning 
Course, consisting of subjects 1, 2, 3, 
4, 6, 11, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 
and 25. 

Woolen Warp Preparation and 
Weaving Course, consisting of sub- 
jects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 26, 27, 28, 
and 29. 

Worsted Warp Preparation and 
Weaving Course, consisting of sub- 
jects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 26, 27, 28, 
29, and 37. 

Woolen Carding, Spinning, and 
Weaving Course, consisting of sub- 
jects 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 11, 12, 17, 18, 19, 
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, and 29. 

Woolen and Worsted Designing 
Course, consisting of subjects 1,2, 3, 4, 
6, 9, 11, 12, 26, 27, 28, 29, 37, 38, 39, 41, 
42, 43, 44, 45, 47, 49, and 50. 

Note — Four Bound Volumes containing the 
subjects of his Course are furnished to each 
student of the Woolen Carding and Spinning 
Course; the Woolen Warp Preparation and 
Weaving Course; the Worsted Warp Prep- 
aration AND Weaving Course; and the 
Woolen Carding, Spinning, and Weaving 
Course. The student of the Woolen and 
Worsted Designing Course receives five 
Bound Volumes containing the subjects of his 
Course. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mill Owners. 

h. Mill Treasurers, Agents, and 
Superintendents. 

c. Boss Carders, Boss Spinners, 
Boss Dressers, Boss Weavers, and other 
Overseers and Foremen in woolen mills. 

d. Second and Third Hands in card- 
ing, spinning, weaving, and other de- 
partments of woolen mills. 



e. Wool Sorters and Scourers, and 
workers in the scouring and drying 
departments of woolen mills. 

/. Grinders, Strippers, and other 
workers in wool card rooms. 

g. Fixers, Spinners, Doffers, Spool- 
ers, and Dresser Tenders. 

h. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain 
Builders, and Assistants in weave rooms. 

i. Burlers, Perchers, and Cloth 
Inspectors. 

j. Designers, Assistant Designers, 
and Pattern Weavers. 

k. Master Mechanics, Machinists, 
and Machinery Erectors. 

/. Young Men learning the mill 
business, and persons wishing to qualify 
for positions in woolen mills. 

m. Woolen-Mill Engineers and 
Draftsmen. 

n. Dealers in woolen-mill machinery 
and supplies, and their Salesmen. 

o. Woolen- Yam Agents, Woolen 
Merchants, and their Salesmen and 
Clerks. 

p. Woolen-Cloth Commission 
Agents and their Salesmen and Clerks. 

q. Paymasters, Bookkeepers, and 
Clerks in woolen-mill offices, storerooms, 
and other departments. 

Note — Persons wanting a full knowledge of 
woolen manufacturing should enroll for the 
Complete Woolen Course. Those desiring 
to study textile designing — both cotton and 
woolen — should enroll for the Complete Tex- 
tile Designing Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Textile mills are constantly chan- 
ging their products. Mills formerly 
making coarse or plain goods are now 
manufacturing fine yams and fancy 

370 



fabrics. This change to finer and more 
elaborate fabrics requires men that 
understand the new processes and that 
are able to operate the improved 
machinery. 

b. The designer is an important 
factor in a textile mill. His position 
is a good-paying one, and he is always 
in demand. Our instruction is the 
best ever prepared on woolen and 
worsted designing. Written in a simple 
and easy style, our Course so clearly 
explains the technical details of design- 
ing that any ambitious student can 
understand them and their application 
in the manufacture of textiles. 

c. Owing to the strict discipline in 
mills and to the unwillingness of heads 
of departments to give information to 
heads of other departments, it is hard 
to obtain a good general knowledge of 
all branches of mill work unless through 
a systematic course of study such as we 
offer. Our Course provides an oppor- 
tunity for a man employed in one de- 
partment to obtain a knowledge of 
other departments. 

d. Never has there been so great a 
need of competent textile workers. 
Textile mill owners everywhere want 
men able to produce salable goods, and 
are willing to pay big salaries. We train 
men that mill owners are glad to em- 
ploy and pay well. 

e. College graduates intending to 
make textile manufacturing their life 
business can, through the study of our 
Course, add to their education the 
knowledge that will qualify them for 
responsible and good-paying positions. 

371 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a week, 
finish the Woolen Warp Preparation 
AND Weaving Course or the Worsted 
Warp Preparation and Weaving 
Course in about 4 months, the Woolen 
Carding and Spinning Course in about 
6 months, the Woolen Carding, Spin- 
ning, and Weaving Course in about 
8 months, and the Woolen and 
Worsted Designing Course in about 
10 months. The average student re- 
quires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers and Examination Questions of 
the Course, which were prepared to 
meet the requirements of the home- 
study student. Our ceaseless endeavor 
to provide ideal instruction for home 
study has made our Bound Volumes the 
most practical textbooks in existence. 
They are exactly suited to the needs of 
the student that must study with no 
instructor by his side and must there- 
fore have instruction so forcefully 
written that he can take it into his mind 
unaided. 

h. They possess almost unlimited 
value as reference books. Containing 
information that it would take hours or 
even days to find elsewhere, and much 

372 



that cannot be obtained from any other 
publications, our Bound Volumes are 
invaluable to the man needing trust- 
worthy facts about the latest and best 
textile mill methods. We epitomize 
the most important facts pertaining to 
woolen manufacturing, present them in 
language easily understood by the man 
of little education, arrange them in a 
systematic manner, and index them 
carefully and thoroughly for ready 
reference. No other books contain so 
much reliable information on textile 
subjects. 



373 



Complete Textile Designing 
Course 

Forty subjects are taught in the Com- 
plete Textile Designing Course. 
The Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain fifty-eight, as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 124' 

Mensuration 17 

Mechanical Definitions ... 38 

Mechanical Calculations . . 17 

Yarn Calculations, Cotton 22 
Yarn Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 26 

Yarn Calculations, General 39 

Cloth Calculations, Cotton. 26 
Cloth Calculations, Woolen 

and Worsted 28 

Draft Calculations 33 

Reading Textile Drawings . 34 

Examination Questions ... 38 

Ring Frames 73 

Cotton Mules 116 

Twisters 37 

Spoolers 27 

Beam Warpers 30 

Slashers 57 

Chain Warping 85 

Examination Questions. . . 23 

Yarns 95 

Cloth Rooms 72 

Mill Engineering 178 

Reeling and Baling 33 

Winding. ._ 32 

Examination Questions .. . 19 

Wool 33 

Wool Scouring 39 

Wool Drying 18 

Burr Picking 25 

Carbonizing 16 

Wool Mixing 31 

Wool Oiling 15 

Woolen Carding 138 

Woolen Spinning 88 

Woolen and Worsted Warp 

Preparation 78 

Examination Questions. . . 30 



374 



5th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Woolen and Worsted Cam- 
Looms 48 

Woolen and Worsted 

Fancy Looms 95 

Woolen and Worsted 

Loom Fixing 37 

Plain Looms 46 

Fixing Looms 31 

Loom Attachments 29 

Automatic Looms 29 

Dobbies 33 

Leno Attachments 34 

Box Motions 29 

Jacquards 112 

Examination Questions. . . 29 

Glossary of Weaves 35' 

Elementary Textile De- 
signing 30 

Analysis o f Cotton Fabrics . 25 
Analysis of Woolen and 

Worsted Labrics 27 

Twill Weaves and De- 
rivatives 35 

Satin and Other Weaves ... 22 

Combination Weaves 27 

Construction of Spot 

Weaves 26 

Weaves for Backed Cot- 
ton Fabrics 22 

Woolen and Worsted Ply 

Weaves 38 

Leno Weaves 65 

Pile Weaves 34 

Color in Textile Designing 87 

Designing in General 17 

Examination Questions. . . 38 



Pages 2,910 

Illustrations, 1,421 
f; ■ Instruction Papers, 64 

Bound Volumes, 6 
Note — No recitations are asked for in the 
subjects in light-face type. 

The instruction in our Courses in Textiles is 
carried on from New Bedford, Mass., under the 
direction of Mr. C. P. Brooks. He is always glad 
to furnish any special information about the 
Textile Courses, and Field Men are urged to write 
to him whenever they need his help. Address: 
C. P. Brooks, Principal of the Textile Department, 
International Correspondence Schools, New Bed- 
ford Mass. 



6th Bound 
Volume 



375 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They teach the student how to 
make calculations regarding yams, 
fabrics, warp preparation, and weaving 
machinery, 

b. They treat of yams, describing 
their classification, characteristics, vari- 
eties, qualities, and the forms in which 
they are put up for commercial purposes. 

c. They explain the processes of 
preparing warps, such as spooling, warp- 
ing, slashing, dressing, beaming, and 
drawing in and reeding. 

d. They describe the construction, 
operation, and adjustment of weaving 
machinery, including plain looms, loom 
attachments, cam-looms, woolen and 
worsted fancy looms, dobbies, box 
motions, and jacquards. The fixing of 
looms is given due consideration. 

e. They describe cotton cloth-room 
processes and machinery and tell how 
to bale the cloth for shipment. 

/. They give thorough instruction 
in elementary textile designing. 

g. They take up the analysis of 
fabrics; show how to determine the 
weave, the warp and filling patterns, 
and the chain and harness drafts; make 
the necessary calculations; and repro- 
duce fabrics from given samples. 

h. They describe the leading weaves 
for fabrics made from cotton, woolen, 
and other yams, such as twills and 
derivatives, satin weaves, basket weaves, 
ribbed weaves, honeycomb weaves, 
stripes and checks, spot weaves of vari- 
ous kinds, filling-backed fabrics, warp- 
backed fabrics, double cloths, double 

376 



plain weaves, and triple, cloth. Leno 
weaves and the attachments for weav- 
ing lenos are fully treated of. 

■i. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of color in textile designing; 
of the classification of colors; of simple 
and compound coloring; of the use of 
color in regular and irregular stripes and 
checks, two or more color effects and 
their combination v/ith fancy weaves. 

j. They give instruction in design- 
ing in general and the student is pro- 
vided with a reference glossary of 400 
weaves. 

k. They treat of pile weaves, inclu- 
ding weaves for velvets, velveteens, 
plush, and Turkish toweling. 

I. They give instruction in textile 
designing as applied to cotton, woolen, 
and worsted fabrics, and the machinery 
for weaving them is fully described. 
With certain of the designing Instruc- 
tion Papers, actual samples of various 
fabrics are supplied for practice in cloth 
analysis. 

TH. They teach the student the vari- 
ous methods of designing fabrics and 
prepare him for changes in fashions and 
styles involving new methods of manu- 
facturing. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Mill Owners and Mill Officials in 
general. 

h. Designers, Assistant Designers, 
and Pattern Weavers. 

c. Boss Dressers, Boss Weavers, and 
other Overseers and Foremen in textile 
mills. 

377 



d. Second Hands and Third Hands 
n the weaving and other departments 

of textile mills. 

e. Slashers and Dresser Tenders. 

/. Loom Fixers, Weavers, Chain 
Builders, and Spare Hands in weave 
rooms. 

g. Overseers of cloth rooms, Cloth 
Inspectors, Perchers, and Burlers. 

h. Clerks in mill offices, Shipping 
Clerks, and other clerical assistants in 
textile mills. 

i. Cloth Commission Agents, Cloth 
Merchants and their Salesmen. 

Note — The principles of designing are com- 
mon to almost all textile fabrics. While this 
Course deals more directly with cotton, woolen, 
and worsted designing, the knowledge derived 
can be applied to the designing of fabrics other 
than those mentioned in the Course. _ It should 
be understood, however, that the instruction 
does not treat specifically of silk nor linen 
fabrics; but since the principles of designing 
are practically the same, it is merely a matter 
of intelligent application of the knowledge 
derived from our Course to make it of _ great 
value to any one desiring to learn the designing 
of fabrics other than cotton, woolen, or worsted 
goods. 

For those having a good knowledge of warp 
preparation and weaving machinery, but whose 
knowledge of designing is incomplete, we have 
arranged a Theory of Textile Designing 
Course. This Course is exactly suited to those 
wanting instruction in the analysis and the 
reproduction of fabrics and of the drafting of 
weaves; also to those engaged in getting out new 
styles and therefore needing a knowledge of the 
structure and the designing of fabrics in general, 
but not needing to devote time to the study of 
machinery and manufacturing processes. 

After finishing the Mathematical Section, the 
student of the Complete Textile Designing 
Course may take up either the Cotton Warp 
Preparation and Weaving Section or the Woolen 
and Worsted Warp Preparation and Weaving 
Section. He may omit either of these sections, 
but before he has finished the subject of Yams 
he must notify the Textile Department which 
section he desires to study. 

378 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. An important part of every de- 
signer's duties is the analyzing of fabrics 
sent to the mill for reproduction. This 
analysis is of the utmost importance 
not only in cases where a mill desires to 
manufacture certain fabrics for which 
there is a large demand, but also for the 
purpose of gaining new ideas for the 
production of other fabrics. The per- 
son able to analyze a sample of cloth and 
reproduce it exactly or with certain de- 
sired modifications is always in demand 
and receives good pay. We can help 
weave-room men become designers. 
Our Course is the best ever prepared on 
textile designing; it treats fully of 
woolen, worsted, and cotton designing 
— starting with the elementary princi- 
ples and leading the student progres- 
sively from the simplest to the most 
complicated weaves. Samples of cloth 
are sent to the student. He is required 
to analyze them, record the results, 
and send his work to us for criticism. 
This gives the student practical experi- 
ence. He is taught not only to analyze 
the samples, but also to reproduce them 
and to make original designs. 

b. In the manufacture of textile fab- 
rics, no branch of the business is more 
important than that of designing, nor 
does anything affect the desirability and 
selling qualities of a fabric more than 
the design. The material may be costly, 
the yarn perfect, and the weaving and 
finishing well done; but if the design is 
not well conceived or is not adapted 
to the purpose for which the cloth is 
intended, the fabric will be inferior. 

379 



c. In order that one may intelli- 
gently understand the best methods of 
manufacturing fabrics, it is first of all 
essential to acquire a thorough knowl- 
edge of woven fabrics. Our Course 
teaches the student all the principles 
underlying woven fabrics, explaining 
and illustrating the methods used to 
produce cloth and yarns ; it contains the 
information a man must have to become 
a successful textile manufacturer. 

d. Textile manufacturing is turning 
rapidly toward the finer and more 
elaborate fabrics such as have pre- 
viously been imported. There is dis- 
crimination against fabrics that do not 
attain the highest grade of excellence. 
This provides better opportunities for 
the textile designer, and has created a 
demand for competent men thoroughly 
understanding the manufacture and 
design of cotton, woolen, worsted, and 
other textiles. Our textile designing 
Courses are the best ever prepared on 
the subject. They have been written 
by experts and are of inestimable value 
to designers, superintendents, overseers, 
section hands, weavers, and all others 
desiring to advance themselves. Much 
of the instruction pertaining to Ameri- 
can methods of design and manufacture 
has never before been published. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

380 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They embrace the Instruction 
Papers and. Examination Questions of 
the Course, and explain fully and clearly 
both cloth analyzing and designing. 

h. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. Containing in logical order 
all the subjects properly embraced in a 
textile designing course, our Bound 
Volumes are exactly suited to the needs 
of the student that must know all the 
technical details pertaining to textile 
designing. They contain much infor- 
mation never before published. Every- 
thing of an experimental nature has 
been excluded, our purpose being to 
give only information that can readily 
be put to practical use. Our Bound 
Volumes are an epitome of useful, com- 
mon-sense knowledge of the best and 
latest practice of textile designing. 
No reference library on textile subjects 
is complete without them. 

c. They are superior to any other 
books of the kind ever published. They 
are far ahead of the textbooks used in 
textile schools. The information given 
has been so simplified, it can be easily 
understood and used by people of little 
education. Because our instruction is 
so clearly written as to make impossible 
a misunderstanding of what is read, our 
Bound Volumes are universally acknowl- 
edged the best for home study. The 
subject of textile calculations has been so 
simplified, it can be easily understood by 

381 



any one having a knowledge of no higher 
mathematics than arithmetic. This 
fact alone makes our Bound Volumes of 
priceless worth to the textile worker. 

d. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all the 
initial letters under which it is likely to 
be sought. 



382 



French Course 



Edison Standard Phonograph 
(equipped with a special repeat- 
ing attachment) 

Brass Horn (14-inch) 

Model "C" Reproducer 

Recorder 

Special Hearing Tube (with head- 
piece attachment and sound mod- 
ifier. The sound modifier is our 
own patented invention, and is 
used exclusively with our Courses) 

Speaking Tube 

Winding Crank 

Camel's-Hair Chip Brush 

Two Blank Cylinders 

Twenty-five Molded Phonographic 
Records (corresponding to the 
French Textbooks) 

Four French Textbooks 

Instruction and Correction of Stu- 
dent's Work, comprising the fol- 
lowing : 

A set of the pamphlet Instruction 
Papers issued to a student as he 
progresses with his studies 

Blank Cylinders on which to make 
his phonographic recitations 

Thorough and careful criticism of 
his work, and guidance in his 
studies ._ 

Privilege of writing, as frequently 
as he may desire, for special in- 
struction in his Course 

Our Diploma when he completes the 
Course and satisfactorily passes 
our examination 



Section A 



Section B 
Section C 



Section D 



Peculiar Advantages of Our Method of 
Teaching French 

a. We teach the student to read 
understandingly ; for we train his eye, 
his ear, and his memory at the same 
time. 

b. We teach the student to write 
correctly; for, after the first few les- 
sons, we require him to use the language 
of his Course in correspondence with 
his Instructor. 



383 



c. We teach the student to speak 
fluently; for we require him to recite 
into the phonograph and send his 
records to his Instructor for correction 
and criticism. 

d. We teach the student to think 
logicahy; for we require him to practice 
drills, using the idioms and construc- 
tions in the various combinations 
occurring in conversation and liter- 
ature. 

e. We require our student to learn 
each lesson before we give him the next. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain practical conversa- 
tional lessons, prepared strictly on a 
common-sense plan, and the student at 
once learns to talk on general affairs 
and the topics of the times. 

h. They require the student to write 
what he learns, besides reciting it into 
the phonograph. 

c. They include instruction in gram- 
mar to the full extent required. This 
grammar instruction is written in 
English, and the student is required 
to practice translation and carry on 
French correspondence with his In- 
structor. 

d. They include courses of reading 
on technical subjects; many selections 
are given from the classics; and the 
commercial, political, and industrial 
conditions of foreign countries are 
described. 

e. They enable the student to acquire 
a vocabulary of over five thousand 
French words. 

384 



/. They teach the student how to 
translate EngHsh into French, and 
French into EngHsh. 

g. They require the student to do 
original composition in French. 

How We Are Able to Guarantee That 

Our French Instruction Records 

Bear Correct Pronunciation 

Our Instructors repeat a lesson into 
the phonograph many times until a per- 
fect record is made. A metal mold is 
then made from this perfect record, by 
the Edison Gold-Mold Process. Then all 
the Instruction Records of that lesson 
are cast in the mold. This insures abso- 
lute precision and standardizes the 
language for the first time in its history. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Persons interested in the engi- 
neering professions, chemistry, etc. 

b. Employes in all classes of United 
States Government service. 

c. Employes of firms having trade 
in foreign countries. 

d. Men and Women ambitious of 
developing their intellectual powers, 
improving their conversational ability, 
etc., in order to appear to advantage in 
the society of persons of the better sort. 

e. Students in high schools and 
academies. 

/. Teachers. 

g. Physicians. 

h. Clergymen. 

i. Persons that intend to travel 
abroad. 

y. Persons engaged in the study of 
political conditions. 

13 385 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The French is generally recog- 
nized as the nearest approach to a 
universal language. A person inter- 
ested in civil engineering, hydraulic 
engineering, mining engineering, chem- 
istry, electrical engineering, etc., will 
find a big increase in his business and 
social opportunities through a knowl- 
edge of French. 

b. The rapid development of Amer- 
ican trade in Europe has opened many 
avenues of advancement to salesmen 
and othes employes able to read, write, 
and speak French. 

c. Some universities and colleges 
require that their students shall have 
a knowledge of French before entering. 

d. To the student of French is 
opened one of the richest literatures 
of the world, in the various depart- 
ments of professional, technical, and 
scientific learning. 

e. All physicians need a knowledge 
of French, in order to read the excellent 
French literature devoted to medicine 
and surgery. 

/. Ability to converse well in French 
will often contribute more than any 
other accomplishment to one's social 
advancement. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 1 year. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

386 



Remarks 

One of the difficult things in language 
teaching is to get the student to prac- 
tice unfamiliar sounds in a vigorous 
tone in the presence of his teacher. A 
personal instructor seldom can spare 
enough time with the student to give 
him sufficient practice in speaking; and 
the student frequently cannot rehearse 
his lesson alone, because he forgets 
most of it. Then, too, a personal 
teacher's peculiarities of manner and 
dress often distract the attention of the 
student. Our method avoids all diffi- 
culties of this sort. We give to the stu- 
dent what is in many respects superior 
to a personally present teacher. Our 
student is able to hear his Instructor's 
voice, when, where, and as long as he 
likes, and he ma}^ hear a word or a 
phrase repeated as often as he desires; 
for the phonograph has no distracting 
peculiarities, has no engagements, is 
not nervous, and never grows impatient. 



387 



German Course 

Edison Standard Phonograph" 
(equipped with a special repeat- 
ing attachment) 

Brass Horn (14-inch) 

Model "C" Reproducer 

Recorder 

Special Hearing Tube (with head- 
piece attachment and sound mod- }■ Section A 
ifier. The sound modifier is our 
own patented invention, and is 
used exclusively with our Courses) 

Speaking Tube 

Winding Crank 

Camel's-Hair Chip Brush 

Two Blank Cylinders 

Twenty-five Molded Phonographic 1 

Records (corresponding to the > Section B 
German Textbooks) J 

Four German Textbooks Section C 

Instruction and Correction of Stu- 
dent's Work, comprising the fol- 
lowing : 

A set of the pamphlet Instruction 
Papers issued to a student as he 
progresses with his studies 

Blank Cylinders on which to make 
his phonographic recitations 

Thorough and careful criticism of Y Section D 
his work, and guidance in his 
studies 

Privilege of writing, as frequently 
as he may desire, for special in- 
struction in his Course 

Our Diploma when he completes the 
Course and satisfactorily passes 
our examination 

Peculiar Advantages of Our Method of 
Teaching German 

a. We teach the student to read 
understandingly ; for we train his eye, 
his ear, and his memory at the same 
time. 

b. We teach the student to write 
correctly; for, after the first few lessons, 
we require him to use the language of 
his course in correspondence with his 
Instructor. 



388 



c. We teach the student to speak 
fluently; for we require him to recite 
into the phonograph and send his 
records to his Instructor for correction 
and criticism. 

d. We teach the student to think 
logically; for we require him to practice 
drills, using the idioms and construc- 
tions in the various combinations occur- 
ring in conversation and literature. 

e. We require our student to learn 
each lesson before we give him the next. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain practical conversa- 
tional lessons, prepared strictly on a 
common-sense plan, and the student at 
once learns to talk on general affairs and 
the topics of the times. 

h. They require the student to write 
what he learns, besides reciting it into 
the phonograph. 

c. They include instruction in gram- 
mar to the full extent required. This 
grammar instruction is written in 
English, and the student is required to 
practice translation and carry on Ger- 
man correspondence with his Instructor. 

d. They include courses of reading 
on technical subjects; many selections 
are given from the classics; and the 
commercial, political, and industrial 
conditions of foreign countries are 
described. 

e. They enable the student to acquire 
a vocabulary of over five thousand 
German words. 

/. They teach the student how to 
translate English into German, and 
German into English. 

389 



g. They require the student to do 
original composition in German. 

How We Are Able to Guarantee That 

Our German Instruction Records 

Bear Correct Pronunciation 

Our Instructors repeat a lesson into 
the phonograph many times until a 
perfect record is made. A metal mold 
is then made from this perfect record, 
by the Edison Gold-Mold Process. Then 
all the Instruction Records of that les- 
son are cast in the mold. This insures 
absolute precision and standardizes the 
language for the first time in its history. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Business Men. 

b. Clerks. 

c. Salesmen. 

d. Persons interested in the engineer- 
ing professions, chemistry, etc. 

e. Employes in all classes of United 
States Government service. 

/. Employes of firms having trade 
in foreign countries. 

g. Men and Women ambitious of 
developing their intellectual powers, 
improving their conversational ability, 
etc., in order to appear to advantage in 
the society of persons of the better sort. 

h. Students in high schools and 
academies. 

i. Teachers. 

/. Physicians. 

k. Clergymen. 

/. Persons that intend to travel 
abroad. 

m. Persons engaged in the study of 
political conditions. 

390 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. A knowledge of the German 
language is of inestimable value to 
business men and their employes. A 
good conversationist in German has 
important social and business advan- 
tages. He is able to enjoy the associa- 
tion of hundreds of congenial people 
that he would otherwise not know; and 
he is in a position to attract a good deal 
of custom that ignorance of German 
would be sure to leave to his com- 
petitors. 

6. Germany is acknowledged fore- 
most in medicine and surgery, and a 
majority of the best writings on these 
subjects is found in the German lan- 
guage. Physicians, surgeons, and med- 
ical students find our German Course 
of inestimable help. It enables them to 
keep informed of the latest achieve- 
ments of their German brethren. 

c. The Germans are among the lead- 
ers in every branch of modern discovery, 
invention, and engineering. Ability to 
read, write, and speak German is there- 
fore of special value to the scientists and 
the engineers of all countries. 

d. German is taught so commonly 
in the schools, teachers will find our 
Courses of special value. Our system 
possesses unique advantages that enable 
us to guarantee correct pronunciation. 

e. It is a great advantage to every 
intelligent person to have a knowledge 
of the German language. The impor- 
tant works on nearly every subject of 
interest to the philosopher, the scientist, 
the educator, the artist, the linguist, the 
poet, and the musician, are in German. 

391 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 1 year. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Remarks 

One of the difficult things in language 
teaching is to get the student to prac- 
tice unfamiliar sounds in a vigorous 
tone in the presence of his teacher. A 
personal instructor seldom can spare 
enough time with the student to give 
him sufficient practice in speaking; and 
the student frequently cannot rehearse 
his lesson alone, because he forgets 
most of it. Then, too, a personal 
teacher's peculiarities of manner and 
dress often distract the attention of the 
student. Our method avoids all diffi- 
culties of this sort. We give to the stu- 
dent what is in many respects superior 
to a personally present teacher. Our 
student is able to hear his Instructor's 
voice, when, where, and as long as he 
likes, and he may hear a word or a 
phrase repeated as often as he desires; 
for the phonograph has no distracting 
peculiarities, has no engagements, is 
not nervous, and never grows impatient. 



392 



Spanish Course 

Edison Standard Phonograph' 

(equipped with a special repeat- 
ing attachment) 

Brass Horn (14-inch) 

Model "C" Reproducer 

Recorder 

Special Hearing Tube (with head- 
piece attachment and sound mod- } vSection A 

ifier. The sound modifier is our 

own patented invention, and is 

used exclusively with our Courses) 

Speaking Tube 

Winding Crank 

Camel's-Hair Chip Brush 

Two Blank Cylinders j 

Twenty-Five Molded Phonographic 

Records (corresponding to our ^ Section B 

Spanish Textbooks) 

Four Spanish Textbooks Section C 

Instruction and Correction of Stu-" 

dent's Work, comprising the fol- 
lowing : 
A set of the pamphlet Instruction 

Papers issued to a student as he 

progresses with his studies 

Blank Cylinders on which to make 

his phonographic recitations 

Thorough and careful criticism of J- Section D 

his work, and guidance in his 

studies 

Privilege of writing, as frequently 

as he may desire, for special in- 

stniction in his Course 

Our Diploma when he completes the 

Course and satisfactorily passes 

our examination 

Peculiar Advantages of Our Method of 
Teaching Spanish 

a. We teach the student to read 
understandingly ; for we train his eye, 
his ear, and his memory at the same 
time. 

b. We teach the student to write 
correctly; for, after the first few lessons, 
we require him to use the language of 
his Course in correspondence with his 
Instructor. 



393 



c. We teach the student to speak 
fluently; for we require him to recite 
into the phonograph and send his 
records to his Instructor for correction 
and criticism. 

d. We teach the student to think 
logically; for we require him to practice 
drills, using the idioms and construc- 
tions in the various combinations 
occurring in conversation and litera- 
ture. 

e. We require our student to learn 
each lesson before we give him the 
next. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain practical conversa- 
tional lessons, prepared strictly on a 
common-sense plan, and the student at 
once learns to talk on general affairs 
and the topics of the times. 

h. They require the student to write 
what he learns, besides reciting it into 
the phonograph. 

c. They include instruction in gram- 
mar to the full extent required. This 
grammar instruction is written in Eng- 
lish, and the student is required to 
practice translation and carry on Span- 
ish correspondence with his Instructor. 

d. They include courses of reading 
on technical subjects; many selections 
are given from the classics; and the 
commercial, political, and industrial 
conditions of foreign countries are 
described. 

e. They enable the student to acquire 
a vocabulary of over five thousand 
Spanish words. 

394 



/. They teach the student how to 
translate English into Spanish, and 
Spanish into English. 

g. They require the student to do 
original composition in Spanish. 

How We Are Able to Guarantee That 

Our Spanish Instruction Records 

Bear Correct Pronunciation 

Our Instructors repeat a lesson into 
the phonograph many times until a 
perfect record is made. A metal mold is 
then made from this perfect record, by 
the Edison Gold-Mold Process. Then 
all the Instruction Records of that 
lesson are cast in the mold. This 
insures absolute precision and standard- 
izes the language for the first time in 
its history. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Business Men. 

b. Clerks. 

c. Salesmen. 

d. Persons interested in the engi- 
neering professions, chemistry, etc. 

e Employes in all classes of United 
States Government service. 

/. Employes of firms having trade in 
foreign countries. 

g. Students in high schools and 
academies. 

h. Teachers. 

i. Physicians. 

j. Clergymen. 

k. Persons that intend to travel 
abroad. 

I. Persons engaged in the study of 
political conditions. 

395 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Commercial opportunities in the 
South American countries and our new 
possessions should make Spanish the 
most popular foreign language in the 
United States. 

b. Every young man should be able 
to speak Spanish before he goes into 
our new possessions to identify himself 
with their industrial development. 

c. Engineers should understand 
Spanish, in view of the constant calls 
being made on Americans to construct 
and manage engineering works in 
Spanish-speaking countries. 

d. American manufacturers and 
merchants need employes that speak, 
read, and write the Spanish language. 
They also need correspondents, stenog- 
raphers, and assistants in Spanish- 
American cities to carry on the corre- 
spondence growing out of the increased 
trade relations. 

e. Professional men and women, 
especially those recently graduated at 
colleges, need to speak Spanish if they 
would consider the possibility of giving 
their services to our new possessions. 
Doctors, lawyers, architects, clergymen, 
and missionaries are of this class. 

/. Teachers are being recruited from 
the United States to serve in the public- 
school systems how being installed in 
Porto Rico, Cuba, and the Philippines. 
Educators that are able to read, write, 
and speak Spanish will have a decided 
advantage in this field. 

g. Persons engaged in the army have 
great need to speak Spanish, and many 
important military positions at home 

396 



and in our new possessions require this 
knowledge. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time given. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
1 year. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Remarks 

One of the difficult things in language 
teaching is to get the student to prac- 
tice unfamiliar sounds in a vigorous 
tone in the presence of his teacher. A 
personal instructor seldom can spare 
enough time with the student to give 
him sufficient practice in speaking; and 
the student frequently cannot rehearse 
his lesson alone, because he forgets 
most of it. Then, too, a personal 
teacher's peculiarities of manner and 
dress often distract the attention of the 
student. Our method avoids all diffi- 
culties of this sort. We give to the stu- 
dent what is in many respects superior 
to a personally present teacher. Our 
student is able to hear his Instructor's 
voice, when, where, and as long as he 
likes, and he may hear a word or a 
phrase repeated as often as he desires; 
for the phonograph has no distracting 
peculiarities, has no engagements, is 
not nervous, and never grows impatient. 

William Bulfin, in a recent issue of 
"The World's Work," had this to say 
regarding the qualifications absolutely 
essential to business success in South 

397 



America : " It is necessary to found 
big wholesale and retail stores and 
man them efficiently. When the right 
goods are pushed here in the proper 
way, there is always a satisfactory 
result. But too often are the wrong 
men sent out with the right goods. It 
would pay the manufacturers and the 
exporters of the United States to send 
out first-class men — men who would 
gild a business transaction with the 
urbanity so much prized by Latin 
Americans, men who would take the 
trouble of studying the language. * * * 
The man who depends on 'smartness' 
alone is a commercial calamity for the 
people who employ him. * * * The 
Spanish word 'simpatico' is translated 
in English as 'sympathetic,' but it 
means a great deal more in Spanish 
than it means in English. Amongst 
other things it means cultured social 
amenity, sympathy with the people, 
a knowledge of their language, a decent 
respect for their ways which pleases 
and flatters, and an attitude more 
or less indulgent to what a foreigner 
may consider their antiquated business 
methods." 



398 



Demonstration of Language 
Courses 

Demonstration of our language 
Courses has proved to be one of the 
best general advertisements of the 
International Correspondence Schools. 

Our careful preparation of the I. C. S. 
Textbooks; the unique advantages 
of the I. C. S. system of correspondence 
instruction ; our successful method of 
criticizing and correcting our students' 
exercises; our ability to originate sys- 
tems and carry out details — all these 
are quickly observed by new classes 
of persons at language demonstrations, 
who increase our field for general solici- 
tation fully one-half. ■ 

Best Way to Make a Demonstration 
of Our Language Courses 

a. Place circulars of the language 
Courses in the hands of the listeners. 

b. Explain the advantages of our 
molded records, which are made in 
gold molds through the Edison process. 

c. Find the proper lesson page in 
the circular before the phonograph is 
allowed to talk. Explain that we train 
the eye, the ear, the tongue, and the 
memory. 

d. Let the phonograph talk. The 
machine should run slowly (ninety 
revolutions a minute) and reproduce 
the Instructor's voice distinctly and in 
a natural tone. If the hearing tube is 
used, see that the sound modifier is 
properly adjusted. 

e. Explain the plan of each conver- 
sational lesson. Before the prospective 

399 



students close their circulars, and after 
the phonograph is stopped, refer to the 
printed extracts from the lessons. These 
are entitled " Remarks " ; "Drill"; "Re- 
view and Conversation"; and "Phono- 
graph Exercise." 

/. Call attention to the fact that 
records of pronunciation are made by 
the students (on blank cylinders that 
we furnish free with our Phonograph 
Outfit), and sent to the Schools for 
criticism and correction. 

g. Make a record of your voice and 
reproduce it immediately. Explain that 
students cannot progress in their les- 
sons unless they send in phonograph 
exercises for correction. Explain that 
the student must talk, and that his 
desire to speak as accurately as the 
phonograph will lead the student to 
attain a perfect pronunciation. 

h. Explain that in the I. C. S. system 
the student is supplied with only a few 
advanced lessons at any point in the 
Course, progression being attendant 
upon recitation. It is the only system 
that obliges the student to speak aloud 
and provides for the careful criticism 
and correction of his oral lessons recited 
into the phonograph. 

i. Show how I. C. S. students learn to 
write the foreign languages. Explain 
that all but the first few Conversational 
lessons and all the Grammar and 
Reader lessons provide for written 
exercises. Thus instruction is given 
at the same time in speaking, reading, 
and writing. 

/. Refer to the synopses of the 
Courses in the circular. Here may be 
shown the completeness of each Course. 

400 



Show that the thirty Conversational 
lessons have a definite grammatical 
arrangement; that they give the aver- 
age student a good working knowledge 
of the language in a few months; that 
the Grammar and the Reader teach the 
rules for construction after the student 
has learned to speak the language, 
which is an important advantage. 

k. Demonstrate the use of the 
repeating attachment on the phono- 
graph, and the sound modifier in the 
hearing tube. Explain that with our 
special apparatus the student has a 
complete and satisfactory outfit for 
both amusement and language study. 

Proper Course of Procedure in. Allow- 
ing an Audience to Hear a 
Language Record 

With the phonograph at rest, see 
that the Model C Reproducer is in place 
in the Speaker Arm. See that the 
nickel-plated screw in the Speaker Arm 
is turned out of the way, and the handle 
of the Reproducer is tight up against 
the casting. Be sure that the instru- 
ment is wound up. Open wide the 
Swing Locking Arm. Raise the Lift 
Lever to its highest point. Place the 
record on the Mandrel, bevel end first. 

Close the Swing Locking Arm and see 
that the record is on the Mandrel tight, 
without using too much force. Move 
the Speaker Arm over to the left to the 
beginning of the record. Throw the 
Start-and-Stop Level to the left, start- 
ing the instrument. From experience 
the demonstrator should be able to 
adjust the speed properly to ninety 

401 



revolutions a minute, before the instru- 
ment begins to talk. Attach the 6-way 
Hearing Tube to the Reproducer, stop 
the instrument, and distribute the cir- 
culars containing the lessons. After 
adjusting the Sound Modifiers in the 
tubes, which adjustment the demon- 
strator should learn by experience before 
attempting a demonstration, invite the 
listeners to take up the Hearing Cups. 
Explain to each listener that he should 
use only one Hearing Cup, holding it 
in one hand while he holds the circular 
in the other. Be sure to open the cir- 
cular so that the proper lesson is before 
the listener. 

When all the , listeners are in a com- 
fortable position ready to follow the 
lesson, start the instrument and turn 
down the Lift Lever, with the Repro- 
ducer as near the beginning of the record 
as the eye can judge. It is probable 
that the exact starting point will not 
be found at first; but instead of lifting 
up the Speaker Arm and setting it back, 
work the repeating attachment until 
the Reproducer starts at the beginning. 
Do not make the starting of the instru- 
ment appear difficult by looking under- 
neath the Reproducer and frantically 
endeavoring to find the exact starting 
point at once. 

Never let the instrument talk before 
the proper place for the listener to read 
is found in the circular. Much of the 
fascination of listening to a foreign- 
language record is lost unless the listener 
reads the translation of the lesson while 
the instrument is talking. 

When removing a record, be sure that 
the Lift Lever is up. Do not set the 

402 



record down, but immediately place it 
in the pasteboard box. 

Proper Way to Make a Record During 
a Demonstration 

Put the tool called the Recorder in 
place of the Reproducer. Be sure that 
the instrument is wound up. Place the 
Blank Cylinder on the Mandrel of the 
instrument, bevel end first, and see that 
the Recorder is lifted up so that it will 
not cut before dictation is begun. Start 
the instrument. Dust off the cylinder 
while it is running, wnth the soft brush 
furnished with the Outfit. Adjust the 
speed about the same as for hearing the 
instruction records. Attach the speak- 
ing tube to the Recorder. Do not use 
the Horn for dictation. Sit in a com- 
fortable position directly in front of the 
instrument so as to remain at ease while 
speaking. Do not be in haste to begin. 
Be sure there will be no interruption, 
and then let down the Recorder on the 
cylinder — not too near the left end. 
Allow a few revolutions to take place 
before speaking, and lift the Recorder 
off the cylinder the instant you have 
finished. Then carefully dust off the 
loose wax — the instrument still running 
to make the cylinder perfectly clean. 
Change the Recorder for the Repro- 
ducer, and the record may be heard at 
once. 

A little practice will show the correct 
position for any person to assume when 
making a record. It is well for Repre- 
sentatives to remember, however, that 
the prospective student should not be 
encouraged to record his voice during 

403 



a demonstration; the voice of an inex- 
perienced person sometimes reproduces 
improperly and proves a detriment to 
an otherwise good impression. 

A record can be made at any speed, 
but it must be reproduced at the same 
speed to obtain the best results. 

Remarks 

It is expected that the Outfit will be 
kept in perfect condition, and that the 
Representative charged with its care 
will demonstrate the Language Courses 
a sufficient number of times to produce 
at least one language enrolment a month. 

Blank cylinders are not furnished free 
to demonstrators. Cylinders may be 
made blank by rubbing them evenly 
with a cloth wet with ordinary kerosene. 
As often as the record surface is thus 
removed, a new record may be made 
on the cylinder. Still, while excellent 
results are possible with the kerosene, 
perhaps the better plan is to have a 
local dealer shave the cylinders in a 
special lathe. 

Supervisors and Division Superin- 
tendents should understand that every 
Phonograph Outfit in their possession 
is to be placed in various parts of the 
territory under their charge to produce 
at least one language enrolment (for 
each Outfit) a month, and that they 
must not allow the apparatus to remain 
unproductive in any locality if it is 
possible to put it to greater advantage 
in some other place. 

Broken or damaged Instruction Rec- 
ords will be replaced without charge, 
upon application to the Superintendents 
of the Districts. 

404 



Repairs that may be charged to wear 
and tear will always be made promptly 
by direction of the Home Office if 
reported on the monthly Inspection 
Report of Representatives' Outfits. 

Articles reported missing from the 
Outfit must be paid for at cost prices. 



405 



Complete Commercial Course 

Fourteen subjects are taught in the 
Complete Commercial Course. The 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain fifteen, as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 293 ] 

Examination Questions. . . 32 [ 

Keys 54 J 

English Grammar 338 

Punctuation and Capital- 
ization 54 

Letter Writing 204 

Examination Questions. . . 34 

Spelling 39 

Penraanship (Slanting) ... 60 

Penmanship (Vertical) . . 48 

Stenography 139 

Typewriting 207 I 

Examination Questions. . . 99 J 
Single-Entry Bookkeeping 119" 
Double-Entry Bookkeep- 
ing 

Opening, Closing, and 

Changing Books 27 

Corporation Organization 

and Bookkeeping 68 

Elements of Cost Account- 
ing 74 

Bank Bookkeeping 86 

Examination Sets 106. 

2,207 



226 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Vokime 



4th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 

Illustrations, 310 

Instruction Papers, 55 

Bound Volumes, 4 • 
Note — The student of the Complete Commer- 
cial Course receives instruction in either Slant- 
ing or Vertical Penmanship, according to his 
selection. 

The student may take up Bookkeeping as 
soon as he finishes Arithmetic and Penmanship; 
or if he writes a good hand and understands 
Interest and Percentage, he can begin with Book- 
keeping at once; or he can study Stenography 
as the first subject of his Course, if he has a 
fair knowledge of English. 

406 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give the student a good 
business training. 

h. They explain fully the business 
forms in common use. 

c. They enable the student to take 
charge of a set of books — either single- 
entry or double-entry — and to devise 
olhce systems adapted to various lines. 

d. They contain thorough instruc- 
tion in letter writing — explaining how 
to compose a good letter in which the 
grammar, punctuation, and spelling are 
correct. 

e. They embrace thorough instruc- 
tion in stenography. 

/. They treat typewriting fully, 
explaining not only the operation of 
the machine by the touch system, but 
also its use in tabulating, billing, 
duplicating, etc. 

g. They teach how to open or close 
a set of books and how to change from 
single-entry to double-entry or from 
double-entry to single-entry. 

h. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of modem office methods, 
card systems, the use of special columns 
in books of accounts, etc. 

i. They treat fully of corporation 
organization, the opening and the 
closing of corporation books, and the 
duties of corporation officials. 

j. They explain fully cost account- 
ing and show how its introduction into 
any business is made easy. 



407 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Young Persons desiring to fit 
themselves for positions as bookkeepers 
and stenographers. 

b. Students and Graduates of busi- 
ness colleges and commercial schools. 

c. Typewriters wishing to become 
stenographers, bookkeepers, or experts 
in labor-saving office systems. 

d. Stenographers wanting a knowl- 
edge of accounting, expert office work, 
and management. 

e. Bookkeepers and persons desiring 
to become expert accountants. 

/. Clerks, Salesmen, and Collectors 
desirous of becoming accountants, pri- 
vate secretaries, or managers. 

g. Store Managers and Floor Walkers 
wanting to become proprietors or cor- 
poration officials. 

h. Teachers desirous of becoming 
expert accountants, private secretaries, 
and managers. 

i. Persons intending to engage in 
business for themselves. 

;. Business Men and Women that 
keep their own books. 

Note — The Complete Commercial Course 
is intended for persons wishing a thorough busi- 
ness training. Persons wanting a ftill knowledge 
of EngHsh, Stenography, and Typewriting only, 
should enroll for the Complete Stenographic 
Course. Those desiring a knowledge of Book- 
keeping (including _ department-store work), 
corporation accounting, and cost accounting 
only, should enroll for the Bookkeeping and 
Business Forms Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Business life offers great oppor- 
tunities to both young men and young 
women. Beyond the certainty of good 

408 



salaries for all competent workers, 
there are always within reach higher 
positions for those possessing the 
necessary knowledge and ability. 

b. Worth will manifest itself; and 
the employe that acquires ability to 
more than fulfil his duties is already 
started on the road to success. The 
information contained in our Cotirse 
will greatly increase his chances of 
promotion. The clerk that thoroughly 
understands bookkeeping, modern office 
methods, card systems, cost accounting, 
etc., and uses this knowledge in his 
daily work, will be first selected for an 
advanced and better-paid position. 

c. Our Course is a boon to the young 
man about to engage in business for 
himself; it will enable him to carry on 
his affairs in an economical and business- 
like manner; it may prevent his failure. 

d. To the person that has never 
gone to school, our Course furnishes 
not only a good general education, but 
also a knowledge of business and busi- 
ness principles that will enable him to 
fill desirable office positions or to better 
handle his own business affairs. 

e. The bookkeeper will find our 
instruction replete with new and useful 
ideas. Our Course will enable him to 
fill his position with greater ease to 
himself and better satisfaction to his 
employer. 

/. When a young man desired to 
get a business education it was formerly 
the custom for him to secure employ- 
ment with a reliable firm and then 
learn as best he could. This method, 
however, necessitated a long appren- 
ticeship with small pay. Things have 

409 



changed. Today the business man has 
neither the time nor the inchnation to 
make a schoolroom of his store or his 
office; he requires that his employes 
shall already be trained. We do the 
training. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 18 
months. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
and KcA^s of the Course. They include 
in concise form the best that has been 
learned of up-to-date business methods 
and commercial subjects. The Bound 
Volumes were prepared to meet the re- 
quirements of people that must get an 
education, if they get it at all, by means 
of home study and out of the presence 
of a teacher. They are written in 
simple style, particular care having 
been taken to avoid unusual words. 
It is because our Bound Volumes are 
so clearly written as to make impos- 
sible a misunderstanding of what is 
read that they are universally accepted 
as the best for home study. 

410 



b. They are for reference purposes 
superior to any other books of the kind 
ever pubHshed. They are far ahead of 
the best commercial textbooks used in 
business colleges. The Bound Volumes 
contain an invaluable collection of facts, 
processes, and principles of the best 
commercial practice, and furnish infor- 
mation indispensable to every one 
requiring a knowledge of bookkeeping 
and modern office methods. Indeed, 
nowhere else can the student get so 
readily so much helpful, money-earning 
information. 

c. They are so fully indexed, the 
student can find in an instant any 
information pertaining to the subjects 
of which they treat. All questions are 
answered fully and in language easily 
understood, even by the man of little 
education. 



411 



Bookkeeping and Business 
Forms Course 

Nine subjects are taught in the 
Bookkeeping and Business Forms 
Course. The Bound. Volumes of the 
Reference Library contain ten, as 
follows : 



10 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 2931 

Spelling 39 

Penmanship (Slanting) ... 60 

Penmanship (Vertical) . . 48 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

Keys 54 

Single-Entry B ookkeeping 119' 
Double-Entry Bookkeep- 
ing 226 

Opening, Closing, and 

Changing Books 27 

Corporation Organization 

and Bookkeeping 68 

Elements of Cost Account- 
ing 74 

Bank Bookkeeping 86 

Examination Sets 106 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 1,241 

Illustrations, 203 

Instruction Papers, 27 

Bound Volumes, 2 
Note — The student of the Bookkeeping and 
Business Forms Course may have instruction 
in either Slanting or Vertical Penmanship (Sub- 
ject No. 3 or No. 4), according to his selection. 
The student may take up Bookkeeping as 
soon as he finishes Arithmetic and Penmanship; 
or if he writes a good hand and understands 
Interest and Percentage, he may begin with 
Bookkeeping at once if he so desires. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They fully explain the business 
forms in common use. 

b. They qualify the student to take 
full charge of a set of books — either 

412 



single-entry or double-entry — and to 
devise office systems adapted to various 
lines of business. 

c. They teach how to open or close 
a set of books, and how to change from 
single-entry to double-entry or from 
double-entry to single-entry. 

d. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of modem office methods, 
card systems, the use of special columns 
in books of accounts, etc. 

e. They treat fully of corporation 
organization, the opening and the clo- 
sing of corporation books, and the 
duties of corporation officials. 

/. They fully explain cost account- 
ing and show how easily it can be intro- 
duced into any business. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Young Persons wanting to fit 
themselves for positions as clerks, 
bookkeepers, and accountants. 

b. Students and Graduates of busi- 
ness colleges and commercial schools. 

c. Stenographers desiring a knowl- 
edge of bookkeeping, modem office 
methods, card systems, etc. 

d. Typewriters wishing to become 
bookkeepers or experts in labor-saving 
office systems. 

e. Bookkeepers and all others desir- 
ous of becoming expert accountants. 

/. Clerks, Salesmen, and Collectors 
wanting to become bookkeepers and 
accountants. 

g. Teachers wishing to become ac- 
countants, office experts, and managers. 

h. Persons intending to engage in 
business for themselves. 

413 



i. Business Men and Women that 
keep their own books. 

Note — All callings and professions are so inter- 
woven with the keeping of accounts and the 
application of business methods, a practical 
knowledge of bookkeeping is of inestimable 
value to a person in any walk of life. It enables 
many to transact business profitably and honor- 
ably that could not hope to succeed without it. 

The Bookkeeping and Business Forms 
Course is intended for persons wanting a knowl- 
edge of bookkeeping (including department-store 
work), corporation organization, and cost 
accounting. Those desiring a thorough business 
education should enroll for the Complete Com- 
mercial Course. Persons wishing a full 
knowledge of English, Stenography, and Type- 
writing only, should enroll for the Complete 
Stenographic Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. It is well known that a large num- 
ber of those that start in business fail; 
and a large percentage of these failures 
are due to a lack of knowledge of book- 
keeping and business methods. Busi- 
ness cannot be run properly without 
keeping accounts, and accounts cannot 
be kept properly except by compe- 
tent bookkeepers. Our Course includes 
thorough instruction in both single- 
entry and double-entry bookkeeping. 
The instruction in single-entry book- 
keeping clearly explains and illustrates 
the single-entry system and its use — 
both for books of a single proprietor and 
a partnership — and gives forms suitable 
for any kind of business. The instruc- 
tion in double-entry describes the use 
of a large number of special forms of 
books designed to show, with less labor, 
better results than do many systems of 
bookkeeping in common use. Each 
lesson represents a set of books suitable 

414 



not only for the business shown, but 
for many other lines. The different 
books cover a large field, and the book- 
keeper or proprietor that does not care 
to use any particular set in exactly the 
combination we give will have no 
trouble in adapting the set exactly to 
his needs. We give our student a 
practical working knowledge of book- 
keeping — ^not a smattering of cut-and- 
dried rules, but a live knowledge that 
can be applied in any business or office. 
Through our bookkeeping instruction 
the proprietor not only can see at a 
glance whom he owes, who owes him, 
and how much; but also the amount of 
each kind of business done, the cost 
of conducting that business, the profits 
arising from it, and from exactly what 
part of the business the profits were 
received. All this information is vital 
to the business man; it will enable him 
to plan wisely his purchases and 
expenses for each particular line of 
work, basing his calculations for the 
future on the past as shown by his 
books. This knowledge may prevent 
his failure. 

b. There are unusual opportunities 
for the stenographer that is also a 
bookkeeper. There are thousands of 
offices in which the work is hardly 
sufficient to justify the emxployment of 
both a stenographer and a bookkeeper; 
and the person able to fill both positions 
can command a much larger salary than 
if he were qualified only as a stenog- 
rapher or a bookkeeper. Then, again, 
by having a thorough knowledge of 
both subjects a student doubles his 
chances for employment and greatly 

415 



increases his probabilities for rapid 
promotion. 

c. New firms are being organized 
constantly and the trade of old firms is 
increasing; the field for bookkeepers is 
consequently always widening. 

d. To the business man wishing to 
keep his own books or to improve his 
present system our Course offers an 
opportunity to obtain the desired 
results with the least expenditure of 
time and money. 

e. The first-class bookkeeper has so 
great a knowledge of the general prin- 
ciples of bookkeeping that he can grasp 
the system of any set of books and 
keep or audit them intelligently; he 
opens and closes books, or changes 
them as is required. The average 
bookkeeper cannot do this; he some- 
times has difficulty in keeping his own 
set in good order. But there is no 
reason why any one with intelligence 
enough to become a bookkeeper of any 
kind should not become more expert 
and earn three or four times the salary 
of the ordinary man. The best posi- 
tions in banks, with trust and insurance 
companies, and other large corpora- 
tions, are open to bookkeepers of this 
class. The way to qualify for a better 
position as bookkeeper is through the 
study of our Bookkeeping and Busi- 
ness Forms Course. This Course 
affords thorough training in commer- 
cial accounting. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 

416 



studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, 
and Ke3^s of the Course, and give a full 
and clear treatment of the principles of 
bookkeeping and their application to 
modem methods of accounting. They 
include in concise form the best that 
has been learned about up-to-date busi- 
ness methods and commercial subjects. 

h. They are for reference purposes 
superior to any other books of the kind 
ever published. They are far ahead of 
the best commercial textbooks used in 
business colleges. The Bound Vol- 
umes furnish information indispensable 
to every one requiring a knowledge of 
bookkeeping and modem office systems. 
They contain in concise form the 
methods used in the best commercial 
houses in the country. From no other 
source can the student get so quickly 
so much money-earning knowledge. 

c. They are so fully indexed, the 
student can find in an instant any 
information pertaining to the subjects 
of which they treat. All questions are 
answered fully and in language easily 
understood by the man of little edu- 
cation. 



14 417 



Complete Stenographic Course i 

Seven subjects are taught in the ; 
Complete Stenographic Course. The ' 
Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain eight, as follows: 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 English Grammar 338 ] 

^ ^'StioS*'°'' ^"""^ Capital!- ^^ I ^g^ 3^^^^ , 

3 Letter°Writing .■;.■.■. ■.;■.::: 204 I Volume 
Examination Questions ... 34 J 

4 Spelling... 39] 

5 Penmanship (Slanting) ... 60 | 

6 Penmanship (Vertical) ... 48 I 2d Bound 

7 Stenography 139 | Volume 

8 Typewriting _ 207 " 

Examination Questions. . . 

Pages 1,122 

Illustrations, 137 

Instruction Papers, 34 

Bound Volumes, 2 
Note — The student of the Complete Steno- 
graphic Course receives instruction in either 
Slanting or Vertical Penmanship, according to 
his selection. The student may take up Stenog- 
raphy as the first subject of his Course, if he 
has a fair knowledge of English. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace thorough instruc- 
tion in stenography. 

b. They give the student a full 
knowledge of letter writing — showing 
how to compose a good letter in which 
the grammar, punctuation, and spelling 
are correct. 

c. They give full instruction in type- 
writing — explaining not only the opera- 
tion of the machine by the touch system, 
but also its use in tabulating, billing, 
duplicating, etc. 

d. They give instruction in law 
reporting. 

418 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Young Persons wanting to learn 
stenography. 

b. Students and Graduates of busi- 
ness colleges and commercial schools. 

c. Students and Graduates of high 
schools and academies. 

d. Clerks, Salesmen, and Collectors 
wanting to add a knowledge of stenog- 
raphy to their other qualifications in 
order to advance. 

e. Typewriters wishing a knowledge 
of stenography. 

/. Stenographers desirous of review- 
ing the subjects of grammar, letter 
writing, punctuation, etc., or to increase 
their speed in either shorthand or 
typewriting. 

g. Young Men preparing for civil 
service examinations that require a 
knowledge of stenography and type- 
writing. 

h. Bookkeepers and Accountants 
wanting a knowledge of stenography 
and typewriting. 

i. Office Boys desirous of fitting 
themselves as stenographers. 

y. Private Secretaries. 

k. Lawyers. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The ability to write shorthand is 
becoming more and more a necessary 
qualification for young men and young 
women in business life. It is the step- 
ping-stone to advancement. The very 
nature of their work places stenographers 
in close touch with their employers; 
and the person that writes the firm's 
correspondence is the one that learns 

419 



the business quickest. The thoroughly 
trained stenographer not only gets a 
good salary at the start, but also has 
the advantage that his work cannot 
fail to be noticed. He has, further- 
more, good chances of promotion 
because of the knowledge he gains of 
the inner workings of the business. 
In many cases stenographers, on 
account of the opportunities the work 
offers, have been able to advance 
rapidly to positions of trust and 
responsibility. 

h. Stenography affords a pleasant 
and profitable opening for women 
wishing to earn their own living. 
While there are hundreds of so-called 
stenographers glad of employment at 
from $4 to $5 a week, really competent 
stenographers are sure of good positions 
at much higher salaries, even at the 
start. A capable young woman stenog- 
rapher can command twice the salary 
of one that is not capable, and there is 
not a city where she cannot readily 
secure a good position. Through our 
instruction any young woman of aver- 
age ability can soon qualify as a com- 
petent stenographer. 

c. There are good openings in the 
government service for competent men 
stenographers and typewriters. The 
number of eligibles has not been suffi- 
cient to meet the needs of the service; 
and the prospect for advancement is 
good. 

d. A good stenographer never need 
lack employment; for nearly every 
business employs one or more, and the 
demand for those really able will 
always exceed the supply. 

420 



Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers and Examination Questions of 
the Course, which were prepared to 
meet the requirements of the student 
that must get an education, if he gets 
it at all, by means of home study and 
with no instructor by his side. It is 
essential that the instruction for this 
purpose be so forcefully written and 
illustrated that the student will take 
it into his mind unaided; and so well 
do our Bound Volumes meet this 
requirement, they are universally ac- 
cepted as the best for home study. 
They are easily understood, even by 
the man of little education. Many 
students have acquired a thorough 
knowledge of the principles of stenog- 
raphy and typewriting by thoughtfully 
studying the Bound Volumes alone. 
This knowledge, supplemented with 
practice, will enable the student to 
acquire speed, accuracy, and ability in 
taking dictation and transcribing his 
notes. Our Bound Volumes are in- 
valuable to every one that would 

421 



be a competent stenographer and type- 
writer. 

b. They are of great value as ref- 
erence books. They are superior to 
the best textbooks used by business 
coUeges. The Bound Volumes contain 
many special features not found in any 
other single work on stenography. 
They not only give the student a good 
knowledge of English, Stenography, and 
Typewriting, but also of their practical 
application to business. The Bound 
Volumes embrace the methods of many 
of the best reporters, stenographers, 
and typewriters in the country. 

c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 



422 



Banking and Banking Law 
Course 

Nine subjects are taught in the 
Banking and Banking Law Course. 
The Bound Volumes of the Reference 
Library contain thirteen, as follows: 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Single-Entry Bookkeeping 119' 
Double-Entry Bookkeep- 
ing 226 

Opening, Closing, and 

Changing Books 27 

Corporation Organization 

and Bookkeeping 68 

Elements of Cost Account- 
ing 74 

Bank Bookkeeping 86 

Examination Sets 106 

History of Banking 26 

National and State Banks 120 

National Bank Supervision 54 

Savings Banks 83 

Trust Companies. 58 

Examination Questions. . . 12 
The Law of Commercial 

Paper 194 

The Law of Banks and 

Banking 109 

Supplement 

Examination Questions. 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



• 15. 

Pages 1,466 

Illustrations, 369 
Instruction Papers, 27 
Bound Volumes, 3 
Note — The subjects in light-face type are 
not included in this Course. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They give a concise outline of 
the development of banking — both 
foreign and domestic. 

h. They describe the incorporation 
of both national and state banks and 



423 



treat of their management and opera- 
tion. 

c. They deal with the government 
supervision of national banks — cover- 
ing their organization, reorganization, 
examination, and the conversion of 
state banks into national banks. 

d. They explain the purposes of 
clearing houses and their methods of 
operation. 

e. They contain the history of the 
development of savings banks. The 
incorporation of both mutual and 
stock savings banks as well as their 
administration and the system of 
bookkeeping used is given due con- 
sideration. 

/. They take up the organization, 
supervision, operation, and administra- 
tion of trust companies. 

g. They give the law of commercial 
paper — ^both English and American 
codification. The requisities of negoti- 
able instruments, indorsement, pre- 
sentment of bills and notes for pay- 
ment, dishonor, protest, liabilities of 
parties, rules governing when laws 
conflict, bills of lading, warehouse 
receipts, and forgeries — all are treated 
of in a clear and concise manner. 
Every business man should have this 
knowledge ; it may prevent his making 
costly mistakes. 

h. They give full instruction in 
the law of banks and banking. 

i. They contain a digest of the 
banking laws of the states and terri- 
tories in the United States and give 
the banking law of Canada. 

y. They embrace the national-bank 
act. 

424 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Bank Directors and Trustees. 

b. Officers of national and state 
banks. 

c. Officers of savings banks. 

d. Officers of trust companies. 

e. Paying Tellers and Assistants. 

/. Receiving Tellers and Assistants. 

g. Note Tellers and Assistants. 

h. Discount Clerks. 

t. Collection Clerks. 

j. Bank Bookkeepers. 

k. Young Men wanting to fit them- 
selves for positions with banks or 
trust companies. 

/. Students and Graduates of busi- 
ness colleges and commercial schools. 

m. Auditors. 

n. Bank Examiners. 

o. Business Men generally. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. A knowledge of the legal side of 
banking is of vital importance to any 
bank official. Without it he is con- 
tinually in the dark as to what course 
to follow in order to protect the bank. 
Our instruction is his surest guide: 
it will give him the law of commercial 
paper, the law of banks and banking, 
and the methods of supervision of both 
state and national banks; it will guard 
him against making costly mistakes. 

b. With the great number of banks 
already in existence and the many new 
ones being organized every year, any 
clerk should have little trouble to rise. 
Promotion is won by efficiency rather 
than influence. The clerk bending 
every effort toward fitting himself 

425 



for the duties of the place above him 
is sure to forge ahead. 

c. Today the young man in the 
bank has too little opportunity to get, 
even by slow experience, a knowledge 
of the various methods and functions 
of his institution. It is a mistake for 
him to think he must begin at the 
bottom rung of the ladder. In bank- 
ing, as in everything else, worth counts. 
And the man able to prove his ability 
will soon outstrip the man not ready 
for promotion — even though the latter 
be an older employe. 

d. These are busy times in the 
banking world, and there are great 
opportunities for the man that knows 
the business and is full of energy and 
initiative: he can soon push his way 
to the top, where a good salary awaits 
him. 

e. To the bank clerk having a 
resolute purpose to amount to some- 
thing and realizing that experience 
is a slow teacher, we offer a way of 
getting in a short period information 
it has taken some of the best bankers 
in the country a lifetime to acquire. 
Prepared by experts and practical bank- 
ers, our instruction gives the banking 
law and represents the best that is 
known about banking. It enables the 
student to profit by the long experience 
of others and gives him the very knowl- 
edge he must have before he can fill 
satisfactorily a position of trust and 
responsibility. 

/. The wide-awake bookkeeper, mail 
clerk, or discount clerk is eagerly 
waiting to seize any opportunity that 
will help push him up to the position 

426 



of teller. But he realizes how futile 
his efforts will be to reach this valuable 
post without a thorough knowledge of 
the entire banking business. He knows 
he cannot acquire the necessary instruc- 
tion through the daily routine, nor has 
he time to plod through vaguely 
written textbooks on banking. We 
can help such a man by giving him 
knowledge that no amount of experi- 
ence can give, and without requiring 
him to wade through a mass of non- 
essentials. Our Course contains the 
very essence of banking and banking 
law and strikes at the very root of 
what is required in all branches of 
banking. 

g. Except where f_a bank employe 
has been promoted through all the 
departments of a bank, he can have 
only a superficial knowledge of the 
detail work — of the legal reasons why 
certain things must be done as they 
are, and of the state and the national 
requirements. Every bank employe 
should know bank bookkeeping and 
its relation to the bank statement, 
which every bank is required to make, 
and to the report made by the bank 
examiner. Our Course contains this 
information. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 1 year. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

427 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers and Examination Questions of 
the Course, and give the student a 
^ood knowledge of banking and bank- 
ing law. Nearly all textbooks on 
banking require the student to wade 
through a great mass of unnecessary 
material to get the information he 
needs; nor is the ordinary textbook 
suited to the requirements of the 
home-study student. Books for class- 
room M^oric are written for the hand 
of the teacher and of necessity must 
be supplemented with his personal 
work in the presence of the student. 
Our Bound Volumes contain nothing 
that is not necessary for the student 
to know: their facts are arrayed in 
that thorough, incisive, and straight- 
to-the-point manner so essential for 
the student that must study with no 
instructor by his side. They are the 
only satisfactory books for home study. 

b. They are so fully indexed, the 
student can find in an instant any 
information pertaining to the subjects 
of which they treat. 

c. They are for reference purposes 
superior to any other books of the 
kind ever published. They are far 
ahead of the ordinary textbook on 
banking. The Bound Volumes contain 
an invaluable collection of facts and 
processes of the best banking practice, 
and furnish information indispensable 

428 



to every on^ requiring a knowledge of 
banking and banking law. Indeed, 
nowhere else can the student get so 
readily so much helpful information. 

d. They contain not only our 
Instruction Papers in bank book- 
keeping but also the Instruction Papers 
in general bookkeeping. 



429 



Complete Electrotherapeutic 
Course and Its Subordi- 
nate Courses 



LIST OF SUBJECTS 

1 Direct Currents 

2 Magnetism and Electro- 

magnetism 

3 Electrostatics and High- 

Frequency Currents. . . . 

4 Accessory Apparatus 

Examination Questions. . . 

5 Technique and Physiology 

of Static and Other 
High- Frequency Cur- 
rents 

6 Technique and Physiology 

of Direct Currents . . . . 

7 Technique and Physiology 

of Coil Currents 

Examination Questions. . . 

8 Physics of Roentgen Rays 

9 Skiagraphy 

10 Practical Applications of 

Roentgen Rays 

11 Physics of Light and Cau- 

tery. . . ._ _ 

Examination Questions . . . 

12 Therapeutic Uses of Elec- 

tricity in Gynecology . . 

13 Electricity in Diseases of 

the Nervous System . . . 

14 Electricity in Surgery. . . . 
Examination Questions. . . 

15 Electricity in Diseases of 

the Eye, Ear, Nose, and 
Throat 

16 Electricity in Genito-Uri- 

nary Diseases 

17 Therapeutics of Static 

Electricity 

18 Electricity in Dentistry . . 
Examination Questions. . . 



PAGES 

117 



80 
79 
19J 



64 

122 

124 
13 
941 
37 

108 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 

Volume 



32 
17 

123 I 

211 r 

95 



4th Bound 
Volume 



13. 



120 

149 

111 

159 

19 



5th Bound 
Volume 



Pages 2,002 

Illustrations, 770 
Instruction Papers, 18 
Bound Volumes, 5 

430 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They include thorough instruc- 
tion in the generation, measurement, 
and control of electric currents of all 
characters, thus qualifying the practi- 
tioner to understand fully the principles 
and processes involved in all applica- 
tions he may have occasion to make. 

b. They explain fully the construc- 
tion and method of operation of all 
instruments, electrodes, and other appa- 
ratus used in the treatment of disease 
with electricity. 

c. They are profusely illustrated, 
showing the actual application of elec- 
trodes to diseased surfaces, to surfaces 
leading to diseased parts, etc. 

d. They include all the latest instruc- 
tion regarding the generation of Roent- 
gen rays and their employment in 
medicine and surgery. 

e. They embrace all the known 
applications of electricity in dentistry. 

/. They are written in a simple and 
straight - to - the - point style, insuring 
quick comprehension. They are there- 
fore the best reference papers for the 
practitioner without time for system- 
atic study and recitation. 

g. They contain the best illustra- 
tions ever made of electrotherapeutie 
subjects. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Physicians. 

b. Surgeons. 

c. Nurses. 

d. Dentists. 

e. Medical Students. 

431 



Note — Field Men are urged to call on all the 
recent graduates (of medical colleges) in their 
Routes. While our Course is attractive to all 
practitioners, it offers special advantages to 
those whose practice is yet to be established. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. In view of the recent great strides 
in electrotherapeutics, the treatment of 
disease with electric currents and 
Roentgen rays is no longer restricted 
to the hospitals and the offices of cele- 
brated specialists. The time is not far 
distant when the sick of every city, 
town, village, and hamlet will enjoy the 
relief that electrical treatment will give 
— and that at the hands of the regular 
family physician. The practitioners 
first to adopt the new methods will be 
the first to realize the increased prac- 
tice and the larger income that is sure 
to result. 

b. About electrical apparatus there 
is always a certain charm that appeals 
to patients, and they submit hopefully 
to electrical treatment, often while 
without faith in anything else. Possess- 
ing the knowledge of electrophysics and 
electrophysiology contained in our In- 
struction Papers, the physician will 
not only maintain his patient's interest 
and hope by bringing about beneficial 

-results, but he will be able to cure per- 
manently many cases that have not 
yielded to other treatment at all. 

c. The only correct treatment of 
stricture known today is by means of 
the galvanic current, which cures stric- 
ture by liquefying and absorbing it. 
The cure is permanent. The physician 
has an excellent field for scientific 

432 



achievement in the treatment of stric- 
ture, if he follows the instruction given 
in our Course. There are many other 
chronic maladies frequently encoun- 
tered, in the treatment of which elec- 
tricity is the practitioner's best friend. 
Among these are neuralgia; gonorrheal 
arthritis ; constipation ; intestinal ob- 
struction; gynecological diseases; dis- 
eases of the nervous system; hysteria; 
neurasthenia; rheumatism; gout; and 
diabetes. 

d. In the homes of the busy practi- 
tioner's patients, in the hospital, and 
in the sanitarium, the nurse will find 
steady, pleasant, and remunerative 
employment if she has a good knowl- 
edge of electricity, its generation, and 
its medical application. Our Nurses' 
Electrical Course will give the elec- 
trical knowledge required, either while 
the student is studying to become a 
nurse or after she has graduated at her 
training school. 

e. Any physician without a Roentgen 
ray outfit, and a thorough knowledge of 
how to secure its best results with 
safety to his patients, is deprived of one 
of the most valuable agents known to 
the medical world. In the presence of 
fractures, dislocations, injured joints, 
and certain diseases of the osseous sys- 
tem, and in locating foreign bodies, a 
well-lit fluoroscopic screen affords the 
only accurate means of examination. 

/. As a source of motive power for 
the various mechanical devices peculiar 
to dentistry, such as drills, burrs, bur- 
nishers, and mallets, electricity has 
many unique advantages. Electrically 
driven appliances have a steadiness of 

433 



motion that insures comfort to the \ 
patient, and freedom to the operator. 
For exploring the mouth and accessory 
cavities, the miniature electric lamp is 
far superior to all other sources of light. 
And when strictly limited applications 
of heat are needed, electricity meets the 
requirements as no other agent can. 
The dentist using good electrical appa- 
ratus under our instruction is sure to 
prosper. With the direct current he 
can destroy any amount of tissue he 
desires ; he can render teeth insensitive ; 
he can sterilize teeth; and he can dis- 
integrate abnormal growths. 

Courses Extracted From the Complete 
Electrotherapeutic Course 

Gynecological Electrotherapeu- 
tic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 12. This Course 
is intended for physicians, surgeons, and 
medical students desiring a knowledge 
of how to employ electricity in treating 
diseases peculiar to women. 

Genito-Urinary Electrothera- 
peutic Course, including subjects 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 16. 
This Course is intended for physicians, 
surgeons, and medical students desiring 
a knowledge of how to employ elec- 
tricity in treating diseases peculiar to 
the genito-urinary system. 

Surgical Electrotherapeutic 
Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, and 14. This Course 
is intended for surgeons and medical 
students desiring a knowledge of how 
to employ electricity in surgery. 

Neurological Electrotherapeu- 
tic Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 

434 



2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and_ 13. This 
Course is intended for physicians, sur- 
geons, and medical students desiring a 
knowledge of how to employ electricity 
in treating diseases of the brain, the 
spinal cord, the peripheral nerves, and 
the muscles. 

Eye, Ear, Nose, and Throat Elec- 
TROTHERAPEUTic CouRSE, including Sub- 
jects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 15. 
This Course is intended for specialists 
desiring a knowledge of how to employ 
electricity in treating diseases of the 
organs named. 

Roentgen Rays Course, including 
subjects Nos. 8, 9, and 10. This Course 
includes instruction in the operation and 
care of all apparatus used by the fore- 
most Roentgen ray workers. It gives 
full instruction in the generation of the 
rays, and thoroughly explains every de- 
tail of their application. Our Course 
comprises the only complete instruction 
ever written on Roentgen ray work. 

Nurses' Electrical Course, in- 
cluding subjects Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 
8, 9, 10, and 11. This Course will 
increase the efficiency and earning 
capacity of any nurse. 

Note— Arithmetic is included in this Course. 
The student, however, may omit this subject 
by passing our examination. The Arithmetic 
Instruction Papers are not included in the 
Bound Volumes. 

Dental Electrotherapeutic 
Course, including subjects Nos. 1, 2, 

3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 18. This Course is 
intended for dentists and dental stu- 
dents. 

Note — The five Bound Volumes containing- the 
Complete Electrotherapeutic Course are fur- 
nished to each student enrolling for any of its 
extracted Courses. 

435 



Time Required to Finish the Complete 
Electrotherapeutic Course, or One 
of Its Extracted Courses 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Complete Electro- 
therapeutic Course in less than 1 year 
and some finish one of its extracted 
Courses in less than 6 months. The 
average student requires a little more 
time. 

Remarks 

The attractiveness of our electro- 
therapeutic proposition is increased a 
thousandfold. Physicians, surgeons, 
nurses, dentists, and medical students 
may now secure the five Bound Volumes 
containing our Complete Electro- 
therapeutic Course, for about a 
third the regular price we charge for 
furnishing a student with pamphlet 
Instruction Papers, Bound Volumes, 
and criticism and correction of his 
written recitations. Lack of time to 
study systematically and recite to us 
need no longer keep our instruction 
from the hands of the thousands that 
want it for consultation. 



436 



Complete Commercial Law 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS. PAGES 

The Law in General 48 ~ 

The Law of Personal 

Rights 35 

The Law of Property 201 

The Law of Wills 21 

The Law of Contracts. . . . 254 
Examination Questions. . . 29. 
The Law of Commercial 

Paper 194 

The Law of Banks and 

Banking 110 

The Law of Partnership. . 135 
The Law of Corporations 125 
The Law of Building Asso- 
ciations 50 

The Law of Beneficial As- 
sociations 23 

Examination Questions .. . 37 

The Law of Agency 67 

The Law of Master and 

Servant 30 

The Law of Bailments. ... 92 
The Law of Landlord and 

Tenant 70 

The Law of Mechanics 

Liens 28 

The Law of Guaranty and 

Suretyship 32 

The Law of Executors and 

Administrators 80 

The Law of Debtor and 

Creditor 128 

The Law of Business and 

Commerce 22 

The Law of Trusts 50 

Examination Questions. . . 41 

437 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

22 The Law of Husband and 

Wife 61 

23 The Law of Divorce 45 

24 The Law of Parent and 

Child 26 

25 The Law of Guardian and 

Ward 20 

26 The Law of Notaries Pub- 

lic 19 

27 The Law of Justices of the 

Peace ^^ 

28 The Law of Patents, Copy- 

right, and Trade Marks 97 

29 The Law of Insurance. ... 156 

30 The Law of Mines and 

Mining 85 

Examination Questions .. . 38 

Appendix 512' 5th Bd. Vol. 

Forms 421 6th Bd. Vol. 

Pages 3,417 

Instruction Papers, 61 
Bound Volumes, 6 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They embrace every subject of 
importance in commercial law in the 
United States and Canada. 

b. They treat thoroughly of the 
principles and rules that govern busi- 
ness relations. 

c. They make clear the many legal 
technicalities that ordinarily are con- 
fusing. 

d. They make easy to understand 
every principle and application they 
present. 

e. They are not only instructive, 
but fascinating. They are so concisely 
written, and contain so much pertinent 
information, no effort is required to 
study them. Once the student begins 
any subject, he is reluctant to lay down 
the Instruction Paper before he has 
mastered its contents. 



438 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Presidents; Secretaries; Treasur- 
ers; Directors; and all Corporation 
Officials. 

b. Partners; Managers; Superinten- 
dents; Accountants; Bookkeepers. 

c. Bankers; Bank Officers; Bank 
Clerks. ■ 

d. Insurance Officials and Agents. 

e. Merchants; Clerks. 

/. Justices of the Peace; Magis- 
trates; Aldermen. 

g. Notaries Public. 

7i. Law Students. 

i. Administrators ; Guardians ; Trus- 
tees. 

/. Real-Estate Agents. 

k. Contractors and Builders. 

/. Mechanics. 

m. Farmers. 

n. Patentees. 

o. Credit Men. 

p. Collectors. 

q. Conveyancers. 

r. Municipal Employes. 

s. Stenographers. 

Note — There is really no class of persons to 
whom a knowledge of Commercial Law would not 
be worth much more than the cost of our Course. 

We have arranged a number of special Courses 
in commercial law for those persons wanting 
to study only that branch pertaining solely 
to their business. The Courses are as follows, 
each name indicating the class to which the 
Course is suited: the Law for Corporation 
Managers, etc., Course; the Law for Business 
Men Course; the Law for Clerks Course; the 
Law for Stenographers Course; the Law for 
Bookkeepers Course; the Law for Secre- 
taries Course; the Law for Contractors and 
Builders Course; the Law for Credit Men 
Course; the Law for Collectors Course; the 
Law for Real-Estate Agents Course; the 
Law for Conveyancers Course; the Law for 

439 



Insurance Agents Course; the Law for 
Justices of the Peace Course; the Law for 
Magistrates Course; the Law for Aldermen 
Course; the Law for Notaries Public Course; 
the Law for Town Clerks Course; and the 
Law for Municipal Employes Course. 

The six Bound Volumes containing the Com- 
plete Commercial Law Course are furnished 
to each student of any of these Special Courses. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Mere opinion as to what ought 
to be right or wrong in the eyes of the 
law, is an unsafe guide in any transac- 
tion. Our Course explains what the 
law is, and gives explicit directions for 
avoiding the many legal oversights and 
omissions to which all classes of people 
are liable. 

b. The law is a statement of cus- 
toms, constitutional and legislative 
enactments, and court decisions. It 
is easy to fail to comply with some of 
the many requirements or to do some 
forbidden thing unwittingly. No per- 
son, however desirous of doing right, 
can safely conduct his own affairs or 
those of another unless he has positive 
knowledge of the principles taught in 
our Course. 

c. Our Course will increase the relia- 
bility of any employe, and put him in 
a position to meet the demand of em- 
ployers for men that can be implicitly 
trusted with important duties. 

d. Any agent may learn from our 
Course his duties to his principal; his 
rights in his relations with his principal 
and a third party; to what extent he 
can bind his principal by his acts; and 
the extent to which he becomes per- 
sonally liable for his acts. 

440 



e. Our Course is the most thorough, 
clear, and concise work ever prepared 
on commercial law. It is written in 
an easy and entertaining style, and 
may be readily understood by any 
reader of average intelligence. 

/. Every business man for his own 
protection should know the law of 
commercial transactions. Without this 
knowledge he may make mistakes that 
it will take years of hard work to recover 
from. Our instruction is his best safe- 
guard. Our ■ Complete Commercial 
Law Course will equip the student 
to conduct his business better; it offers 
the opportunity, to get a good knowl- 
edge of the well-established rules and 
principles of law governing everyday 
business transactions. We give the 
student a clear understanding of the 
facts and processes of ordinary business 
and equip him Math information indis- 
pensable to him in everyday business 
life. 

How Our Student Gains a Knowledge of 
the Laws of the Different States 

Each student is furnished with an' 
Appendix of 512 pages, embracing the 
legislative enactments bearing on the 
subjects of the Course in various states 
and jurisdictions. 

Remarks 

The Course is replete with reference 
to decisions of the Canadian Courts. 
The abbreviations U. C. C. P., U. C. 
Ch., and U. C. Q. B. (which mean Upper 
Canada Common Pleas Reports, Upper 
Canada Chancery Reports, and Upper 

441 



Canada Queen Bench Reports, appear 
at the bottom of many pages of our 
Instruction Papers, showing that^ we 
have been careful to state the decided 
law of Canada on the various subjects 
we treat of. 

No complete course on any subject 
of the law could be written without 
reference to the principles and rules of 
law as they pertain in England and 
Canada. In fact, the law as it exists 
in the United States and Canada today 
had its first existence in England. 

If a person has no time for systematic 
lesson study and therefore does not 
care to enroll for our Course of instruc- 
tion, though wanting the Bound Vol- 
umes, he may secure them for about a 
third of the price of the Course. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives to 
it. Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in about 
IJ years. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They embrace the Instruction 
Papers of the Course ; a Book of Forms 
showing the best modem forms for prac- 
tical use ; and an Appendix containing 
the legislative enactments of various 
states and jurisdictions in reference to 

442 



the subjects treated in the Course. Our 
Bound Volumes are written in an 
entertaining style and are easily under- 
stood by the reader of average intelli- 
gence. They give the student a clear 
knowledge of commercial law — knowl- 
edge that will broaden immeasureably 
his view of business affairs and enable 
him to avoid costly legal troubles and 
mistakes. 

b. They contain all the subjects 
properly included in a complete com- 
mercial law course. For reference pur- 
poses they are invaluable. The refer- 
ences to various authorities, reports, 
and statutes are given in the form of 
numbered foot-notes under the state- 
ments they are used to illustrate. 
These citations are numerous and render 
it a simple matter to find plenty of 
decisions, etc. 

c. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed according to 
all the initial letters under which it is 
likely to be sought. 



443 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



' Complete Advertising Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Advertisement Construc- 

tion 25 

2 Principles of Display 20 

3 Illustrations in Newspaper 

Ads 27 

4 Engraving Processes .... 26 

5 Ads for Various Busi- 

nesses 31 

6 Cyclopedia of Retail Ads . . 98 

7 Printing-House Methods . . 154 
Examination Questions .. . 14 

8 Copy Preparation and 

Proof Reading 33 

9 Supplementary Advertis- 

ing 35 

10 Retail Advertising Man- 

agement 37 

1 1 Conducting an Advertising 

Office 26 

12 Department-Store Adver- 

tising 63 

13 Department-Store Adver- 

tising Management 76 

14 Ad Illustration 136 

Examination Questions .. . 14 

Pages 815 

Illustrations, 402 

Instruction Papers, 13 

Bound Volumes, 2 
Note — No recitations are asked for in sub- 
ject 14; this subject is added to the Course for 
reference purposes only. 

The student of our Complete Advertising 
Course is furnished with an I. C. S. Ad- Writers' 
Type Gauge and an I. C.S. Ad-Writers' Copy 
Table together with a sufficient number of I. C. S. 
Ad- Writers' Charts to finish the Course. We do 
not furnish a separate type book, as specimen 
pages of leading type faces are included in the 
Instruction Papers. 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They are the most practical, 
thorough, and concise ever prepared 
on ad writing. 

444 



b. They give the student a thorough 
Ij knowledge of the principles of ad wri- 
ting, and will enable him to write 
effective ads for any product or any 

I business. 

c. They teach the student to dis- 
I cover quickly the selling points of an 
[ article and present them in the most 
j effective manner. 

d. They require the student to write 
and lay out original ads. 

e. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of typographical and illus- 
trative display. 

/. They give the student all the 
knowledge of engraving and printing 
the ad writer needs. 

g. They give the student all the 
information necessary to enable him to 
prepare copy, read proof, and conduct 
his business with the printer. 

h. They give instruction in the prep- 
aration of miscellaneous retail adver- 
tising matter, in retail advertising 
management, and in department-store 
advertising. 

i. They are replete with illustrations . 

y. They enable the student to write 
practical, effective ads almost as soon 
as he begins to study. 

k. They do not teach drawing; but 
they teach what kind of illustrations 
are suitable for newspaper and maga- 
zine ads, and how to display illustra- 
tions in ads to the best advantage. 

/. They do not include instruction 
in grammar nor rhetoric; they teach 
only what applies directly to adver- 
tising, and that is treated completely 
and thoroughly. 

445 



m. They are free from problems and 
mathematical work — excepting a few 
simple calculations as to the amount of 
type that will go into a given space, etc. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Clerks. 
h. Salesmen. 

c. Bookkeepers. 

d. Young Men wanting to learn ad 
writing. 

e. Young Women desiring to become 
ad writers. 

/. Retail Merchants. 

g. Advertising Solicitors. 

h. Printers. 

i. Ad Writers. 

j. Students and Graduates of ordi- 
nary ad- writing schools. 

k. Students and Graduates of high 
schools and business colleges. 

/. Show-Card Writers and Window 
Trimmers. 

m. Persons wanting to increase their 
salaries by adding a knowledge of ad 
writing to their present qualifications. 

Note — So closely related are the subjects of 
advertising, show-card writing, window trim- 
ming, and mercantile decorating, that frequently 
a prospective student is found desiring a knowl- 
edge of all. Or, on the other hand, he may want 
to study only such a combination as he thinks 
he needs. To meet the demands of such a per- 
son we combine the Complete Advertising 
Course, the Advanced Show-Card Writing 
Course, and the Window Trimming and 
Mercantile Decoration Course; or the Com- 
plete Advertising Course and the Advanced 
Show-Card Writing Course; or the Complete 
Advertising Course and the Window Trim- 
ming and Mercantile Decoration Course; or 
the Advanced Show-Card Writing Course 
and the Window Trimming and Mercantile 
Decoration Course so as to give him exactly 
the knowledge he wants. The first Instruction 

446 



Papers of each division of these Courses are 
sent to the student as soon as he enrolls, and he 
niay study one, two, or three divisions at once. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. This is the advertising age. In 
fact no business education is complete 
without a knowledge of advertising. 
For advertising purposes there is 
expended in the tjnited States over 
one hundred million dollars a year. 
Much of this is wastefully spent by 
people ignorant of how to write ads 
that will sell goods. Our Course will 
enable merchants to advertise with the 
greatest possible certainty of success. 
Through our Course any one possessing 
average intelligence and a fair knowl- 
edge of English can learn to write 
business-getting ads. Here is the oppor- 
tunity for ambitious persons to qualify 
for more interesting and better-paid 
work. 

b. A revolution has been made in 
advertising within the last few years. 
Advertising has become a profession. 
The ad writer of today must quickly 
see the selling features of his wares; 
moreover, he must know where, when, 
and how to advertise. 

c. In order for the ad writer to ana- 
lyze quickly any article of merchandise, 
find its selling points, and write and 
lay out an ad that will so present these 
selling points as to impel the reader to 
become a purchaser, he must have the 
information contained in our Course. 

d. Today the business man that 
does not advertise properly is sure to 
lose ground. And it is next to impos- 
sible to start in for oneself without 

447 



advertising. How important it is, 
then, that the knowledge contained in 
our Course should be had by every clerk 
or other employe expecting to conduct 
successfully a business of his own. 

e. Hundreds of young men and 
women that might be earning good pay 
as ad writers are practically wasting 
their time at uncongenial and unre- 
munerative work. Any one having 
ordinary intelligence and a common- 
school education can learn to write 
good advertisements. The ability to 
write catchy effective advertisements 
is the result of the right kind of training 
combined with practical experience. 
Our Course supplies the best training 
it is possible to secure, and the instruc- 
tion is so practical that the student 
can secure experience almost as soon as 
he begins to study. 

/. The increase of advertising matter 
within the last few years is simply 
astounding. New lines of business are 
advertising largely, and old lines are 
doubling their advertising. So great is 
the demand for advertisement writers, 
it is impossible to secure enough com- 
petent men to do the work. A student 
that studies our Course and is faithful 
in his work, can qualify in a few months 
to write good ads ; this means pleasanter 
work and more pay. 

g. Our Course is the only Course 
that provides for thorough criticism 
and correction of the student's work. 
A helpful personal letter is written to 
the student regarding each written reci- 
tation he sends to us. 

h. A unique feature of our Course 
is a comprehensive cyclopedia of retail 

448 



advertisements, headlines, and selling 
points. This will prove invaluable to 
the beginner in helping him form ideas 
of his own. 

i. Our Course includes more than 
twenty times as much practical infor- 
mation as any other advertising course. 

/. This Course contains the only 
adequate treatment of department- 
store advertising in existence. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
less than 7 months. The average 
student requires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers and Examination Questions 
of the Course. These Papers having 
successfully met the exacting require- 
ments of thousands of students, it is 
evident that the Bound Volumes treat 
of principles and applications of adver- 
tising with more thoroughness and con- 
ciseness than is possible in a work pre- 
pared on any other plan. They are in 
fact an epitome of common-sense appli- 
cation. For easy gradation; for con- 
ciseness; for intelligent adherence to 
the important features of their subjects; 

15 449 



and for practicability, they are un- 
equaled. From no other source can a 
student get so quickly so much money- 
earning knowledge. 

b. They are invaluable for reference 
purposes. They are better than an 
encyclopedia. They are devoted exclu- 
sively to the subject of advertising, and 
the details of that subject are explained 
with thoughtful care and a proper 
regard for the possible shortcomings of 
the reader. Every important item is 
indexed according to all the initial 
letters under which it is likely to be 
sought. Indeed, so carefully are all 
items classified and indexed, the student 
can find in a moment the answer to 
a practical question it might otherwise 
take weeks to obtain. 

c. They are written in simple style, 
particular care having been taken to 
avoid unusual words. The information 
they contain is so set forth as to be 
easily understood — even by the man of 
little education. They begin with the 
simplest and most elementary prin- 
ciples and lead easily and quickly to 
the best theory and practice of the 
work. 



450 



Advanced Show-Card Writing 
Course 



I.IST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Show-Card Writing 77 

2 Show-Card Design and Ornament 52 

3 Letter Formation 35 

Pages 164 

Illustrations, 178 
Lettering Plates, 22 
Instruction Papers. 4 
Bound Volumes, 1 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They teach how to write attrac- 
tive and artistic show-cards, window 
signs, store banners, etc. 

b. They contain full instruction in 
freehand lettering, taking up the free- 
hand alphabets adapted to show-card 
writing and explaining in detail the 
formation of their different letters. 

c. They qualify the student for doing 
freehand brush work in water colors, 
shading, etc. 

d. They teach how to employ the 
various styles of letters to the best 
advantage. 

e. They are replete with illustrations. 

/. They embrace every subject prop- 
erly included in a show-card writing 
course. 

g. They are free from mathematical 
work. 

h. They are the most thorough, 
practical, and comprehensive ever pre- 
pared on show-card writing. 

i. They contain practical examples 
in design, ornament, and inscription 
arrangement. 

451 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Clerks in retail stores. 

h. Retail Merchants. 

c. Window Trimmers. 

d. Show-Card Writers. 

e. Letterers. 

/. Sign Painters. 

g. Salesmen. 

h. Bookkeepers. 

i. Floor Walkers. 

j. Retail-Store Managers. 

k. Ad Writers. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Show-cards are recognized as one 
of the best means of interesting and 
influencing the public to buy. No 
merchant can afford to be without 
them. Displayed directly in connec- 
tion with the goods to which they relate, 
well-written cards make a striking 
appeal to shoppers. Our Course will 
enable the student to write cards setting 
forth the merits of any merchandise in 
a clear and convincing manner. 

h. Clerks and other store employes 
can quickly make themselves more 
valuable to their employer by learning 
to write attractive and business-bring- 
ing show-cards. 

c. Our Course solves the problem for 
young men and women eager to better 
their condition. Opening the way to a 
comparatively new and uncrowded 
field, this instruction offers to young 
men a profitable profession, and to 
young women a clean and remunerative 
line of work that may be done at home. 

d. Show-card writing has risen to 
the dignity of a profession. Any person 

4.52 



possessing ordinary intelligence may at 
slight expense for studio equipment 
start in business for himself. Many 
merchants unable to employ a show- 
card writer constantly are glad to secure 
the occasional services of an expert 
when a contract can be made for a 
stated number of cards each week. 
By thus supplying several merchants, 
a competent person may build up a 
profitable business of his own. Our 
Course gives the student in a clear and 
concise manner the information neces- 
sary to his success. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Show-Card Writers' Outfit as soon as 
he has paid $10. A student not pre- 
pared to pay cash in advance or $10 
down, can study Show-Card Writing 
(the first Instruction Paper of his 
Course) until his payments amount to 
$10, when the Outfit will be furnished. 
The student pays express charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 
6 months. The average student re- 
quires a little more time. 



453 



Window Trimming and Mer- 
cantile Decoration 
Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Backgrounds _ 173 

Examination Questions ... 23 

2 Dress Goods 83 

3 White Goods 13 

4 Clothing 26 

Examination Questions .. . 16 

5 Foot, Hand, and Head 

Covering 

6 Men and Women's Fur- 

nishings 

7 Handkerchiefs 

8 Linens 

9 House Furnishings 

Examination Questions. . . 

10 Miscellaneous Merchandise 

11 Decorations 

12 Collection of Artistic Dis- 

plays 

13 Illumination and Motion 

in Displays 

14 Fixtures and Useful Infor- 

mation 

15 Ideas for Window Deco- 

rations 

Examination Questions. . . 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



3d Bound 
Volume 



4th Bound 
Volume 



18 

37. 

35 f 

15 

30 

17. 

26 

22 



28 
11 J 



Pages 645 

Illustrations. 1,510 

Instruction Papers, 42 

Bound Volumes, 4 
Note — Students of this Course are furnished 
with 1 year's subscription to the "Merchants 
Record and Show Window." This is the most 
up-to-date periodical published in the interests 
of window trimmino-, and is the official organ of 
the National Association of Window Trimmers 
of America. The subscriptions of students 
enrolling before the twentieth of the current 
month will begin with the following month's 
issue. The subscriptions of students enrolling 
after the twentieth of the month will begin with 
the issue of the second month following. 



454 



Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They will enable any student of 
average intelligence to qualify as an 
expert window trimmer and store 
decorator with any line of merchandise. 

b . They give the student full instruc- 
tion in window trimming and store dec- 
orating. 

c. They contain the fullest and most 
explicit directions for getting the best 
color effects. 

d. They are the most thorough, . 
practical, and complete ever prepared 
on mercantile decoration. 

e. They give the student a thorough 
knowledge of the various materials suit- 
able for decorative and display purposes. 

/. They teach the student the vari- 
ous methods of displaying merchandise. 

g. They are replete with suggestive 
ideas for window and store decoration. 

h. They are free from mathematical 
work. 

i. They include instruction in deco- 
rations for special occasions, as outside 
store decorations, floats, booths, etc. 

/. They require the student to 
analyze and describe in his own words 
the various displays shown. 

k. They teach the student stencil 
and fresco work. 

/. They give instruction in the use 
of electricity for illumination in displays. 
They treat of motion in displays — 
showing how attractiveness may be 
enhanced by means of moving objects. 

m. The}^ are replete with the best 
illustrations ever made of mercantile 
decorations. 

455 



n. They require the student to send 
photographs of his best work for inspec- 
tion and criticism. 

0. They require the student to state 
the time consumed in performing the 
various operations illustrated. 

p. They are so clear that much of 
the information they contain is readily 
understood from the many illustrated 
demonstrations; these show in detail 
the successive steps in the formation of 
a display. The illustrations are so 
clear that reference to the text is often 
almost unnecessary. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Clerks. 

h. Salesmen. 

c. Retail-Store Managers. 

d. Floor Walkers. 

e. Bookkeepers. 

/. Young Men that desire to learn 
window trimming. 

g. Retail Merchants that do their 
own trimming. 

h. Students and Graduates of high 
schools and business colleges. 

i. Show-Card Writers. 

j. Ad Writers. 

k. Window Trimmers. 

1. Persons that sell merchandise at 
retail, or that desire to become such 
salesmen. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. Striking window displays and 
artistic store decorations make an 
effective appeal to the shopping public. 
Every up-to-date business man knows 
the importance of having his store 

456 



present an attractive appearance. This 
is the merchant's method of displaying 
goods and securing trade. Many mer- 
chants that cannot afford to employ 
a professional trimmer appreciate the 
business-bringing value of strong dis- 
plays, and have good ideas as to how 
the work should be done; but through 
lack of training they are unable to put 
their ideas to practical use. Our Course 
will enable merchants either to do or 
to direct their own trimming. Through 
our instruction any person of ordinary 
ability and average good taste can 
qualify as a first-class trimmer. 

b. Window trimming is now a 
recognized profession, and a profitable 
one. The expert is in constant demand 
and receives good pay for his services. 

c. The clerk or salesman that can 
create strong, attractive, business-bring- 
ing displays has a knowledge that 
insures higher wages as a clerk and a 
good chance of advancement to the 
more important and better-paid posi- 
tion of trimmer. 

d. Our Course is a boon to the 
young man about to engage in the mer- 
cantile business for himself. Through 
our instruction he can acquire informa- 
tion that will prove a potent factor in 
his commercial success. 

e. The trimmer will find our Course 
of great value as a reference work and 
a source of inspiration in the production 
of original effects. It embraces the 
latest ideas of the art. Our instruction 
will give the student engaged in the 
practice of mercantile decorating a 
new and enlarged working knowledge 

457 



that will enable him to originate 
striking, business-creating displays. 

/. The business man is quick to 
perceive the worth of employes that 
take an active interest in his affairs, 
and he is glad to show his appreciation 
by advancing those that are striving to 
help him. How can a clerk or salesman 
better and quicker bring himself to his 
employer's notice than by an attractive 
arrangement of the merchandise at his 
counter ? 

g. A special and remarkably strong 
feature of this Course is a descriptive 
list of the most successful displays of 
the past 10 years as worked out by 
the ablest trimmers. This will be of 
inestimable value to the beginner in 
assisting him in forming ideas and con- 
ceptions of his own. It is really an 
inexhaustible mine of ideas and sugges- 
tions for display composition. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 6 
months. The average student requires 
a little more time. 

Why the Bound Voiumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers and Examination Questions of 
the Course. They are the most valuable 

458 



work ever prepared, on mercantile 
decorating. They treat the subject 
fully and in detail. They are the only 
volumes in existence suitable for home 
study. Some students have enrolled 
simply to secure these Bound Volumes, 
and have achieved success through the 
study of them alone, without sub- 
mitting recitations to us. 

b. They are fully indexed. Every 
important item is indexed with all 
initial letters under which it is likely 
to be sought. 

c. They contain the latest and best 
ideas on window trimming and store 
decoration. For reference purposes 
their value is almost unlimited. No- 
where else can the student find such 
practical, helpful answers to the many 
different questions that come up in his 
daily practice. The student possessing 
them has a complete up-to-date work 
unexcelled for clearness and concise- 
ness, and containing exactly the infor- 
mation necessary to his success. 



459 



Complete Lettering and Sign 
Painting Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Elements of Lettering 99 1 

2 Lettering and Sign Painting 68 I 1st Bound 

3 The Formation of Letters . 146 | Volume 

Examination Questions ... 4 J 

4 Sign and Banner Making. . . SSI 

5 Practical Design and Oma- I 2d Bound 

ment 161 ( Volume 

Examination Questions ... 4 J 

Pages 565 

Illustrations, 379 
Instruction Papers, 5 
Lettering Plates, 34 
Bound Volumes, 2 

Elements of Lettering begins with the 
history of the alphabet; gives rules for 
punctuation; includes instruction in 
lettering, explaining how to space, 
shade, condense, elongate, telescope, 
and interlace letters; treats of orna- 
mental forms of letters ; tells how to get 
artistic effects in ribbon, panel, and 
inscription designs ; takes up the making 
of stencil patterns; and teaches the use 
of drawing instruments. 

Lettering and Sign Painting treats of 
the tools and materials used in sign 
painting; tells how to prepare surfaces 
for various kinds of painting and letter- 
ing; shows how to gild on glass, wood, 
and metal; contains instruction in 
embossing; and explains the construc- 
tion of relief letters, and their application 
to various styles of signs. 

The Formation of Letters contains 
thirty-four Lettering Plates and gives 
detailed instruction for drawing them: 
there are thirty — each containing an 
alphabet exactly suited to the sign 

460 



painter's needs; and the remaining four 
are devoted to color work, consisting of 
plain and fancy shading, inscription 
designing in color, monograms, indexes, 
and bands. This instruction is the 
best ever prepared on lettering, and is 
invaluable to the person having letter- 
ing to do; it will not only enable the 
student to lay out all the principal 
styles of English alphabets, but will 
qualify him to form correctly German, 
Greek, and Hebrew letters. 

Sign and Banner Making describes the 
manufacture of signs; tells about carv- 
ing, mirror silvering, white-acid process, 
glass chipping, frosted window panels, 
etching on gold leaf, and many other 
subjects the up-to-date sign painter 
must have a knowledge of; treats of 
advertising signs; explains how to 
make banners; and gives valuable 
information about charges for signs and 
lettering. This instruction is thor- 
oughly practical and fully prepares the 
student to handle successfully and 
profitably all work of this character. 
It enables him to engage in business 
without having had experience in a 
sign-painting establishment. 

Practical Design and Ornament con- 
tains a large collection of photographs 
of original and artistic signs. These 
photographs represent the best work of 
leading sign painters and are of almost 
infinite value to the student in suggest- 
ing ideas for new and original designs. 
A careful study of these illustrations 
will give the student a good under- 
standing of many practical points 
about the location of a sign on and the 

461 



best method of attaching it to a build- 
ing. The subject of ornament is given 
special attention, and the character and 
composition of ornaments used in gen- 
eral practice are explained. This in- 
struction fills a long-felt want and will 
be welcomeji by every letterer and sign 
painter desiring to take up this pleasant 
and profitable branch of the business. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Sign Painters. 

b. Letterers. 

c. Lithographers. 

d. Designers. 

e. Engravers. 

/. Workmen and Apprentices in 
sign-painting shops. 

g. Carriage Painters. 

h. House Painters. 

i. Car Painters. 

y. Architects. 

k. Interior Decorators. 

/. Fresco Painters. 

m. Engrossers. 

n. Stained-Glass Window Designers. 

o. Persons wishing to do correct 
lettering. 

Note — Persons intending to write show-cards 
sho^lld enroll for the Advanced Show-Card 
Writing Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The sign painter that has learned 
his trade in the shop is frequently hin- 
dered by a lack of knowledge — knowl- 
edge he cannot get through experience 
alone, but that he must have before 
he can get a high salary. To such a 
man our instruction offers the opportu- 
nity to make up for shortcomings, 

462 



broaden his scope, and acquire valuable 
information not to be had by the appren- 
tice. Our Course contains all the sub- 
jects properly included in a lettering 
and sign-painting course, and gives 
much reliable information on kindred 
subjects. It teaches the student to 
design artistic and effective signs. It 
gives him a thorough knowledge of 
lettering, explaining the technical details 
of letter formation and leading him pro- 
gressively from the plain block letter 
to the more elaborate ornamental 
styles. It will qualify the student as a 
good letterer and sign painter; fit the 
apprentice to earn journeyman's wages 
much sooner than if he depended on 
shop practice alone; and enable the 
journeyman to do better work and get 
better pay. 

b. Never had the sign painter 
greater opportunities than at present; 
never was he better paid. Millions of 
dollars are spent for signs. Sign paint- 
ing is a business easily and quickly 
learned, and one that requires little 
capital. In nearly every city there is 
an opportunity for a competent sign 
painter to make money. B}^ submit- 
ting appropriate designs to merchants, 
he can get enough orders to keep him 
busy and may soon ' build up a well- 
paying business. 

c. No one is surer of employment at 
good wages than the professional let- 
terer. The man able to do plain letter- 
ing rapidly and well gets from $15 to 
$25 a week; and the man competent to 
design artistic signs can earn twice 
that amount. 

463 



d. The student ambitious to become 
a sign painter must understand the 
mixing of colors, the making of sizes 
for gilding, and the applying of both 
gold leaf and silver leaf. Through our 
Course, the student is given a thorough 
knowledge of the handling of colors, 
the preparing of both quick and slow 
sizes, and the laying of both gold leaf 
and silver leaf. 

e. In submitting estimates, the sign 
painter is frequently called on to fur- 
nish a design showing how the work will 
look when finished. To make this 
design, he must know how to use draw- 
ing instruments. Our Course teaches 
how to use drawing instruments and 
give them proper care; tells how to 
describe ellipses; and gives instruction 
in mechanical lettering. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Complete Lettering and Sign Painting 
Outfit as soon as he has paid $10. The 
student pays express charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 



464 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Lettering Plates, and Examina- 
tion Questions of the Course, and give 
a full and clear treatment of lettering 
and sign painting. 

b. They are, because of the great 
practicability of our instruction, invalu- 
able for reference purposes. The holder 
of these Bound Volumes can consult 
them when a difficulty arises and find 
in a moment information it might 
otherwise take hours to find. Indeed, 
much of the information about sign and 
banner making and practical design and 
ornament has never before been pub- 
lished. The Bound Volumes are fully 
indexed. Every important item is 
indexed with all the initial letters under 
which it is likely to be sought. 

c. They contain the methods and 
processes used by the leading sign 
painters, and show many alphabets 
exactly suited to the sign painter's 
needs. These alphabets are arranged 
progressively, leading the student from 
the plain and simple styles of lettering 
to the most advanced and ornamental. 
Alphabets obsolete and not in common 
use have been omitted, our constant 
aim being to give the student only the 
best. Even though he may never 
recite to us, the student can study the 
Bound Volumes in spare time at home 
and, with practice, become a good 
letterer and sign painter. 

465 



International Library of 
Technology 

The International Library of 
Technology is the advanced Instruc- 
tion Papers of the I. C. S. Courses, 
systematically arranged and bound 
into eighty-one handsome three-quarter 
morocco volumes. 

Why the Library Was Prepared 

For many years there has been urgent 
need of a thorough, clear, and concise 
reference work on the up-to-date 
methods of the trades and the engineer- 
ing professions — a work to which the 
president, the manager, or the foreman 
could turn for explanation of the facts, 
principles, and processes, or quick solu- 
tion of the problems, pertaining to his 
work. 

Our success in teaching by mail has 
established us as the fountain head of 
industrial science; no other school nor 
publisher has in hand such a fund of 
technical knowledge; no other institu- 
tion has such facilities for dissemina- 
tion. 

The Courses of the International Cor- 
respondence Schools are generally recog- 
nized as the best in the world for home 
study, and prominent engineers, officials 
of industrial establishments, and educa- 
tional institutions have made persistent 
requests for our Instruction, Papers, 
permanently bound, for reference pur- 
poses. And thousands of our students 
— ambitious to read up on technical 
subjects not treated in their Courses — 
have made similar requests. From the 

466 



beginning those familiar with our work 
have insisted that our advanced Instruc- 
tion Papers, if united in proper order, 
carefully indexed, and substantially 
bound, would make the most useful 
reference work ever known. 

By Whom the Library Was Compiled 

The Faculty of the International 
Correspondence Schools, assisted by 
many of the foremost engineers, 
mechanics, and chemists of the United 
States. 

The Library Not a Substitute for a Course 
of Instruction 

As the Library is intended for refer- 
ence only, all elementary mathematics 
and mechanics, examination questions, 
and keys are omitted. The entire 
Library would fail to answer the pur- 
pose of even one of our regular Courses 
of instruction. 

Persons That Should Subscribe for the 
Library 

a. Faculty Officers and Instructors 
in universities, colleges, scientific schools, 
etc. 

h. Principles and Teachers in high 
schools and academies. 

c. Presidents, Secretaries, Treasur- 
ers, Directors, and all Corporation 
Officials. 

d. Electrical Engineers, Mechanical 
Engineers, and all Professional Men in 
any way associated with the engineer- 
ing professions. 

e. Patent Attorneys. 
/. Attorneys-at-Law. 

467 



Note — Many legal controversies bearing on 
mechanics, electricity, etc., are of so technical a 
character, an attorney with our Library at hand 
for consultation may often win cases that would 
otherwise be lost by reason of his ignorance of 
the principles, facts, and processes involved. 

g. I. C. S. students desirous of ac- 
quiring technical information on sub- 
jects not in their Courses. 

Why Persons Should Subscribe for the 
Library 

a. It is an epitome of industrial 
economy. 

b. It is the most practical, thorough, 
and concise Library on industrial science 

— written by men of long experience at 
their work, and edited by a corps of 
expert technical writers. 

c. It is the best-illustrated Library 
ever published — replete with views, 
plans, sections, and elevations of the 
latest machinery and methods, executed 
by the best corps of illustrators in the 
country. 

d. It is the best-indexed Library ever 
printed — each subject being indexed 
with all the letters under which it is 
liable to be sought. 

e. It is prepared especially for busy 
men — being written for home study 
without the aid of a present teacher or 
additional reference books. 

/. It is a systematic array of princi- 
ples, a judicious analysis of up-to-date 
processes, and a sensible explanation of 
how to apply these principles and proc- 
esses; the treatment is simple and clear, 
and the text is readily understood. It 
is the most rational reference work ever 
prepared on the trades and the engineer- 
ing professions. 

468 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Sheet-Metal Pattern Drafting 
Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 269 | 

2 Instrumental Drawing 15 1st Bound 

3 Geometrical Drawing 5o > Volume 

Examination Questions 21 

Keys 31 

4 Practical Projection 98 

5 Development of Surfaces. . 65 

6 Practical Pattern Prob- 

lems 294 

7 Architectural Proportion. . 91 

8 Development of Moldings. . 81 
Skylights 25 J 

Pages 1,106 

Illustrations, 693 
Instruction Papers, 23 
Drawing Plates, 21 
Bound Volumes, 2 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 

1 tion Papers 

] . a. They are illustrated fully and in 

[the greatest detail. 

h. They explain the construction of 

i skylights and give accurate develop- 

iments for skylight patterns. 

j c. They fully explain miters. 

I d. They give the student full instruc- 

I tion in the proportionment of classic 

■orders — such as the Tuscan, the Doric, 
the Ionic, etc. — enabling him to_ give 
the proper proportions to any particular 
design he may be called on to construct. 

I e. They contain instruction in let- 
tering. 

/. They contain such tables of 
weights, measures, dimensions, etc. as 
are needed by the mechanic when he is 
called on to estimate the sizes and 
capacities of various articles. 
g. They explain blueprinting. 

469 



h. They show how the surfaces o 
solids are developed by the method o 
triangulation. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Apprentices, Helpers, Journey 
men, and Foremen in tin shops anc 
sheet-metal shops. ■ 

b. Pattemcutters. 

c. Tinsmiths. 

d. Coppersmiths. 

e. Metal Roofers. 

/. Metal- Work Designers; Alumi 
num. Workers. 

g. Sheet-Iron Workers; Boiler 
makers. 

h. Architectural Sheet-Metal Work- 
ers. 

i. Sheet-Metal Pattern Draftsmen 

/. Cornice Makers; Conveyer Ma- 
kers; Skylight Makers; Die Makers; al 
persons requiring a knowledge of the 
laying out and the cutting of patterns 
and the reading of working drawings 
for sheet-metal work. 

k. Furnace Setters. 

/. Managers and Superintendents 
requiring a knowledge of developing 
patterns for sheet-metal work. 

m. Young Men desirous of becoming 
sheet-metal pattern draftsmen. 

n. Persons desirous of acquiring a 
knowledge of some profession such as 
sheet-metal pattern drafting. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. ^ Sheet metal, because of its du- 
rability, lightness, and ease of applica- 
tion, is put to almost an infinite numbei 
of uses. The call for skilled sheet-metal 
workers far exceeds the supply, and 

470 



Competent men are always sure of 
bmployment at good wages. There are 
plenty of men to be had with only a 
practical knowledge of sheet-metal 
work; but the men wanted today to 
fill the responsible positions — to take 
full charge of the shops and the drafting 
tooms — are the men with a theoretical 
as well as a practical knowledge of their 
trade. Our Course offers the student 
the only feasible way of supplementmg 
his practical experience with a thorough 
Iknowledge of the theories and principles 
of sheet-metal pattern drafting; it is 
ifhe only Course that will fully quahfy 
'him for the highest and best-paid posi- 
tions of his profession. 

b. Our Course is in full accord with 
the latest and best practice of sheet- 
metal pattern drafting. It teaches 
how to lay out patterns for sheet-metal 
work in exactly the same manner as 
employed in actual practice. The stu- 
dent is thus fully prepared on entering a 
modern pattern drafting room to take 
up his work at once without waiting to 
learn new methods; this is a great 
advantage and argues well for his rapid 
advancement. 

c. Drawing is universally the lan- 
guage of the industrial world. Drawings 
tell the Avorking man exactly what is 
wanted, where verbal explanations fail. 
A knowledge of this language is almost 
imperative to the sheet-metal worker; 
he must thoroughly understand the 
reading of working drawings in order 
to do his work intelligently. Through 
our instruction the journeyman sheet- 
metal worker can not only learn to 

471 



read working drawings, but also to lay 
out and cut patterns for the most com- 
plicated forms of sheet-metal work; 
and this knowledge will bring him an 
increase in salary. 

d. The foreman or superintendent in i 
charge of the sheet-metal pattern shop 
needs the information contained in our 
Course in order to make careful and 
intelligent estimates of the cost of new 
work he is bidding for. Our Course is a 
clear and concise statement of essential ' 
facts _ concerning sheet-metal pattern 
drafting, and furnishes information indi- 
spensable to every one connected with 
the sheet-metal industry; it offers the 
apprentice a means of advancing to the 
journeyman's position; it will qualify 
the journeyman for taking charge of the 
shop;_ and it will give the foreman a 
practical working knowledge that will 
enable him to efficiently direct and 
improve the work of the shop. 

e.^ A strong feature of our Course is 
a list of sixty representative shop 
problems, with specific instruction for 
the making of the necessary drawings 
and developments. These practical 
pattern problems have no equal for 
reference purposes. They are grouped 
in such a manner that workingmen 
engaged in the different branches of 
the sheet-metal trade may readily find 
their particular problems under separ- 
ate headings. The first twenty prob- 
lems relate to patterns for tin and sheet- 
iron ware; the next twenty to patterns 
for pipe and conveyer work; while the 
remainder have special reference to pat- 
terns for the heavy sheet-metal work 

472 



made by the boilerinaker and the copper- 
smith. These problems, with their de- 
tailed explanations, are of inestimable 
value to all persons engaged in the shop 
or the drafting room of a sheet-metal- 
working establishment. The sheet-metal 
worker can consult them when a diffi- 
culty arises pertaining to the work of 
which they treat, and in a moment find 
the solution to a problem that might 
otherwise take hours to master. 

/. Our Course thoroughly explains 
the laying out of patterns for nearly all 
the various moldings and miters met 
with in the daily practice of the sheet- 
metal worker. This information is 
invaluable to cornice and skylight 
makers, for they are frequently called 
on to develop patterns for this particular 
kind of sheet-metal work. 

Drawing Outfit Furnished 

The Complete Drawing Outfit is sent 
to the student as soon as he has paid 
SIO. A student unable to pay cash in 
advance or $10 dow^n can study the 
mathematics of his Course until his 
payments amount to $10, when the 
Outfit will be furnished- The student 
pays express charges. ■ 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan of 
studying, and the time he gives. Some, 
studying 2 hours a day for 6 days a 
week, finish the Course in about 1 year. 
The average student requires a little 
more time. 

Note — The student may take up drawing in 
the Course as early as he pleases, without wait- 
ing till he has finished the mathematics. 

473 



Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer 

ence Library Will Be Useful to the 

Student if for Any Reason He Is 

Unable to Send Us Written 

Recitations 

a. They contain the Instructioi 
Papers, Examination Questions, Draw 
ing Plates, and Keys of the Course 
They are the most valuable work eve; 
prepared on sheet-metal pattern draft 
ing. They treat the subject fully anc 
in detail. They are the only volume; 
in existence suitable for home study 
Some students have enrolled simply 
to secure these Bound Volumes, anc 
have achieved success through the stud} 
of them alone, without submitting 
recitations to us. 

b. They are fully indexed. Ever} 
important item is indexed with al 
initial letters under which it is likel) 
to be sought. 

c. They contain the latest and bes1 
ideas on sheet-metal pattern work 
For reference purposes their value h 
almost unlimited. Nowhere else car; 
the student find such practical, helpfu; 
answers to the many different questions 
that come up in his daily practice; 
The student possessing these Bound 
Volumes has a complete up-to-date 
work unexcelled for clearness and con- 
ciseness, and containing exactly the 
information necessary to his success. 

d. They are a desirable addition tc( 
any sheet-metal worker's library. They 
contain the tried and proved facts and 
processes employed in the most success- 
ful shops of the country, arranged in aii 
orderly and systematic whole. 

474 



Ocean Navigation Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

Arithmetic 85 

Elementary Algebra 39 

Geometry and Trigonom- „^ , ^ ^ , 

etry 73 I. 1st Bound 

Logarithms'. ". 20 f Volume 

Spherical Trigonometry ... 46 

Examination Questions 23 

Keys 75 

Navigation 245 1 ^ , .^ , 

Nautical Tables 180 2d Bound 

Examination Questions. . . . 23 f Volume 

Keys 46 J 

Nautical Astronomy 307 ^ 

Ocean Meteorology ^^ I , t. 

Rules of the Road and I 3d Bound 

Safety Arrangements 56 j Volume 

Examination Questions 27 j 

Keys 54 J 

Pages 1,385 

Illustrations, 444 
Instruction Papers, 17 
Bound Volumes, 3 
Note — No attempt is made to teach Pilotage 
for any particular locality. 

t>eculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
I tion Papers 

a. They impart to the student the 
Imatheinatical knowledge he must have 
in order to deal inteUigently with the 
methods used to determine the position 
of a ship at sea. 

b. They describe the system of 
lines by which the latitude and the 
longitude of any place on the earth 
are determined. The relation of longi- 
tude to time is clearly explained. 

c. They contain a full and clear 
description of the mariner's compass, 
the lead, and the log. The Instruction 
Papers describe the several errors of the 

475 



compass and explain how each is com- 
pensated for by means of artificial 
magnets and soft-iron spheres. 

d. They explain the use of the com-i- 
mon log and the patent log in determin- 
ing the distance run by the ship, as well' 
as how to use the lead and the sounding 
machine in finding the position of the 
ship in foggy weather. 

e. They describe all the standard 
methods used to find, by bearings oi 
known objects, the position of a ship 
when in sight of land. 

/. They treat of the different meth^ 
odsof dead-reckoning, showing how the 
position of a ship is found by keeping 
a record of the courses and the dis- 
tances run by the ship when out of 
sight of land. 

g. They explain the use of traverse 
tables and give all the methods of sail- 
ings for calculating latitude and longi- 
tude without astronomical observa- 
tions. 

h. They describe the construction 
and the use of charts in plotting the 
position of a ship, and fully explain 
how the day's work is carried out in. 
actual practice at sea. 

i. ^ They treat of all the astronomical 
principles connected with determining 
■■ — by observations of the sun, moon, 
planets, or stars — the position of a ship 
at sea, and explain the construction and: 
the use of the sextant and the chronom- ■ 
eter. The manner of finding the error 
and the rate of the chronometer is given 
due consideration. 

/._ They explain the different kinds 
of time measurement, showing how each 
measurement is determined from the^ 



476 



movements of celestial bodies and tell- 
ing how to convert one kind of time into 
another. 

k. They describe all standard and 
approved methods of finding positions 
at sea by astronomical observations, 
and give full directions for proceeding 
with each separate sight. 

/. They contain numerous observa- 
tions worked out in detail, showing 
exactly the manner in which the work 
is done and how the various elements 
are taken from the Nautical Almanac 
and corrected. 

m. They contain a plate showing in 
their respective constellations all the 
principal stars used in navigation, 
together with instruction for locating 
them in the sky. 

n. They describe fully the manner 
of finding, by means of azimuths and , 
amplitudes, the deviation of the com- 
pass when in sight of land as well as 
when at sea. A diagram simplifying 
the operation and eliminating to a great 
extent the possibility of error is shown. 

o. They contain a clear and concise 
treatise on Sumner's method, a method 
the aspiring navigator of average ability 
has heretofore found extremely difficult 
to understand. The importance of 
Sumner's method in the practice of 
navigation cannot be overestimated; 
and the simple, yet thorough, manner 
in which this subject is explained in our 
Instruction Paper is frequently com- 
mended by our students. 

p. They give explanations of the 
causes of currents, winds, and storms, 
of their peculiarities, and of the neces- 
sary precautions to avoid the centers of 

477'! 



hurricanes, together with valuable in- 
formation regarding the best way to 
maneuver a vessel in heavy weather 
and to foretell the approach of a danger- 
ous storm by means of the barometer 
and other accompanying character- 
istic features. 

q. They contain a practical discus- 
sion on tides and on the use of tide 
tables. Methods for avoiding con- 
cealed dangers are given. 

r. They embrace the new interna- 
tional code of signals, showing by means 
of colored plates various samples of 
hoists. The revised rules of the road 
for preventing collisions at sea are 
included. 

5. They explain what should be 
done in case of a wreck or other disaster 
and give the duties of the shipmaster in 
such a case. Directions for restoring 
an apparently drowned person are 
included. And a list of questions is 
given — each accompanied with direc- 
tions for finding its answer — on subjects 
of which an applicant for a master's 
or an officer's certificate should have a 
knowledge. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Officers in the merchant marine 
desiring to increase their efficiency and 
become first-class navigators. 

h. Boatswains, Quartermasters, Car- 
penters, Apprentices, and Seamen of all 
grades on both sail and steam vessels 
of the merchant marine. 

c. Petty Officers, Warrant Officers, 
and any enlisted men in the Navy 
wishing to obtain higher ratings. 



d. Boatswains and Gunners in the 
Navy desiring to prepare for the 
examination to become Commissioned 
Officers. 

e. Members of the Naval Reserve 
and the State Naval Militia. 

/. Yachtsmen, Yacht Owners, and 
Members of yacht clubs. 

g. Pilots and Pilots' Apprentices, 
Sailing Masters. 

h. Persons intending to prepare 
for examinations to become nautical 
experts. 

i. Persons employed in the United 
States Lighthouse Service and the 
United States Life-Saving Service. 

j. Persons intending to enter the 
United States Steamboat-Inspection 
Service. 

k. Persons interested in shipping and 
nautical affairs in general. 

Note — The person wanting to take up the 
study of Navigation, but not so fully as treated 
in the Ocean Navigation Course, should enroll 
for the Coastwise Navigation Course. The 
Lake Navigation Course is intended for only 
those persons engaged in lake navigation; it does 
not include any methods of navigation by 
observations. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The ship owner is constantly 
on the lookout for the man competent 
to take charge of a new vessel or to 
fill a vacancy on a vessel already in 
commission. A high standard of effi- 
ciency, however, is required of a man 
holding the position of officer on an 
ocean-going passenger vessel. Above 
all things he must be a first-class 
navigator. He must be able not only 
to practice all standard methods of 
finding the position of his ship at sea, 

479 



but he must also understand the 
principles on which they are founded. 
Seamen attending nautical schools con- 
ducted by retired shipmasters, are 
usually crammed with rules and given 
only a smattering of navigation — just 
enough to squeeze through the license 
examination. Knowledge of so exact 
a science as navigation acquired in so 
happy-go-lucky a fashion does not fit 
a young man for the great responsi- 
bilities of commanding a modem 
vessel. Our Ocean Navigation Course 
gives him a thorough knowledge of 
both the theory and practice of naviga- 
tion. It contains not only directions 
of how to make observations and work 
out the methods of finding the position 
of a ship, but it explains the principles 
underlying each method, gives the 
student a clear insight into the art, 
and enables him to judge intelligently 
of the value and the trustworthiness 
of the results obtained by each method 
under different conditions and cir- 
cumstances. The Course will help him 
pass the examination required to 
obtain a license for mate or master 
of any class of vessel. And because 
of our unique method of teaching, the 
movements of the student do not in; 
the least interfere with his studies. 
As a matter of fact, the student study- 
ing at sea has an advantage through; 
being able to put into daily practice: 
the knowledge acquired from his Course. 
The benefit of this is evident. 

b. No other navy in the world 
offers to its enlisted men so great 
opportunities for advancement as does 
the United States Navy. Under the 

480 , 



Naval Personnel Act, twelve warrant 
officers may every year be appointed 
to the rank of Commissioned Officers. 
This means that a young man entering 
the service as an apprentice may rise- 
to the rank of Admiral ; he has the same 
chance as the graduate of the Naval 
Academy. But there is one thing a 
warrant officer must do before he can 
advance: he must pass an examination. 
To prepare for this examination he 
must study, and our instruction is 
particularly well suited to furnish him 
with the knowledge he is required to 
have for this purpose. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Chart- Work Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 6 
days a week, finish the Course in about 
10 months. The average student re- 
quires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They contain the Instruction 
Papers, Examination Questions, and 
Keys pi the Course, which were prepared 
especially to meet the requirements of 

^6 481 



the awaj^-from-school student. Instruc- 
tion for this purpose must be so force- 
fully written and illustrated that the 
student can take it into his rnind 
unaided. Our instruction anticipates 
every point likely to cause the student 
trouble. The utmost care has been 
taken to avoid ambiguous expressions. 
As the best way to make a state-, 
ment or description clear is to give 
a picture or diagram with it, illustra- 
tions have been used without stint. 
For self -instruction, our Bound Vol- 
umes are unequaled; they are clear, 
concise, and explain all the details 
lacking in the ordinary textbook on 
navigation; they are admittedly the 
clearest and most comprehensive books 
ever published on ocean navigation, 
and have received the most unquaHfied 
and hearty indorsement of officers 
both in the navy and in the merchant 
marine. 

b. They are intensly practical and 
have been so written as to be easil}; 
understood by the man of limited 
education. The general aim has beer 
to impart the information in such s 
manner that it can be readily put tc 
practical use. 

c. They possess almost unlimited 
value as reference books. They are re- 
plete with illustrative examples workec 
out in detail, showing exactly _ ho^\ 
the different observations are utilized 
in actual practice at sea. No_ refer^ 
ence library on nautical subjects is com- 
plete without these volumes. Ever}- 
important item is indexed with all the 
initial letters under which it is likeb 
to be sought. 



482 



Coastwise Navigation Course 



LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGEi 

Arithmetic 89 

Elements of Navigation . . 47 

Variation and Deviation. . 39 

Elements of Geometry ... 26 

Chart, Lead, and Log 46 

Piloting 43 

Examination Questions. . . 25 

Keys 49 J 

Dead Reckoning 39" 

Latitude by Observation. 42 

Longitude by Observation 40 

Amplitude and Azimuth . . 42 
Code Signals and Rules of 

the Road 37 

Nautical Tables 143 

Examination Ouestions. . . 21 

Keys 30 



1st Bound 
Volume 



2d Bound 
Volume 



Pages 758 

Illustrations, 225 
Instruction Papers, 12 
Bound Volumes, 2 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They do not contain any instruc- 
tion in algebra nor trigonometry. Just 
enough mathematics is included to 
lenable the student to understand and 
use intelligently all the approved 
methods of navigation practiced on 
the larger coastwise vessels. 

b. They treat fully of the errors 
and adjustments of the mariner's com- 
pass. 

c. They describe the lead, the log, 
and the sounding machine, and tell 
how to use them. 

d. They describe and illustrate the 
construction of the polyconic chart 
and the Mercatorial chart, and explain 
all matters pertaining to chart work, 
including the plotting of courses and 

483 



positions. The subject of correcting 
one course into another is fully ex- 
plained and numerous worked-out ex- 
amples are given. Explicit instruction 
is given in the important subject of 
proper piloting. 

e. They take up all the methods of 
navigation by dead reckoning, showing 
by many worked-out examples exactly 
how the work is done in practice. 

/. They give exact directions for 
determining, by astronomical observa- 
tions of the sun, the position of a ship 
at sea. Numerous sights of the sun 
for both latitude and longitude are 
worked out in detail. The sextant is 
clearly described and the manner of 
using it fully explained. 

g. They deal with amplitude and 
azimuth observations for finding at sea 
the errors of the compass. This 
instruction is especially valuable to 
the student, for it describes clearly the 
construction and the use of all azimuth 
instruments now in use, including the 
pelorus. 

h. They tell about fuel consumption, 
propulsion, and the speed of vessels, 
and put the student in possession of 
much useful information regarding the 
behavior of vessels due to the effects 
of the screw propeller and the rudder. 

i. They explain and illustrate the 
new international code of signals, and 
give the pilot rules governing the move- 
ments of vessels to prevent coUisions. 
y. They contain timely advice on 
how to proceed in case of shipwreck, 
giving directions for obtaining the best 
results from the efforts of the life- 
saving service on shore. 



484 



Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Masters and Mates of coastwise 
sailing vessels wishing to become first- 
class navigators. 

b. Officers of steam vessels engaged 
in coastwise navigation ' desiring to 
obtain a license of a higher grade. 

c. Quartermasters and Deck Hands 
on coastwise vessels wanting to secure 
an officer's license. 

d. Captains of harbor tugs, ocean 
tugs, and seagoing barges. 

e. Men employed on all kinds of 
fishing vessels and oyster boats. 

/. Owners of steam launches and 
yachts wanting to navigate their own 
craft. 

g. Employes of the United States 
Lighthouse Service . and the United 
States Life-Saving Service. 

h. Employes in nautical warehouses, 
in shipping offices, and in the offices of 
owners and agents of all classes of 
vessels. 

i. Persons desirous of getting a 
good insight into up-to-date methods 
and practices of navigation, but not 
caring to take up the study of the 
Ocean Navigation Course. 

Note — The Coastwise Navigation Course 
was prepared especially for men and officers 
engaged on coastwise vessels— both sail vessels 
and steam vessels— on the Pacific as well as the 
Atlantic seaboards, and for those desiring to get 
a thorough working knowledge of navigation in 
the shortest possible time. Persons wanting to 
study navigation more fully than treated in the 
Coastwise Navigation Course should enroll for 
the Ocean Navigation Course. The Lake 
Navigation Course is intended for only those 
persons engaged in, or wanting to engage in, 
lake navigation; it does not include instruction 
in the methods of navigation by observations. 



485 



Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. In many cases, the pilot or the 
master of a coastwise vessel depends 
almost entirely on dead-reckoning and 
on his knowledge of the coast line to 
conduct his 'ship to its destination. If 
from any cause he is driven seaward 
and loses his bearings, he must be able 
to determine the position of his ship 
by sights of the sun. In the West 
Indian trade this ability is particularly 
needed; for after leaving a northern 
port the vessel may be out of sight of 
land for several days, and its position 
must of necessity be determined by 
astronomical observations. Our Course 
gives exact directions for determining 
the position of a ship by observations 
of the sun. Numerous sights of the 
sun for latitude and longitude are 
worked out in detail, showing the stu- 
dent precisely how the work is done at 
sea and giving him invaluable informa- 
tion about practical methods of naviga- 
tion; the Course will increase his effi- 
ciency and do much to further his 
advancement to positions of more 
importance and greater income. 

b. A sailor's advancement depends 
on his own efforts. To forge ahead 
he must not only be a good seaman, but 
he must also understand the theory 
and practice of navigation. Experi- 
ence alone will not give this. But the 
man willing to spend part of his spare 
time in study, can — with our help — get 
a good knowledge of navigation. Pre- 
pared by nautical experts, our Course 
is in perfect harmony with the best 
practice, and gives the student the 

486 



theoretical knowledge he must have 
to advance. Our instruction is so 
plainly written and clearly illustrated 
as to make impossible a misunder- 
standing of what is read. The solutions 
of problems heretofore perplexing have 
been so simplified that the student 
now meets with little difficulty in 
solving them. In fact, just enough 
mathematics is included to give the 
student sufficient knowledge to solve 
the problems that daily arise. 

c. According to the rules and 
regulations of the United States Board 
of Supervising Inspectors of Steam 
Vessels, no original license as master 
or mate of coastwise steamers shall be 
issued, nor grade of license raised, nor 
route extended for any person that 
does not understand navigation; that 
is not able to determine a ship's posi- 
tion at sea by observation of the sun; 
that cannot obtain longitude by the 
chronometer; and that cannot deter- 
mine a ship's latitude by meridian 
altitude of either the sun, moon, or 
stars. Our Course explains how to do 
this. 

d. International commerce has 
reached gigantic proportions, and it 
is constantly growing. More ships 
are being built, and men competent 
to take charge of them are in demand. 
A high standard of efficiency, however, 
is required of the man in charge of 
a valuable ship. Besides being a 
practical seaman, he must have suffi- 
cient knowledge of navigation to pass 
a license examination. These examina- 
tions are not difficult to the person 
possessing the knowledge contained 

487 



in our Course. Indeed, some students 
have secured licenses before finishing 
their Courses. This fact alone proves 
conclusively how well adapted our 
instruction is to the man preparing 
for a license examination. Our Course 
will give the student information that 
will be invaluable to him as an officer 
of a vessel, and do much toward 
qualifying him as a first-class navigator. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Chart- Work Outfit as soon as he has 
paid SIO. The student pays express | 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying, 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 9 months. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will Be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, and 
Keys of the Course, and give the student 
a thorough knowledge of the theory 
and practice of coastwise navigation 
— knowledge that he must have to pass 
the examination for a license. They 
contain all the subjects properly in- 
cluded in a coastwise navigation course, 



and give much information of great 
value to the student. 

b. They are invaluable to the stu- 
dent realizing the tragedy of idle 
moments and the infinite possibilities 
of spare-time study. Replete with 
practical information, the student so 
fortunate as to possess the Bound 
Volumes has a reference library full 
of knowledge indispensable to him in 
his work, written in a style so^ simple 
as to be easily understood, and indexed 
so thoroughly that every important 
subject can be found in an instant. 
The subjects are arranged in a logical 
order and are presented in that 
thorough, incisive, straight-to-the-point 
manner so essential to the home stu- 
dent. They are the only books satis- 
factory for home study. No ship 
officer's library is complete without 
our Bound Volumes. 



16i 489 



Lake Navigation Course 

LIST OF SUBJECTS PAGES 

1 Arithmetic 89^ 

2 . Rudiments of Algebra 33 

3 Geometry and Mensuration 43 I 1st Bound 

Nautical Tables 80 ( Volume 

Examination Questions 12 

Keys 43 J 

4 Lake Navigation 278] o^ t>„„„^ 

Examination Questions. ... 21 ^ ^^^i °",^^ 
Keys 38j ^^^^"^^ 

Pages 637 

Illustrations, 222 
Instruction Papers, 9 
Bound Volumes, 2 

Peculiar Characteristics of the Instruc- 
tion Papers 

a. They contain all the instruction 
in mathematics a student must know 
to solve the navigator's daily problems. 
This instruction is presented in so simple 
and practical a manner as to make the 
subject most interesting. 

b. They show how to conduct safely 
a ship from one port to another with- 
out the aid of astronomical observations, 
and they explain the use of parallels 
of latitude and meridians of longitude 
in determining the position of a ship 
at sea. 

c. They describe in detail the 
mariner's compass, its location on 
shipboard, and the compensation of 
its errors by means of artificial magnets 
and soft-iron spheres. The patent log, 
the chip log, the hand lead, the sound- 
ing machine, and the pelorus are given 
ample attention. 

d. They explain the construction 
and the use of charts and tell about 
the correction of courses. 

490 



I 



e. They show how to determine the 
deviation of the compass when in 
sight of suitable objects on shore, or 
by the azimuth and the amphtude of 
the sun when at sea. The relation of 
longitude to time is clearly explained. 

/. They give instruction in naviga- 
tion by dead-reckoning and describe 
the use of the traverse tables. This 
instruction is supplemented with numer- 
ous worked-out examples showing ex- 
actly how these operations are carried 
out in practice. 

g. They contain full explanations 
of the various standard methods for 
determining the position of a ship when 
in sight of land. 

h. They describe the use of the 
sextant for measuring the angle between 
two objects on shore. The Instruction 
Papers do not, however, treat of the 
subject of determining the position of 
a ship at sea by observations of the 
sun. The methods known as the 
horizontal and danger angles are dealt 
with in a thorough manner. 

i. They tell about the different 
kinds of time measurements and 
explain the conversion of one kind of 
time to another. A practical dis- 
cussion of standard time and time 
signals is included. 

y. They take up the subjects of 
propulsion, fuel consumption, and speed 
of vessels, and give many timely 
remarks about the behavior of vessels 
due to the effects of the screw pro- 
peller and the rudder. 

k. They contain a thorough ex- 
planation of the nature of the severe 
storms traversing the great lakes; 

•491 



describe their accompanying character- 
istic atmospheric conditions; and tell 
how their approach may be foretold 
by the barometer. This information 
is valuable to the navigator in helping 
him to avoid storm centers, or if they 
are unexpectedly encountered, to apply 
the best means of safely handling the 
ship. 

/. They give the weather signals 
of the United States and Canada as 
well as the pilot rules and other legal 
requirements adopted by the United 
States government for the navigation 
of vessels on the great lakes. 

m. They explain how to proceed in 
case of a shipwreck so as to secure the 
best results from the efforts of the 
life-saving service on shore. Valuable 
advice is given for resuscitating a 
person apparently drowned. 

Persons That Should Enroll 

a. Masters and Pilots of vessels 
plying on the Great Lakes desiring to 
become proficient navigators. 

h. Pilots on the Great Lakes wishing 
to obtain a higher grade license. 

c. Deck Hands and Wheelmen on 
lake vessels wishing to become mates 
and pilots. 

d. Men and Quartermasters of coast- 
ing vessels desirous of becoming mates. 

e. Captains of harbor tugs, launches, 
canal boats, and barges. 

/. Men employed on all kinds of 
fishing vessels and oyster boats. 

g. Owners of steam launches and 
yachts desiring to navigate their own 
craft. 

492 



h. Persons employed in the .United 
States Lighthouse Service and the 
United States Life-Saving Service. 

i. Persons employed in nautical 
warehouses, in shipping offices, and in 
the offices of owners and agents of all 
classes of vessels. 

;. Persons wanting a short course in 
navigation and not caring to take up 
the study of the Ocean Navigation 
Course. 

Note — The Lake Navigation Course does 
not include instruction in any of the methods of 
navigation by observations; it is intended for 
only those persons engaged in, or wanting to 
engage in, lake navigation. The person wanting 
to study ocean navigation, but not so fully as 
treated in the Ocean Navigation Course should 
enroll for the Coastwise Navigation Course. 

Why Persons Should Enroll 

a. The pilot on the Great Lakes is 
not as a rule well informed regarding 
methods of navigation. He prefers to 
run in sight of landmarks, and when- 
ever the course takes him out of sight 
of land he is more or less uncertain as 
to the exact position of his ship. On 
account of the constant nearness of 
dangerous shores attending the naviga- 
tion of the lakes, the responsibilities of 
an officer in charge of a lake steamer 
are equal to those of an officer of an 
ocean-going steamer. Our instruction 
will fit the pilot or the officer on a lake 
steamer to cope successfully with the 
trying situations sure to present them- 
selves. It is a thorough treatise on the 
theoretical and the practical sides of 
lake navigation. 

h. No pilot on the Great Lakes with 
a first-class or a second-class license 

493 



should be content to remain in his 
present position when there is a chance 
open for him at the top of his profes- 
sion. The ambition of every holder 
of a first-class license should be to 
become a master; and the ambition of 
the holder of a second-class license 
should be to obtain a first-class license 
and finally to become a master. This 
can be easily brought about by acquir- 
ing those qualifications necessary to 
pass the government examination for a 
license. It is to meet the government 
requirements that our Lake Naviga- 
tion Course is offered. With the 
exception of piloting for any particular 
locality, it includes just the information 
a pilot must have to raise his papers 
to the highest grade. 

c. The sailor engaged in lake, 
harbor, and coastwise navigation has 
little to justify the hope of ever rising 
higher u.nless he is able to satisfy the 
examining board and secure a pilot's 
license. Heretofore, there has been 
no ready way to secure the necessary 
education. As a result there are today 
many sailors that have been in the 
same position for years and whose 
chances of promotion are as remote 
as ever. Many have gone before the 
examining board and failed, while only 
a comparative few have been able after 
repeated efforts to squeeze through 
the examination. The examination for 
a pilot's license is not extremely difficult 
and the sailor studying our Course 
should have little trouble to pass. The 
student can qualify for the lowest 
grade of license before he finishes his 
Course; and, as he continues with his 

494 



studies, he can apply for higher grade 
papers and keep at it until he secures 
the highest-grade license. 

Outfit Furnished 

The student is furnished with our 
Chart-Work Outfit as soon as he has 
paid $10. The student pays express 
charges. 

Time Required to Finish the Course 

That depends altogether on the stu- 
dent's concentrative powers, his plan 
of studying, and the time he gives. 
Some, studying 2 hours a day for 
6 days a week, finish the Course in 
about 7 months. The average student 
requires a little more time. 

Why the Bound Volumes of the Refer- 
ence Library Will be Useful to the 
Student if for Any Reason He Is 
Unable to Send Us Written 
Recitations 

a. They are composed of the Instruc- 
tion Papers, Examination Questions, and 
Keys of the Course, and give the student 
a good knowledge of lake navigation. 
They are invaluable to the student 
realizing the tragedy of idle moments 
and the infinite possibilities of spare- 
time study. Replete with practical 
information, the student so fortunate 
as to possess the Bound Volumes has a 
reference library full of knowledge 
indispensable to him in his work, and 
indexed so thoroughly that he can find 
in a moment the solution to a problem 
that might otherwise take hours to 
master. 

495 



b. They are by far superior to all 
other books for home study. Of the 
two classes of ordinary textbooks 
— those for general reading and those 
for class-room teaching — neither is 
suitable for home study. Books for 
general reading are informative rather 
than instructive: their facts are not 
arrayed in that thorough, incisive, and 
straight-to-the-point manner so essential 
for the home student. Books for class- 
room work are still less sufficient for 
self-instruction: they are written for 
the hand of the teacher and of neces- 
sity must be supplemented with his 
personal work in the presence of the 
student. Our Bound Volumes meet 
the exacting requirements of the home- 
study student. They are so clearly 
written and illustrated as to make 
impossible a misunderstanding of what 
is read, and they contain logically 
arranged all the subjects properly 
included in a lake navigation course. 
The Bound Volumes give the student 
instruction obtained from the most 
practical and reliable sources, and 
presented by a simplified method of 
teaching that has been tried and proved 
a success. Our experience and con- 
stant endeavor to provide ideal instruc- 
tion for the student that must study 
out of the presence of a teacher has 
made our Bound Volumes the best 
textbooks in existence for home study. 

c. They are fully indexed. Each 
important item is indexed with all 
initial letters under which it is likely 
to be sought. 



496 



Index 



A Page 

Advanced Electric Lighting Course 137 

Advanced Electric Railways Course 137 

Advanced Engine Running Course 113 

Advanced Show-Card Writing Course 451 

Alkalies and Hydrochloric Acid, Chemistry 

and Mantif acture of 234 

Architecttiral Drawing Course 255 

Architectural Rendering Course 249 

B 

Banking and Banking Law Course 423 

Bookcover Design Course 292 

Bookkeeping and Business Foittls Course .... 412 

Bridge Engineering Course 175 

Building Contractors' Course 202 

C 

Carpet Design Course ^ 274 

Cement, Chemistry and Mantifacture of 235 

Chemistry and Chemical Technology Course 223 

Civil Engineering Course 154 

Coastwise Navigation Course 483 

Complete Advertising Course 444 

Complete Architectural Course 194 

Complete Coal Mining Course 319 

Complete Commercial Course 406 

Complete Commercial Law Course 437 

Complete Cotton Course 345 

Complete Electrical Engineering Course 61 

Complete Electrotherapeutic Course and Its 

Subordinate Courses 430 

Complete Heating Course 306 

Complete Lettering and Sign Painting Course 460 

Complete Plumbing and Heating Course. . . . 298 

Complete Plumbing Course 306 

Complete Steam Engineering Course 106 

Complete Stenographic Course 418 

Complete Textile Designing Course 374 

Complete Woolen Course 359 

Cotton Carding and Spinning Course 355 

Cotton Carding, Spinning, and Plain Weav- 
ing Course 355 

Cotton Designing Course 355 

497 



Page 

Cotton Warp Preparation and Plain Weav- 
ing Course 355 

Cottonseed Oil and Products, Chemistry and 

Manufacture of 234 

D 

Demonstration of Language Courses 399 

Draftsmen's Course 44 

Dynamo Running Course 78 

E 

Electric Car Running Course 89 

Electric Lighting and Railways Course 69 

Electric Lighting Course 78 

Electric Railways Course 78 

Electrotherapeutic Courses 430 

Engine and Dynamo Running Course 125 

Engine Running Course 119 

F 

Fancy Cotton Weaving Course 355 

French Course 383 

Full Mining Course 310 

G 

Gas, Chemistry and Manufacture of 235 

General Chemistry Course 216 

General Design Course 267 

General Illustrating Course 238 

German Course 388 

H 

How to Secure Employment 6 

Advertising 6 

Architecture 7 

Bridge Engineering 9 

Building Contracting 8 

Chemistry 8 

Civil Engineering 9 

Commerce 9 

Electricity 10 

Heating 17 

Hydraulic Engineering 9 

Illustration and Design 11 

Mechanical Drawing 13 

Mechanical Engineering 13 

Mining 14 

Municipal Engineering 9 

Navigation 14 

498 



Page 

Plumbing 17 

Railroad Engineering 9 

Sheet-Metal Pattern Drafting 22 

Show-Card Writing 23 

Steam Engineering 24 

Steam Fitting 17 

Structural Engineering 24 

Surveying and Mapping _. . 9 

Window Trimming and Mercantile 

Decoration 23 

Hydraulic Engineering Course 188 

I 

Interior Wiring Course 83 

International Library of Technology 466 

Iron and Steel, Chemistry and Manufacture 
of 234 

L 

Lake Navigation Course 490 

Leather, Chemistry and Manufacture of ... . 234 

Linoleum Design Course 286 

Little Items 5 

M 

Marine Engineers' Course 142 

Mechanical Course 31 

Mechanical Drawing (With Mathematics) 

Course 50 

Mechanical Drawing (Without Mathematics) 

Course 55 

Mechanical Engineering Course 25 

Metal Mining Course 332 

Metal Prospectors' Course 339 

Municipal Engineering Course 181 

N 
Newspaper Illustrating Course 243 

O 

Ocean Navigation Course 475 

Our Plan 4 

Our Work 3 

P 

Packing-House Industries, Chemistry and . . . 234 

Paper, Chemistry and Manufacture of 235 

Perspective Drawing Course 261 

499 



Page 

Petroleum and Petroleum Products, Chem- 
istry and Manufacture of 235 ' 

Plumbers and Steam Fitters' Course 306 

Plumbing Inspectors' Course 306 

R 

Railroad Engineering Course 161 

S 

Sheet-Metal Pattern Drafting Course 469 

Shop Practice Course 36 

Short Coal Mining Course 327 

Short Plumbing Course 306 

Soap, Chemistry and Manufacture of 234 

Spanish Cotirse 393 

Stationary Firemen's Course 148 

Steam-Electric Course 130 

Steam Fitters' Course 306 

Structural Engineering Course 208 

Sugar, Chemistry and Manufacture of 235 

Sulphuric Acid, Chemistry and Manufacture 

of ....'. 234 

Surveying and Mapping Course 168 

T 

Telegraph Engineering Course 100 

Telephone Engineering Course 93 

W 

Wallpaper Design Course 280 

Window Trimming and Mercantile Decora- 
tion Course 454 

Woolen Carding and Spinning Course ....... 369 

Woolen Carding, Spinning, and Weaving 

Course 369 

Woolen Warp Preparation and Weaving 

Course 369 

Woolen and Worsted Designing Course 369 

Worsted Warp Preparation and Weaving 

Course 369 



500 



APR 23 1907 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

029 944 064 ? 




